OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System V100R003C00
IDU Hardware Description Issue
03
Date
2011-04-10
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
[email protected]
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
About This Document
About This Document Related Versions The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name
Version
OptiX RTN 950
V100R003C00
iManager U2000
V100R003C00
Intended Audience This document is intended for: l
Network planning engineer
l
Hardware installation engineer
l
Installation and commissioning engineer
l
Field maintenance engineer
l
Data configuration engineer
l
System maintenance engineer
Before reading this document, you need to be familiar with the following: l
Basics of digital microwave communication
l
Basics of the OptiX RTN 950
Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol
Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
About This Document
Symbol
Description Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention
Description
Times New Roman
Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface
Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic
Book titles are in italics.
Courier New
Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.
Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
iv
Convention
Description
Boldface
The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic
Command arguments are in italics.
[]
Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... }
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
About This Document
Convention
Description
[ x | y | ... ]
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... }*
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]*
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention
Description
Boldface
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Update History Updates between document issues are cumulative. Thus, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 03 (2011-04-10) Based on Product Version V100R003C00 This document is the third issue for the V100R003C00 product version. Compared with the second issue, the content updates are as follows. Section
Description
Entire document
Unified the expression structure of dimensions.
Entire document
Modified the description of the PROG indicator.
Updates in Issue 02 (2011-01-20) Based on Product Version V100R003C00 This document is the second issue for the V100R003C00 product version. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
About This Document
Compared with the first issue, the content updates are as follows. Section
Description
D Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board
Updated power consumption values of specific boards.
Entire document
Optimized the descriptions of working principles for IF boards.
Entire document
Fixed known bugs.
Updates in Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C00 This document is the first issue for the V100R003C00 version.
vi
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Contents
Contents About This Document...................................................................................................................iii 1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................1-1 1.1 Network Application.......................................................................................................................................1-2 1.2 Components.....................................................................................................................................................1-3 1.3 Radio Link Forms............................................................................................................................................1-6
2 Chassis..........................................................................................................................................2-1 2.1 Chassis Structure.............................................................................................................................................2-2 2.2 Installation Mode.............................................................................................................................................2-2 2.3 Air Flow..........................................................................................................................................................2-2 2.4 IDU Labels......................................................................................................................................................2-3
3 Boards...........................................................................................................................................3-1 3.1 Board Appearance...........................................................................................................................................3-3 3.2 Board List........................................................................................................................................................3-4 3.3 CST..................................................................................................................................................................3-7 3.3.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................3-7 3.3.2 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................3-8 3.3.3 Working Principle..................................................................................................................................3-9 3.3.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-12 3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card...................................................................................................................3-19 3.3.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-21 3.3.7 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-22 3.3.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-22 3.4 CSH...............................................................................................................................................................3-23 3.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-24 3.4.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-24 3.4.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................3-27 3.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-30 3.4.5 DIP Switches and CF Card...................................................................................................................3-37 3.4.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-39 3.4.7 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-40 3.4.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-40 3.5 IF1.................................................................................................................................................................3-41 Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
Contents
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description 3.5.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-42 3.5.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-42 3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-43 3.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-48 3.5.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-50 3.5.6 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-51 3.5.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-51
3.6 IFU2..............................................................................................................................................................3-53 3.6.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-53 3.6.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-53 3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-56 3.6.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-60 3.6.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-62 3.6.6 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-63 3.6.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-63 3.7 IFX2..............................................................................................................................................................3-65 3.7.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-66 3.7.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-66 3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-69 3.7.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-72 3.7.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-74 3.7.6 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-75 3.7.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-76 3.8 ISU2..............................................................................................................................................................3-78 3.8.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-78 3.8.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-78 3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-81 3.8.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-85 3.8.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-87 3.8.6 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-88 3.8.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-88 3.9 ISX2..............................................................................................................................................................3-92 3.9.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-93 3.9.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-93 3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-96 3.9.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-99 3.9.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................3-102 3.9.6 Board Parameter Settings...................................................................................................................3-103 3.9.7 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................3-103 3.10 EM6T/EM6F.............................................................................................................................................3-107 3.10.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-107 3.10.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-107 viii
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Contents
3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................3-111 3.10.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-113 3.10.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-118 3.10.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................3-118 3.10.7 Board Parameter Settings.................................................................................................................3-119 3.10.8 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-119 3.11 EFP8..........................................................................................................................................................3-121 3.11.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-121 3.11.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-122 3.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................3-125 3.11.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-128 3.11.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-131 3.11.6 Board Parameter Settings.................................................................................................................3-132 3.11.7 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-132 3.12 SL1D.........................................................................................................................................................3-133 3.12.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-133 3.12.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-133 3.12.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................3-135 3.12.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-137 3.12.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-139 3.12.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................3-139 3.12.7 Board Parameter Settings.................................................................................................................3-140 3.12.8 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-140 3.13 ML1/MD1.................................................................................................................................................3-141 3.13.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-142 3.13.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-142 3.13.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................3-144 3.13.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-146 3.13.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-150 3.13.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................3-151 3.13.7 Board Parameter Settings.................................................................................................................3-151 3.13.8 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-151 3.14 SP3S/SP3D................................................................................................................................................3-152 3.14.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-153 3.14.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-153 3.14.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................3-153 3.14.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-156 3.14.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-160 3.14.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................3-160 3.14.7 Board Parameter Settings.................................................................................................................3-161 3.14.8 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-161 3.15 AUX..........................................................................................................................................................3-162 Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
Contents
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description 3.15.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-162 3.15.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-162 3.15.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-163 3.15.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-164 3.15.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-167 3.15.6 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-167
3.16 PIU............................................................................................................................................................3-169 3.16.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-169 3.16.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-169 3.16.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-170 3.16.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-171 3.16.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-172 3.16.6 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-173 3.17 FAN...........................................................................................................................................................3-173 3.17.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-174 3.17.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-174 3.17.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-174 3.17.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-175 3.17.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-177 3.17.6 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-177
4 Accessories...................................................................................................................................4-1 4.1 E1 Panel...........................................................................................................................................................4-2 4.2 PDU.................................................................................................................................................................4-4 4.2.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................4-4 4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle...........................................................................................................4-5 4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode.......................................................................................................................4-6
5 Cables...........................................................................................................................................5-1 5.1 Power Cable....................................................................................................................................................5-3 5.2 PGND Cable....................................................................................................................................................5-3 5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable...................................................................................................................................5-4 5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable...........................................................................................................................5-4 5.3 IF Jumper.........................................................................................................................................................5-5 5.4 XPIC Cable.....................................................................................................................................................5-6 5.5 Fiber Jumper....................................................................................................................................................5-7 5.6 E1 Cables.........................................................................................................................................................5-9 5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment..................................................................................5-10 5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel....................................................................................................5-13 5.7 Orderwire Cable............................................................................................................................................5-15 5.8 Network Cable...............................................................................................................................................5-16
A Parameters Description...........................................................................................................A-1 A.1 Parameters for Network Management...........................................................................................................A-2 x
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Contents
A.1.1 Parameters for NE Management...........................................................................................................A-2 A.1.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching...............................................................................................A-2 A.1.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation.................................................................................................A-7 A.1.1.3 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs........................................................................A-9 A.1.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization.........................................................................A-10 A.1.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time...............................................A-13 A.1.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management...............................................................A-14 A.1.1.7 Parameter Description: License Management.................................................................................A-15 A.1.1.8 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs...........................................A-16 A.1.2 Parameters for Communications Management...................................................................................A-17 A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting......................................................A-18 A.1.2.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration...........................................A-19 A.1.2.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management..........A-20 A.1.2.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC.....................................A-22 A.1.2.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management.......................................................................A-23 A.1.2.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management...........................A-24 A.1.2.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation.............A-26 A.1.2.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings.......................A-27 A.1.2.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP...................................................................A-31 A.1.2.10 Parameter Description: Port OSPF Setting....................................................................................A-32 A.1.2.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter.........................................A-32 A.1.2.12 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table............................................................A-33 A.1.2.13 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel................................................................A-34 A.1.2.14 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management.........................................A-38 A.1.2.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting..............................................................A-39 A.1.2.16 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol Setting.......................................................A-40 A.1.2.17 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Access Control........................................................A-40 A.1.2.18 Parameter Description: Access Control.........................................................................................A-41 A.1.3 Parameters for Network Security Management..................................................................................A-42 A.1.3.1 Parameter Description: NE User Management...............................................................................A-42 A.1.3.2 Parameter Description: NE User Management_Creation................................................................A-43 A.1.3.3 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control..................................................................................A-45 A.2 Radio Link Parameters................................................................................................................................A-46 A.2.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation.........................................A-47 A.2.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC............................................................................A-51 A.2.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create.................................................................................A-58 A.2.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection..............................................................................................A-59 A.2.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create.................................................................................................A-61 A.2.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection..........................................................................................A-63 A.2.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration....................................................................A-66 A.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters....................................................................................................A-76 A.3.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation...................................................................................A-76 Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xi
Contents
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description A.3.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP...................................................................................................A-80
A.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters....................................................................................................................A-84 A.4.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation..........................................................A-84 A.4.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation..................................A-87 A.4.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services ......................................................................................................................................................................A-90 A.4.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration..........................................................................A-94 A.4.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control..................................................................................A-96 A.4.6 Parameter Description: TU_AIS Insertion.........................................................................................A-99 A.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces................................................................................................................A-100 A.5.1 PDH Port Parameters........................................................................................................................A-101 A.5.1.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes....................................................................A-101 A.5.1.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes.............................................................A-102 A.5.2 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards....................................................................................A-106 A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes.........................................................A-106 A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control.............................................................A-110 A.5.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes.....................................................A-112 A.5.2.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes.............................................................A-115 A.5.2.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes.................................................A-116 A.5.3 Serial Port Parameters......................................................................................................................A-118 A.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Basic Attributes....................................................................A-119 A.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Creation of Serial Ports.........................................................A-120 A.5.4 Microwave Interface Parameters......................................................................................................A-121 A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes....................................................A-121 A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes................................................A-122 A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes................................................A-125 A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes.............................................A-126 A.5.5 IF Board Parameters.........................................................................................................................A-130 A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute.........................................................................A-130 A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute...................................................................A-138 A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes...................................A-139 A.5.5.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records.....................................................................A-140 A.5.5.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test...............................................................................................A-141 A.5.6 ODU Parameters...............................................................................................................................A-142 A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute............................................A-142 A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes............................................................A-144 A.5.6.3 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information..................................................A-147 A.5.6.4 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes......................................................A-148 A.5.7 Parameters for SDH Interface Boards..............................................................................................A-149 A.5.7.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces........................................................................................A-150 A.5.7.2 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown.....................................................................A-151 A.5.8 Parameters for PDH Interface Boards..............................................................................................A-152 A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces........................................................................................A-152 xii
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Contents
A.5.8.2 Parameter Description: PRBS Test...............................................................................................A-154 A.5.9 Parameters for Overhead..................................................................................................................A-155 A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead................................................................A-156 A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs..............................................................................................A-157 A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs............................................................................................A-158 A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the Packet Plane..........................................A-159 A.6.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services......................................................................................................A-160 A.6.1.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation.........................................................................A-160 A.6.1.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service.........................................................................................A-180 A.6.1.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Item_Creation................................................A-191 A.6.1.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation........................................................................A-192 A.6.1.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service........................................................................................A-198 A.6.1.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation................................................................................A-209 A.6.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols....................................................................................................A-209 A.6.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation..................................................................A-210 A.6.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management..................................................................................A-212 A.6.2.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation.............................................A-218 A.6.2.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration....................................A-220 A.6.2.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters...............................................A-220 A.6.2.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters..................................................A-226 A.6.2.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST.................A-228 A.6.2.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation.......................A-236 A.6.2.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation........................................A-244 A.6.2.10 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Point LPT.................................................A-245 A.6.2.11 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Point LPT...................................A-247 A.6.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Multipoint LPT.........................................A-247 A.6.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Multipoint LPT..........................A-250 A.6.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM....................................................................................................A-254 A.6.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain Creation...A-255 A.6.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association Creation ....................................................................................................................................................................A-256 A.6.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation.............................A-256 A.6.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation................A-258 A.6.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation...............................A-259 A.6.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling................................A-259 A.6.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling................................A-261 A.6.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter...............................A-263 A.6.3.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring.........A-265 A.6.4 QoS Parameters................................................................................................................................A-266 A.6.4.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management................................................................A-267 A.6.4.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create...................................................A-273 A.6.4.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification.........................................A-280 A.6.4.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management.................................................................................A-282 Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xiii
Contents
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description A.6.4.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy...............................................................................................A-287 A.6.4.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration....................................A-292 A.6.4.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation.......................................................A-303
A.7 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the EoPDH Plane.........................................A-305 A.7.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services......................................................................................................A-305 A.7.1.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creation...............................................................A-306 A.7.1.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creating QinQ-Based Ethernet Line Services....A-309 A.7.1.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service..............................................................................A-313 A.7.1.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creation of Ethernet LAN Services Based on IEEE 802.1d/802.1q Bridge.................................................................................................................................A-316 A.7.1.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creating IEEE 802.1ad Bridge-Based Ethernet LAN Service........................................................................................................................................................A-319 A.7.1.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service.............................................................................A-324 A.7.1.7 Parameter Description: VLAN Filtering Table_Creation.............................................................A-329 A.7.1.8 Parameter Description: Aging Time of MAC Address Table Entries...........................................A-330 A.7.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols....................................................................................................A-331 A.7.2.1 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Protocol Enabling...........................................................A-332 A.7.2.2 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Parameters..........................................................A-333 A.7.2.3 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Parameters..............................................................A-334 A.7.2.4 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Running Information..........................................A-336 A.7.2.5 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Running Information..............................................A-337 A.7.2.6 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Point-to-Point Attribute..................................................A-338 A.7.2.7 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Enabling........................................................A-339 A.7.2.8 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Creation of Static Multicast Table Entries....A-340 A.7.2.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Aging Time of Multicast Table Entries........A-341 A.7.2.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Creation of LAGs.....................................A-342 A.7.2.11 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation......................................A-344 A.7.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Point Service LPT.................A-345 A.7.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Multipoint Service LPT.........A-346 A.7.2.14 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation........................................................................A-347 A.7.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM....................................................................................................A-348 A.7.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MDs...............................................A-349 A.7.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MAs...............................................A-349 A.7.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MPs................................................A-350 A.7.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LB......................................................A-352 A.7.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LT......................................................A-353 A.7.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Parameter.....................................................A-354 A.7.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Error Frame Monitoring..............................A-355 A.7.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_Remote OAM Parameter........................................A-356 A.7.4 QoS Parameters................................................................................................................................A-357 A.7.4.1 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of Flows.....................................................A-358 A.7.4.2 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR.......................................................A-360 A.7.4.3 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CoS........................................................A-362 xiv
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Contents
A.7.4.4 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR/CoS...............................................A-363 A.7.4.5 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Shaping Management of Egress Queues..................A-364 A.7.5 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards....................................................................................A-365 A.7.5.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_External Port.....................................................................A-365 A.7.5.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Internal Port......................................................................A-372 A.7.5.3 Parameter Description: Type Field of QinQ Frames.....................................................................A-378 A.8 RMON Parameters....................................................................................................................................A-378 A.8.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group.......................................................A-378 A.8.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group..........................................................A-379 A.8.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group............................................A-380 A.8.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting........................................................A-381 A.9 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services......................................................................................................A-383 A.9.1 MPLS Tunnel Parameters.................................................................................................................A-383 A.9.1.1 Parameter Description: Basic Configurations of MPLS Tunnels..................................................A-384 A.9.1.2 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Static Tunnel...........................................A-385 A.9.1.3 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Unidirectional Tunnels.........A-390 A.9.1.4 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Bidirectional Tunnels...........A-395 A.9.1.5 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_OAM Parameters.....................................A-400 A.9.1.6 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_FDI..........................................................A-405 A.9.1.7 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Ping..................................................A-406 A.9.1.8 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Traceroute........................................A-409 A.9.1.9 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Management.......................................................A-412 A.9.1.10 Parameter Description: PW Management_MS-PW Creation.....................................................A-417 A.9.1.11 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW OAM.................................................................A-428 A.9.1.12 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Ping...................................................................A-432 A.9.1.13 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Traceroute.........................................................A-435 A.9.1.14 Parameter Description: MPLS APS Protection Management.....................................................A-437 A.9.1.15 Parameter Description: Tunnel Protection Group_Creation.......................................................A-440 A.9.1.16 Parameter Description: PW APS Protection Group_Creation....................................................A-445 A.9.1.17 Parameter Description: Slave Protection Pair of a PW APS Protection Group_Creation...........A-456 A.9.2 CES Parameters................................................................................................................................A-462 A.9.2.1 Parameter Description: CES Service Management.......................................................................A-462 A.9.2.2 Parameter Description: CES Service Management_Creation.......................................................A-472 A.9.3 ATM Parameters..............................................................................................................................A-485 A.9.3.1 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Management...............................A-486 A.9.3.2 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_Bound Path Configuration.............................A-491 A.9.3.3 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Status..........................................A-493 A.9.3.4 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Link Status.............................................A-494 A.9.3.5 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_ATM Interface Management..........................A-494 A.9.3.6 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table............................A-496 A.9.3.7 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table_Creation.............A-498 A.9.3.8 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management.......................................................................A-500 Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xv
Contents
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description A.9.3.9 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management_Creation.......................................................A-504 A.9.3.10 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management...................................................................A-509 A.9.3.11 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management_Creation....................................................A-518 A.9.3.12 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Segment and End Attributes.......................A-530 A.9.3.13 Parameter Description: ATM OMA Management_CC Activation Status..................................A-534 A.9.3.14 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Remote End Loopback Status....................A-537 A.9.3.15 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_LLID...........................................................A-540
A.10 Clock Parameters.....................................................................................................................................A-541 A.10.1 Physical Clock Parameters.............................................................................................................A-541 A.10.1.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table..................................................................A-542 A.10.1.2 Parameter Description: Priority Table for the PLL Clock Source of the External Clock Port....A-544 A.10.1.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet.....................................................A-546 A.10.1.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality.....................................................A-549 A.10.1.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control..........................................A-552 A.10.1.6 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status...................................A-553 A.10.1.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters..........A-554 A.10.1.8 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching...............................A-556 A.10.1.9 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching Conditions.............A-557 A.10.1.10 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source...............A-558 A.10.1.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status..............................................................A-561 A.10.2 CES ACR Clock Parameters..........................................................................................................A-562 A.10.2.1 Parameter Description: ACR Clock Source................................................................................A-563 A.10.2.2 Parameter Description: Clock Domain........................................................................................A-563 A.10.2.3 Parameter Description: Clock Domain_Creation........................................................................A-564 A.10.3 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports..........................................................................................A-565 A.11 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces...........................................................................A-565 A.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General...................................................................................A-566 A.11.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced................................................................................A-567 A.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port...........................................................................A-568 A.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port................................................................A-569 A.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface...........................................................A-570
B Board Loopback Types............................................................................................................B-1 C Indicators of Boards.................................................................................................................C-1 D Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board...............................................................D-1 E Glossary.......................................................................................................................................E-1 E.1 0-9...................................................................................................................................................................E-2 E.2 A-E.................................................................................................................................................................E-2 E.3 F-J................................................................................................................................................................. E-11 E.4 K-O............................................................................................................................................................... E-16 E.5 P-T................................................................................................................................................................E-22
xvi
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Contents
E.6 U-Z...............................................................................................................................................................E-31
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xvii
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Figures
Figures Figure 1-1 Microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 950..................................................1-2 Figure 1-2 Appearance of the IDU 950................................................................................................................1-4 Figure 1-3 Direct mounting..................................................................................................................................1-6 Figure 1-4 Separate mounting..............................................................................................................................1-6 Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 950........................................................................................................2-2 Figure 2-2 Air flow in an IDU 950 chassis..........................................................................................................2-3 Figure 2-3 Positions of the IDU 950 labels..........................................................................................................2-5 Figure 3-1 Appearance of an ISU2 board.............................................................................................................3-3 Figure 3-2 Bar code..............................................................................................................................................3-3 Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout...................................................................................................................................3-4 Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CST...............................................................................................3-10 Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit.........................................................................3-11 Figure 3-6 Front panel of the CST..................................................................................................................... 3-12 Figure 3-7 Front view of the RJ45 connector.....................................................................................................3-14 Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port........................................... 3-16 Figure 3-9 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card.......................................................................................3-20 Figure 3-10 Slot for the CST in the IDU chassis............................................................................................... 3-21 Figure 3-11 Logical slot of the CST on the NMS..............................................................................................3-21 Figure 3-12 Functional block diagram of the CSH............................................................................................3-28 Figure 3-13 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit.......................................................................3-30 Figure 3-14 Front panel of the CSH...................................................................................................................3-31 Figure 3-15 Front view of the RJ45 connector...................................................................................................3-33 Figure 3-16 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port......................................... 3-34 Figure 3-17 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card.....................................................................................3-38 Figure 3-18 Slot for the CSH in the IDU chassis...............................................................................................3-39 Figure 3-19 Logical slot of the CSH on the NMS..............................................................................................3-39 Figure 3-20 Functional block diagram of the IF1.............................................................................................. 3-44 Figure 3-21 Front panel of the IF1.....................................................................................................................3-48 Figure 3-22 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis................................................................................................3-50 Figure 3-23 Logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS.............................................................................................. 3-50 Figure 3-24 Functional block diagram of the IFU2........................................................................................... 3-57 Figure 3-25 Front panel of the IFU2..................................................................................................................3-60 Figure 3-26 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-62 Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xix
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Figures
Figure 3-27 Logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS........................................................................................... 3-62 Figure 3-28 Functional block diagram of the IFX2...........................................................................................3-69 Figure 3-29 Front panel of the IFX2..................................................................................................................3-72 Figure 3-30 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-75 Figure 3-31 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2.............................................................................3-75 Figure 3-32 Functional block diagram of the ISU2...........................................................................................3-82 Figure 3-33 Front panel of the ISU2..................................................................................................................3-85 Figure 3-34 Slots for the ISU2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-87 Figure 3-35 Logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS...........................................................................................3-88 Figure 3-36 Functional block diagram of the ISX2...........................................................................................3-96 Figure 3-37 Front panel of the ISX2..................................................................................................................3-99 Figure 3-38 Slots for the ISX2 in the IDU chassis...........................................................................................3-102 Figure 3-39 Logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS.........................................................................................3-102 Figure 3-40 Functional block diagram.............................................................................................................3-111 Figure 3-41 Front panel of the EM6T..............................................................................................................3-113 Figure 3-42 Front panel of the EM6F..............................................................................................................3-113 Figure 3-43 Front view of the RJ45 connector.................................................................................................3-116 Figure 3-44 Ports of the SFP optical module...................................................................................................3-117 Figure 3-45 Slots for the EM6T/EM6F in the IDU chassis.............................................................................3-118 Figure 3-46 Logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the NMS............................................................................3-118 Figure 3-47 Functional block diagram of the EFP8.........................................................................................3-126 Figure 3-48 Front panel of the EFP8................................................................................................................3-128 Figure 3-49 Front view of the RJ45 connector.................................................................................................3-130 Figure 3-50 Slots for the EFP8 in the IDU chassis..........................................................................................3-131 Figure 3-51 Logical slots of the EFP8 on the NMS.........................................................................................3-131 Figure 3-52 Functional block diagram of the SL1D........................................................................................3-135 Figure 3-53 Front panel of the SL1D...............................................................................................................3-137 Figure 3-54 Slots for the SL1D in the IDU chassis..........................................................................................3-139 Figure 3-55 Logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS........................................................................................3-139 Figure 3-56 Functional block diagram of the ML1/MD1................................................................................3-144 Figure 3-57 Front panel of the ML1.................................................................................................................3-146 Figure 3-58 Front panel of the MD1................................................................................................................3-146 Figure 3-59 Front view of an Anea 96 connector.............................................................................................3-148 Figure 3-60 Slots for the ML1/MD1 in the IDU chassis..................................................................................3-150 Figure 3-61 Logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS................................................................................3-150 Figure 3-62 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D...............................................................................3-154 Figure 3-63 Front panel of the SP3S................................................................................................................3-156 Figure 3-64 Front panel of the SP3D...............................................................................................................3-156 Figure 3-65 Front view of an Anea 96 connector.............................................................................................3-158 Figure 3-66 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU chassis................................................................................3-160 Figure 3-67 Logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS...............................................................................3-160 Figure 3-68 Functional block diagram of the AUX.........................................................................................3-163 xx
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Figures
Figure 3-69 Front panel of the AUX................................................................................................................3-164 Figure 3-70 Front view of the RJ45 connector.................................................................................................3-165 Figure 3-71 Slots for the AUX in the IDU chassis...........................................................................................3-167 Figure 3-72 Logical slots of the AUX on the NMS.........................................................................................3-167 Figure 3-73 Functional block diagram of the PIU...........................................................................................3-170 Figure 3-74 Front panel of the PIU..................................................................................................................3-171 Figure 3-75 Slots for the PIU in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-172 Figure 3-76 Logical slots of the PIU on the NMS...........................................................................................3-173 Figure 3-77 Functional block diagram of the FAN..........................................................................................3-174 Figure 3-78 Front panel of the FAN.................................................................................................................3-176 Figure 3-79 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-177 Figure 3-80 Logical slot of the FAN on the NMS...........................................................................................3-177 Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel..................................................................................................................4-2 Figure 4-2 Front view of an E1 port (E1 panel)...................................................................................................4-3 Figure 4-3 Front panel of the PDU.......................................................................................................................4-4 Figure 4-4 Functional block diagram of the PDU................................................................................................4-6 Figure 4-5 Interior of the PDU in DC-C mode ...................................................................................................4-7 Figure 4-6 Interior of the PDU in DC-I mode .....................................................................................................4-7 Figure 5-1 Power cable.........................................................................................................................................5-3 Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable................................................................................................................................5-4 Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable.........................................................................................................................5-5 Figure 5-4 IF jumper............................................................................................................................................5-6 Figure 5-5 XPIC cable..........................................................................................................................................5-7 Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector................................................................................................................................5-8 Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector.................................................................................................................................5-9 Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector.................................................................................................................................5-9 Figure 5-9 E1 cable connected to the external equipment................................................................................. 5-10 Figure 5-10 E1 cable connected to the E1 panel................................................................................................5-14 Figure 5-11 Orderwire cable.............................................................................................................................. 5-16 Figure 5-12 Network cable.................................................................................................................................5-18
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxi
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Tables
Tables Table 1-1 Features of the IDU 950.......................................................................................................................1-3 Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 950.............................................................................1-4 Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 950..........................................................................1-5 Table 1-4 Radio link forms supported by the OptiX RTN 950............................................................................1-7 Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels..............................................................................................................2-3 Table 3-1 List of IDU boards...............................................................................................................................3-4 Table 3-2 Functions and features that the CST supports......................................................................................3-8 Table 3-3 Status explanation for indicators on the CST.....................................................................................3-12 Table 3-4 Description of the clock ports and management ports.......................................................................3-14 Table 3-5 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port...........................................................................................3-14 Table 3-6 Pin assignments for the EXT port......................................................................................................3-15 Table 3-7 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector..............................................................3-15 Table 3-8 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port...........................................................................................3-16 Table 3-9 Pin assignments for the TOD2 port....................................................................................................3-17 Table 3-10 Buttons.............................................................................................................................................3-19 Table 3-11 Setting DIP switches........................................................................................................................3-20 Table 3-12 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-22 Table 3-13 Clock timing and synchronization performance..............................................................................3-22 Table 3-14 Wayside service interface performance...........................................................................................3-23 Table 3-15 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-23 Table 3-16 Functions and features that the CSH supports.................................................................................3-24 Table 3-17 MPLS/PWE3 functions....................................................................................................................3-26 Table 3-18 QoS functions...................................................................................................................................3-27 Table 3-19 Status explanation for indicators on the CSH..................................................................................3-31 Table 3-20 Description of the clock ports and management ports.....................................................................3-32 Table 3-21 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port.........................................................................................3-33 Table 3-22 Pin assignments for the EXT port....................................................................................................3-33 Table 3-23 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector............................................................3-34 Table 3-24 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port.........................................................................................3-35 Table 3-25 Pin assignments for the TOD2 port..................................................................................................3-36 Table 3-26 Buttons.............................................................................................................................................3-37 Table 3-27 Setting DIP switches........................................................................................................................3-38 Table 3-28 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-40 Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxiii
Tables
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description Table 3-29 Clock timing and synchronization performance..............................................................................3-40 Table 3-30 Wayside service interface performance...........................................................................................3-41 Table 3-31 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-41 Table 3-32 Functions and features that the IF1 supports....................................................................................3-42 Table 3-33 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IF1.......................................................................3-44 Table 3-34 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IF1.....................................................................3-46 Table 3-35 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1....................................................................................3-48 Table 3-36 Description of the Ports ...................................................................................................................3-49 Table 3-37 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-50 Table 3-38 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (IF1 board)..............................................................................3-51 Table 3-39 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-52 Table 3-40 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.................................................................3-52 Table 3-41 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-53 Table 3-42 Functions and features that the IFU2 supports.................................................................................3-54 Table 3-43 Ethernet service functions that the IFU2 supports...........................................................................3-55 Table 3-44 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFU2....................................................................3-57 Table 3-45 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFU2..................................................................3-59 Table 3-46 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2..................................................................................3-60 Table 3-47 Description of the Ports ...................................................................................................................3-61 Table 3-48 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-62 Table 3-49 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFU2 board).......................................................................3-63 Table 3-50 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-64 Table 3-51 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.................................................................3-65 Table 3-52 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-65 Table 3-53 Functions and features that the IFX2 supports.................................................................................3-66 Table 3-54 Ethernet service functions that the IFX2 supports...........................................................................3-68 Table 3-55 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFX2....................................................................3-69 Table 3-56 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFX2..................................................................3-71 Table 3-57 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2..................................................................................3-72 Table 3-58 Description of the ports....................................................................................................................3-74 Table 3-59 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-75 Table 3-60 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFX2 board).......................................................................3-76 Table 3-61 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-77 Table 3-62 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.................................................................3-77 Table 3-63 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-78 Table 3-64 Functions and features that the ISU2 supports.................................................................................3-79 Table 3-65 Ethernet service functions that the ISU2 supports...........................................................................3-80 Table 3-66 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISU2....................................................................3-82 Table 3-67 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISU2..................................................................3-84 Table 3-68 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2..................................................................................3-85 Table 3-69 Description of the Ports ...................................................................................................................3-86 Table 3-70 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-88
xxiv
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Tables
Table 3-71 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board).................................................................3-89 Table 3-72 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service)..............3-89 Table 3-73 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service)................3-90 Table 3-74 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-91 Table 3-75 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.................................................................3-92 Table 3-76 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-92 Table 3-77 Functions and features that the ISX2 supports.................................................................................3-93 Table 3-78 Ethernet service functions that the ISX2 supports...........................................................................3-95 Table 3-79 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISX2....................................................................3-96 Table 3-80 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISX2..................................................................3-98 Table 3-81 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2................................................................................3-100 Table 3-82 Description of the ports..................................................................................................................3-101 Table 3-83 Slot allocation ................................................................................................................................3-102 Table 3-84 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board)...............................................................3-103 Table 3-85 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service)............3-103 Table 3-86 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service)..............3-105 Table 3-87 IF performance...............................................................................................................................3-106 Table 3-88 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem...............................................................3-106 Table 3-89 Mechanical behavior......................................................................................................................3-106 Table 3-90 Functions and features that the EM6T/EM6F supports.................................................................3-108 Table 3-91 Signal processing in the receive direction......................................................................................3-111 Table 3-92 Signal processing in the transmit direction....................................................................................3-112 Table 3-93 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F..................................................................3-113 Table 3-94 Description of the ports on the EM6T............................................................................................3-115 Table 3-95 Description of the ports on the EM6F............................................................................................3-115 Table 3-96 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode..................................................................3-116 Table 3-97 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode.............................................................3-117 Table 3-98 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector..........................................................3-117 Table 3-99 Slot configuration for the EM6T/EM6F........................................................................................3-118 Table 3-100 Board feature code of the EM6F..................................................................................................3-119 Table 3-101 Performance of the GE optical interface .....................................................................................3-119 Table 3-102 GE electric interface performance................................................................................................3-120 Table 3-103 FE electric interface performance................................................................................................3-120 Table 3-104 Mechanical behavior ...................................................................................................................3-121 Table 3-105 Functions and features that the EFP8 supports............................................................................3-122 Table 3-106 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EFP8................................................................3-126 Table 3-107 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EFP8..............................................................3-127 Table 3-108 Status explanation for indicators on the EFP8.............................................................................3-128 Table 3-109 Description of the ports on the EFP8...........................................................................................3-129 Table 3-110 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode................................................................3-130 Table 3-111 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode...........................................................3-130 Table 3-112 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector........................................................3-131 Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxv
Tables
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description Table 3-113 Slot allocation...............................................................................................................................3-132 Table 3-114 FE electric interface performance................................................................................................3-132 Table 3-115 Mechanical behavior....................................................................................................................3-132 Table 3-116 Functions and features that the SL1D supports............................................................................3-134 Table 3-117 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SL1D...............................................................3-135 Table 3-118 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SL1D............................................................. 3-136 Table 3-119 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D............................................................................ 3-137 Table 3-120 Description of the ports ...............................................................................................................3-138 Table 3-121 Slot allocation...............................................................................................................................3-139 Table 3-122 Board feature code of the SL1D...................................................................................................3-140 Table 3-123 STM-1 optical interface performance..........................................................................................3-140 Table 3-124 Mechanical behavior....................................................................................................................3-141 Table 3-125 Functions and features that the ML1/MD1 supports....................................................................3-142 Table 3-126 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ML1/MD1.......................................................3-145 Table 3-127 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ML1/MD1..................................................... 3-145 Table 3-128 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1.................................................................... 3-147 Table 3-129 Description of the ports on the ML1............................................................................................3-147 Table 3-130 Description of the ports on the MD1............................................................................................3-147 Table 3-131 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.................................................................................3-148 Table 3-132 Slot allocation...............................................................................................................................3-150 Table 3-133 Board feature code of the ML1/MD1...........................................................................................3-151 Table 3-134 E1 interface performance.............................................................................................................3-151 Table 3-135 Mechanical behavior....................................................................................................................3-152 Table 3-136 Functions and features that the SP3S/SP3D supports..................................................................3-153 Table 3-137 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D..................................................... 3-154 Table 3-138 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D....................................................3-155 Table 3-139 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D...................................................................3-156 Table 3-140 Description of the ports on the SP3S........................................................................................... 3-157 Table 3-141 Description of the ports on the SP3D...........................................................................................3-157 Table 3-142 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.................................................................................3-158 Table 3-143 Slot allocation...............................................................................................................................3-160 Table 3-144 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D.........................................................................................3-161 Table 3-145 E1 interface performance.............................................................................................................3-161 Table 3-146 Mechanical behavior ...................................................................................................................3-161 Table 3-147 Functions and features that the AUX supports............................................................................ 3-162 Table 3-148 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX............................................................................. 3-164 Table 3-149 Description of the auxiliary ports and management ports............................................................3-165 Table 3-150 Pin assignments for the F1/S1 port.............................................................................................. 3-166 Table 3-151 Pin assignments for the ALMI port..............................................................................................3-166 Table 3-152 Pin assignments for the ALMO port............................................................................................3-166 Table 3-153 Slot allocation...............................................................................................................................3-167 Table 3-154 Orderwire interface performance.................................................................................................3-168
xxvi
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Tables
Table 3-155 Synchronous data interface performance.....................................................................................3-168 Table 3-156 Asynchronous data interface performance...................................................................................3-168 Table 3-157 Mechanical behavior ...................................................................................................................3-169 Table 3-158 Functions and features that the PIU supports...............................................................................3-170 Table 3-159 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU................................................................................3-171 Table 3-160 Description of the ports on the PIU..............................................................................................3-172 Table 3-161 Technical specifications for the PIU............................................................................................3-173 Table 3-162 Functions and features that the FAN supports.............................................................................3-174 Table 3-163 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed...........................................................................................3-175 Table 3-164 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN..............................................................................3-176 Table 3-165 Technical specifications for the FAN...........................................................................................3-177 Table 4-1 Port description of an E1 panel............................................................................................................4-2 Table 4-2 Pin assignments for an E1 port (E1 panel)...........................................................................................4-3 Table 4-3 Ports on the PDU..................................................................................................................................4-5 Table 5-1 Power cable specifications...................................................................................................................5-3 Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers.........................................................................................................................5-7 Table 5-3 Pin assignments for a 75-ohm E1 cable.............................................................................................5-11 Table 5-4 Pin assignments for a 120-ohm E1 cable...........................................................................................5-12 Table 5-5 Pin assignments for the E1 cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector and a DB37 connector .............................................................................................................................................................................5-14 Table 5-6 Pin assignments for the orderwire cable............................................................................................5-16 Table 5-7 Pin assignments for MDIs..................................................................................................................5-16 Table 5-8 Pin assignments for MDI-Xs..............................................................................................................5-17 Table 5-9 Pin assignments for the straight-through cable..................................................................................5-18 Table 5-10 Pin assignments for the crossover cable...........................................................................................5-18 Table A-1 Parameters on the main interface...................................................................................................A-100 Table A-2 Methods used by Ethernet interfaces to process data frames.........................................................A-114 Table A-3 Data frame processing....................................................................................................................A-124 Table A-4 Service direction of UNI-UNI........................................................................................................A-160 Table A-5 Service direction of UNI-NNI (carried by PWs)............................................................................A-165 Table A-6 Service direction of UNI-NNI (carried by QinQ links)..................................................................A-168 Table A-7 Service direction of NNI-NNI........................................................................................................A-170 Table A-8 Parameters on the main interface...................................................................................................A-306 Table A-9 Parameters for port attributes.........................................................................................................A-308 Table A-10 Parameters for bound paths..........................................................................................................A-308 Table A-11 Parameters on the main interface.................................................................................................A-309 Table A-12 Parameters of port attributes.........................................................................................................A-312 Table A-13 Parameters for bound paths..........................................................................................................A-313 Table A-14 Parameters on the main interface (Display QinQ Shared Service is not selected)....................A-314 Table A-15 Parameters on the main interface (Display QinQ Shared Service is selected)..........................A-314 Table A-16 Parameters for port attributes.......................................................................................................A-315 Table A-17 Parameters for bound paths..........................................................................................................A-315 Table A-18 Parameters on the main interface.................................................................................................A-316 Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxvii
Tables
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description Table A-19 Parameters for mounting services................................................................................................A-317 Table A-20 Parameters for mounting configuration........................................................................................A-318 Table A-21 Parameters for bound paths..........................................................................................................A-318 Table A-22 Parameters on the main interface.................................................................................................A-319 Table A-23 Parameters of service mounting...................................................................................................A-320 Table A-24 Parameters of service mounting...................................................................................................A-322 Table A-25 Parameters for bound paths..........................................................................................................A-323 Table A-26 Parameters on the main interface.................................................................................................A-324 Table A-27 Parameters for mounting services................................................................................................A-324 Table A-28 Parameters for VLAN filtering table............................................................................................A-326 Table A-29 Parameters for VLAN unicast......................................................................................................A-327 Table A-30 Parameters for disabling MAC addresses....................................................................................A-328 Table A-31 Parameters for bound paths..........................................................................................................A-328 Table A-32 Parameters for self-learned MAC addresses................................................................................A-328 Table A-33 Parameters for VLAN MAC address table capacity....................................................................A-329 Table A-34 Parameters for VB port MAC address table capacity..................................................................A-329 Table A-35 Parameters on the main interface.................................................................................................A-330 Table A-36 Parameters on the main interface.................................................................................................A-331 Table A-37 Parameters on the main interface.................................................................................................A-332 Table A-38 Parameters on the main interface.................................................................................................A-333 Table A-39 Parameters on the main interface.................................................................................................A-335 Table A-40 Parameters on the main interface.................................................................................................A-336 Table A-41 Parameters on the main interface.................................................................................................A-337 Table A-42 Parameters on the main interface.................................................................................................A-338 Table A-43 Parameters on the main interface.................................................................................................A-349 Table A-44 Parameters on the main interface.................................................................................................A-350 Table A-45 Parameters on the main interface.................................................................................................A-350 Table A-46 Parameters for advanced attributes...............................................................................................A-352 Table A-47 Parameters on the main interface.................................................................................................A-353 Table A-48 Parameters on the main interface.................................................................................................A-354 Table A-49 Parameters on the main interface.................................................................................................A-354 Table A-50 Parameters on the main interface.................................................................................................A-356 Table A-51 Parameters on the main interface.................................................................................................A-357 Table A-52 Parameters on the main interface.................................................................................................A-359 Table A-53 Parameters on the main interface.................................................................................................A-361 Table A-54 Parameters on the main interface.................................................................................................A-362 Table A-55 Parameters on the main interface.................................................................................................A-364 Table A-56 Parameters on the main interface.................................................................................................A-365 Table A-57 Parameters for the basic attributes................................................................................................A-366 Table A-58 Parameters for flow control..........................................................................................................A-367 Table A-59 Parameters for the tag attributes...................................................................................................A-369 Table A-60 Parameters for the network attributes...........................................................................................A-369
xxviii
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Tables
Table A-61 Parameters for the advanced attributes.........................................................................................A-370 Table A-62 Methods used by ports to process data frames.............................................................................A-371 Table A-63 Parameters for the tag attributes...................................................................................................A-372 Table A-64 Parameters for encapsulation or mapping....................................................................................A-373 Table A-65 Parameters for the network attributes...........................................................................................A-374 Table A-66 Parameters for the LCAS.............................................................................................................A-374 Table A-67 Parameters for bound paths..........................................................................................................A-376 Table A-68 Methods used by ports to process data frames.............................................................................A-377 Table A-69 Parameters on the main interface.................................................................................................A-378 Table A-70 CES services.................................................................................................................................A-413 Table A-71 E-Line services.............................................................................................................................A-414 Table A-72 ATM services...............................................................................................................................A-415 Table A-73 CES services.................................................................................................................................A-415 Table A-74 E-Line services.............................................................................................................................A-416 Table A-75 ATM services...............................................................................................................................A-417 Table A-76 ATM services...............................................................................................................................A-422 Table A-77 CES services.................................................................................................................................A-446 Table A-78 E-Line services.............................................................................................................................A-447 Table A-79 ATM services...............................................................................................................................A-448 Table A-80 CES services.................................................................................................................................A-449 Table A-81 E-Line services.............................................................................................................................A-450 Table A-82 ATM services...............................................................................................................................A-450 Table A-83 CES services.................................................................................................................................A-457 Table A-84 E-Line services.............................................................................................................................A-458 Table A-85 ATM services...............................................................................................................................A-459 Table A-86 CES services.................................................................................................................................A-460 Table A-87 E-Line services.............................................................................................................................A-461 Table A-88 ATM services...............................................................................................................................A-461 Table A-89 Mapping relationship between ATM service types, traffic types, and traffic parameters...........A-503 Table A-90 Mapping relationship between ATM service types, ATM traffic types, and traffic parameters ..........................................................................................................................................................................A-508 Table A-91 ATM services...............................................................................................................................A-523 Table B-1 Loopback types that service interface boards support........................................................................B-1 Table C-1 Status explanation for indicators on the CST.....................................................................................C-1 Table C-2 Status explanation for indicators on the CSH.....................................................................................C-2 Table C-3 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1.......................................................................................C-4 Table C-4 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2....................................................................................C-5 Table C-5 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2....................................................................................C-6 Table C-6 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2....................................................................................C-7 Table C-7 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2....................................................................................C-8 Table C-8 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F.....................................................................C-10 Table C-9 Status explanation for indicators on the EFP8..................................................................................C-11 Table C-10 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D...............................................................................C-12 Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxix
Tables
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description Table C-11 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D.....................................................................C-13 Table C-12 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1.......................................................................C-13 Table C-13 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX................................................................................C-14 Table C-14 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU..................................................................................C-14 Table C-15 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN................................................................................C-14 Table D-1 Weight and power consumption of each board..................................................................................D-1
xxx
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
1 Introduction
1
Introduction
About This Chapter The OptiX RTN 950 is a product in the OptiX RTN 900 radio transmission system series. 1.1 Network Application The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation TDM/Hybrid/Packet integrate microwave transmission system developed by Huawei. It provides a seamless microwave transmission solution for a mobile communication network or private network. 1.2 Components The OptiX RTN 950 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 950 and the ODU. Each ODU is connected to the IDU through an IF cable. 1.3 Radio Link Forms The OptiX RTN 950 provides the radio links of different forms in which different IF boards and ODUs are configured for different microwave application scenarios.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-1
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
1 Introduction
1.1 Network Application The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation TDM/Hybrid/Packet integrate microwave transmission system developed by Huawei. It provides a seamless microwave transmission solution for a mobile communication network or private network.
OptiX RTN 900 Product Family The OptiX RTN 900 products are available in three types: OptiX RTN 910, OptiX RTN 950, and OptiX RTN 980. Users can choose an appropriate type based on the actual requirements. l
The IDU of the OptiX RTN 910 is 1U high and supports one or two IF boards.
l
The IDU of the OptiX RTN 950 is 2U high and supports one to six IF boards.
l
The IDU of the OptiX RTN 980 is 5U high and supports one to fourteen IF boards. NOTE
The OptiX RTN 900 product series uses the same types of IF boards and service interface boards.
The OptiX RTN 900 products provide a variety of service interfaces and can be installed easily and configured flexibly. It provides a solution that is integrated with the TDM microwave, Hybrid microwave, and Packet microwave based on the network requirements. It supports the smooth upgrade from the TDM microwave to the Hybrid microwave, and from the Hybrid microwave to the Packet microwave. The solution is able to adapt to changing service scenarios due to evolutions in radio mobile networks. Therefore, this solution meets the transmission requirements of not only 2G and 3G networks, but also future LTE and 4G networks.
OptiX RTN 950 The OptiX RTN 950 is microwave equipment deployed at the access and convergence layers. Figure 1-1 shows the microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 950. Figure 1-1 Microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 950
FE
E1/ STM-1
E1 E1
FE E1/ STM-1
E1
Regional TDM Network FE/GE
E1 FE/GE
Regional Packet Network FE/GE
E1 FE
FE
OptiX RTN 950
1-2
E1
MSTP
NodeB
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS
RNC
BSC
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
1 Introduction
NOTE
l In the solution, the OptiX RTN 950 is connected to an RNC and BSC directly or through a regional backhaul network. l The OptiX RTN 950 provides a wide range of interfaces and service bearer technologies to adapt to the regional backhaul network. The regional backhaul network can be a time-division multiplexing (TDM) network or packet switching network (PSN). l The OptiX RTN 950 supports the Ethernet over PDH (EoPDH) function, and therefore packet services can be backhauled through a TDM network. l The OptiX RTN 950 supports the pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) technology, and therefore TDM, ATM, and Ethernet services can be backhauled through a PSN.
1.2 Components The OptiX RTN 950 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 950 and the ODU. Each ODU is connected to the IDU through an IF cable.
IDU 950 The IDU 950 is the indoor unit for an OptiX RTN 950 system. It receives and multiplexes services, performs service processing and IF processing, and provides the system control and communications function. Table 1-1 lists the basic features of the IDU 950. Table 1-1 Features of the IDU 950 Item
Description
Chassis height
2U
Pluggable
Supported
Number of microwave directions
1 to 6
RF configuration mode
1+0 non-protection configuration N+0 non-protection configuration (N ≤ 5) 1+1 protection configuration N+1 protection configuration (N ≤ 4) XPIC configuration
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-3
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
1 Introduction
Figure 1-2 Appearance of the IDU 950
ODU The ODU is the outdoor unit for the OptiX RTN 900. It converts frequencies and amplifies signals. The OptiX RTN 900 product series can use the RTN 600 ODU and RTN XMC ODU, covering 6 GHz to 38 GHz entire frequency band. NOTE
Unlike the other frequency bands that use 14 MHz, 28 MHz, or 56 MHz channel spacing, the 18 GHz frequency band uses 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, or 55 MHz channel spacing correspondingly.
Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 950 Item
Description Standard Power ODU
High Power ODU
Low Capacity for PDH ODU
ODU type
SP, SPA
HP
LP
Frequency band
7/8/11/13/15/18/23/ 26/38 GHz (SP ODU)
6/7/8/10/10.5/11/13/ 15/18/23/26/28/32/3 8 GHz
7/8/11/13/15/18/23 GHz
6/7/8/11/13/15/18/2 3 GHz (SPA ODU)
1-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Item
1 Introduction
Description
Microwave modulation mode
Standard Power ODU
High Power ODU
Low Capacity for PDH ODU
QPSK/16QAM/ 32QAM/64QAM/ 128QAM/256QAM (SP)
QPSK/16QAM/ 32QAM/64QAM/ 128QAM/256QAM
QPSK/16QAM
7/14/28/40/56 MHz (6/7/8/10/11/13/15/1 8/23/26/28/32/38 GHz)
3.5/7/14/28 MHz
QPSK/16QAM/ 32QAM/64QAM/ 128QAM (SPA) Channel spacing
3.5/7/14/28 MHz
7/14/28 MHz (10.5 GHz)
Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 950 Item
Description High Power ODU
Low Capacity for PDH ODU
ODU type
XMC-2
XMC-1
Frequency band
7/8/13/15/18/23/26/38 GHz
7/8/13/15/18/23 GHz
Microwave modulation mode
QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/ 64QAM/128QAM/256QAM
QPSK/16QAM
Channel spacing
7/14/28/40/56 MHz
3.5/7/14/28 MHz
There are two methods for mounting the ODU and the antenna: direct mounting and separate mounting. l
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
The direct mounting method is usually used when a small-diameter and single-polarized antenna is used. In this situation, if one ODU is configured for one antenna, the ODU is directly mounted at the back of the antenna. If two ODUs are configured for one antenna, an RF signal combiner/splitter (hereinafter referred to as a hybrid coupler) must be mounted to connect the ODUs to the antenna. Figure 1-3 illustrates the direct mounting method.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-5
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
1 Introduction
Figure 1-3 Direct mounting
l
The separate mounting method is used when a double-polarized antenna or big-diameter and single-polarized antenna is used. Figure 1-4 shows the separate method. In this situation, a hybrid coupler can be mounted. That is, two ODUs share one feed boom. Figure 1-4 Separate mounting
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 provides an entire frequency band antenna solution, and supports the single-polarized antenna and dual-polarized antenna with a diameter of 0.3 m to 3.7 m and the corresponding feeder system.
1.3 Radio Link Forms The OptiX RTN 950 provides the radio links of different forms in which different IF boards and ODUs are configured for different microwave application scenarios.
1-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
1 Introduction
Table 1-4 Radio link forms supported by the OptiX RTN 950
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Radio Link Form
Control, Switching, and Timing Board
IF Board
ODU
Low-capacity PDH microwave
CST/CSH
IF1
Low capacity for PDH ODU
SDH/PDH microwave
CST/CSH
IF1
Standard power ODU or high power ODU
High-capacity SDH microwave
CST/CSH
ISU2
Standard power ODU or high power ODU
High-capacity SDH microwave supporting XPIC
CST/CSH
ISX2
Standard power ODU or high power ODU
Hybrid/Packet microwave
CSH
IFU2/ISU2
Standard power ODU or high power ODU
Hybrid/Packet microwave supporting XPIC
CSH
IFX2/ISX2
Standard power ODU or high power ODU
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-7
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
2 Chassis
2
Chassis
About This Chapter The IDU of the OptiX RTN 950 is a 2U chassis. It can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of racks, cabinets, and surfaces. 2.1 Chassis Structure The dimensions (H x W x D) of the IDU 950 chassis are 88 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm. The IDU 950 chassis has a four-layered structure that is air cooled. 2.2 Installation Mode The IDU 950 can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of racks, cabinets, and surfaces. 2.3 Air Flow An IDU 950 chassis is air-cooled with air in on the left side and air out on the right side. 2.4 IDU Labels Product nameplate labels, qualification card labels, ESD protection labels, grounding labels, laser safety class labels, high temperature warning labels, and operation warning labels, and other types of labels are affixed in their respective positions on the IDU chassis or boards. Adhere to the warnings and instructions on the labels when performing various types of tasks in order to avoid bodily injury or damage to the equipment.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-1
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
2 Chassis
2.1 Chassis Structure The dimensions (H x W x D) of the IDU 950 chassis are 88 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm. The IDU 950 chassis has a four-layered structure that is air cooled. Figure 2-1 shows the chassis structure of the IDU 950. Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 950
2.2 Installation Mode The IDU 950 can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of racks, cabinets, and surfaces. The IDU 950 can be installed: l
In a 300 mm European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) cabinet
l
In a 600 mm ETSI cabinet
l
In a 450 mm 19-inch cabinet
l
In a 600 mm 19-inch cabinet
l
In a 19-inch open rack
l
In an outdoor cabinet for wireless equipment
l
On a wall
l
On a table
2.3 Air Flow An IDU 950 chassis is air-cooled with air in on the left side and air out on the right side. Figure 2-2 shows the air flow in an IDU 950 chassis. 2-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
2 Chassis
Figure 2-2 Air flow in an IDU 950 chassis
2.4 IDU Labels Product nameplate labels, qualification card labels, ESD protection labels, grounding labels, laser safety class labels, high temperature warning labels, and operation warning labels, and other types of labels are affixed in their respective positions on the IDU chassis or boards. Adhere to the warnings and instructions on the labels when performing various types of tasks in order to avoid bodily injury or damage to the equipment.
Label Description Table 2-1 provides the description of the labels on the IDU chassis and boards. Actual labels may vary depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards. Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels Label
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Label Name
Description
ESD protection label
Indicates that the equipment is sensitive to static electricity.
Grounding label
Indicates the grounding position of the IDU chassis.
Fan warning label
Warns you not to touch fan leaves when the fan is rotating.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-3
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
2 Chassis
Label
Label Name
Description
High temperature warning label
Indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed 70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. Wear protective gloves to handle the board.
Power caution label
Instructs you to read related instructions before performing any power-related tasks. For details, see Labels in 3.16.4 Front Panel.
合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD
Qualification card label
Indicates that the equipment has been quality checked.
RoHS label
Indicates that the equipment complies with the related requirements specified in the RoHS directive.
Product nameplate label
Indicates the product name and certification.
Operation guidance label
Instructs you to slightly pull the switch lever outwards before setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.
HUAWEI 华为技术有限公司
中国制作
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.
MADE IN CHINA
PULL
2-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
2 Chassis
Label Position Figure 2-3 shows the positions of the labels on the chassis of the IDU 950. Figure 2-3 Positions of the IDU 950 labels OptiX RTN 950
Class1Laser Product
电源额定值 POWER RATING:
合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD
-48－-60V;14.3A
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference received , including interference that may cause undesired operation .
N14036
HUAWEI 华为技术有限公司
中国制作
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.
MADE IN CHINA
华为技术有限公司 HUAWEI TECHNOLGIES CO . , LTD .
中国制造 MADE IN CHINA
!
! WARNING -48V OUTPUT TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-5
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
3
Boards
About This Chapter The IDU 950 supports the following types of boards: system control, switching, and timing boards, IF boards, Ethernet boards, SDH boards, PDH boards, power supply boards, and fan boards. 3.1 Board Appearance The dimensions (H x W x D) of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 950 chassis are 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm. The dimensions (H x W x D) of the system control, switching, and timing board in the IDU 950 chassis are 22.36 mm x 193.80 mm x 269.73 mm. 3.2 Board List The IDU 950 provides various functions with different boards inserted. 3.3 CST The CST is the integrated TDM system control, switching, and timing board. 3.4 CSH The CSH is the integrated Hybrid system control, switching, and timing board. 3.5 IF1 The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board. The IF1 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.6 IFU2 The IFU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode. The IFU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.7 IFX2 The IFX2 is a universal IF board that supports the XPIC function in Integrated IP radio mode. The IFX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.8 ISU2 The ISU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode at the same time. The ISU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.9 ISX2 The ISX2 is a universal XPIC IF board and provides the XPIC function for signals transmitted/ received in Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode. The ISX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-1
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
3.10 EM6T/EM6F The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical ports and two GE ports. The EM6T has similar functions to the EM6F. The only difference is as follows: The GE ports on the EM6T use fixed electrical ports whereas the GE ports on the EM6F use the SFP modules and therefore can function as two optical or electrical ports. The GE electrical ports on the EM6F and the EM6T are compatible with the FE electrical ports. 3.11 EFP8 The EFP8 is an 8-port FE EoPDH processing board. The EFP board is connected to the packet plane through its bridging GE port. 3.12 SL1D The SL1D is a 2xSTM-1 optical interface board. 3.13 ML1/MD1 The ML1 is a 16xSmart E1 service processing board. The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service processing board. 3.14 SP3S/SP3D The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. 3.15 AUX The AUX is an auxiliary management interface board of the OptiX RTN 950. One NE can house only one AUX. 3.16 PIU The PIU is the power interface board. The OptiX RTN 950 supports two PIUs, each of which accesses one -48 V/-60 V DC power supply. 3.17 FAN The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat generated in the chassis through air cooling.
3-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
3.1 Board Appearance The dimensions (H x W x D) of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 950 chassis are 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm. The dimensions (H x W x D) of the system control, switching, and timing board in the IDU 950 chassis are 22.36 mm x 193.80 mm x 269.73 mm. NOTE
The depth of the board refers to the distance between the front panel and the end of the PCB.
Board Appearance Figure 3-1 shows the appearance of an ISU2 board in an IDU 950 chassis. Figure 3-1 Appearance of an ISU2 board
Bar Code The front panel of a board has two ejector levers and two captive screws. The ejector levers help you remove or insert a board. The captive screws fasten a board to the chassis. A board bar code (as shown in Figure 3-2) is attached to one of the ejector levers. Figure 3-2 Bar code Bar code
0514721055000015-SL91EM6F01
①
① ② ③ ④
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
②
③ ④
Internal code Board version Board name Board feature code
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-3
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards NOTE
Only the bar codes of some boards contain board feature codes, which further classify boards. For example, the feature codes of some boards using SFP modules (such as EM6F) indicate the type of SFP module being used, and the feature codes of some other boards providing E1 ports (such as SP3S) indicate the impedance of E1 ports.
3.2 Board List The IDU 950 provides various functions with different boards inserted. Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)
Slot 11 (FAN)
Slot 7 (CST/CSH)
Slot 8 (CST/CSH)
Slot 5 (EXT)
Slot 6 (EXT)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 1 (EXT)
Slot 2 (EXT)
NOTE
“EXT” represents an extended slot, which can house any type of IF board or interface board.
Table 3-1 List of IDU boards Board Acronym
Board Name
CST
TDM control, switching, and timing board
Valid Slot
Description
Slot 7 or slot 8
l Provides full time division crossconnections for VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s. l Performs system communications and control. l Provides the clock processing function and supports one external clock input/ output function. l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one NM serial interface, and one NE cascading interface.
3-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Board Acronym
Board Name
CSH
Hybrid control, switching, and timing board
3 Boards
Valid Slot
Description
Slot 7 or slot 8
l Provides full time division crossconnections for VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s. l Provides the 10 Gbit/s packet switching capability. l Performs system communications and control. l Provides the clock processing function and supports one external clock input/ output function. l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one NM serial interface, and one NE cascading interface.
ISU2
Universal IF board
Slot 1 to slot 6
l Provides one IF interface l Supports integrated IP microwave and SDH microwave. The supported service modes can be Native E1+Ethernet, Native STM-1+Ethernet or SDH (1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1). l Supports the AM function. l Supports highly efficient encapsulation technology
ISX2
Universal XPIC IF board
Slot 1 to slot 6
l Provides one IF interface l Supports integrated IP microwave and SDH microwave. The supported service modes can be Native E1+Ethernet, Native STM-1+Ethernet or SDH (1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1). l Supports the XPIC function. l Supports the AM function. l Supports highly efficient encapsulation technology
IF1
IFU2
SDH IF board
Slot 1 to slot 6
l Provides one IF interface.
Universal IF board
Slot 1 to slot 6
l Provides one IF interface.
l Supports the TU-based PDH microwave solution and the STM-1-based SDH microwave solution.
l Supports the integrated IP microwave. l Supports the AM function.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-5
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Board Acronym
Board Name
IFX2
Universal XPIC IF board
Valid Slot
Description
Slot 1 to slot 6
l Provides one IF interface. l Supports the integrated IP microwave. l Supports the XPIC function. l Supports the AM function.
SL1D
2xSTM-1 interface board
Slot 1 to slot 6
Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1 optical interfaces.
EM6T
6 Port RJ45 Ethernet/ Gigabit Ethernet Interface Board
Slot 1 to slot 6
l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.
4 Port RJ45 + 2 Port SFP Fast Ethernet/ Gigabit Ethernet Interface Board
Slot 1 to slot 6
l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.
8-port RJ45 FE EoPDH processing board with the switching function
Slot 1 to slot 6
l Provides eight FE electrical interfaces.
EM6F
EFP8
l Provides two GE electrical interfaces that are compatible with the FE electrical interface.
l Uses the SFP module to provide two GE optical or electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces are compatible with the FE electrical interfaces.
l Bridges to the packet plane through one internal GE interface. l Supports the processing of EoPDH services. The total bandwidth of the VCG is 63xE1. l Supports Ethernet transparent transmission services and Layer 2 switching services.
ML1
MD1
SP3S
3-6
16xE1 (smart) tributary board
Slot 1 to slot 6
32xE1 (smart) tributary board
Slot 1 to slot 6
16xE1 tributary board
Slot 1 to slot 6
l Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm smart E1 interfaces. l Supports CES E1, ATM/IMA E1, and fractional E1. l Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm smart E1 interfaces. l Supports CES E1, ATM/IMA E1, and fractional E1. Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM E1 interfaces.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Board Acronym
Board Name
SP3D
3 Boards
Valid Slot
Description
32xE1 tributary board
Slot 1 to slot 6
Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or TDM 120ohm E1 interfaces.
AUX
Auxiliary interface board
Slot 1 to slot 6
Provides one orderwire interface, one asynchronous data interface, one synchronous data interface, and four-input and two-output external alarm interfaces.
TND1PIU
Power board
Slot 9 or slot 10
Provides one -48 V/-60 V DC power input.
TND1FAN
Fan board
Slot 11
Cools and ventilates the IDU.
3.3 CST The CST is the integrated TDM system control, switching, and timing board. 3.3.1 Version Description The functional version of the CST is SL91. 3.3.2 Functions and Features The CST provides full time division cross-connection, system control and communication, and clock processing functions. The CST provides auxiliary ports and management ports. 3.3.3 Working Principle The CST consists of the system control and communication unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit, and power supply unit. 3.3.4 Front Panel There are indicators, buttons, management ports, clock ports, and latches on the front panel. 3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF (compact flash) card. 3.3.6 Valid Slots The CST can be inserted in slot 7 or slot 8 of the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the CST on the NMS is the same as its physical slot. 3.3.7 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CST. 3.3.8 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including the cross-connection capability, clock performance, wayside service port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
3.3.1 Version Description The functional version of the CST is SL91.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-7
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
3.3.2 Functions and Features The CST provides full time division cross-connection, system control and communication, and clock processing functions. The CST provides auxiliary ports and management ports. Table 3-2 lists the functions and features that the CST supports. Table 3-2 Functions and features that the CST supports Function and Feature
CST
Basic functions
Cross-connect capacity
Supports full time division cross-connections (equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s) at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level.
System control and communication
Manages, monitors, and controls the running status of the IDU, and works as a communication service unit between the NMS and boards to help the NMS to control and manage the NE.
Clock source
Provides the system clock and frame headers for service signals and overhead signals for the other boards when tracing an appropriate clock source.
Clock
The traced clock source can be any of the following: l External clock l SDH line clock l PDH tributary clock l Clock at the air interface Clock protection
Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
DCN
Outband DCN
Supports a maximum of 13 DCCs.
Protection
1+1 hot standby
Supported
Auxiliary ports and management ports
Ethernet NM port
1
NM serial port
1
NE cascading port
1
Port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet
1
Warm reset and cold reset
Supported
OM
3-8
The specifications of port comply with RS-485.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Function and Feature
3 Boards
CST
In-service FPGA loading
Supported
Board manufacturing information query
Supported
Board temperature detection
Supported
Board voltage detection
Supported
Detection of indicators on the other boards
Supported
Hot swapping function
Supported
Pluggable CF card
Supported
3.3.3 Working Principle The CST consists of the system control and communication unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit, and power supply unit.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-9
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Functional Block Diagram Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CST Backplane
Cross-connect unit
TDM service Service board
Control bus
FE signal
Ethernet NM port NM serial port
NE cascading port
System control and communication unit of the paired board
System control and communication unit
Clock signal required by other boards
Monitoring signal
Clock unit
Port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet /Time port 2
Time port 1 Clock port
External clock signal Power supplied to the other units on the board
Power supply unit
Clock signal provided to the other units on the board
Clock unit of the paired board
-48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V power supplied to other boards +12 V power supplied to fans
System Control and Communication Unit The system control and communication unit consists of the CPU unit and logic control unit. The system control and communication unit performs the following functions:
3-10
l
The CPU unit controls and manages the other units on the board and collects alarms and performance events using the control bus.
l
The CPU unit controls and manages the other boards in the IDU and collects alarms and performance events using the control bus.
l
The CPU unit controls and manages the ODU by transmitting the ODU control signal to the SMODEM unit in the IF board over the control bus in the backplane.
l
The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control unit.
l
The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port and NE cascading port.
l
The CPU unit implements software loading by reading information from the CF card with the bus.
l
The CPU unit monitors and manages an outdoor cabinet by reading the outdoor cabinet monitoring signal with the bus.
l
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and enables FPGA loading. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
l
3 Boards
The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit, the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes: – Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit – Adding or dropping orderwire and asynchronous data services – Exchanging the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines
l
The system control and communication unit on a CST board communicates with the system control and communication unit on the paired CST board by carrying FE signals over the communication bus in the backplane. In this manner, 1+1 hot backup between paired boards is achieved.
Cross-Connect Unit The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system using the higher order crossconnect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 3-5 shows the functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit. Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit Source TDM service unit
Higher order cross-connect module HOXC
SinkTDM service unit
Lower order cross-connect module LOXC
The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect module over VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit. If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect module grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect module. The lower order cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order cross-connect module processes the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.
Clock Unit l
The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from external clock sources or service clock sources at service ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means of the phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides the system clock.
l
The clock units on the main and standby boards transmit clock signals to each other.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-11
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Power Supply Unit The power supply unit performs the following functions: l
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by the chips of the other units on the local board.
l
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power supply required by the other boards in the IDU.
l
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power supply required by the fan.
3.3.4 Front Panel There are indicators, buttons, management ports, clock ports, and latches on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
CST
STAT PROG SYNC SRV ACT
Figure 3-6 Front panel of the CST
CF RCV RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD1
TOD2
Indicators Table 3-3 Status explanation for indicators on the CST Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.
PROG
3-12
Blinks on (green) and off at 100 ms intervals
Software is being loaded to the board during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
Blinks on (green) and off at 300 ms intervals
The board software is in BIOS boot state during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Indicator
3 Boards
State
Meaning
On (green)
l When the board is being powered on or being reset, the upper layer software is being initialized. l When the board is running, the software is running normally.
Blinks on (red) and off at 100 ms intervals
The BOOTROM self-check fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
On (red)
l The memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The logic file or upper layer software is lost during the running process of the board. l The pluggable storage card is faulty.
SYNC
SRV
On (green)
The clock is working properly.
On (red)
The clock source is lost or a clock switchover occurs.
On (green)
The system is working properly.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the system.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in the system.
Off
In an unprotected system, there is no power supplied to the system. In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one.
ACT
On (green)
In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. In an unprotected system, the board has been activated.
Off
In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one. In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-13
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Clock Ports and Management Ports Table 3-4 Description of the clock ports and management ports Port
Description
Connector Type
NMS/COM
Ethernet NM port/NM serial port
EXT
NE cascade port
CLK/TOD1
External clock port (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz), external time port 1, or wayside E1 port
TOD2
External time port 2 or port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet
RJ45
NOTE
l The external clock port and wayside E1 port share one port physically. This port can also transparently transmit DCC bytes, orderwire overhead bytes, and synchronous/asynchronous data overhead bytes. This port, however, can implement only one of the preceding functions at one time. l The external time port 2 and the outdoor cabinet monitoring port share one port physically. On the OptiX RTN 900 V100R003, the physical port can be used as the outdoor cabinet monitoring port only.
Auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the ports, however, are different. Figure 3-7 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector. Figure 3-7 Front view of the RJ45 connector
87654321
Table 3-5 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port Port
NMS/COM
3-14
Pin
Signal
1
Transmitting data (+)
2
Transmitting data (-)
3
Receiving data (+)
4
Grounding end of the NM serial port
5
Receive end of the NM serial port
6
Receiving data (-)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Port
3 Boards
Pin
Signal
7
Not defined
8
Transmit end of the NM serial port
Table 3-6 Pin assignments for the EXT port Port
EXT
Pin
Signal
1
Transmitting data (+)
2
Transmitting data (-)
3
Receiving data (+)
6
Receiving data (-)
4, 5, 7, 8
Not defined
NOTE
The EXT port supports the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes; that is, the EXT port can transmit data through pins 3 and 6 and receive data through pins 1 and 2.
The RJ45 connector has two indicators. Table 3-7 provides status explanation for these indicators. Table 3-7 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector Indicator
State
Meaning
LINK (green)
On
The link is working properly.
Off
The link is interrupted.
On or blinking
The port is transmitting or receiving data.
Off
The port is not transmitting or receiving data.
ACT (yellow)
NOTE
The NMS/COM port and the EXT port are equivalent to two ports on a hub. This means that no external Ethernet link should be configured between the two ports during the networking process; otherwise, an Ethernet loop will be formed. As a result, a broadcast storm is generated on the network, leading to repeated resetting of NEs.
Figure 3-8 shows the two common incorrect connections.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-15
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
CST
STAT PROG SYNC SRV ACT
Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port
CF RCV
RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD1 TOD2
CST
STAT PROG SYNC SRV ACT
LAN
CF RCV
RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD1 TOD2
NOTE
When the OptiX RTN 950 is configured with two CST boards, their Ethernet NM ports and NE cascading ports are equivalent to four ports on a hub. To avoid network storms, use only the Ethernet NM port and NE cascading port of the working CST board, if possible.
The clock port (CLK) and high-precision time port (TOD1) share the CLK/TOD1 port physically but use different pins of the CLK/TOD1 port. Table 3-8 provides details about the pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port. Table 3-8 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port Pin
Working Mode External Clock
External Time Input (1PPS + Time Information )
External Time Input
External Time Output
(DCLS)
(DCLS)
(1PPS + Time Information )
1
CLK receiving (-)
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
2
CLK receiving (+)
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
3
Not defined
1PPS signal input (-)
1PPS signal output (-)
DCLS time signal input (-)
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS time signal output (-)
Grounding end
Grounding end
Grounding end
4
3-16
External Time Output
CLK transmitting (-)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
(RS-422 level) Grounding end
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Pin
3 Boards
Working Mode External Clock
External Time Input (1PPS + Time Information )
External Time Output
External Time Input
External Time Output
(DCLS)
(DCLS)
(1PPS + Time Information )
5
CLK transmitting (+)
Grounding end
Grounding end
Grounding end
Grounding end
6
Not defined
1PPS signal input (+)
1PPS signal output (+)
DCLS time signal input (+)
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS time signal output (+)
Time information input (-)
Time information output (-)
Not defined
Not defined
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
Time information input (+)
Time information output (+)
Not defined
Not defined
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
7
8
Not defined
Not defined
(RS-422 level)
The external time port 2 and the port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet share the TOD2 port physically but use different pins of the TOD2 port. Table 3-9 provides details about the pin assignments for the TOD2 port. Table 3-9 Pin assignments for the TOD2 port Pin
Working Mode External Time Input (1PPS + Time Informatio n)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
External Time Output
External Time Input
External Time Output
(1PPS + Time Information)
(DCLS)
(DCLS)
Port for Monitoring an Outdoor Cabinet
1
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
2
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-17
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Pin
Working Mode External Time Input
External Time Output
External Time Input
External Time Output
(1PPS + Time Information)
(DCLS)
(DCLS)
1PPS signal input (-)
1PPS signal output (-)
DCLS time signal input (-)
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS time signal output (-)
(1PPS + Time Informatio n) 3
(RS-422 level)
Port for Monitoring an Outdoor Cabinet
Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal input (-) (RS-422 level)
4
Grounding end
Grounding end
Grounding end
Grounding end
Grounding end
5
Grounding end
Grounding end
Grounding end
Grounding end
Grounding end
6
1PPS signal input (+)
1PPS signal output (+)
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS time signal input (+)
DCLS time signal output (+)
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal input (+) (RS-422 level)
7
Time information input (-)
Time information output (-)
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
Not defined
Not defined
Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal output (-) (RS-422 level)
8
Time information input (+)
Time information output (+)
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
Not defined
Not defined
Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal output (+) (RS-422 level)
NOTE
Pins 3 and 6-8 of the CLK/TOD1 and TOD2 ports are reserved for running the high-precision time protocol (IEEE 1588 protocol) and are not used in this product version.
3-18
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Buttons Table 3-10 Buttons Button
Name
Description
CF RCV
CF configuration restoration button
After this button is pressed and held for eight seconds, the board automatically restores the NE database from the CF card.
RST
Warm reset button
After this button is pressed, a warm reset is performed on the board.
Latches There is a latch near each ejector lever on the front panel of the board. When removing a board, you can rotate the ejector levers only after pushing the latches to the middle positions. In addition, rotating the ejector levers triggers the tact switch on the board and then triggers working/ protection switching.
3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF (compact flash) card. NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IP, NE-ID, and subnet mask), software packages, and NE logs are stored on the CF card. After you press the CRV button on the system control, switching, and timing board and hold it for eight seconds, the data stored on the CF card will be loaded to the board. To synchronize the NE databases, system parameters, and NE logs on the system control, switching, and timing board to the CF card, enable the regular backup function. NOTE
The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the system control, switching, and timing board during package diffusion. Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations are not needed to synchronize software packages on the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card. If the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card have different software packages or data, the SWDL_PKGVER_MM alarm will be reported.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-19
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Figure 3-9 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card
ON DIP
1 2 3 4
2
1
1. DIP switches
2. CF card
Table 3-11 Setting DIP switches Meaning
Setting of DIP Switchesa
3-20
1
2
3
4
0
0
0
0
Indicates that the board works with the watchdog enabled.
0
0
0
1
The value is reserved.
0
0
1
0
Indicates that a memory self-check is running.
0
0
1
1
Indicates that the board is being debugged.
0
1
0
0
Indicates that the board works with the watchdog disabled and a full memory check is running.
0
1
0
1
Indicates the BIOS holdover state.
0
1
1
0
Indicates the BIOS exhibition state.
0
1
1
1
The value is reserved. (By default, this value indicates that the board works with the watchdog enabled.)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Meaning
Setting of DIP Switchesa 1
2
3
4
1
0
0
0
The value is reserved. (By default, this value indicates that the board works with the watchdog enabled.)
1
0
0
1
Restores the data of the CF card.
1
0
1
0
Erases data in the system parameter area.
1
0
1
1
Erases databases.
1
1
0
0
Erases NE software, including patches.
1
1
0
1
Erases databases and NE software, including patches.
1
1
1
0
Erases all data in the file system.
1
1
1
1
Erases all the data except for the board manufacturing information.
NOTE
a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When a DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.
3.3.6 Valid Slots The CST can be inserted in slot 7 or slot 8 of the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the CST on the NMS is the same as its physical slot. Figure 3-10 Slot for the CST in the IDU chassis Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)
Slot 11 (FAN)
Slot 7 (CST)
Slot 8 (CST)
Slot 5 (EXT)
Slot 6 (EXT)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 1 (EXT)
Slot 2 (EXT)
Figure 3-11 Logical slot of the CST on the NMS Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Slot 11 (FAN)
Slot 7 (CST)
Slot 8 (CST)
Slot 5 (EXT)
Slot 6 (EXT)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 1 (EXT)
Slot 2 (EXT)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-21
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-12 Slot allocation Item
Description
Slot allocation priority
Slot 7 > Slot 8
3.3.7 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CST.
Related References A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting A.10.1.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table A.10.1.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status A.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General A.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port A.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port A.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface
3.3.8 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including the cross-connection capability, clock performance, wayside service port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Cross-Connection Capability The CST supports full time division cross-connections (equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s) at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level.
Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance Clock timing and synchronization performance meets related ITU-T Recommendations. Table 3-13 Clock timing and synchronization performance Item
Performance
External synchronization source
2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §9), or 2048 kHz (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §13)
Frequency accuracy
Compliant with ITU-T G.813
Pull-in and pull-out ranges Noise generation 3-22
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Item
3 Boards
Performance
Noise tolerance Noise transfer Transient response and holdover performance
Wayside Service Interface Performance Table 3-14 Wayside service interface performance Item
Performance
Transmission path
Uses the Huawei-defined bytes in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)
2048
Impedance (ohm)
120
Interface characteristics
Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.
Mechanical Behavior Table 3-15 Mechanical behavior Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W x D)
22.36 mm x 193.80 mm x 269.73 mm
Weight
0.72 kg
Power Consumption Power consumption: < 20.7 W
3.4 CSH The CSH is the integrated Hybrid system control, switching, and timing board. 3.4.1 Version Description The functional version of the CSH is SL91. 3.4.2 Functions and Features Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-23
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
The CSH provides 10 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division cross-connection, system control and communication, and clock processing functions. The CSH provides auxiliary ports and management ports. 3.4.3 Working Principle The CSH consists of the system control and communication unit, packet switching unit, crossconnect unit, clock unit, and power supply unit. 3.4.4 Front Panel There are indicators, buttons, management ports, clock/time ports, and latches on the front panel. 3.4.5 DIP Switches and CF Card This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF (compact flash) card. 3.4.6 Valid Slots The CSH can be inserted in slot 7 or slot 8 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the CSH on the NMS is the same as its physical slot. 3.4.7 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSH. 3.4.8 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including the packet switching capacity, crossconnection capability, clock performance, wayside service port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
3.4.1 Version Description The functional version of the CSH is SL91.
3.4.2 Functions and Features The CSH provides 10 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division cross-connection, system control and communication, and clock processing functions. The CSH provides auxiliary ports and management ports. Table 3-16 lists the functions and features that the CSH supports. Table 3-16 Functions and features that the CSH supports
3-24
Function and Feature
CSH
Basic functions
Switching capability
Supports 10 Gbit/s packet switching function.
Cross-connect capacity
Supports full time division cross-connections (equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s) at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level.
System control and communication
Manages, monitors, and controls the running status of the IDU, and works as a communication service unit between the NMS and boards to help the NMS to control and manage the NE.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Function and Feature
CSH
Clock
Provides the system clock and frame headers for service signals and overhead signals for the other boards when tracing an appropriate clock source.
Clock synchronization at the physical layer
The traced clock source can be any of the following: l External clock l SDH line clock l PDH tributary clock l Clock at the air interface l Synchronous Ethernet clock
Clock protection
Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
DCN
Outband DCN
Supports a maximum of 13 DCCs.
Inband DCN
The DCN bandwidth is configurable.
MPLS/PWE3 functions
Supported See Table 3-17.
QoS functions
Supported See Table 3-18.
Protection
1+1 hot standby
Supported
Auxiliary ports and management ports
Ethernet NM port
1
NM serial port
1
NE cascading port
1
Port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet
1
Warm reset and cold reset
Supported
In-service FPGA loading
Supported
Board manufacturing information query
Supported
OM
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
The specifications of port comply with RS-485.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-25
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Function and Feature
CSH
Board temperature detection
Supported
Board voltage detection
Supported
Detection of indicators on the other boards
Supported
Hot swapping function
Supported
Pluggable CF card
Supported
The packet switching unit of the CSH works with a service board to implement MPLS/PWE3 functions. Table 3-17 provides details about these functions. Table 3-17 MPLS/PWE3 functions Function and Feature
CSH
MPLS tunnel
Setup mode
Static LSPs
Protection
1:1 MPLS tunnel APS
OAM
Supports the following OAM functions: l MPLS OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711 l LSP ping and LSP traceroute functions
PWE3
Service categories
Supports the following service categories: l CES services l ATM PWE3 services l ETH PWE3 services
Setup mode
Static PWs
Protection
1:1 PW APS
OAM
Supports the following OAM functions: l VCCV l PW OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711. l PW ping and PW traceroute functions
3-26
MS-PW
Supported
Configurable bandwidth
Supported
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
The packet switching unit of the CSH works with a service board to implement QoS functions. Table 3-18 provides details about these functions. Table 3-18 QoS functions Function and Feature
CSH
DiffServ
Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB service classes for service flows based on their QoS information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values) carried by the packets.
Ethernet complex traffic classification
Supports traffic classification based on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values carried by packets.
CAR
Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports.
Shaping
Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, prioritized queue, or traffic flow.
Queue scheduling policies
Supports the following queue scheduling policies: l SP l WRR l SP+WRR
NOTE
The packet switching unit of the CSH works with service boards to implement the Ethernet service function. For information about the Ethernet service function, refer to descriptions in associated service boards.
3.4.3 Working Principle The CSH consists of the system control and communication unit, packet switching unit, crossconnect unit, clock unit, and power supply unit.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-27
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Functional Block Diagram Figure 3-12 Functional block diagram of the CSH Backplane
GE bus
Packet switching unit
Service board
TDM service
Cross-connect unit
Service board
Control bus
Ethernet NM port NM serial port
FE signal System control and communication unit
NE cascading port Port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet /Time port 2 Time port 1 Clock port
System control and communication unit of the paired board
Monitoring signal
Clock unit
Clock signal required by other boards Clock unit of the paired board
External clock signal Clock signal provided to the other units on the board
Power supplied to the other units on the board
Power supply unit
-48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V power supplied to other boards +12 V power supplied to fans
System Control and Communication Unit The system control and communication unit consists of the CPU unit and logic control unit. The system control and communication unit performs the following functions:
3-28
l
The CPU unit controls and manages the other units on the board and collects alarms and performance events using the control bus.
l
The CPU unit controls and manages the other boards in the IDU and collects alarms and performance events using the control bus.
l
The CPU unit controls and manages the ODU by transmitting the ODU control signal to the SMODEM unit in the IF board over the control bus in the backplane.
l
The CPU unit enables the packet switching unit using the control bus to groom Ethernet service packets.
l
The CPU unit processes Ethernet protocol packets from the packet switching unit using the control bus. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
l
The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control unit.
l
The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port and NE cascading port.
l
The CPU unit implements software loading by reading information from the CF card with the bus.
l
The CPU unit monitors and manages an outdoor cabinet by reading the outdoor cabinet monitoring signal with the bus.
l
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and enables FPGA loading.
l
The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit, the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes: – Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit – Adding or dropping orderwire and synchronous/asynchronous data services – Exchanging the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines
l
The system control and communication unit on a CSH board communicates with the system control and communication unit on the paired CSH board by carrying FE signals over the communication bus in the backplane. In this manner, 1+1 hot backup between paired boards is achieved.
Packet Switching Unit The packet switching unit grooms services and processes protocols for Ethernet services (including Native Ethernet services and MPLS/PWE3 packets carried over Ethernet). l
After receiving Ethernet services from an Ethernet board, the packet switching unit grooms the Ethernet services based on the configurations that are delivered by the system control and communication unit.
l
After receiving protocol packets from an Ethernet board, the packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the system control and communication unit for processing. After processing, the system control and communication unit sends the protocol packets back to the packet switching unit. The packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the Ethernet board.
Cross-Connect Unit The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system using the higher order crossconnect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 3-13 shows the functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-29
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Figure 3-13 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit Source TDM service unit
Higher order cross-connect module HOXC
SinkTDM service unit
Lower order cross-connect module LOXC
The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect module over VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit. If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect module grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect module. The lower order cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order cross-connect module processes the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.
Clock Unit l
The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from external clock sources or service clock sources at service ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means of the phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides the system clock.
l
The clock units on the main and standby boards transmit clock signals to each other.
Power Supply Unit The power supply unit performs the following functions: l
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by the chips of the other units on the local board.
l
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power supply required by the other boards in the IDU.
l
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power supply required by the fan.
3.4.4 Front Panel There are indicators, buttons, management ports, clock/time ports, and latches on the front panel.
3-30
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Front Panel Diagram
CSH
STAT PROG SYNC SRV ACT
Figure 3-14 Front panel of the CSH
CF RCV
RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD1 TOD2
Indicators Table 3-19 Status explanation for indicators on the CSH Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.
PROG
Blinks on (green) and off at 100 ms intervals
Software is being loaded to the board during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
Blinks on (green) and off at 300 ms intervals
The board software is in BIOS boot state during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
On (green)
l When the board is being powered on or being reset, the upper layer software is being initialized. l When the board is running, the software is running normally.
Blinks on (red) and off at 100 ms intervals
The BOOTROM self-check fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
On (red)
l The memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The logic file or upper layer software is lost during the running process of the board. l The pluggable storage card is faulty.
SYNC Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
On (green)
The clock is working properly.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-31
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Indicator
SRV
State
Meaning
On (red)
The clock source is lost or a clock switchover occurs.
On (green)
The system is working properly.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the system.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in the system.
Off
In an unprotected system, there is no power supplied to the system. In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one.
ACT
On (green)
In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. In an unprotected system, the board has been activated.
Off
In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one. In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.
Clock Ports and Management Ports Table 3-20 Description of the clock ports and management ports Port
Description
NMS/COM
Ethernet NM port/NM serial port
EXT
NE cascade port
CLK/TOD1
External clock port (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz), external time port 1, or wayside E1 port
TOD2
External time port 2 or port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet
Connector Type
RJ45
NOTE
l The external clock port and wayside E1 port share one port physically. This port can also transparently transmit DCC bytes, orderwire overhead bytes, and synchronous/asynchronous data overhead bytes. This port, however, can implement only one of the preceding functions at one time. l The external time port 2 and the outdoor cabinet monitoring port share one port physically. On the OptiX RTN 900 V100R003, the physical port can be used as the outdoor cabinet monitoring port only.
3-32
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the ports, however, are different. Figure 3-15 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector. Figure 3-15 Front view of the RJ45 connector
87654321
Table 3-21 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port Port
NMS/COM
Pin
Signal
1
Transmitting data (+)
2
Transmitting data (-)
3
Receiving data (+)
4
Grounding end of the NM serial port
5
Receive end of the NM serial port
6
Receiving data (-)
7
Not defined
8
Transmit end of the NM serial port
Table 3-22 Pin assignments for the EXT port Port
EXT
Pin
Signal
1
Transmitting data (+)
2
Transmitting data (-)
3
Receiving data (+)
6
Receiving data (-)
4, 5, 7, 8
Not defined
NOTE
The EXT port supports the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes; that is, the EXT port can transmit data through pins 3 and 6 and receive data through pins 1 and 2.
The RJ45 connector has two indicators. Table 3-23 provides status explanation for these indicators. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-33
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-23 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector Indicator
State
Meaning
LINK (green)
On
The link is working properly.
Off
The link is interrupted.
On or blinking
The port is transmitting or receiving data.
Off
The port is not transmitting or receiving data.
ACT (yellow)
NOTE
The NMS/COM port and the EXT port are equivalent to two ports on a hub. This means that no external Ethernet link should be configured between the two ports during the networking process; otherwise, an Ethernet loop will be formed. As a result, a broadcast storm is generated on the network, leading to repeated resetting of NEs.
Figure 3-16 shows the two common incorrect connections.
CSH
STAT PROG SYNC SRV ACT
Figure 3-16 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port
CF RCV
RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD1 TOD2
CSH
STAT PROG SYNC SRV ACT
LAN
CF RCV
RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD1 TOD2
NOTE
When the OptiX RTN 950 is configured with two CSH boards, their Ethernet NM ports and NE cascading ports are equivalent to four ports on a hub. To avoid network storms, use only the Ethernet NM port and NE cascading port of the working CSH board, if possible.
The clock port (CLK) and high-precision time port (TOD1) share the CLK/TOD1 port physically but use different pins of the CLK/TOD1 port. Table 3-24 provides details about the pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port.
3-34
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-24 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port Pin
Working Mode External Clock
External Time Input (1PPS + Time Information )
External Time Output
External Time Input
External Time Output
(DCLS)
(DCLS)
(1PPS + Time Information )
1
CLK receiving (-)
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
2
CLK receiving (+)
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
3
Not defined
1PPS signal input (-)
1PPS signal output (-)
DCLS time signal input (-)
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS time signal output (-) (RS-422 level)
4
CLK transmitting (-)
Grounding end
Grounding end
Grounding end
Grounding end
5
CLK transmitting (+)
Grounding end
Grounding end
Grounding end
Grounding end
6
Not defined
1PPS signal input (+)
1PPS signal output (+)
DCLS time signal input (+)
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS time signal output (+)
Time information input (-)
Time information output (-)
Not defined
Not defined
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
Time information input (+)
Time information output (+)
Not defined
Not defined
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
7
8
Not defined
Not defined
(RS-422 level)
Time port 2 and the port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet share the TOD2 port physically but use different pins of the TOD2 port. Table 3-25 provides details about the pin assignments for the TOD2 port. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-35
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-25 Pin assignments for the TOD2 port Pin
Working Mode External Time Input (1PPS + Time Informatio n)
External Time Output
External Time Input
External Time Output
(1PPS + Time Information)
(DCLS)
(DCLS)
Port for Monitoring an Outdoor Cabinet
1
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
2
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
3
1PPS signal input (-)
1PPS signal output (-)
DCLS time signal input (-)
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS time signal output (-)
Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal input (-)
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level) 4
Grounding end
Grounding end
Grounding end
Grounding end
Grounding end
5
Grounding end
Grounding end
Grounding end
Grounding end
Grounding end
6
1PPS signal input (+)
1PPS signal output (+)
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS time signal input (+)
DCLS time signal output (+)
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal input (+) (RS-422 level)
7
Time information input (-)
Time information output (-)
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
Not defined
Not defined
Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal output (-) (RS-422 level)
8
Time information input (+)
Time information output (+)
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
Not defined
Not defined
Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal output (+) (RS-422 level)
NOTE
Pins 3 and 6-8 of the CLK/TOD1 and TOD2 ports are reserved for running the high-precision time protocol (IEEE 1588 protocol) and are not used in this product version.
3-36
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Buttons Table 3-26 Buttons Button
Name
Description
CF RCV
CF configuration restoration button
After this button is pressed and held for eight seconds, the board automatically restores the NE database from the CF card.
RST
Warm reset button
After this button is pressed, a warm reset is performed on the board.
Latches There is a latch near each ejector lever on the front panel of the board. When removing a board, you can rotate the ejector levers only after pushing the latches to the middle positions. In addition, rotating the ejector levers triggers the tact switch on the board and then triggers working/ protection switching.
3.4.5 DIP Switches and CF Card This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF (compact flash) card. NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IP, NE-ID, and subnet mask), software packages, and NE logs are stored on the CF card. After you press the CRV button on the system control, switching, and timing board and hold it for eight seconds, the data stored on the CF card will be loaded to the board. To synchronize the NE databases, system parameters, and NE logs on the system control, switching, and timing board to the CF card, enable the regular backup function. NOTE
The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the system control, switching, and timing board during package diffusion. Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations are not needed to synchronize software packages on the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card. If the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card have different software packages or data, the SWDL_PKGVER_MM alarm will be reported.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-37
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Figure 3-17 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card
ON DIP
1 2 3 4
2
1
1. DIP switches
2. CF card
Table 3-27 Setting DIP switches Meaning
Setting of DIP Switchesa
3-38
1
2
3
4
0
0
0
0
Indicates that the board works with the watchdog enabled.
0
0
0
1
The value is reserved.
0
0
1
0
Indicates that a memory self-check is running.
0
0
1
1
Indicates that the board is being debugged.
0
1
0
0
Indicates that the board works with the watchdog disabled and a full memory check is running.
0
1
0
1
Indicates the BIOS holdover state.
0
1
1
0
Indicates the BIOS exhibition state.
0
1
1
1
The value is reserved. (By default, this value indicates that the board works with the watchdog enabled.)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Meaning
Setting of DIP Switchesa 1
2
3
4
1
0
0
0
The value is reserved. (By default, this value indicates that the board works with the watchdog enabled.)
1
0
0
1
Restores the data of the CF card.
1
0
1
0
Erases data in the system parameter area.
1
0
1
1
Erases databases.
1
1
0
0
Erases NE software, including patches.
1
1
0
1
Erases databases and NE software, including patches.
1
1
1
0
Erases all data in the file system.
1
1
1
1
Erases all the data except for the board manufacturing information.
NOTE
a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When a DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.
3.4.6 Valid Slots The CSH can be inserted in slot 7 or slot 8 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the CSH on the NMS is the same as its physical slot. Figure 3-18 Slot for the CSH in the IDU chassis Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)
Slot 11 (FAN)
Slot 7 (CSH)
Slot 8 (CSH)
Slot 5 (EXT)
Slot 6 (EXT)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 1 (EXT)
Slot 2 (EXT)
Figure 3-19 Logical slot of the CSH on the NMS Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Slot 11 (FAN)
Slot 7 (CSH)
Slot 8 (CSH)
Slot 5 (EXT)
Slot 6 (EXT)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 1 (EXT)
Slot 2 (EXT)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-39
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-28 Slot allocation Item
Description
Slot allocation priority
Slot 7 > Slot 8
3.4.7 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSH.
Related References A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting A.10.1.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table A.10.1.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status A.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General A.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port A.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port A.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface
3.4.8 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including the packet switching capacity, crossconnection capability, clock performance, wayside service port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Packet Switching Capacity The CSH supports a 10 Gbit/s packet switching capacity.
Cross-Connection Capability The CSH supports full time division cross-connections (equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s) at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level.
Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance Clock timing and synchronization performance meets related ITU-T Recommendations. Table 3-29 Clock timing and synchronization performance
3-40
Item
Performance
External synchronization source
2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §9), or 2048 kHz (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §13)
Frequency accuracy
Compliant with ITU-T G.813
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Item
3 Boards
Performance
Pull-in and pull-out ranges Noise generation Noise tolerance Noise transfer Transient response and holdover performance
Wayside Service Interface Performance Table 3-30 Wayside service interface performance Item
Performance
Transmission path
Uses the Huawei-defined bytes in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)
2048
Impedance (ohm)
120
Interface characteristics
Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.
Mechanical Behavior Table 3-31 Mechanical behavior Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W x D)
22.36 mm x 193.80 mm x 269.73 mm
Weight
0.74 kg
Power Consumption Power Consumption: < 25.3 W
3.5 IF1 The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board. The IF1 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.5.1 Version Description The functional version of the IF1 is SL91. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-41
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
3.5.2 Functions and Features The IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. 3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one IF signal, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IF1. 3.5.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel. 3.5.5 Valid Slots The IF1 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. 3.5.6 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IF1. 3.5.7 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
3.5.1 Version Description The functional version of the IF1 is SL91.
3.5.2 Functions and Features The IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. Table 3-32 lists the functions and features that the IF1 supports. Table 3-32 Functions and features that the IF1 supports Function and Feature
IF1
Basic functions
l Receives and transmits one IF signal. l Provides management channels to the ODU. l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
Radio type
TU/STM-1-based radio
Radio work mode
See Technical Specifications of the IF1.
Protection
1+1 HSB/FD/ SD protection
Supported
N+1 protection
Supported
SNCP
Supported
License Clock 3-42
Supports control on the air interface capacity by using the license file. Clock source
Clock at the air interface
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Function and Feature Clock protection
3 Boards
IF1 Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol (supported only in SDH radio mode) l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol (supported only in SDH radio mode)
DCN
Inband DCN
Not supported
Outband DCN
l The PDH radio mode supports one DCC that is composed of one DCC byte if the capacity is less than 16xE1. l The PDH radio mode supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC bytes if the capacity is equal to or more than 16xE1. l The SDH radio mode supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC bytes, nine DCC bytes, or twelve DCC bytes.
OM
Loopback
Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops at IF ports l Outloops at IF ports l Inloops at composite ports l Outloops at composite ports
Warm reset and cold reset
Supported
In-service FPGA loading
Supported
Board manufacturing information query
Supported
Board temperature detection
Supported
Board power detection
Supported
3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one IF signal, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IF1.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-43
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Functional Block Diagram Figure 3-20 Functional block diagram of the IF1 Backplane
SMODEM unit
HSM signal bus
Paired board
ODU control signal Service bus
Overhead bus
Logic processing unit
Microwave MODEM unit frame signal
MUX/DEMUX unit
IF processing unit
Combiner Interface unit
IF
Cross-connect unit System control and communication unit
Control bus
System control and communication unit Logic control unit
-48 V power supplied to the ODU +3.3 V power supplied to the other units on the board
Power supply unit
Clock signal provided to the other units on the board
Clock unit
-48 V +3.3 V
System clock signal
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction Table 3-33 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IF1 Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Combiner interface unit
Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals and microwave service signals.
2
SMODEM unit
l Demodulates ODU control signals. l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system control and communication unit.
3
IF processing unit
l Controls the level of service signals through the automatic gain control (AGC) circuit. l Filters signals. l Performs A/D conversion.
3-44
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
4
MODEM unit
l Performs digital demodulation. l Performs time domain adaptive equalization. l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific alarms.
5
MUX/DEMUX unit (for SDH microwave signal processing)
l Synchronizes frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF alarms. l Performs descrambling. l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks link IDs and generates specific alarms. l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and reports the SSM status to the system control and communication unit. l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned microwave messages and reports the changes to the system control and communication unit over the control bus. l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes, and transmits the overhead signal to the logic processing unit. l Extracts wayside service bytes to form another 2 Mbit/ s overhead signal and transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the logic processing unit. l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specific performance events. l Checks higher order path overheads and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Transmits pointer indication signals and VC-4 signals to the logic processing unit.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-45
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
MUX/DEMUX unit (for PDH microwave signal processing)
l Detects microwave frame headers in PDH radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in PDH radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in PDH radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned microwave messages in PDH radio mode and reports the changes to the system control and communication unit over the control bus. l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in microwave frames in PDH radio mode and transmits the overhead signals to the logic processing unit. l Adjusts TU pointers. l Maps TU-12s in microwave frames in PDH radio mode to the specific positions in VC-4s.
Logic processing unit
6
l Processes clock signals. l Transmits overhead signals to the system control and communication unit. l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the main and standby cross-connect units.
NOTE
In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent processing.
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction Table 3-34 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IF1 Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Logic processing unit
l Processes clock signals. l Demultiplexes 2 Mbit/s overhead signals from 8 Mbit/ s overhead signals. l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit.
3-46
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
2
MUX/DEMUX unit (for SDH microwave signal processing)
l Sets higher order path overheads. l Sets AU pointers. l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes. l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes. l Performs scrambling.
3
MUX/DEMUX unit (for PDH microwave signal processing)
l Demaps TU-12s from the VC-4 signals.
MODEM unit
l Performs FEC coding.
l Sets the microwave frame overheads in PDH radio mode.
l Performs digital modulation. 4
IF processing unit
l Performs D/A conversion. l Performs analog modulation.
5
SMODEM unit
Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the system control and communication unit.
6
Combiner interface unit
Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the combined signals to the IF cable.
Control Signal Processing The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit The power supply unit performs the following functions: l
Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion.
l
Receives the +3.3 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
Clock Unit This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock signals to the other units on the board. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-47
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
3.5.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram Figure 3-21 Front panel of the IF1
I
O
PULL
IF1
WARNING -48V OUTPUT TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
STAT SRV LINK ODU RMT ACT
IF1
ODU-PWR
IF
Indicators Table 3-35 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1 Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.
SRV
LINK
ODU
On (green)
The services are normal.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the services.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services.
On (green)
The radio link is normal.
On (red)
The radio link is faulty.
On (green)
The ODU is working properly.
On (red)
l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU.
On (yellow)
3-48
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
The ODU is reporting minor alarms.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Indicator
RMT
ACT
State
Meaning
Blinks on (yellow) and off at 300 ms intervals
The antennas are not aligned.
On (yellow)
The remote equipment is reporting defects.
Off
The remote equipment is free of defects.
On (green)
l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. l In an unprotected system, the board has been activated. l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one.
Off
l In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.
Ports Table 3-36 Description of the Ports Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding Cable
IF
IF port
TNC
IF jumperb
ODU-PWRa
ODU power switch
-
-
NOTE
a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed. b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.
Labels There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance label on the front panel. The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed 70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. If surface temperature reaches this level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-49
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the IF cable is removed. The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.
3.5.5 Valid Slots The IF1 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-22 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)
Slot 11 (FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (IF1)
Slot 6 (IF1)
Slot 3 (IF1)
Slot 4 (IF1)
Slot 1 (IF1)
Slot 2 (IF1)
An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the ODU plus 20. Figure 3-23 Logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS
Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)
Slot 11 (FAN)
Slot 25 (ODU)
Slot 26 (ODU)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 21 (ODU)
Slot 22 (ODU)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (IF1)
Slot 6 (IF1)
Slot 3 (IF1)
Slot 4 (IF1)
Slot 1 (IF1)
Slot 2 (IF1)
Table 3-37 Slot allocation
3-50
Item
Description
Slot allocation priority
Slots 3 and 5 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and 2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
NOTE
Use two IF boards in paired slots to configure a 1+1 FD/SD IF protection group. Specifically, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 5, and slots 4 and 6 are paired slots respectively.
3.5.6 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IF1.
Related References A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs
3.5.7 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Radio Work Modes Table 3-38 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (IF1 board)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Service Capacity
Modulation Mode
Channel Spacing (MHz)
4xE1
QPSK
7
4xE1
16QAM
3.5
8xE1
QPSK
14 (13.75)
8xE1
16QAM
7
16xE1
QPSK
28 (27.5)
16xE1
16QAM
14 (13.75)
22xE1
32QAM
14 (13.75)
26xE1
64QAM
14 (13.75)
35xE1
16QAM
28 (27.5)
44xE1
32QAM
28 (27.5)
53xE1
64QAM
28 (27.5)
STM-1
128QAM
28 (27.5)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-51
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards NOTE
l The channel spacings 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, and 55 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band. l The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the product. The channel spacings larger than the values are also supported. l The SDH/PDH radio link of the OptiX RTN 950 supports all microwave modulation mode. If the SDH/ PDH radio link supports the 4xE1/16QAM microwave modulation mode, it cannot use the high power ODU.
IF Performance Table 3-39 IF performance Item
Performance
IF signal
ODU O&M signal
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)
350
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)
140
Modulation mode
ASK
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)
5.5
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)
10
Interface impedance (ohm)
50
Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem Table 3-40 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem Item
Performance
Encoding mode
l Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH microwave signals l Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding for SDH microwave signals
Adaptive timedomain equalizer for baseband signals
3-52
Supported
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Mechanical Behavior Table 3-41 Mechanical behavior Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.72 kg
Power Consumption Power consumption: < 12 W
3.6 IFU2 The IFU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode. The IFU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.6.1 Version Description The functional version of the IFU2 is SL91. 3.6.2 Functions and Features The IFU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. 3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFU2. 3.6.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel. 3.6.5 Valid Slots The IFU2 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. 3.6.6 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2. 3.6.7 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
3.6.1 Version Description The functional version of the IFU2 is SL91.
3.6.2 Functions and Features The IFU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-53
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-42 lists the functions and features that the IFU2 supports. The IFU2 needs to work with the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions. Table 3-42 Functions and features that the IFU2 supports Function and Feature
IFU2 l Receives and transmits one IF signal.
Basic functions
l Provides management channels to the ODU. l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. Radio type
Integrated IP radio NOTE The Integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio and the Packet radio.
Service categories
Native E1 + Ethernet NOTE Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packet services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.
AM
Supported
E1 priority
Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode with native TDM services being E1 services
Radio work mode
See Technical Specifications of the IFU2.
Protection
License
Clock at the physical layer
1+1 HSB/FD/ SD protection
Supported
N+1 protection
Supported
SNCP for TDM services
Supported
Air interface capacity license
Supported
AM license
Supported
Clock source
Clock at the air interface
Clock protection
Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
DCN
Inband DCN
Supported. The DCN bandwidth is configurable.
Outband DCN Ethernet service functions
3-54
Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC bytes. See Table 3-43.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Function and Feature MPLS functions
See the description of MPLS/PWE3 functions provided in the section for the system control, switching, and timing board.
PWE3 functions OM
IFU2
Loopback
Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops and outloops at IF ports l Inloops and outloops at composite ports l Inloops at the MAC layer of IF_ETH ports NOTE An IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port on the IF board operating in Integrated IP radio mode and is used to receive or transmit Ethernet services transmitted in Integrated IP radio mode.
Cold reset and warm reset
Supported
In-service FPGA loading
Supported
PRBS BER test at IF ports
Supported
Board manufacturing information query
Supported
Board temperature detection
Supported
Board power detection
Supported
Table 3-43 Ethernet service functions that the IFU2 supports Function and Feature Ethernet services
E-Line services
IFU2 Supports the following types of E-Line services: l E-Line services based on ports l E-Line services based on port+VLAN l E-Line services carried by QinQ links l E-Line services carried by PWs
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-55
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Function and Feature E-LAN services
IFU2 Supports the following types of E-LAN services: l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
ERPS
Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344.
OAM
Supports the IEEE 802.1ag OAM and IEEE 802.3ah OAM.
LAG
Supported
Spanning tree protocol
Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.
QoS
See the description of QoS functions provided in the section for the system control, switching, and timing board.
RMON
Supported
3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFU2.
3-56
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Functional Block Diagram Figure 3-24 Functional block diagram of the IFU2 Backplane SMODEM unit
HSM signal bus Paired board
ODU control signal
MODEM unit
Overhead bus
Logic processing unit
Microwave frame signal
MUX/DEMUX unit
IF processing unit
Combiner interface unit
IF
Service bus
Ethernet processing unit
Cross-connect unit System control and communication unit
GE bus
Control bus
Packet switching unit
System control and communication unit Logic control unit
-48 V power supplied to the ODU +3.3 V power supplied to the other units on the board
Power supply unit
+3.3 V power supplied to the monitoring circuit Clock signal provided to the other units on the board
-48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V
Clock unit
System clock signal
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction Table 3-44 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFU2 Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Combiner interface unit
Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals and microwave service signals.
2
SMODEM unit
l Demodulates ODU control signals. l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system control and communication unit.
3
IF processing unit
l Filters signals. l Performs A/D conversion.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-57
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
4
MODEM unit
l Performs digital demodulation. l Performs time domain adaptive equalization. l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific alarms.
5
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Detects microwave frame headers in Integrated IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned microwave messages in Integrated IP radio mode and reports the changes to the system control and communication unit over the control bus. l Extracts auxiliary channel bytes including orderwire bytes, F1 and SERIAL bytes, SSM bytes, and DCC bytes in microwave frames and transmits the overhead signals to the logic processing unit. l Maps E1 service signals in Integrated IP radio mode to the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit. l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave frams and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.
6
Ethernet processing unit
l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/ DEMUX unit. l Sends the processed signals to the main and standby packet switching units.
7
Logic processing unit
l Processes clock signals. l Transmits the overhead signals to the system control and communication unit. l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the main and standby cross-connect units.
NOTE
In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent processing.
3-58
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction Table 3-45 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFU2 Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Logic processing unit
l Processes clock signals. l Processes overhead signals. l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit.
2
3
Ethernet processing unit
l Receives GE signal from the packet switching unit.
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals.
l Processes GE signals.
l Sets the microwave frame overheads in Integrated IP radio mode. l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, and microwave frame overheads to form microwave frames. 5
MODEM unit
l Performs FEC coding. l Performs digital modulation.
6
IF processing unit
l Performs D/A conversion. l Performs analog modulation. l Filters signals. l Amplifies signals.
7
SMODEM unit
Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the system control and communication unit.
8
Combiner interface unit
Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the combined signals to the IF cable.
Control Signal Processing The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit The power supply unit performs the following functions: Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-59
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
l
Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion.
l
Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the IFU2 after performing DC-DC conversion.
Clock Unit This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock signals to the other units on the board.
3.6.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
WARNING -48V OUTPUT TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
I
O
PULL
IFU2
ODU-PWR
IF
STAT SRV LINK ODU RMT ACT
IFU2
Figure 3-25 Front panel of the IFU2
Indicators Table 3-46 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2 Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.
SRV
LINK
ODU 3-60
On (green)
The services are normal.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the services.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services.
On (green)
The radio link is normal.
On (red)
The radio link is faulty.
On (green)
The ODU is working properly.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Indicator
3 Boards
State
Meaning
On (red)
l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU.
RMT
ACT
On (yellow)
The ODU is reporting minor alarms.
Blinks on (yellow) and off at 300 ms intervals
The antennas are not aligned.
On (yellow)
The remote equipment is reporting defects.
Off
The remote equipment is free of defects.
On (green)
l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. l In an unprotected system, the board has been activated.
Off
l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one. l In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.
Ports Table 3-47 Description of the Ports Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding Cable
IF
IF port
TNC
IF jumperb
ODU-PWRa
ODU power switch
-
-
NOTE
a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed. b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.
Labels There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance label on the front panel.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-61
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed 70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. If surface temperature reaches this level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board. The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the IF cable is removed. The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.
3.6.5 Valid Slots The IFU2 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-26 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)
Slot 11 (FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (IFU2)
Slot 6 (IFU2)
Slot 3 (IFU2)
Slot 4 (IFU2)
Slot 1 (IFU2)
Slot 2 (IFU2)
An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the ODU plus 20. Figure 3-27 Logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS
Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)
Slot 11 (FAN)
Slot 25 (ODU)
Slot 26 (ODU)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 21 (ODU)
Slot 22 (ODU)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (IFU2)
Slot 6 (IFU2)
Slot 3 (IFU2)
Slot 4 (IFU2)
Slot 1 (IFU2)
Slot 2 (IFU2)
Table 3-48 Slot allocation
3-62
Item
Description
Slot allocation priority
Slots 3 and 5 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and 2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
NOTE
Use two IF boards in paired slots to configure a 1+1 FD/SD IF protection group. Specifically, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 5, and slots 4 and 6 are paired slots respectively.
3.6.6 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2.
Related References A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes
3.6.7 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Radio Work Modes Table 3-49 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFU2 board)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Channel Spacing (MHz)
Modulation Mode
Maximum Number of E1s in Hybrid Microwave
7
QPSK
5
9 to 12
7
16QAM
10
20 to 24
7
32QAM
12
24 to 29
7
64QAM
15
31 to 37
7
128QAM
18
37 to 44
7
256QAM
21
43 to 51
14 (13.75)
QPSK
10
20 to 23
14 (13.75)
16QAM
20
41 to 48
14 (13.75)
32QAM
24
50 to 59
14 (13.75)
64QAM
31
65 to 76
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)
3-63
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Channel Spacing (MHz)
Modulation Mode
Maximum Number of E1s in Hybrid Microwave
Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)
14 (13.75)
128QAM
37
77 to 90
14 (13.75)
256QAM
43
90 to 104
28 (27.5)
QPSK
20
41 to 48
28 (27.5)
16QAM
40
82 to 97
28 (27.5)
32QAM
52
108 to 125
28 (27.5)
64QAM
64
130 to 150
28 (27.5)
128QAM
75
160 to 180
28 (27.5)
256QAM
75
180 to 210
56 (55)
QPSK
40
82 to 97
56 (55)
16QAM
75
165 to 190
56 (55)
32QAM
75
208 to 240
56 (55)
64QAM
75
260 to 310
56 (55)
128QAM
75
310 to 360
56 (55)
256QAM
75
360 to 420
NOTE
l The channel spacings 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, and 55 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band. l The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the product. The channel spacings larger than the values are also supported. l The throughput specifications in these tables are values for untagged Ethernet frames. l E1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth remaining after the E1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided for Ethernet services.
IF Performance Table 3-50 IF performance Item IF signal
3-64
Performance Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)
350
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)
140
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Item
Performance
ODU O&M signal
Modulation mode
ASK
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)
5.5
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)
10
Interface impedance (ohm)
50
Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem Table 3-51 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem Item
Performance
Encoding mode
LDPC encoding
Adaptive timedomain equalizer for baseband signals
Supported
Mechanical Behavior Table 3-52 Mechanical behavior Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.79 kg
Power Consumption Power consumption: < 23 W
3.7 IFX2 The IFX2 is a universal IF board that supports the XPIC function in Integrated IP radio mode. The IFX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.7.1 Version Description The functional version of the IFX2 is SL91. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-65
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
3.7.2 Functions and Features The IFX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. The IFX2 supports cross-polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) processing for IF signals. 3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFX2. 3.7.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel. 3.7.5 Valid Slots The IFX2 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. 3.7.6 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFX2. 3.7.7 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
3.7.1 Version Description The functional version of the IFX2 is SL91.
3.7.2 Functions and Features The IFX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. The IFX2 supports cross-polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) processing for IF signals. Table 3-53 lists the functions and features that the IFX2 supports. Table 3-53 Functions and features that the IFX2 supports Function and Feature
IFX2
Basic functions
l Receives and transmits one IF signal. l Provides management channels to the ODU. l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
Radio type
Integrated IP radio NOTE Integrated IP radio is compatible with Hybrid radio and Packet radio.
Service categories
Native E1 + Ethernet NOTE Ethernet services can be Native Ethernet services or packet services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.
AM 3-66
Supported Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Function and Feature
IFX2
E1 priority
Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode, in which native TDM services are E1 services
XPIC
Supported
Radio work mode
See Technical Specifications of the IFX2.
Protection
License
Clock at the physical layer
1+1 HSB/FD/ SD protection
Supported
N+1 protection
Supported
SNCP for TDM services
Supported
Air interface capacity license
Supported
AM license
Supported
Clock source
Clock at an air interface
Clock protection
Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
DCN
Inband DCN
Supported. The DCN bandwidth is configurable.
Outband DCN
Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC bytes.
Ethernet service features
See Table 3-54.
MPLS functions
See the description of the MPLS/PWE3 functions that the system control, switching, and timing board supports.
PWE3 functions OM
Loopback
Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops and outloops at IF ports l Inloops and outloops at multiplexing ports l Inloops at the MAC layer of IF_ETH ports NOTE An IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port on the IF board operating in Integrated IP radio mode and is used to receive or transmit Ethernet services transmitted in Integrated IP radio mode.
Cold reset and warm reset
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Supported
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-67
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Function and Feature
IFX2
In-service FPGA loading
Supported
PRBS BER test at IF ports
Supported
Board manufacturing information query
Supported
Board temperature detection
Supported
Board voltage detection
Supported
Table 3-54 Ethernet service functions that the IFX2 supports Function and Feature
IFX2
Ethernet services
Supports the following types of E-Line services:
E-Line services
l E-Line services based on ports l E-Line services based on port+VLAN l E-Line services carried by QinQ links l E-Line services carried by PWs E-LAN services
Supports the following types of E-LAN services: l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
3-68
ERPS
Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344.
ETH-OAM
Supports IEEE 802.1ag OAM and IEEE 802.3ah OAM.
LAG
Supported
Spanning tree protocol
Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.
QoS
See the description of the QoS functions that the system control, switching, and timing board supports.
RMON
Supported
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFX2.
Functional Block Diagram Figure 3-28 Functional block diagram of the IFX2 Backplane SMODEM unit
HSM signal bus Paired board
Microwave MODEM unit frame signal
MUX/DEMUX unit
IF processing unit
Paired XPIC board
Combiner interface unit
IF
Service bus
Overhead bus
Logic processing unit
ODU control signal
Ethernet processing unit
GE bus
Cross-connect unit System control and communication unit
Packet switching unit
XPIC signal Control bus
System control and communication unit Logic control unit
-48 V power supplied to the ODU +3.3 V power supplied to the other units on the board
Power supply unit
+3.3 V power supplied to the monitoring circuit Clock signal provided to the other units on the board
-48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V
Clock unit
System clock signal
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction Table 3-55 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFX2 Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Combiner interface unit
Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals and microwave service signals.
2
SMODEM unit
l Demodulates ODU control signals. l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system control and communication unit.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-69
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
3
IF processing unit
l Filters the received signals and splits the signals to two channels of signals. – Performs A/D conversion for one channel of filtered signals and transmits the converted signals to the MODEM unit. – Outputs the other channel of filtered signals as the XPIC signals. l Performs A/D conversion for XPIC signals transmitted from the paired IFX2 and transmits the converted signals to the MODEM unit.
4
MODEM unit
l Performs digital demodulation by using XPIC IF signals transmitted from the paired IFX2 as reference signals. l Performs XPIC operations for IF signals. l Performs time domain adaptive equalization. l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific alarms.
5
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Detects microwave frame headers in Integrated IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode and generates specific alarms. l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned microwave messages in Integrated IP radio mode and reports the changes to the system control and communication unit over the control bus. l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and SSM bytes in microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode and transmits the overhead signal to the logic processing unit. l Maps E1 service signals in Integrated IP radio mode to the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit. l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.
6
Ethernet processing unit
l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/ DEMUX unit. l Sends the processed signals to the main and standby packet switching units.
3-70
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
7
Logic processing unit
l Processes clock signals. l Transmits the overhead signals to the system control and communication unit. l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the main and standby cross-connect units.
NOTE
In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent processing.
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction Table 3-56 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFX2 Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Logic processing unit
l Processes clock signals. l Processes overhead signals. l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit.
2
3
Ethernet processing unit
l Receives GE signals from the packet switching unit.
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals.
l Processes GE signals.
l Sets the microwave frame overheads in Integrated IP radio mode. l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals and microwave frame overheads to form microwave frames. 5
MODEM unit
l Performs FEC coding. l Performs digital modulation.
6
IF processing unit
l Performs D/A conversion. l Performs analog modulation. l Filters signals. l Amplifies signals.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
7
SMODEM unit
Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the system control and communication unit.
8
Combiner interface unit
Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the combined signals to the IF cable.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-71
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Control Signal Processing The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit The power supply unit performs the following functions: l
Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion.
l
Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the IFX2 after performing DC-DC conversion.
Clock Unit This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock signals to the other units on the board.
3.7.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
WARNING -48V OUTPUT TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
PULL
I X-IN
X-OUT
O
IFX2
ODU-PWR
IF
XPIC STAT SRV LINK ODU RMT ACT
IFX2
Figure 3-29 Front panel of the IFX2
Indicators Table 3-57 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2
3-72
Indicator
State
Meaning
XPIC
On (green)
The XPIC input signal is normal.
On (red)
The XPIC input signal is lost.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Indicator
STAT
3 Boards
State
Meaning
Off
The XPIC function is disabled.
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.
SRV
LINK
ODU
On (green)
The services are normal.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the services.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services.
On (green)
The radio link is normal.
On (red)
The radio link is faulty.
On (green)
The ODU is working properly.
On (red)
l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU.
RMT
ACT
On (yellow)
The ODU is reporting minor alarms.
Blinks on (yellow) and off at 300 ms intervals
The antennas are not aligned.
On (yellow)
The remote equipment is reporting defects.
Off
The remote equipment is free of defects.
On (green)
l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. l In an unprotected system, the board has been activated.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-73
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
Off
l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one. l In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.
Ports Table 3-58 Description of the ports Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding Cable
IF
IF port
TNC
IF jumperb
ODU-PWRa
ODU power switch
-
-
X-IN
XPIC signal input port
SMA
XPIC cable
X-OUT
XPIC signal output port
SMA
NOTE
a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed. b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.
Labels There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance label on the front panel. The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed 70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. If surface temperature reaches this level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board. The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the IF cable is removed. The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.
3.7.5 Valid Slots The IFX2 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. 3-74
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Figure 3-30 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)
Slot 11 (FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (IFX2)
Slot 6 (IFX2)
Slot 3 (IFX2)
Slot 4 (IFX2)
Slot 1 (IFX2)
Slot 2 (IFX2)
An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the ODU plus 20. Figure 3-31 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2
Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)
Slot 11 (FAN)
Slot 25 (ODU)
Slot 26 (ODU)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 21 (ODU)
Slot 22 (ODU)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (IFX2)
Slot 6 (IFX2)
Slot 3 (IFX2)
Slot 4 (IFX2)
Slot 1 (IFX2)
Slot 2 (IFX2)
Table 3-59 Slot allocation Item
Description
Slot allocation priority
Slots 3 and 5 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and 2
NOTE
Use two IF boards in paired slots to configure a 1+1 FD/SD IF protection group. Specifically, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 5, and slots 4 and 6 are paired slots respectively. NOTE
One IFX2 pair must be installed on the same row or adjacently in the same column.
3.7.6 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFX2.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-75
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Related References A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes
3.7.7 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Radio Work Modes Table 3-60 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFX2 board)
3-76
Channel Spacing (MHz)
Modulation Mode
Maximum Number of E1s in Hybrid Microwave
28 (27.5)
QPSK
19
41 to 48
28 (27.5)
16QAM
40
84 to 97
28 (27.5)
32QAM
49
103 to 120
28 (27.5)
64QAM
63
130 to 150
28 (27.5)
128QAM
75
160 to 180
28 (27.5)
256QAM
75
180 to 210
56 (55)
QPSK
39
83 to 97
56 (55)
16QAM
75
165 to 190
56 (55)
32QAM
75
210 to 245
56 (55)
64QAM
75
260 to 305
56 (55)
128QAM
75
310 to 360
56 (55)
256QAM
75
360 to 410
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
NOTE
l The channel spacings 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, and 55 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band. l The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the product. The channel spacings larger than the values are also supported. l The throughput specifications in these tables are values for untagged Ethernet frames. l E1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth remaining after the E1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided for Ethernet services.
IF Performance Table 3-61 IF performance Item
Performance
IF signal
ODU O&M signal
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)
350
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)
140
Modulation mode
ASK
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)
5.5
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)
10
Interface impedance (ohm)
50
Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem Table 3-62 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Item
Performance
Encoding mode
LDPC encoding
Adaptive timedomain equalizer for baseband signals
Supported
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-77
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Mechanical Behavior Table 3-63 Mechanical behavior Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.80 kg
Power Consumption Power consumption: < 33 W
3.8 ISU2 The ISU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode at the same time. The ISU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.8.1 Version Description The functional version of the ISU2 is SL91. 3.8.2 Functions and Features The ISU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. 3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISU2. 3.8.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel. 3.8.5 Valid Slots The ISU2 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. 3.8.6 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISU2. 3.8.7 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
3.8.1 Version Description The functional version of the ISU2 is SL91.
3.8.2 Functions and Features The ISU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. 3-78
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-64 lists the functions and features that the ISU2 supports. The ISU2 needs to work with the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions. Table 3-64 Functions and features that the ISU2 supports Function and Feature
ISU2
Basic functions
l Receives and transmits one IF signal. l Provides management channels to the ODU. l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. l Integrated IP radio
Radio type
l SDH radio NOTE The Integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio and the Packet radio.
Service categories in Integrated IP radio mode
l Native E1 + Ethernet l Native STM-1 + Ethernet NOTE Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packet services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.
Service categories in SDH radio mode
l STM-1
AM
Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode
High-efficiency encapsulation
Supports high-efficiency encapsulation for L2 Ethernet packets and L3 IP packets.
E1 priority
Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode with native TDM services being E1 services
Radio work mode
See Technical Specifications of the ISU2.
Link-level protection
1+1 HSB/FD/ SD protection
Supported
N+1 protection
Supported
LAG protection at air interfaces
Supported
Service protection
SNCP
Ethernet service functions
See Table 3-65.
MPLS functions
See the description of MPLS/PWE3 functions provided in the section for the system control, switching, and timing board.
PWE3 functions License
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
l 2xSTM-1
Air interface capacity license
Supported
AM license
Supported
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-79
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Function and Feature
ISU2
Clock at the physical layer
Clock source
Clock at the air interface
Clock protection
Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
DCN
Inband DCN
Supported
Outband DCN
l Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC bytes for each channel in Integrated IP radio mode. l Supports one DCC that is composed of D1-D3 bytes, D4-D12 bytes, or D1-D12 bytes, for each channel in SDH radio mode.
OM
Loopback
Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops and outloops at IF ports l Inloops and outloops at composite ports
Cold reset and warm reset
Supported
In-service FPGA loading
Supported
PRBS BER test at IF ports
Supported
Board manufacturing information query
Supported
Board temperature detection
Supported
Board power detection
Supported
Table 3-65 Ethernet service functions that the ISU2 supports Function and Feature
ISU2
Ethernet services
Supports the following types of E-Line services:
E-Line services
l E-Line services based on ports l E-Line services based on port+VLAN l E-Line services carried by QinQ links l E-Line services carried by PWs
3-80
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Function and Feature E-LAN services
3 Boards
ISU2 Supports the following types of E-LAN services: l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
ERPS
Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344.
OAM
Supports the IEEE 802.1ag OAM and IEEE 802.3ah OAM.
LAG
Supported
Spanning tree protocol
Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.
QoS
See the description of QoS functions provided in the section for the system control, switching, and timing board.
RMON
Supported
3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISU2. NOTE
The ISU2 adopts the same principle to process signals transmitted/received in Integrated IP radio mode and signals transmitted/received in SDH radio mode. The difference is with regard to the microwave frame structure and processed service categories.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-81
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Functional Block Diagram Figure 3-32 Functional block diagram of the ISU2 Backplane SMODEM unit
HSM signal bus
Microwave frame signal
Overhead bus
Ethernet processing unit
MUX/DEMUX unit
MODEM unit
IF processing unit
Combiner interface unit
IF
Service bus
Logic processing unit
ODU control signal
Paired board
Cross-connect unit System control and communication unit
GE bus
Control bus
Packet switching unit
System control and communication unit Logic control unit
-48 V power supplied to the ODU +3.3 V power supplied to the other units on the board
-48 V1
Power supply unit
-48 V2 +3.3 V
+3.3 V power supplied to the monitoring circuit Clock signal provided to the other units on the board
Clock unit
System clock signal
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction Table 3-66 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISU2 Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Combiner interface unit
Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals and microwave service signals.
2
SMODEM unit
l Demodulates ODU control signals. l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system control and communication unit.
3
IF processing unit
l Filters signals. l Performs A/D conversion.
4
MODEM unit
l Performs digital demodulation. l Performs time domain adaptive equalization. l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific alarms.
3-82
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
5
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Detects microwave frame headers and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks link IDs in microwave frames and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned microwave messages and reports the changes to the system control and communication unit over the control bus. l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in microwave frames and transmits to the logic processing unit. l Maps E1 service signals to the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services. l Demaps VC-4s from STM-1 service signals and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1 services. l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave frams and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.
6
Ethernet processing unit
l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/ DEMUX unit. l Sends the processed signals to the main and standby packet switching units.
7
Logic processing unit
l Processes clock signals. l Transmits the overhead signals to the system control and communication unit. l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the main and standby cross-connect units.
NOTE
In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent processing.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-83
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction Table 3-67 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISU2 Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Logic processing unit
l Processes clock signals. l Processes overhead signals. l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit.
2
3
Ethernet processing unit
l Receives GE signals from the packet switching unit.
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals that are from the logic processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Processes GE signals.
l Adds overheads to the VC-4 signals that are from the logic processing unit to form STM-1 signals, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1 services. l Sets microwave frame overheads. l Combines the E1/STM-1 signals, Ethernet signals, and microwave frame overheads to form microwave frames. 4
MODEM unit
l Performs FEC coding. l Performs digital modulation.
6
IF processing unit
l Performs D/A conversion. l Performs analog modulation. l Filters signals. l Amplifies signals.
7
SMODEM unit
Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the system control and communication unit.
8
Combiner interface unit
Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the combined signals to the IF cable.
Control Signal Processing The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit. 3-84
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Power Supply Unit The power supply unit performs the following functions: l
Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion.
l
Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the ISU2 after performing DC-DC conversion.
Clock Unit This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock signals to the other units on the board.
3.8.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
WARNING -48V OUTPUT TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
PULL
I
O
ISU2
ODU-PWR
IF
STAT SRV LINK ODU RMT ACT
ISU2
Figure 3-33 Front panel of the ISU2
Indicators Table 3-68 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2 Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.
SRV
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
On (green)
The services are normal.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the services.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-85
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Indicator
LINK
ODU
State
Meaning
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services.
On (green)
The radio link is normal.
On (red)
The radio link is faulty.
On (green)
The ODU is working properly.
On (red)
l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU.
RMT
ACT
On (yellow)
The ODU is reporting minor alarms.
Blinks on (yellow) and off at 300 ms intervals
The antennas are not aligned.
On (yellow)
The remote equipment is reporting defects.
Off
The remote equipment is free of defects.
On (green)
l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. l In an unprotected system, the board has been activated. l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one.
Off
l In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.
Ports Table 3-69 Description of the Ports
3-86
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding Cable
IF
IF port
TNC
IF jumperb
ODU-PWRa
ODU power switch
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
NOTE
a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed. b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.
Labels There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance label on the front panel. The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed 70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. If surface temperature reaches this level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board. The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the IF cable is removed. The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.
3.8.5 Valid Slots The ISU2 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-34 Slots for the ISU2 in the IDU chassis Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)
Slot 11 (FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (ISU2)
Slot 6 (ISU2)
Slot 3 (ISU2)
Slot 4 (ISU2)
Slot 1 (ISU2)
Slot 2 (ISU2)
An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the ODU plus 20.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-87
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Figure 3-35 Logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS
Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)
Slot 11 (FAN)
Slot 25 (ODU)
Slot 26 (ODU)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 21 (ODU)
Slot 22 (ODU)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (ISU2)
Slot 6 (ISU2)
Slot 3 (ISU2)
Slot 4 (ISU2)
Slot 1 (ISU2)
Slot 2 (ISU2)
Table 3-70 Slot allocation Item
Description
Slot allocation priority
Slots 3 and 5 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and 2
NOTE
Use two IF boards in paired slots to configure a 1+1 FD/SD IF protection group. Specifically, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 5, and slots 4 and 6 are paired slots respectively.
3.8.6 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISU2.
Related References A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes
3.8.7 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption. 3-88
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Radio Work Modes Table 3-71 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board) Service Capacity
Modulation Mode
Channel Spacing (MHz)
STM-1
128QAM
28 (27.5)
2xSTM-1
128QAM
56 (55)
Table 3-72 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service) Channel Spacing (MHz)
Modulation Mode
Maximum Number of E1s in Hybrid Microwave
7
QPSK
7
Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) Not Accelerated
With L2 Bandwidth Accelerated
With L2+L3 Bandwidth Accelerated (IPv4)
5
10 to 13
10 to 15
10 to 22
16QAM
10
20 to 26
20 to 30
20 to 44
7
32QAM
12
25 to 32
25 to 36
25 to 54
7
64QAM
15
31 to 40
31 to 47
31 to 67
7
128QAM
18
37 to 47
37 to 56
37 to 80
7
256QAM
20
41 to 53
41 to 62
41 to 90
14 (13.75)
QPSK
10
20 to 26
20 to 31
20 to 44
14 (13.75)
16QAM
20
41 to 52
41 to 61
41 to 89
14 (13.75)
32QAM
24
51 to 65
51 to 77
51 to 110
14 (13.75)
64QAM
31
65 to 83
65 to 96
65 to 140
14 (13.75)
128QAM
37
76 to 97
76 to 113
76 to 165
14 (13.75)
256QAM
42
87 to 111
87 to 131
87 to 189
28 (27.5)
QPSK
20
41 to 52
41 to 62
41 to 89
28 (27.5)
16QAM
40
82 to 105
82 to 124
82 to 178
28 (27.5)
32QAM
52
107 to 136
107 to 161
107 to 230
28 (27.5)
64QAM
64
131 to 168
131 to 198
131 to 283
28 (27.5)
128QAM
75
155 to 198
155 to 233
155 to 333
28 (27.5)
256QAM
75
181 to 230
181 to 272
181 to 388
40
QPSK
27
56 to 72
56 to 84
56 to 122
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-89
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Channel Spacing (MHz)
Modulation Mode
Maximum Number of E1s in Hybrid Microwave
40
16QAM
40
Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) Not Accelerated
With L2 Bandwidth Accelerated
With L2+L3 Bandwidth Accelerated (IPv4)
55
114 to 145
114 to 172
114 to 247
32QAM
71
147 to 187
147 to 221
147 to 318
40
64QAM
75
181 to 230
181 to 272
181 to 388
40
128QAM
75
215 to 272
215 to 323
215 to 456
40
256QAM
75
249 to 318
249 to 375
249 to 538
56 (55)
QPSK
40
82 to 105
82 to 124
82 to 178
56 (55)
16QAM
75
166 to 212
166 to 250
165 to 356
56 (55)
32QAM
75
206 to 262
206 to 308
206 to 437
56 (55)
64QAM
75
262 to 333
262 to 388
262 to 567
56 (55)
128QAM
75
309 to 396
309 to 466
309 to 656
56 (55)
256QAM
75
360 to 456
360 to 538
360 to 777
NOTE
The ISX2 board supports channel spacings of 7 Mbit/s and 14 Mbit/s only when the non-XPIC mode is adopted.
Table 3-73 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service) Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) Not Accelerated
With L2 Bandwidth Accelerated
With L2+L3 Bandwidth Accelerated (IPv4)
Channel Spacing (MHz)
Modulation Mode
Number of STM-1 Services in Hybrid Microwave
28 (27.5)
128QAM
1
155 to 198
155 to 233
155 to 333
28 (27.5)
256QAM
1
181 to 230
181 to 272
181 to 388
40
64QAM
1
181 to 230
181 to 272
181 to 388
40
128QAM
1
215 to 272
215 to 323
215 to 456
40
256QAM
1
249 to 318
249 to 375
249 to 538
56 (55)
16QAM
1
166 to 212
166 to 250
165 to 356
56 (55)
32QAM
1
206 to 262
206 to 308
206 to 437
3-90
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) Not Accelerated
With L2 Bandwidth Accelerated
With L2+L3 Bandwidth Accelerated (IPv4)
Channel Spacing (MHz)
Modulation Mode
Number of STM-1 Services in Hybrid Microwave
56 (55)
64QAM
1
262 to 333
262 to 388
262 to 567
56 (55)
128QAM
1
309 to 396
309 to 466
309 to 656
56 (55)
256QAM
1
360 to 456
360 to 538
360 to 777
NOTE
l The channel spacings 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, and 55 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band. l The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the product. The channel spacings larger than the values are also supported. l The throughput specifications in these tables are values for untagged Ethernet frames. l E1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth remaining after the E1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided for Ethernet services.
IF Performance Table 3-74 IF performance Item
Performance
IF signal
ODU O&M signal
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)
350
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)
140
Modulation mode
ASK
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)
5.5
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)
10
Interface impedance (ohm)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
50
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-91
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem Table 3-75 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem Item
Performance
Encoding mode
LDPC encoding
Adaptive timedomain equalizer for baseband signals
Supported
Mechanical Behavior Table 3-76 Mechanical behavior Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.60 kg
Power Consumption Power consumption: < 22 W
3.9 ISX2 The ISX2 is a universal XPIC IF board and provides the XPIC function for signals transmitted/ received in Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode. The ISX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.9.1 Version Description The functional version of the ISX2 is SL91. 3.9.2 Functions and Features The ISX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. In addition, the ISX2 provides the crosspolarization interference cancellation (XPIC) function for IF signals by transmitting/receiving XPIC reference signals. 3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISX2. 3.9.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel. 3.9.5 Valid Slots 3-92
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
The ISX2 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. 3.9.6 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISX2. 3.9.7 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
3.9.1 Version Description The functional version of the ISX2 is SL91.
3.9.2 Functions and Features The ISX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. In addition, the ISX2 provides the crosspolarization interference cancellation (XPIC) function for IF signals by transmitting/receiving XPIC reference signals. Table 3-77 lists the functions and features that the ISX2 supports. The ISX2 needs to work with the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions and packet service functions. Table 3-77 Functions and features that the ISX2 supports Function and Feature
ISX2
Basic functions
l Receives and transmits one IF signal. l Provides management channels to the ODU. l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. l Integrated IP radio
Radio type
l SDH radio NOTE The integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio and the Packet radio.
Service categories in Integrated IP radio mode
l Native E1 + Ethernet l Native STM-1 + Ethernet NOTE Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packet services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Service categories in SDH radio mode
l STM-1
AM
Supported only in integrated IP radio mode
High-efficiency encapsulation
Supports high-efficiency encapsulation for L2 Ethernet packets and L3 IP packets.
E1 priority
Supported only in integrated IP radio mode with native TDM services being E1 services
l 2xSTM-1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-93
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Function and Feature
ISX2
XPIC
Supported
Radio work mode
See Technical Specifications of the ISX2.
Link-level protection
Native TDM services
1+1 HSB/FD/ SD protection
Supported
N+1 protection
Supported
LAG protection at air interfaces
Supported
Service categories
E1 services and STM-1 services
Service protection
SNCP
Ethernet service functions
See Table 3-78.
MPLS functions
See the description of MPLS/PWE3 functions provided in the section for the system control, switching, and timing board.
PWE3 functions License
Clock at the physical layer
Air interface capacity license
Supported
AM license
Supported
Clock source
Clock at the air interface
Clock protection
Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
DCN
Inband DCN
Supported
Outband DCN
l Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC bytes for each channel in Integrated IP radio mode. l Supports one DCC that is composed of D1-D3 bytes, D4-D12 bytes, or D1-D12 bytes, for each channel in SDH radio mode.
OM
Loopback
Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops and outloops at IF ports l Inloops and outloops at composite ports
3-94
Cold reset and warm reset
Supported
In-service FPGA loading
Supported
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Function and Feature
3 Boards
ISX2
PRBS BER test at IF ports
Supported
Board manufacturing information query
Supported
Board temperature detection
Supported
Board power detection
Supported
Table 3-78 Ethernet service functions that the ISX2 supports Function and Feature
ISX2
Ethernet services
Supports the following types of E-Line services:
E-Line services
l E-Line services based on ports l E-Line services based on port+VLAN l E-Line services carried by QinQ links l E-Line services carried by PWs E-LAN services
Supports the following types of E-LAN services: l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
ERPS
Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344.
OAM
Supports the IEEE 802.1ag OAM and IEEE 802.3ah OAM.
LAG
Supported
Spanning tree protocol
Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.
QoS
See the description of QoS functions provided in the section for the system control, switching, and timing board.
RMON
Supported
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-95
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISX2. NOTE
The ISX2 adopts the same principle to process signals transmitted/received in Integrated IP radio mode and signals transmitted/received in SDH radio mode. The difference is with regard to the microwave frame structure and processed service types.
Functional Block Diagram Figure 3-36 Functional block diagram of the ISX2 Backplane SMODEM unit
HSM signal bus Paired board
Microwave MODEM unit frame signal
MUX/DEMUX unit
IF processing unit
Paired XPIC board
Combiner interface unit
IF
Service bus
Overhead bus
Logic processing unit
ODU control signal
Ethernet processing unit
Cross-connect unit System control and communication unit
GE bus
Packet switching unit
XPIC signal Control bus
System control and communication unit Logic control unit
-48 V power supplied to the ODU +3.3 V power supplied to the other units on the board
Power supply unit
+3.3 V power supplied to the monitoring circuit Clock signal provided to the other units on the board
-48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V
Clock unit
System clock signal
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction Table 3-79 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISX2
3-96
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Combiner interface unit
Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals and microwave service signals.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
2
SMODEM unit
l Demodulates ODU control signals. l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system control and communication unit.
3
IF processing unit
l Filters the received signals and splits the signals to two channels of signals. – Performs A/D conversion for one channel of filtered signals and transmits the converted signals to the MODEM unit. – Outputs the other channel of filtered signals as the XPIC signals. l Performs A/D conversion for XPIC signals transmitted from the paired ISX2 and transmits the converted signals to the MODEM unit.
4
MODEM unit
l Performs digital demodulation by using XPIC IF signals transmitted from the paired ISX2 as reference signals. l Performs XPIC operations for IF signals. l Performs time domain adaptive equalization. l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific alarms.
5
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Detects microwave frame headers and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks link IDs in microwave frames and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned microwave messages and reports the changes to the system control and communication unit over the control bus. l Extracts auxiliary channel bytes including orderwire bytes, F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in microwave frames and transmits to the logic processing unit. l Maps E1 service signals to the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services. l Demaps VC-4s from STM-1 service signals and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1 services. l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave frams and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-97
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
6
Ethernet processing unit
l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/ DEMUX unit. l Sends the processed signals to the main and standby packet switching units.
7
Logic processing unit
l Processes clock signals. l Transmits the overhead signals to the system control and communication unit. l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the main and standby cross-connect units.
NOTE
In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent processing.
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction Table 3-80 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISX2 Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Logic processing unit
l Processes clock signals. l Processes overhead signals. l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit.
2
3
Ethernet processing unit
l Receives GE signals from the packet switching unit.
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals that are from the logic processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Processes GE signals.
l Adds overheads to the VC-4 signals that are from the logic processing unit to form STM-1 signals, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1 services. l Sets microwave frame overheads. l Combines the E1/STM-1 signals, Ethernet signals, and microwave frame overheads to form microwave frames. 4
MODEM unit
l Performs FEC coding. l Performs digital modulation.
3-98
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
6
IF processing unit
l Performs D/A conversion. l Performs analog modulation. l Filters signals. l Amplifies signals.
7
SMODEM unit
Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the system control and communication unit.
8
Combiner interface unit
Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the combined signals to the IF cable.
Control Signal Processing The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit The power supply unit performs the following functions: l
Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion.
l
Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the ISU2 after performing DC-DC conversion.
Clock Unit This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock signals to the other units on the board.
3.9.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
WARNING -48V OUTPUT TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
PULL
I X-IN
X-OUT
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
O
ISX2
ODU-PWR
IF
XPIC STAT SRV LINK ODU RMT ACT
ISX2
Figure 3-37 Front panel of the ISX2
3-99
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Indicators Table 3-81 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2 Indicator
State
Meaning
XPIC
On (green)
The XPIC input signal is normal.
On (red)
The XPIC input signal is lost.
Off
The XPIC function is disabled.
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working.
STAT
l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV
LINK
ODU
On (green)
The services are normal.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the services.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services.
On (green)
The radio link is normal.
On (red)
The radio link is faulty.
On (green)
The ODU is working properly.
On (red)
l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU.
RMT
3-100
On (yellow)
The ODU is reporting minor alarms.
Blinks on (yellow) and off at 300 ms intervals
The antennas are not aligned.
On (yellow)
The remote equipment is reporting defects.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Indicator
ACT
State
Meaning
Off
The remote equipment is free of defects.
On (green)
l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. l In an unprotected system, the board has been activated. l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one.
Off
l In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.
Ports Table 3-82 Description of the ports Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding Cable
IF
IF port
TNC
IF jumperb
ODU-PWRa
ODU power switch
-
-
X-IN
XPIC signal input port
SMA
XPIC cable
X-OUT
XPIC signal output port
SMA
NOTE
a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed. b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.
Labels There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance label on the front panel. The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed 70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. If surface temperature reaches this level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-101
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the IF cable is removed. The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.
3.9.5 Valid Slots The ISX2 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-38 Slots for the ISX2 in the IDU chassis Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)
Slot 11 (FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (ISX2)
Slot 6 (ISX2)
Slot 3 (ISX2)
Slot 4 (ISX2)
Slot 1 (ISX2)
Slot 2 (ISX2)
An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the ODU plus 20. Figure 3-39 Logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS
Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)
Slot 11 (FAN)
Slot 25 (ODU)
Slot 26 (ODU)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 21 (ODU)
Slot 22 (ODU)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (ISX2)
Slot 6 (ISX2)
Slot 3 (ISX2)
Slot 4 (ISX2)
Slot 1 (ISX2)
Slot 2 (ISX2)
Table 3-83 Slot allocation
3-102
Item
Description
Slot allocation priority
Slots 3 and 5 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and 2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
NOTE
Use two IF boards in paired slots to configure a 1+1 FD/SD IF protection group. Specifically, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 5, and slots 4 and 6 are paired slots respectively. NOTE
One ISX2 pair for implementing the XPIC function must be installed on the same row or adjacently in the same column.
3.9.6 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISX2.
Related References A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes
3.9.7 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Radio Work Modes Table 3-84 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board) Service Capacity
Modulation Mode
Channel Spacing (MHz)
STM-1
128QAM
28 (27.5)
2xSTM-1
128QAM
56 (55)
Table 3-85 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service)
Channel Spacing (MHz)
Modulation Mode
Maximum Number of E1s in Hybrid Microwave
7
QPSK
5
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) Not Accelerated
With L2 Bandwidth Accelerated
With L2+L3 Bandwidth Accelerated (IPv4)
10 to 13
10 to 15
10 to 22
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-103
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Channel Spacing (MHz)
Modulation Mode
Maximum Number of E1s in Hybrid Microwave
7
16QAM
7
Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) Not Accelerated
With L2 Bandwidth Accelerated
With L2+L3 Bandwidth Accelerated (IPv4)
10
20 to 26
20 to 30
20 to 44
32QAM
12
25 to 32
25 to 36
25 to 54
7
64QAM
15
31 to 40
31 to 47
31 to 67
7
128QAM
18
37 to 47
37 to 56
37 to 80
7
256QAM
20
41 to 53
41 to 62
41 to 90
14 (13.75)
QPSK
10
20 to 26
20 to 31
20 to 44
14 (13.75)
16QAM
20
41 to 52
41 to 61
41 to 89
14 (13.75)
32QAM
24
51 to 65
51 to 77
51 to 110
14 (13.75)
64QAM
31
65 to 83
65 to 96
65 to 140
14 (13.75)
128QAM
37
76 to 97
76 to 113
76 to 165
14 (13.75)
256QAM
42
87 to 111
87 to 131
87 to 189
28 (27.5)
QPSK
20
41 to 52
41 to 62
41 to 89
28 (27.5)
16QAM
40
82 to 105
82 to 124
82 to 178
28 (27.5)
32QAM
52
107 to 136
107 to 161
107 to 230
28 (27.5)
64QAM
64
131 to 168
131 to 198
131 to 283
28 (27.5)
128QAM
75
155 to 198
155 to 233
155 to 333
28 (27.5)
256QAM
75
181 to 230
181 to 272
181 to 388
40
QPSK
27
56 to 72
56 to 84
56 to 122
40
16QAM
55
114 to 145
114 to 172
114 to 247
40
32QAM
71
147 to 187
147 to 221
147 to 318
40
64QAM
75
181 to 230
181 to 272
181 to 388
40
128QAM
75
215 to 272
215 to 323
215 to 456
40
256QAM
75
249 to 318
249 to 375
249 to 538
56 (55)
QPSK
40
82 to 105
82 to 124
82 to 178
56 (55)
16QAM
75
166 to 212
166 to 250
165 to 356
56 (55)
32QAM
75
206 to 262
206 to 308
206 to 437
56 (55)
64QAM
75
262 to 333
262 to 388
262 to 567
3-104
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Channel Spacing (MHz)
Modulation Mode
Maximum Number of E1s in Hybrid Microwave
56 (55)
128QAM
56 (55)
256QAM
3 Boards
Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) Not Accelerated
With L2 Bandwidth Accelerated
With L2+L3 Bandwidth Accelerated (IPv4)
75
309 to 396
309 to 466
309 to 656
75
360 to 456
360 to 538
360 to 777
NOTE
The ISX2 board supports channel spacings of 7 Mbit/s and 14 Mbit/s only when the non-XPIC mode is adopted.
Table 3-86 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service) Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) Not Accelerated
With L2 Bandwidth Accelerated
With L2+L3 Bandwidth Accelerated (IPv4)
Channel Spacing (MHz)
Modulation Mode
Number of STM-1 Services in Hybrid Microwave
28 (27.5)
128QAM
1
155 to 198
155 to 233
155 to 333
28 (27.5)
256QAM
1
181 to 230
181 to 272
181 to 388
40
64QAM
1
181 to 230
181 to 272
181 to 388
40
128QAM
1
215 to 272
215 to 323
215 to 456
40
256QAM
1
249 to 318
249 to 375
249 to 538
56 (55)
16QAM
1
166 to 212
166 to 250
165 to 356
56 (55)
32QAM
1
206 to 262
206 to 308
206 to 437
56 (55)
64QAM
1
262 to 333
262 to 388
262 to 567
56 (55)
128QAM
1
309 to 396
309 to 466
309 to 656
56 (55)
256QAM
1
360 to 456
360 to 538
360 to 777
NOTE
l The channel spacings 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, and 55 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band. l The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the product. The channel spacings larger than the values are also supported. l The throughput specifications in these tables are values for untagged Ethernet frames. l E1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth remaining after the E1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided for Ethernet services.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-105
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
IF Performance Table 3-87 IF performance Item
Performance
IF signal
ODU O&M signal
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)
350
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)
140
Modulation mode
ASK
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)
5.5
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)
10
Interface impedance (ohm)
50
Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem Table 3-88 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem Item
Performance
Encoding mode
LDPC encoding
Adaptive timedomain equalizer for baseband signals
Supported
Mechanical Behavior Table 3-89 Mechanical behavior Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.60 kg
Power Consumption Power consumption: < 23 W 3-106
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
3.10 EM6T/EM6F The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical ports and two GE ports. The EM6T has similar functions to the EM6F. The only difference is as follows: The GE ports on the EM6T use fixed electrical ports whereas the GE ports on the EM6F use the SFP modules and therefore can function as two optical or electrical ports. The GE electrical ports on the EM6F and the EM6T are compatible with the FE electrical ports. 3.10.1 Version Description The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F is SL91. 3.10.2 Functions and Features The EM6T/EM6F receives/transmits, processes, and converges four FE signals and two GE signals. 3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one GE signal on the EM6T, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6F. 3.10.4 Front Panel There are indicators, FE service ports, and GE service ports on the front panel. 3.10.5 Valid Slots The EM6T/EM6F can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. 3.10.6 Board Feature Code The board feature code of the EM6F indicates the type of SFP module. The board feature code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code. The EM6T does not have a feature code. 3.10.7 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6F. 3.10.8 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including the GE port performance, FE port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
3.10.1 Version Description The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F is SL91.
3.10.2 Functions and Features The EM6T/EM6F receives/transmits, processes, and converges four FE signals and two GE signals. Table 3-90 lists the functions and features that the EM6T/EM6F supports. The EM6T/EM6F needs to work with the packet switching unit of the system control, switching, and timing board to implement Ethernet service functions.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-107
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-90 Functions and features that the EM6T/EM6F supports Function and Feature
Board EM6T
Basic functions
Port specifications
EM6F
Receives/transmits FE/GE service signals and works with the packet switching unit to process the received FE/GE service signals. FE electrical port
Provides four 10/100BASE-T(X) ports.
Provides four 10/100BASE-T(X) ports.
GE port
Provides two 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) ports (fixed).
Provides two GE ports by using SFP modules of any of the following types: l 1000BASE-SX l 1000BASE-LX l 10/100/1000BASE-T (X)
Backplane bus bandwidth
1 Gbit/s
Port attributes
l The FE port supports 10M full-duplex, 10M halfduplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, and auto-negotiation.
Working mode
1 Gbit/s
l The GE electrical port supports 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M halfduplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation. l The GE optical port supports 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation. TAG attributes
l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access, or hybrid. l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet port.
Services
Jumbo frame
Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame length of 9600 bytes.
Traffic control function
Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.
E-Line services
Supports the following types of E-Line services: l E-Line services based on ports l E-Line services based on port+VLAN l E-Line services based on port+QinQ
E-LAN services
Supports the following types of E-LAN services: l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
3-108
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Function and Feature
LAG
3 Boards
Board EM6T
EM6F
Inter-board LAG
Supported
Supported
Intra-board LAG
Supported
Supported
ERPS
Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344.
Spanning tree protocol
Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.
LPT
Supported
QoS
Supported
DiffServ
Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB service classes for service flows based on their QoS information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP values, and MPLS EXP values) carried by the packets.
Complex traffic classification
Supports traffic classification at Ethernet ports based on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, SVLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values carried by packets.
CAR
Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports.
Shaping
Supports traffic shaping for a specific port, prioritized queue, or traffic flow.
Queue scheduling policies
Supports the following queue scheduling policies: l SP l WRR l SP+WRR
ETH OAM
IEEE 802.1ag OAM
Supports the following IEEE 802.1ag OAM functions: l Management of OAM maintenance points l Continuity check test l Loopback test l Link trace test
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-109
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Function and Feature
Board EM6T
IEEE 802.3ah OAM
EM6F
Supports the following IEEE 802.3ah OAM functions: l OAM automatic discovery l Link performance monitoring l Fault detection l Remote loopback test l Loopback detection and blocking of a port being looped back Supported
Supported
Clock source
Synchronous Ethernet
Synchronous Ethernet (not supported by the SFP electrical module)
Clock protection
Supports the following clock protection schemes:
RMON Clock
l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
DCN
Inband DCN
Each FE/GE port provides one inband DCN channel.
OAM
Loopback
Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports
3-110
Warm reset and cold reset
Supported
Supported
Board manufacturing information query
Supported
Supported
Board voltage detection
Supported
Supported
Board temperature detection
Supported
Supported
Query of SFP module information
Not supported
Supported
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one GE signal on the EM6T, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6F.
Functional Block Diagram Figure 3-40 Functional block diagram Backplane GE signal GE signal access unit
Control signal Ethernet processing unit
FE signal access unit
Ethernet signal
Logic processing unit
Ethernet signal Packet switching unit
Control signal FE signal Control bus of the board
Logic control unit
Control bus
+3.3 V power supplied to the board
Power supply unit
-48 V1 -48 V2
+3.3 V backup power supplied to the board Clock signal provided to the other units on the board
System control and communication unit
+3.3 V Clock unit
System clock signal
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction Table 3-91 Signal processing in the receive direction Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
GE signal access unit/FE signal access unit
l Receives/Transmits GE/FE signals. l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for GE/FE signals. l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRC checks, and Ethernet performance measurement for frame signals.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-111
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
2
Ethernet processing unit
l Adds tags identifying ingress ports to Ethernet data frames. l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames. l Processes labels in MPLS/PWE3 packets. l Performs QoS processing such as traffic classification and CAR traffic monitoring for Ethernet data frames. l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the logic processing unit.
3
Logic processing unit
Transmits Ethernet data frames to the main and standby packet switching units.
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction Table 3-92 Signal processing in the transmit direction Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Logic processing unit
l Selects Ethernet data frames from the packet switching unit. l Transmits Ethernet data frames to the Ethernet processing unit.
2
Ethernet processing unit
l Processes labels in MPLS/PWE3 packets. l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames. l Performs QoS processing such as traffic shaping and queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames. l Forwards Ethernet data frames to proper egress ports based on egress tags contained in the Ethernet data frames.
3
GE signal access unit/FE signal access unit
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRC code computing, and Ethernet performance measurement. l Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for Ethernet data frames, and sends out the generated GE/ FE signals through Ethernet ports.
Control Signal Processing The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access unit by using management control signals. The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit and logic processing unit over the control bus on the board. 3-112
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
The logic control unit communicates with the main and standby system control and communication units over the system control bus. The configuration data and query commands from the system control and communication unit are issued to the various units of the board through the logic control unit. The command response reported by each unit on the board, and the alarms and performance events are reported to the system control and communication unit also through the logic control unit.
Power Supply Unit The power supply unit performs the following functions: l
Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power supplies into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
l
Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power backup for the other units on the board.
Clock Unit This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock signals to the other units on the board.
3.10.4 Front Panel There are indicators, FE service ports, and GE service ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
GE1
GE2
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
EM6T
STAT PROG SRV
EM6T
Figure 3-41 Front panel of the EM6T
EM6F
CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT
STAT PROG SRV LINK1 LINK2
EM6F
Figure 3-42 Front panel of the EM6F
GE1
GE2
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
Indicators Table 3-93 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-113
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.
SRV
PROG
On (green)
The system is working properly.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the system.
On (yellow)
A minor alarm occurs in the system.
Off
There is no power supplied to the system.
Blinks on (green) and off at 100 ms intervals
Software is being loaded to the board during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
Blinks on (green) and off at 300 ms intervals
The board software is in BIOS boot state during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
On (green)
l When the board is being powered on or being reset, the upper layer software is being initialized. l When the board is running, the software is running normally.
Blinks on (red) and off at 100 ms intervals
The BOOTROM self-check fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
On (red)
The memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails during the poweron or resetting process of the board. The logic file or upper layer software is lost during the running process of the board. The pluggable storage card is faulty.
LINK1a
LINK2a
3-114
On (green)
The GE1 port is connected correctly and is not receiving or transmitting data.
Blinking (yellow)
The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting data.
Off
The GE1 port is not connected or is connected incorrectly.
On (green)
The GE2 port is connected correctly and is not receiving or transmitting data.
Blinking (yellow)
The GE2 port is receiving or transmitting data.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Indicator
3 Boards
State
Meaning
Off
The GE2 port is not connected or is connected incorrectly.
NOTE
a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the corresponding GE ports.
Ports Table 3-94 Description of the ports on the EM6T Port
Description
FE1
FE service port
Connector Type
Corresponding Cable
FE2 FE3
RJ45
FE4 GE1 GE2
Network cable
GE service port (fixed electrical port)
Table 3-95 Description of the ports on the EM6F Port
Description
FE1
FE service port
FE2 FE3
Connector Type
Corresponding Cable
RJ45
5.8 Network Cable
RJ45 SFP electrical module or LC SFP optical module
5.5 Fiber Jumper/5.8 Network Cable
FE4 GE1 GE2
GE service port (using SFP modules)
NOTE
On the NMS, GE1 and GE2 correspond to PORT1 and PORT2 respectively; FE1 to FE4 correspond to PORT3 to PORT6 respectively.
The performance of the FE service ports on the EM6T/EM6F complies with the 10/100BASET(X) standard; the performance of the GE service ports on the EM6T complies with the Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-115
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard; the performance of the GE service ports on the EM6F complies with the 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard if SFP electrical modules are used. All service ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. For the pin assignments for the ports, see Table 3-96 and Table 3-97. For the front view of an RJ45 connector, see Figure 3-43. Figure 3-43 Front view of the RJ45 connector
87654321
Table 3-96 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode Pin
3-116
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
1
TX+
Transmitting data (+)
BIDA+
Bidirectional data wire A (+)
2
TX-
Transmitting data (-)
BIDA-
Bidirectional data wire A (-)
3
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+
Bidirectional data wire B (+)
4
Reserved
-
BIDC+
Bidirectional data wire C (+)
5
Reserved
-
BIDC-
Bidirectional data wire C (-)
6
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-
Bidirectional data wire B (-)
7
Reserved
-
BIDD+
Bidirectional data wire D (+)
8
Reserved
-
BIDD-
Bidirectional data wire D (-)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-97 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode Pin
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
1
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+
Bidirectional data wire B (+)
2
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-
Bidirectional data wire B (-)
3
TX+
Transmitting data (+)
BIDA+
Bidirectional data wire A (+)
4
Reserved
-
BIDD+
Bidirectional data wire D (+)
5
Reserved
-
BIDD-
Bidirectional data wire D (-)
6
TX-
Transmitting data (-)
BIDA-
Bidirectional data wire A (-)
7
Reserved
-
BIDC+
Bidirectional data wire C (+)
8
Reserved
-
BIDC-
Bidirectional data wire C (-)
The RJ45 connector has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table 3-98. Table 3-98 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector Indicator
State
Meaning
LINK (green)
On
The link is working properly.
Off
The link is interrupted.
On or blinking
The port is transmitting or receiving data.
Off
The port is not transmitting or receiving data.
ACT (yellow)
SFP optical modules are used to provide GE service ports on the EM6F; one SFP optical module provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-44, in which TX represents the transmit port and RX represents the receive port. Figure 3-44 Ports of the SFP optical module
TX Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
RX Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-117
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Labels There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EM6F. The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical port is CLASS 1. That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
3.10.5 Valid Slots The EM6T/EM6F can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-45 Slots for the EM6T/EM6F in the IDU chassis Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)
Slot 11 (FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 6 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 1 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 2 (EM6T/EM6F)
Figure 3-46 Logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the NMS Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)
Slot 11 (FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 6 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 1 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 2 (EM6T/EM6F)
Table 3-99 Slot configuration for the EM6T/EM6F Item
Description
Slot allocation priority
Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 3 and 5
3.10.6 Board Feature Code The board feature code of the EM6F indicates the type of SFP module. The board feature code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code. The EM6T does not have a feature code.
3-118
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-100 Board feature code of the EM6F Board Feature Code
Module Type
Part Number of the Module
01
1000BASE-SX
34060286
02
1000BASE-LX
34060473
03
10/100/1000BASE-T(X)
34100052
3.10.7 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6F.
Related References A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control A.5.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes A.5.2.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes A.5.2.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes
3.10.8 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including the GE port performance, FE port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Performance of GE Optical Ports The GE optical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main specifications for the GE optical ports. Table 3-101 Performance of the GE optical interface
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Item
Performance
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)
1000
Classification code
1000BASE-SX
1000BASE-LX
Fiber type
Multiple-mode optical fiber
Single-mode optical fiber
Transmission distance (km)
0.5
10
Operating wavelength (nm)
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
Mean launched power (dBm)
-9 to -3
-9 to -3
Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm)
-17
-20
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-119
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Item
Performance
Minimum overload (dBm)
0
-3
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
9.5
9.5
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 uses SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces. Users can use different types of SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Performance of GE Electrical Ports The GE electrical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main specifications for the GE electrical ports. Table 3-102 GE electric interface performance Item
Performance
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)
10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX) 1000 (1000BASE-T)
Code pattern
Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX) 4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)
Interface type
RJ45
Performance of FE Electrical Ports The FE electrical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main specifications for the FE electrical ports. Table 3-103 FE electric interface performance Item
Performance
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)
10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX)
Code pattern
Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)
Interface type
3-120
RJ45
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Mechanical Behavior Table 3-104 Mechanical behavior Item
Performance EM6T
EM6F
Dimensions (H x W x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.37 kg
0.40 kg
Power Consumption Power consumption of the EM6T: < 10.4 W Power consumption of the EM6F: < 11.3 W
3.11 EFP8 The EFP8 is an 8-port FE EoPDH processing board. The EFP board is connected to the packet plane through its bridging GE port. 3.11.1 Version Description The functional version of the EFP8 is SL91. 3.11.2 Functions and Features The EFP8 receives/transmits 8xFE signals from its front panel and 1xGE packet plane signals from the backplane, and encapsulates the Ethernet signals into E1 signals, and transmits the Ethernet signals on the PDH network. 3.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one FE signal, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the EFP8. 3.11.4 Front Panel There are indicators and eight FE ports on the front panel. 3.11.5 Valid Slots The EFP8 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the EFP8 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. 3.11.6 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EFP8. 3.11.7 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including the FE port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
3.11.1 Version Description The functional version of the EFP8 is SL91.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-121
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
3.11.2 Functions and Features The EFP8 receives/transmits 8xFE signals from its front panel and 1xGE packet plane signals from the backplane, and encapsulates the Ethernet signals into E1 signals, and transmits the Ethernet signals on the PDH network. Table 3-105 lists the functions and features that the EFP8 supports. Table 3-105 Functions and features that the EFP8 supports Function and Feature
EFP8
Basic functions
Receives/Transmits 8xFE signals and 1xGE packet plane signals and performs EoPDH processing.
Port specifications
FE electrical port: 10/100BASE-T(X)
8
Port attributes
Working mode
The FE port supports 10M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex, and autonegotiation.
TAG attributes
l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet port. l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access, or hybrid.
Services
Jumbo frame
Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame length of 2000 bytes.
Traffic control function
Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.
EPL services
Supports the EPL services that are based on port.
EVPL services
Supports the following types of EVPL services: l EVPL services based on port +VLAN l EVPL services based on QinQ
EPLAN services
Supports the EPLAN services that are based on IEEE 802.1d bridges.
EVPLAN services
Supports the following types of EVPLAN services: l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
3-122
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Function and Feature Encapsulation and mapping
LAG
EFP8 Encapsulation format
Generic framing procedure (GFP)
Maximum number of VCTRUNKs supported by the board
16
Maximum TDM service capacity supported by the backplane
1xVC-4 (63xE1)
Maximum number of E1s that can be bound with a single VCTRUNK
16xE1
Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)
Supported
Inter-board LAG
Not supported
Intra-board LAG
Supported
Spanning tree protocol
Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.
IGMP snooping function
Supported
LPTa
Supported
QoS
Traffic classification
l Traffic classification based on ports l Traffic classification based on port +VLAN ID l Traffic classification based on port +VLAN ID+VLAN PRI l Traffic classification based on port +S-VLAN ID l Traffic classification based on port +C-VLAN ID+S-VLAN ID
CoS
Grooms packets in traffic flows to eight egress queues that belong to different service classes based on the following conditions: l Simple l VLAN priority l IP TOS value l DSCP value
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-123
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Function and Feature
ETH OAM
EFP8 CAR
Provides the CAR function for traffic flows.
Shaping
Supports traffic shaping for queues at ports.
Queue scheduling policies
Supports SP+WRR.
IEEE 802.1ag OAM
Supports the following IEEE 802.1ag OAM functions: l Management of OAM maintenance points l Continuity check test l Loopback test l Link trace test
IEEE 802.3ah OAM
Supports the following IEEE 802.3ah OAM functions: l OAM automatic discovery l Link performance monitoring l Fault detection l Remote loopback test NOTE Port 9 (bridging port) of the EFP8 does not support the OAM function that complies with IEEE 802.3ah.
RMON
Supported
Port mirroring
Supported
Clock
Clock source
Synchronous Ethernet
Clock protection
Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
3-124
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Function and Feature OAM
EFP8 Loopback
Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports l Inloops on VC-12 paths NOTE Bridging ports of the EFP8 do not support the loopback function at the PHY layer.
Warm reset and cold reset
Supported
Board manufacturing information query
Supported
Board temperature detection
Supported
NOTE
a: The LPT function is used to detect faults that occur at a service access node and in an intermediate transmission network. If a fault is detected, the LPT notifies the equipment that receives the service of starting the backup network at the earliest time for communication, ensuring normal transmission of important data.
3.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one FE signal, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the EFP8.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-125
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Functional Block Diagram Figure 3-47 Functional block diagram of the EFP8 Backplane Ethernet signal FE signal access unit
Ethernet processing unit
Encapsulation unit
PDH signal Logic processing unit
Mapping unit
Cross-connect unit
Management GE signal
Packet switching unit
Control signal of the board Control bus
Logic control unit +3.3 V power supplied to the board
Power supply unit
+3.3 V backup power supplied to the board Clock signal provided to the other units on the board
System control and communication unit -48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V
Clock unit
System clock signal
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction Table 3-106 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EFP8 Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
FE signal access unit
l Receives/Transmits FE signals. l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for FE signals. l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRC code checks, and Ethernet performance measurement for frame signals.
2
Ethernet processing unit
l Receives/Transmits GE signals from the packet switching unit. l Performs QoS processing such as traffic classification and CAR for Ethernet data frames based on service categories. l Processes tags based on service categories. l Forwards data frames based on service categories.
3
3-126
Encapsulation unit
Performs GFP encapsulation for Ethernet frames.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
4
Mapping unit
l Maps encapsulated data frames based on E1 virtual concatenation and then encapsulates the data frames to proper VC-12s. l Processes pointers to form TU-12s. l Performs byte interleaving for three TU-12s to form one TUG-2. l Performs byte interleaving for seven TUG-2s to form one TUG-3. l Performs byte interleaving for three TUG-3s to form one C-4. l Adds higher order path overhead bytes to one C-4 to form one VC-4.
3
Logic processing unit
Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the main and standby cross-connect units.
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction Table 3-107 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EFP8 Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Logic processing unit
Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the main cross-connect unit.
2
Mapping unit
l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4. l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3. l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2. l Extracts E1 payload from VC-12s and demaps the E1 payload based on E1 virtual concatenation.
3
Encapsulation unit
Decapsulates signals after demapping.
4
Ethernet signal processing unit
l Processes tags based on service categories. l Performs QoS processing such as traffic shaping and queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames. l Performs frame delimitation, preamble adding, CRC code computing, and Ethernet performance measurement for Ethernet data frames. l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the FE signal access unit or the GE port that is connected to the packet switching unit according to the egress flag.
5
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
FE signal access unit
Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for Ethernet data frames, and sends the generated FE signals to an Ethernet port.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-127
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Control Signal Processing The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE signal access unit by using management control signals. The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit, encapsulation unit, mapping unit, and logic processing unit over the control bus on the board. The logic control unit communicates with the main and standby system control and communication units over the system control bus. The configuration data and query commands from the system control and communication unit are issued to the various units of the board through the logic control unit. The command response reported by each unit on the board, and alarms and performance events are reported to the system control and communication unit also through the logic control unit.
Power Supply Unit The power supply unit performs the following functions: l
Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power supplies into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
l
Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power backup for the other units on the board.
Clock Unit This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock signals to the other units on the board.
3.11.4 Front Panel There are indicators and eight FE ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
PROG
SRV
STAT
EFP8
Figure 3-48 Front panel of the EFP8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Indicators Table 3-108 Status explanation for indicators on the EFP8
3-128
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Indicator
3 Boards
State
Meaning
Off
l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.
PROG
Blinks on (green) and off at 100 ms intervals
Software is being loaded to the board during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
Blinks on (green) and off at 300 ms intervals
The board software is in BIOS boot state during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
On (green)
l When the board is being powered on or being reset, the upper layer software is being initialized. l When the board is running, the software is running normally.
Blinks on (red) and off at 100 ms intervals
The BOOTROM self-check fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
On (red)
l The memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The logic file or upper layer software is lost during the running process of the board. l The pluggable storage card is faulty.
SRV
On (green)
The system is working properly.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the system.
On (yellow)
A minor alarm occurs in the system.
Off
There is no power supplied to the system.
Ports Table 3-109 Description of the ports on the EFP8
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Port
Description
FE1 to FE8
FE port
Connector Type RJ45
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Corresponding Cable 5.8 Network Cable
3-129
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
The FE electrical ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. For the pin assignments for the ports, see Table 3-110 and Table 3-111. For the front view of an RJ45 connector, see Figure 3-49. Figure 3-49 Front view of the RJ45 connector
87654321
Table 3-110 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode Pin
10/100BASE-T(X) Signal
Function
1
TX+
Transmitting data (+)
2
TX-
Transmitting data (-)
3
RX+
Receiving data (+)
4
Reserved
-
5
Reserved
-
6
RX-
Receiving data (-)
7
Reserved
-
8
Reserved
-
Table 3-111 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode Pin
3-130
10/100BASE-T(X) Signal
Function
1
RX+
Receiving data (+)
2
RX-
Receiving data (-)
3
TX+
Transmitting data (+)
4
Reserved
-
5
Reserved
-
6
TX-
Transmitting data (-)
7
Reserved
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Pin
3 Boards
10/100BASE-T(X)
8
Signal
Function
Reserved
-
The RJ45 port has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table 3-112. Table 3-112 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector Indicator
State
Meaning
LINK (green)
On
The link is working properly.
Off
The link is interrupted.
On or blinking
The port is transmitting or receiving data.
Off
The port is not transmitting or receiving data.
ACT (yellow)
3.11.5 Valid Slots The EFP8 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the EFP8 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-50 Slots for the EFP8 in the IDU chassis Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)
Slot 11 (FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (EFP8)
Slot 6 (EFP8)
Slot 3 (EFP8)
Slot 4 (EFP8)
Slot 1 (EFP8)
Slot 2 (EFP8)
Figure 3-51 Logical slots of the EFP8 on the NMS Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Slot 11 (FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (EFP8)
Slot 6 (EFP8)
Slot 3 (EFP8)
Slot 4 (EFP8)
Slot 1 (EFP8)
Slot 2 (EFP8)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-131
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-113 Slot allocation Item
Description
Slot allocation priority
Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 3 and 5
3.11.6 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EFP8.
Related References A.7.5.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_External Port A.7.5.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Internal Port A.7.5.3 Parameter Description: Type Field of QinQ Frames A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs
3.11.7 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including the FE port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Performance of FE Electrical Ports The FE electrical ports on the EFP8 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main specifications for the FE electrical ports. Table 3-114 FE electric interface performance Item
Performance
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)
10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX)
Code pattern
Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)
Interface type
RJ45
Mechanical Behavior Table 3-115 Mechanical behavior Item
Performance EFP8
Dimensions (H x W x D) 3-132
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Item
3 Boards
Performance EFP8
Weight
0.6 kg
Power Consumption Power consumption of the EFP8: < 13.5 W
3.12 SL1D The SL1D is a 2xSTM-1 optical interface board. 3.12.1 Version Description The functional version of the SL1D is SL91. 3.12.2 Functions and Features The SL1D receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical signals. 3.12.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one STM-1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the SL1D. 3.12.4 Front Panel There are indicators, STM-1 optical ports, and a label on the front panel. 3.12.5 Valid Slots The SL1D can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. 3.12.6 Board Feature Code The board feature code of the SL1D indicates the type of SFP optical module. The board feature code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code. 3.12.7 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D. 3.12.8 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including the STM-1 optical port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
3.12.1 Version Description The functional version of the SL1D is SL91.
3.12.2 Functions and Features The SL1D receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical signals. Table 3-116 lists the functions and features that the SL1D supports. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-133
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-116 Functions and features that the SL1D supports Function and Feature
SL1D
Basic functions
Receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical signals.
Optical port specifications
l Adopts the SFP optical module and supports the optical ports of Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 types. l The characteristics of all the optical ports comply with ITU-T G.957.
Protection
Clock
Linear MSP
Supported
SNCP
Supported
Clock source
Each line port provides one SDH line clock signal.
Clock protection
Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
DCN
Outband DCN
Supported
OM
Loopback
Supports the following loopback types: l Outloops at optical ports l Inloops at optical ports l Outloops on VC-4 paths l Inloops on VC-4 paths
3-134
Warm reset and cold reset
Supported
Setting of the on/off state of a laser
Supported
ALS functiona
Supported
In-service FPGA loading
Supported
Board manufacturing information query
Supported
Detection and query of SFP optical module information
Supported
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
NOTE
a: The ALS function is implemented as follows: l When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500 ms, the laser at the specific transmit port is automatically shut down. l The laser starts to launch laser pulses at a specified interval; that is, the laser emits light for two seconds and stops emission for 60 seconds. l After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser works properly and emits continuous light.
3.12.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one STM-1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the SL1D.
Functional Block Diagram Figure 3-52 Functional block diagram of the SL1D Backplane
Service bus
Overhead bus
Logic processing unit
Overhead processing unit
STM-1
O/E conversion unit
STM-1
Crossconnect unit System control and communication unit
System control and communication unit
Control bus
Logic control unit Power supplied to the other units on the board
+3.3 V
Clock signal provided to the other units on the board
Clock unit
System clock signal
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction Table 3-117 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SL1D Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
O/E conversion unit
l Regenerates STM-1 optical signals. l Detects R_LOS alarms. l Converts STM-1 optical signals into electrical signals.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-135
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
2
Overhead processing unit
l Restores clock signals. l Aligns frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF alarms. l Performs descrambling. l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and reports the SSM status to the system control and communication unit. l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes and transmits the overhead signal to the logic processing unit. l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specific performance events. l Checks higher order path overheads and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the logic processing unit.
3
Logic processing unit
l Processes clock signals. l Ttransmits the overhead signals to the system control and communication unit. l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the main and standby cross-connect units.
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction Table 3-118 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SL1D Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Logic processing unit
l Processes clock signals. l Processes overhead signals. l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit.
2
Overhead processing unit
l Sets higher order path overheads. l Sets AU pointers. l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes. l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes. l Performs scrambling.
3-136
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
3
O/E conversion unit
Converts electrical signals into optical signals.
Control Signal Processing The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit and enables FPGA loading.
Clock Unit This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock signals to the other units on the board.
3.12.4 Front Panel There are indicators, STM-1 optical ports, and a label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT
TX2/RX2
TX1/RX1
SL1D
SL1D
STAT SRV LOS1 LOS2
Figure 3-53 Front panel of the SL1D
Indicators Table 3-119 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.
SRV Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
On (green) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
The services are normal. 3-137
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Indicator
LOS1
LOS2
State
Meaning
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the services.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services.
Off
The services are not configured.
On (red)
The first optical port of the SL1D is reporting the R_LOS alarm.
Off
The first optical port of the SL1D is free of R_LOS alarms.
On (red)
The second optical port of the SL1D is reporting the R_LOS alarm.
Off
The second optical port of the SL1D is free of R_LOS alarms.
Ports Table 3-120 Description of the ports
3-138
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding Cable
TX1
Transmit port of the first STM-1 optical port
LC (SFP)
Fiber jumper
RX1
Receive port of the first STM-1 optical port
TX2
Transmit port of the second STM-1 optical port
RX2
Receive port of the second STM-1 optical port
LC (SFP)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Labels There is a laser safety class label on the front panel. The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical port is CLASS 1. That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
3.12.5 Valid Slots The SL1D can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-54 Slots for the SL1D in the IDU chassis Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)
Slot 11 (FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (SL1D)
Slot 6 (SL1D)
Slot 3 (SL1D)
Slot 4 (SL1D)
Slot 1 (SL1D)
Slot 2 (SL1D)
Figure 3-55 Logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)
Slot 11 (FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (SL1D)
Slot 6 (SL1D)
Slot 3 (SL1D)
Slot 4 (SL1D)
Slot 1 (SL1D)
Slot 2 (SL1D)
Table 3-121 Slot allocation Item
Description
Slot allocation priority
Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 3 and 5
3.12.6 Board Feature Code The board feature code of the SL1D indicates the type of SFP optical module. The board feature code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-139
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-122 Board feature code of the SL1D Feature Code
Type of Optical Module
Part Number of the Optical Module
01
Ie-1
34060287
02
S-1.1
34060276
03
L-1.1
34060281
04
L-1.2
34060282
3.12.7 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D.
Related References A.5.7.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs
3.12.8 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including the STM-1 optical port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
STM-1 Optical Interface Performance The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. The following table provides the typical performance of the interface. Table 3-123 STM-1 optical interface performance
3-140
Item
Performance
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)
155520
Classification code
Ie-1
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Fiber type
Multi-mode fiber
Single-mode fiber
Single-mode fiber
Single-mode fiber
Transmission distance (km)
2
15
40
80
Operating wavelength (nm)
1270 to 1380
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
Mean launched power (dBm)
-19 to -14
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Item
Performance
Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm)
-30
-28
-34
-34
Minimum overload (dBm)
-14
-8
-10
-10
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
10
8.2
10
10
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 uses SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Mechanical Behavior Table 3-124 Mechanical behavior Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.30 kg
Power Consumption Power consumption: < 3.4 W
3.13 ML1/MD1 The ML1 is a 16xSmart E1 service processing board. The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service processing board. 3.13.1 Version Description The functional version of the ML1 is SL92. The functional version of the MD1 is SL91. 3.13.2 Functions and Features The ML1 receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The MD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals. 3.13.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ML1/MD1. 3.13.4 Front Panel There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel. 3.13.5 Valid Slots The ML1/MD1 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. 3.13.6 Board Feature Code Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-141
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
The board feature code of the ML1/MD1 indicates the port impedance. The board feature code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code. 3.13.7 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ML1/MD1. 3.13.8 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including the E1 port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
3.13.1 Version Description The functional version of the ML1 is SL92. The functional version of the MD1 is SL91.
3.13.2 Functions and Features The ML1 receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The MD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals. Table 3-125 lists the functions and features that the ML1/MD1 supports. Table 3-125 Functions and features that the ML1/MD1 supports Function and Feature
Board ML1
MD1
Basic functions
Receives and transmits E1 signals, and supports flexible configuration of E1 service categories.
E1 service categories
Supports the following E1 service categories: l CES E1 l ATM/IMA E1
Port specifications
75-ohm/120ohm E1 port
Fractional E1 ATM/IMA
3-142
16
32
Supports transparent service transmission at the 64 kbit/s level. Maximum number of ATM services
64
Maximum number of ATM connections
256
ATM traffic management
Supported
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Function and Feature
3 Boards
Board ML1
ATM encapsulation mode
MD1
Supports the following ATM encapsulation modes: l N-to-one VPC l N-to-one VCC l One-to-one VPC l One-to-one VCC
CES
Maximum number of concatenated ATM cells
31
ATM OAM
F4 (VP level) and F5 (VC level)
Maximum number of IMA groups
16
Maximum number of members in an IMA group
16
Maximum number of services
16
Encapsulation mode
Supports the following encapsulation modes:
32
32
l CESoPSN l SAToP
Service category
Point-to-point services
Compression of idle slots
Supported (applicable to CESoPSN only)
Jitter buffering time (us)
375-16000
Packet loading time (us)
125-5000
CES ACR
Supported
Retiming
Supported
Clock protection OM
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Supports clock protection based on clock source priorities. Loopback
Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-143
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Function and Feature
Board ML1
MD1
Cold reset and warm reset
Supported
PRBS tests at E1 ports
Supported
Board manufacturing information query
Supported
3.13.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ML1/MD1.
Functional Block Diagram Figure 3-56 Functional block diagram of the ML1/MD1 Backplane
Service bus
Logic processing unit
Service processing unit
E1
Signal interface unit
E1
GE bus
Control bus
Packet switching unit
System control and communication unit
Logic control unit
3-144
+3.3 V power supplied to the board +3.3 V backup power supplied to the board
Power supply unit
Clock signal provided to the other units of the board
Clock unit
-48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
System clock signal
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction Table 3-126 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ML1/MD1 Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Signal interface unit
l Receives external E1 signals. l Matches the resistance. l Equalizes signals. l Converts the level. l Recovers clock signals. l Buffers the received data. l Performs HDB3/B8ZS/AMI decoding.
2
Service processing unit
l Frames E1 signals. l Performs CES emulation or processes ATM/IMA services. l Encapsulates PWE3 services and converts the PWE3 services into Ethernet services.
4
Logic processing unit
l Implements the conversion from the internal service bus into the GE bus in the backplane. l Sends service signals to the packet switching unit.
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction Table 3-127 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ML1/MD1 Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Logic processing unit
l Receives service signals from the packet switching unit. l Implements the conversion from the GE bus in the backplane into the internal service bus.
2
Service processing unit
l Decapsulates service signals. l Re-forms CES packets or processes ATM/IMA services. l Converts signals into E1 signals and sends the E1 signals to the signal interface unit.
3
Signal interface unit
l Performs HDB3/B8ZS/AMI coding. l Performs clock re-timing. l Performs pulse shaping. l Drives the line. l Sends E1 signals to a port.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-145
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Control Signal Processing The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit The power supply unit performs the following functions: l
Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power supplies into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
l
Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power backup for the other units on the board.
Clock Unit This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock signals to the other units on the board.
3.13.4 Front Panel There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
ML1
STAT SRV
Figure 3-57 Front panel of the ML1 16 E1
1
MD1
3-146
STAT SRV
Figure 3-58 Front panel of the MD1 16 1
32 17
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Indicators Table 3-128 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1 Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.
SRV
On (green)
The services are normal.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the services.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services.
Off
The services are not configured.
Ports Table 3-129 Description of the ports on the ML1 Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding Cable
1 to 16
The first to sixteenth E1 ports
Anea 96
5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment or 5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel
Table 3-130 Description of the ports on the MD1
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding Cable
1 to 16
The first to sixteenth E1 ports
Anea 96
5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment or 5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-147
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding Cable
17 to 32
The seventeenth to thirty-second E1 ports
Anea 96
5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment or 5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel
The ports on the ML1/MD1 use the Anea 96 connector. Figure 3-59 shows the front view of an Anea 96 connector and Table 3-131 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector. Figure 3-59 Front view of an Anea 96 connector POS.1
POS.96
Table 3-131 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector
3-148
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
The first received E1 differential signal (+)
25
The first transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
2
The first received E1 differential signal (-)
26
The first transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
3
The second received E1 differential signal (+)
27
The second transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
4
The second received E1 differential signal (-)
28
The second transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
5
The third received E1 differential signal (+)
29
The third transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
6
The third received E1 differential signal (-)
30
The third transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
7
The fourth received E1 differential signal (+)
31
The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
8
The fourth received E1 differential signal (-)
32
The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
9
The fifth received E1 differential signal (+)
33
The fifth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
10
The fifth received E1 differential signal (-)
34
The fifth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
11
The sixth received E1 differential signal (+)
35
The sixth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
12
The sixth received E1 differential signal (-)
36
The sixth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
13
The seventh received E1 differential signal (+)
37
The seventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
14
The seventh received E1 differential signal (-)
38
The seventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
15
The eighth received E1 differential signal (+)
39
The eighth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
16
The eighth received E1 differential signal (-)
40
The eighth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
17
The ninth received E1 differential signal (+)
41
The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
18
The ninth received E1 differential signal (-)
42
The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
19
The tenth received E1 differential signal (+)
43
The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
20
The tenth received E1 differential signal (-)
44
The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
21
The eleventh received E1 differential signal (+)
45
The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
22
The eleventh received E1 differential signal (-)
46
The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
23
The twelfth received E1 differential signal (+)
47
The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
24
The twelfth received E1 differential signal (-)
48
The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
49
The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (+)
73
The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
50
The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (-)
74
The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
51
The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (+)
75
The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-149
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
52
The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (-)
76
The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
53
The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (+)
77
The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
54
The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (-)
78
The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
55
The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (+)
79
The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
56
The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (-)
80
The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
3.13.5 Valid Slots The ML1/MD1 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-60 Slots for the ML1/MD1 in the IDU chassis Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)
Slot 11 (FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 6 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 3 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 4 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 1 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 2 (ML1/MD1)
Figure 3-61 Logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)
Slot 11 (FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 6 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 3 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 4 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 1 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 2 (ML1/MD1)
Table 3-132 Slot allocation
3-150
Item
Description
Slot allocation priority
Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 3 and 5
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
3.13.6 Board Feature Code The board feature code of the ML1/MD1 indicates the port impedance. The board feature code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code. Table 3-133 Board feature code of the ML1/MD1 Board Feature Code
Port Impedance (Ohm)
A
75
B
120
3.13.7 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ML1/MD1.
Related References A.5.1.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes A.5.1.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes
3.13.8 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including the E1 port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
E1 Interface Performance Table 3-134 E1 interface performance
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Item
Performance
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)
2048
Code pattern
HDB3
Impedance (ohm)
75
120
Wire pair in each transmission direction
One coaxial wire pair
One symmetrical wire pair
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-151
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Mechanical Behavior Table 3-135 Mechanical behavior Item
Performance ML1
MD1
Dimensions (H x W x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.45 kg
0.50 kg
Power Consumption Power consumption of the ML1: < 7.0 W Power consumption of the MD1: < 12.2 W
3.14 SP3S/SP3D The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. 3.14.1 Version Description The functional version of the SP3S is SL91. The functional version of the SP3D is TNH1. 3.14.2 Functions and Features The SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals. 3.14.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D. 3.14.4 Front Panel There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel. 3.14.5 Valid Slots The SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. 3.14.6 Board Feature Code The board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D indicates the E1 port impedance. The board feature code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code. 3.14.7 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SP3S/SP3D. 3.14.8 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including the E1 port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
3-152
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
3.14.1 Version Description The functional version of the SP3S is SL91. The functional version of the SP3D is TNH1.
3.14.2 Functions and Features The SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals. Table 3-136 lists the functions and features that the SP3S/SP3D supports. Table 3-136 Functions and features that the SP3S/SP3D supports Function and Feature
Board SP3S
Basic functions
SP3D
Receives and transmits E1 signals.
Port specifications
75-ohm/120ohm E1 port
16
Clock
Clock source
Supports a tributary clock source extracted from the first or fifth E1 signal.
Clock protection
Supports clock protection based on clock source priorities.
E1 retiming function
Supported
Loopback
Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports.
Cold reset and warm reset
Supported
PRBS tests at E1 ports
Supported
Board manufacturing information query
Supported
OM
32
3.14.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-153
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Functional Block Diagram Figure 3-62 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D Backplane
Service bus
Logic processing unit
Mapping/Demapping unit
Codec unit
E1
E1 signal
Interface unit
E1
Cross-connect unit
Control bus
System control and communication unit
Logic control unit +3.3 V power supplied to the board
-48 V1
Power supply unit
-48 V2
+3.3 V backup power supplied to the board Clock signal provided to the other units on the board
+3.3 V Clock unit
System clock signal
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction Table 3-137 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Interface unit
External E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and then transmitted to the board.
2
Codec unit
l Equalizes the received signals. l Recovers clock signals. l Detects T_ALOS alarms. l Performs HDB3 decoding.
3-154
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
3
Mapping/ Demapping unit
l Asynchronously maps signals into C-12s. l Adds path overhead bytes to C-12s to form VC-12s. l Processes pointers to form TU-12s. l Performs byte interleaving for three TU-12s to form one TUG-2. l Performs byte interleaving for seven TUG-2s to form one TUG-3. l Performs byte interleaving for three TUG-3s to form one C-4. l Adds higher order path overhead bytes to one C-4 to form one VC-4.
4
Logic processing unit
l Processes clock signals. l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the main and standby cross-connect units.
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction Table 3-138 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Logic processing unit
l Processes clock signals.
Mapping/ Demapping unit
l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.
2
l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit.
l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3. l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2. l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects specific alarms and performance events. l Extracts E1 signals.
3
Codec unit
Performs HDB3 coding.
4
Interface unit
E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and then transmitted to an external cable.
Control Signal Processing The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over the control bus. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-155
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit The power supply unit performs the following functions: l
Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power supplies into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
l
Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power backup for the other units on the board.
Clock Unit This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock signals to the other units on the board.
3.14.4 Front Panel There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
SP3S
SP3S
STAT SRV
Figure 3-63 Front panel of the SP3S E1 1-16
21 1
42 22
SP3D
SP3D
STAT SRV
Figure 3-64 Front panel of the SP3D
Indicators Table 3-139 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D
3-156
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Indicator
3 Boards
State
Meaning
Off
l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.
SRV
On (green)
The services are normal.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the services.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services.
Off
The services are not configured.
Ports Table 3-140 Description of the ports on the SP3S Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding Cable
1-16
The first to sixteenth E1 ports
Anea 96
5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment or 5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel
Table 3-141 Description of the ports on the SP3D Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding Cable
1-21
The first to sixteenth E1 ports
Anea 96
5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment or 5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel
22-42
The seventeenth to thirty-second E1 ports
Anea 96
5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment or 5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel
NOTE
On the OptiX RTN 950, only ports 1-16 and 22-37 of the SP3D are used. Ports 1-16 correspond to E1 signals 1-16 and ports 22-37 correspond to E1 signals 17-32.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-157
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
The ports on the SP3S/SP3D use Anea 96 connectors. Figure 3-65 shows the front view of an Anea 96 connector and Table 3-142 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector. Figure 3-65 Front view of an Anea 96 connector POS.1
POS.96
Table 3-142 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector
3-158
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
The first received E1 differential signal (+)
25
The first transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
2
The first received E1 differential signal (-)
26
The first transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
3
The second received E1 differential signal (+)
27
The second transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
4
The second received E1 differential signal (-)
28
The second transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
5
The third received E1 differential signal (+)
29
The third transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
6
The third received E1 differential signal (-)
30
The third transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
7
The fourth received E1 differential signal (+)
31
The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
8
The fourth received E1 differential signal (-)
32
The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
9
The fifth received E1 differential signal (+)
33
The fifth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
10
The fifth received E1 differential signal (-)
34
The fifth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
11
The sixth received E1 differential signal (+)
35
The sixth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
12
The sixth received E1 differential signal (-)
36
The sixth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Boards
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
13
The seventh received E1 differential signal (+)
37
The seventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
14
The seventh received E1 differential signal (-)
38
The seventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
15
The eighth received E1 differential signal (+)
39
The eighth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
16
The eighth received E1 differential signal (-)
40
The eighth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
17
The ninth received E1 differential signal (+)
41
The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
18
The ninth received E1 differential signal (-)
42
The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
19
The tenth received E1 differential signal (+)
43
The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
20
The tenth received E1 differential signal (-)
44
The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
21
The eleventh received E1 differential signal (+)
45
The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
22
The eleventh received E1 differential signal (-)
46
The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
23
The twelfth received E1 differential signal (+)
47
The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
24
The twelfth received E1 differential signal (-)
48
The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
49
The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (+)
73
The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
50
The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (-)
74
The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
51
The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (+)
75
The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
52
The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (-)
76
The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
53
The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (+)
77
The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
54
The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (-)
78
The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
55
The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (+)
79
The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-159
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
56
The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (-)
80
The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
3.14.5 Valid Slots The SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-66 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU chassis Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)
Slot 11 (FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 6 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 1 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 2 (SP3S/SP3D)
Figure 3-67 Logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)
Slot 11 (FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 6 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 1 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 2 (SP3S/SP3D)
Table 3-143 Slot allocation Item
Description
Slot allocation priority
Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 3 and 5
3.14.6 Board Feature Code The board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D indicates the E1 port impedance. The board feature code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.
3-160
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-144 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D Board Feature Code
Port Impedance (Ohm)
A
120
B
75
3.14.7 Board Parameter Settings This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SP3S/SP3D.
Related References A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs
3.14.8 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including the E1 port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
E1 Interface Performance Table 3-145 E1 interface performance Item
Performance
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)
2048
Code pattern
HDB3
Impedance (ohm)
75
120
Wire pair in each transmission direction
One coaxial wire pair
One symmetrical wire pair
Mechanical Behavior Table 3-146 Mechanical behavior Item
Performance SP3S
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
SP3D
Dimensions (H x W x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.50 kg
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
0.64 kg
3-161
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Power Consumption Power consumption of the SP3S: < 5.7 W Power consumption of the SP3D: < 9.6 W
3.15 AUX The AUX is an auxiliary management interface board of the OptiX RTN 950. One NE can house only one AUX. 3.15.1 Version Description The functional version of the AUX is SL91. 3.15.2 Functions and Features The AUX provides the system with one orderwire phone port, one synchronous data port, one asynchronous data port, and one four-input/two-output external alarm port. 3.15.3 Working Principle The AUX consists of the orderwire unit, logic control unit, and clock unit. 3.15.4 Front Panel There are indicators, management ports, and auxiliary ports on the front panel. 3.15.5 Valid Slots The AUX can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the AUX on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. 3.15.6 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including auxiliary port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
3.15.1 Version Description The functional version of the AUX is SL91.
3.15.2 Functions and Features The AUX provides the system with one orderwire phone port, one synchronous data port, one asynchronous data port, and one four-input/two-output external alarm port. Table 3-147 lists the functions and features that the AUX supports. Table 3-147 Functions and features that the AUX supports Function and Feature
AUX
Orderwire phone port
1
Synchronous data port
1 The transmission rate of the port is 64 kbit/s and its specifications comply with ITU-T G.703.
3-162
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Function and Feature Asynchronous data port
AUX 1 The transmission rate of the port is equal to or less than 19.2 kbit/s and the interfacing level complies with RS-232.
External alarm port
Four inputs and two outputs
Hot swapping function
Supported
Power detection
Supported
3.15.3 Working Principle The AUX consists of the orderwire unit, logic control unit, and clock unit.
Functional Block Diagram Figure 3-68 Functional block diagram of the AUX Backplane Power supply unit 4-input/2-output alarm port One orderwire phone port 64 kbit/s synchronous data port
Orderwire unit
+3.3 V Power dip detection signal
Logic control unit
System bus
System control and communication unit
19.2 kbit/s asynchronous data port
Clock unit
Clock signal
Board status detection unit
System control and communication unit
Power Supply Unit l
Receives the +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and supplies it to the other units on the AUX.
l
Receives and shuts down control signals.
Orderwire Unit l
Supports the input of four channels of alarms.
l
Supports the output of two channels of alarms.
l
Provides one orderwire port.
l
Provides one 64 kbit/s synchronous transparent data port.
l
Provides one 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data port. NOTE
The 64 kbit/s synchronous data port can transparently transmit orderwire byte. One port, however, can implement only one of the two functions: 64 kbit/s synchronous data port and transparent transmission of orderwire byte.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-163
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Logic Control Unit l
Provides an interface with the CPU unit and works with the CPU unit to implement the board control function.
l
Processes orderwire bytes and overhead bytes.
l
Processes clock signals.
l
Provides board status information.
l
Checks the status of the main and standby system control, switching, and timing boards.
l
Checks the status of the main and standby clocks.
l
Supports the switching of system clock reference sources automatically and by running specific commands.
l
Supports the detection and reporting of the key clock status of each board in the system.
Board Status Detection Unit l
Detects board performance data such as board voltage.
l
Stores board manufacturing information.
Clock Unit Provides clock signals to the logic control unit.
3.15.4 Front Panel There are indicators, management ports, and auxiliary ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram Figure 3-69 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AUX.
AUX
STAT SRV
Figure 3-69 Front panel of the AUX
F1/S1
PHONE
ALMO
ALMI
Indicators Table 3-148 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX
3-164
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Indicator
3 Boards
State
Meaning
Off
l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.
SRV
On (green)
The system is working properly.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the system.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in the system.
Off
There is no power supplied to the system.
Auxiliary Ports and Management Ports Table 3-149 Description of the auxiliary ports and management ports Port
Description
F1/S1
Synchronous/Asynchronous data port
ALMI
Alarm input port
ALMO
Alarm output port
PHONE
Orderwire phone port
Connector Type RJ45
The auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the ports, however, are different. Figure 3-70 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector. Figure 3-70 Front view of the RJ45 connector
87654321
Table 3-150 provides the pin assignments for the F1/S1 port.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-165
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-150 Pin assignments for the F1/S1 port Port
Pin
Signal
F1/S1
1
Transmitting asynchronous data signals
2
Grounding end
3
Receiving asynchronous data signals
4
Transmitting synchronous data signals (TIP)
5
Transmitting synchronous data signals (RING)
6
Grounding end
7
Receiving synchronous data signals (TIP)
8
Receiving synchronous data signals (RING)
For the pin assignments for the ALMI and ALMO ports, see Table 3-151 and see Table 3-152. Table 3-151 Pin assignments for the ALMI port Port
Pin
Signal
ALMI
1
The first external alarm input signal
2
Grounding end for the first external alarm input signal
3
The second external alarm input signal
4
The third external alarm input signal
5
Grounding end for the third external alarm input signal
6
Grounding end for the second external alarm input signal
7
The forth external alarm input signal
8
Grounding end for the forth external alarm input signal
Table 3-152 Pin assignments for the ALMO port
3-166
Port
Pin
Signal
ALMO
1
The first external alarm output signal (+)
2
The first external alarm output signal (-)
3
The second external alarm output signal (+)
4
The first external alarm output signal (+)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Port
3 Boards
Pin
Signal
5
The first external alarm output signal (-)
6
The second external alarm output signal (-)
7
The second external alarm output signal (+)
8
The second external alarm output signal (-)
3.15.5 Valid Slots The AUX can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the AUX on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-71 Slots for the AUX in the IDU chassis Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)
Slot 11 (FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (AUX)
Slot 6 (AUX)
Slot 3 (AUX)
Slot 4 (AUX)
Slot 1 (AUX)
Slot 2 (AUX)
Figure 3-72 Logical slots of the AUX on the NMS Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 9 (PIU)
Slot 11 (FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (AUX)
Slot 6 (AUX)
Slot 3 (AUX)
Slot 4 (AUX)
Slot 1 (AUX)
Slot 2 (AUX)
Table 3-153 Slot allocation Item
Description
Slot allocation priority
Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 3 and 5
3.15.6 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including auxiliary port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-167
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Orderwire Interface Performance Table 3-154 Orderwire interface performance Item
Performance
Transmission path
Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huaweidefined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Orderwire type
Addressing call
Wire pair in each transmission direction
One symmetrical wire pair
Impedance (ohm)
600
NOTE
The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when OptiX RTN equipment calls 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire phones in the orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is established.
Synchronous Data Interface Performance Table 3-155 Synchronous data interface performance Item
Performance
Transmission path
Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)
64
Interface type
Codirectional
Interface characteristics
Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.
Asynchronous Data Interface Table 3-156 Asynchronous data interface performance
3-168
Item
Performance
Transmission path
Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)
≤ 19.2
Interface characteristics
Meets the RS-232 standard.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Mechanical Behavior Table 3-157 Mechanical behavior Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.27 kg0.594 lbs (0.27 kg)
Power Consumption Power consumption: < 1.3 W
3.16 PIU The PIU is the power interface board. The OptiX RTN 950 supports two PIUs, each of which accesses one -48 V/-60 V DC power supply. 3.16.1 Version Description The functional version of the PIU is TND1. 3.16.2 Functions and Features The PIU supports power access, power protection, surge protection status monitoring, and information reporting. 3.16.3 Working Principle The PIU consists of the protection and detection unit, EMI filtering unit, and communication control unit. 3.16.4 Front Panel There are indicators, power access ports, and a label on the front panel. 3.16.5 Valid Slots The PIU can be inserted in slots 9 and 10. The logical slots of the PIU on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. 3.16.6 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including input voltage, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
3.16.1 Version Description The functional version of the PIU is TND1.
3.16.2 Functions and Features The PIU supports power access, power protection, surge protection status monitoring, and information reporting. Table 3-158 lists the functions and features that the PIU supports. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-169
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-158 Functions and features that the PIU supports Function and Feature
PIU
Basic functions
Power access
Two PIUs are provided and each accesses one -48 V DC or -60 V DC power input.
Power output
The PIU provides other boards with -48 V power.
Protection
Supports 1+1 HSB protection.
Power protection
l Protection against overcurrent
Surge protection
Supported
Protection
Surge protection status monitoring
l Protection against short circuits
Supported
3.16.3 Working Principle The PIU consists of the protection and detection unit, EMI filtering unit, and communication control unit.
Functional Block Diagram Figure 3-73 shows the functional block diagram of the PIU. Figure 3-73 Functional block diagram of the PIU Backplane
-48 V/-60 V
Protection and detection unit
EMI filtering unit
Detection signal
-48 V
Detection signal Communicatio n control unit
Board operating in distributed power supply mode
System control and communication unit +3.3 V
Protection and Detection Unit The protection and detection unit primarily protects and detects the PIU. It performs the following functions:
3-170
l
Provides protection against lightning strike and surge.
l
Detects whether the surge-protection circuit fails and reports a surge-protection failure alarm. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
l
3 Boards
Monitors PIU temperature in real time and reports it to the system control and communication unit through the communication control unit.
EMI Filtering Unit The EMI filtering unit performs electro-magnetic interference (EMI) filtering.
Communication Control Unit The communication control unit achieves communication between the system control and communication unit and the PIU and reports the following information to the system control and communication unit: l
PIU manufacturing information
l
PCB version information
l
Surge-protection failure information
l
PIU temperature
3.16.4 Front Panel There are indicators, power access ports, and a label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram Figure 3-74 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU.
-48V PWR
NEG(-) RTN(+)
-60V
Figure 3-74 Front panel of the PIU
Indicators Table 3-159 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Indicator
Status
Description
PWR
On (green)
The power supply is connected.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-171
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Indicator
Status
Description
Off
There is no power supplied to the PIU or the power supply is connected incorrectly.
Ports The PIU accesses one power supply. Table 3-160 lists the types of the ports on the PIU and their respective usage. Table 3-160 Description of the ports on the PIU Port
Port Description
Connector Type
Corresponding Cable
NEG1(-)
-48 V power input port
2 mm HM power connector
5.1 Power Cable
RTN1(+)
BGND power input port
Labels Caution label for power operations: prompting you to read the operation guide before any power operations.
CAUTION Do not remove or install a PIU while the equipment is powered on. That is, turn off all the power supplies of the PIU before removing or installing it.
3.16.5 Valid Slots The PIU can be inserted in slots 9 and 10. The logical slots of the PIU on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-75 Slots for the PIU in the IDU chassis Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 11 Slot 9 (PIU)
3-172
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 1
Slot 2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Figure 3-76 Logical slots of the PIU on the NMS Slot 10 (PIU) Slot 11 Slot 9 (PIU)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 1
Slot 2
3.16.6 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including input voltage, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption. Table 3-161 lists the technical specifications for the PIU. Table 3-161 Technical specifications for the PIU Item
Performance
Dimensions
21.0 mm x 41.4 mm x 229.9 mm
Weight
0.12 kg
Power consumption
< 0.5 W
Input voltage
-38.4 V to -72.0 V
3.17 FAN The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat generated in the chassis through air cooling. 3.17.1 Version Description The functional version of the FAN is TND1. 3.17.2 Functions and Features The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status. 3.17.3 Working Principle The FAN consists of the fan unit, power unit, and communication monitoring unit. 3.17.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel. 3.17.5 Valid Slots The FAN can be inserted in slot 11 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS is the same as the physical slot. 3.17.6 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including board mechanical behavior and board power consumption. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-173
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
3.17.1 Version Description The functional version of the FAN is TND1.
3.17.2 Functions and Features The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status. Table 3-162 lists the functions and features that the FAN supports. Table 3-162 Functions and features that the FAN supports Function and Feature
FAN
Power input
Accesses one +12 V power input from the active system control, switching, and timing board and one +12 V power input from the standby system control, switching, and timing board to provide 1+1 protection.
Number of fans
6
Intelligent fan speed adjustment
Supported
Protection
Provides soft-start for the power supply of the fans, protects fans against overcurrent, and filters out high-frequency signals.
OM
l Reports the information about the fan rotating speed, alarms, version number, and board in-position status. l Provides alarm indicators.
3.17.3 Working Principle The FAN consists of the fan unit, power unit, and communication monitoring unit. Figure 3-77 shows the functional block diagram of the FAN. Figure 3-77 Functional block diagram of the FAN Backplane
Fan unit
+12 V
+12 V Power unit +12 V
Communication detection signal
Communication monitoring unit
3-174
Communication detection signal
System control and communication unit
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Power Unit l
Receives +12 V power from the backplane.
l
Provides the fan power with the following functions: soft-start, filtering, supply combining, and overcurrent protection.
Fan Unit Six air-cooling fans dissipate the heat generated by the system.
Communication Monitoring Unit l
Detects the manufacturing information, PCB version information, and environmental temperature of the FAN, and reports the information to the system control and communication unit.
l
Detects the fan rotating speed and adjusts the speed according to the pulse-width modulation signal from the system control and communication unit. The system adjusts the fan rotating speed based on the working temperature, as listed in Table 3-163. Table 3-163 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed Working Temperature
Rotating Speed
≤ 25°C
4800 rounds/minute
25°C to 60°C
Linear increase in accordance with the temperature
≥ 60°C
16000 rounds/minute
3.17.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram Figure 3-78 shows the appearance of the front panel of the FAN.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-175
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Figure 3-78 Front panel of the FAN
FAN
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
Indicators Table 3-164 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN Indicator
State
Meaning
FAN
On (green)
The fan is working properly.
On (red)
The fan is faulty.
Off
The fan is not powered on or is not installed.
NOTE
The CRIT, MAJ, or MIN indicator on the front panel of the FAN indicates the current alarm severity of the subrack.
ESD Wrist Strap Jack An ESD wrist strap needs to be connected to the ESD wrist strap jack to achieve the proper grounding of the human body.
Labels The front panel of the FAN has the following labels: l 3-176
ESD protection label: indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
l
3 Boards
Fan warning label: warns you not to touch fan leaves when a fan is rotating.
3.17.5 Valid Slots The FAN can be inserted in slot 11 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS is the same as the physical slot. Figure 3-79 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis Slot 10 Slot 11 (FAN) Slot 9
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 1
Slot 2
Figure 3-80 Logical slot of the FAN on the NMS Slot 10 Slot 11 (FAN) Slot 9
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 1
Slot 2
3.17.6 Technical Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including board mechanical behavior and board power consumption. Table 3-165 lists the technical specifications for the FAN. Table 3-165 Technical specifications for the FAN Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W x D)
28.5 mm x 86.2 mm x 217.6 mm
Weight
0.302 kg
Power consumption
< 4.1 W (room temperature) < 29.6 W (high temperature)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-177
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
4 Accessories
4
Accessories
About This Chapter The accessories of the OptiX RTN 950 include the E1 panel and the power distribution unit (PDU). Select appropriate accessories based on the requirements. 4.1 E1 Panel When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, install an E1 panel in the cabinet and this E1 panel functions as a DDF for the IDU. 4.2 PDU A PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet to distribute the input power supply to devices in the cabinet.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-1
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
4 Accessories
4.1 E1 Panel When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, install an E1 panel in the cabinet and this E1 panel functions as a DDF for the IDU. The dimensions (H x W x D) of the E1 panel are 42 mm x 483 mm x 33 mm. An E1 panel provides cable distribution for 16 E1s.
Front Panel Diagram Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
R9
R10
R11
R12
R13
R14
R15
R16
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
T10
T11
T12
T13
T14
T15
T16
1-8 9-16
Ports Table 4-1 Port description of an E1 panel Port
Description
Connector Type
T1-T16
Transmit ports for the first to sixteenth E1 ports (connected to external equipment)
BNC
R1-R16
Receive ports for the first to sixteenth E1 ports (connected to external equipment)
1-8
The first to eighth E1 ports (connected to an IDU)
9-16
The ninth to sixteenth E1 ports (connected to an IDU)
Grounding bolt
Connecting a PGND cable
DB37
-
NOTE
The port impedance of each E1 port on an E1 panel is 75 ohms.
Figure 4-2 shows the front view of an E1 port that is connected to an IDU. Table 4-2 provides the pin assignments for the E1 port.
4-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
4 Accessories
Figure 4-2 Front view of an E1 port (E1 panel)
Pos. 1
Pos. 37
Table 4-2 Pin assignments for an E1 port (E1 panel)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
20
The first E1 received differential signal (+)
21
The first E1 transmitted differential signal (+)
2
The first E1 received differential signal (-)
3
The first E1 transmitted differential signal (-)
22
The second E1 received differential signal (+)
23
The second E1 transmitted differential signal (+)
4
The second E1 received differential signal (-)
5
The second E1 transmitted differential signal (-)
24
The third E1 received differential signal (+)
25
The third E1 transmitted differential signal (+)
6
The third E1 received differential signal (-)
7
The third E1 transmitted differential signal (-)
26
The fourth E1 received differential signal (+)
27
The fourth E1 transmitted differential signal (+)
8
The fourth E1 received differential signal (-)
9
The fourth E1 transmitted differential signal (-)
36
The fifth E1 received differential signal (+)
35
The fifth E1 transmitted differential signal (+)
17
The fifth E1 received differential signal (-)
16
The fifth E1 transmitted differential signal (-)
34
The sixth E1 received differential signal (+)
33
The sixth E1 transmitted differential signal (+)
15
The sixth E1 received differential signal (-)
14
The sixth E1 transmitted differential signal (-)
32
The seventh E1 received differential signal (+)
31
The seventh E1 transmitted differential signal (+)
13
The seventh E1 received differential signal (-)
12
The seventh E1 transmitted differential signal (-)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-3
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
4 Accessories
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
30
The eighth E1 received differential signal (+)
29
The eighth E1 transmitted differential signal (+)
11
The eighth E1 received differential signal (-)
10
The eighth E1 transmitted differential signal (-)
Others
Reserved
-
-
4.2 PDU A PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet to distribute the input power supply to devices in the cabinet. 4.2.1 Front Panel There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches on the front panel of a PDU. 4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle After implementing simple power distribution, a PDU feeds power to devices in a cabinet. 4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode A PDU supports DC-C and DC-I power distribution. The DC-C power distribution is the default mode.
4.2.1 Front Panel There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches on the front panel of a PDU.
Front Panel Diagram Figure 4-3 Front panel of the PDU 1
1
2
3
2
4
OUTPUT
3
4
A
B
ON
2
1
3
4
OUTPUT
ON RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-)
OFF 20A
20A 20A 20A
OFF
INPUT
20A
20A 20A 20A
5
4-4
6
1. Output power terminals (A)
2. PGND terminals
3. Input power terminals
4. Output power terminals (B)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
4 Accessories
5. Power switches (A)
6. Power switches (B)
Ports Table 4-3 Ports on the PDU Position
Port
Description
Output power terminals (A)
+
Power output (+)
-
Power output (-)
PGND terminals
Wiring terminal for a two-hole OT terminal
For connecting PGND cables
Input power terminals
RTN1(+)
The first power input (+)
RTN2(+)
The second power input (+)
NEG1(-)
The first power input (-)
NEG2(-)
The second power input (-)
Output power terminals (B)
+
Power output (+)
-
Power output (-)
Power switches (A)
20 A
Switches for power outputs
Power switches (B)
20 A
The fuse capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to the right correspond to output power terminals 1 to 4 on side A. Switches for power outputs The fuse capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to the right correspond to output power terminals 1 to 4 on side B.
4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle After implementing simple power distribution, a PDU feeds power to devices in a cabinet.
Functions l
The PDU supports two -48 V/-60 V DC power inputs.
l
Each input power supply provides four outputs.
l
The fuse capacity of the switch for each power output is 20 A.
l
The PDU supports DC-C and DC-I power distribution.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-5
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
4 Accessories
Working Principle A PDU consists of input terminals, output terminals, and circuit breakers and it performs simple distribution operations for the input power. Figure 4-4 Functional block diagram of the PDU
OUTPUT A + SW1
SW2
INPUT
+ +
SW3
RTN1(+) BGND
+
SW4
RTN2(+)
-
1 2
3 4
OUTPUT B +
NEG1(-) BGND
SW1
NEG2(-) SW2
+ +
SW4
PGND
+
SW4
-
1 2
3 4
4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode A PDU supports DC-C and DC-I power distribution. The DC-C power distribution is the default mode. A short-circuit copper bar inside a PDU controls the power distribution mode of the PDU.
DC-C Power Distribution Mode To use DC-C power distribution, use the short-circuit copper bar to short-circuit terminal RTN1 (+), terminal RTN2(+), and PGND terminals.
4-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
4 Accessories
Figure 4-5 Interior of the PDU in DC-C mode
DC-I Power Distribution Mode To use DC-I power distribution, remove the short-circuit copper bar. Figure 4-6 Interior of the PDU in DC-I mode
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-7
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
5 Cables
5
Cables
About This Chapter This chapter describes the purpose, appearance, and pin assignments of various cables used on the IDU 950. 5.1 Power Cable A power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to a power supply device (for example, a PDU on top of the cabinet) for access of the -48 V power to the IDU. 5.2 PGND Cable PGND cables are available in two categories: IDU PGND cables and E1 panel PGND cables. 5.3 IF Jumper An IF jumper connects the IDU to an IF cable. The IF jumper works with the IF cable to transmit IF signals and O&M signals in addition to supplying -48 V power between the ODU and the IDU. 5.4 XPIC Cable An XPIC cable transmits reference IF signals between the two XPIC boards in an XPIC workgroup to implement the XPIC function. 5.5 Fiber Jumper A fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper has an LC/PC connector that is connected to an SDH optical port or GE optical port on the OptiX RTN 950. The connector at the other end of the fiber jumper depends on the type of the optical port on the equipment to be connected. 5.6 E1 Cables E1 cables are available in two categories: E1 cable (Anea 96) connected to the external equipment and E1 cable connected to the E1 panel. 5.7 Orderwire Cable An orderwire cable connects an orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire cable are terminated with an RJ11 connector. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the PHONE port on the AUX. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected to the port of the orderwire phone. 5.8 Network Cable Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-1
5 Cables
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are terminated with an RJ45 connector.
5-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
5 Cables
5.1 Power Cable A power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to a power supply device (for example, a PDU on top of the cabinet) for access of the -48 V power to the IDU.
Cable Diagram Figure 5-1 Power cable
Table 5-1 Power cable specifications Model
Cable
Terminal
6 mm2 power cable and terminal
Power cable, 450 V/ 750 V, H07Z-K-6 mm2, blue/black, low smoke zero halogen cable
Common terminal, single cord end terminal, conductor cross section 6 mm2, 30 A, insertion depth 12 mm, blue
NOTE
For the OptiX RTN 950, power cables with a 6 mm2 cross-sectional area can extend for a maximum distance of 43 m.
5.2 PGND Cable PGND cables are available in two categories: IDU PGND cables and E1 panel PGND cables. 5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable An IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and external equipment share the same ground. 5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-3
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
5 Cables
An E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point of external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel and external equipment share the same ground.
5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable An IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and external equipment share the same ground.
Cable Diagram Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable Main label 1
Cable tie
H.S.tube
2
L 1. Bare crimping terminal, OT
2. Bare crimping terminal, OT
Pin Assignments None.
5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable An E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point of external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel and external equipment share the same ground.
5-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
5 Cables
Cable Diagram Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable Main label 1
L Bare crimping terminal, OT
Pin Assignments None.
5.3 IF Jumper An IF jumper connects the IDU to an IF cable. The IF jumper works with the IF cable to transmit IF signals and O&M signals in addition to supplying -48 V power between the ODU and the IDU. An IF jumper is a 2 m RG-223 cable. One end of the IF jumper has a type-N connector that is connected to the IF cable. The other end of the IF jumper has a TNC connector that is connected to the IF board. NOTE
l A 5D IF cable is directly connected to the IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required. l If an RG-8U or 1/2-inch IF cable is used, an IF jumper is required to connect the RG-8U or 1/2-inch IF cable to the IF board.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-5
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
5 Cables
Cable Diagram Figure 5-4 IF jumper 1 H.S.tube 2 PCS
2
L = 3 cm
2000 mm 1. RF coaxial cable connector, TNC, male
2. RF coaxial cable connector, type-N, female
Pin Assignments None.
5.4 XPIC Cable An XPIC cable transmits reference IF signals between the two XPIC boards in an XPIC workgroup to implement the XPIC function. An XPIC cable is an RG316 cable that has SMA connectors at both ends. One end of the XPIC cable is connected to the X-IN port of one XPIC board in an XPIC workgroup, and the other end of the XPIC cable is connected to the X-OUT port of the other XPIC board in the same XPIC work group. XPIC cables are available in the following types:
5-6
l
XPIC cables with angle connectors: These XPIC cables are long and used to connect two XPIC boards in the horizontal direction, for example, XPIC boards in slots 3 and 4.
l
XPIC cables with straight connectors: These XPIC cables are short and used to connect two XPIC boards in the vertical direction, for example, IFX2 boards in slots 3 and 5. These XPIC cables are also used to connect the X-IN port to the X-OUT port on the same XPIC board to loop back signals.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
5 Cables
Cable Diagram Figure 5-5 XPIC cable 1
1
L1 2
2
L2
1. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, angle, male
2. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, straight, male
Pin Assignments None.
5.5 Fiber Jumper A fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper has an LC/PC connector that is connected to an SDH optical port or GE optical port on the OptiX RTN 950. The connector at the other end of the fiber jumper depends on the type of the optical port on the equipment to be connected.
Types of Fiber Jumpers Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers Connector 1
Connector 2
Cable
LC/PC
FC/PC
2 mm single-mode fiber 2 mm multi-mode fiber
LC/PC Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
SC/PC Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2 mm single-mode fiber 5-7
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
5 Cables
Connector 1
Connector 2
Cable 2 mm multi-mode fiber
LC/PC
LC/PC
2 mm single-mode fiber 2 mm multi-mode fiber
NOTE
For the OptiX RTN 950, multi-mode fibers are required to connect to 1000BASE-SX GE optical ports.
Fiber Connectors The following figures show three common types of fiber connectors, namely, LC/PC connector, SC/PC connector, and FC/PC connector. Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector
5-8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
5 Cables
Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector
Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector
5.6 E1 Cables E1 cables are available in two categories: E1 cable (Anea 96) connected to the external equipment and E1 cable connected to the E1 panel. 5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment An E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to directly receive E1 signals from or transmits E1 signals to external equipment. 5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-9
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
5 Cables
An E1 cable that is connected to the E1 panel is used when the E1 panel functions as a DDF. One end of the E1 cable has an Anea 96 connector that is connected to an E1 port on the IDU. The other end of the E1 cable has a DB37 connector that is connected to the E1 panel.
5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment An E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to directly receive E1 signals from or transmits E1 signals to external equipment. Each E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment can transmit a maximum of 16 E1 signals. There are two types of E1 cables that are connected to the external equipment: 75-ohm coaxial cables and 120-ohm twisted pair cables.
Cable Diagram Figure 5-9 E1 cable connected to the external equipment Main label 1 W
X1
A ViewA
Pos.96 Cable connector, Anea, 96-pin,female
Pos.1
1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female NOTE
l A 120-ohm E1 cable and a 75-ohm E1 cable have the same appearance. l The core diameter of a 75-ohm E1 cable is 1.6 mm. Therefore, use a crimping tool with an opening of 2.5 mm (0.098-inch) to attach the end of the 75-ohm E1 cable on the DDF frame with a 75-1-1 coaxial connector.
5-10
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
5 Cables
Pin Assignments Table 5-3 Pin assignments for a 75-ohm E1 cable Pin
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
W Core
Serial No.
1
Tip
1
2
Ring
3
Tip
4
Ring
5
Tip
6
Ring
7
Tip
8
Ring
9
Tip
10
Ring
11
Tip
12
Ring
13
Tip
14
Ring
15
Tip
16
Ring
18
Ring
17
Tip
20
Ring
19
Tip
22
Ring
21
Tip
24
Ring
23
Tip
50
Ring
49
Tip
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
Remark s
Pin
R0
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
R9
R10
R11
R12
W
Remark s
Core
Serial No.
25
Tip
2
T0
26
Ring
27
Tip
4
T1
28
Ring
29
Tip
6
T2
30
Ring
31
Tip
8
T3
32
Ring
33
Tip
10
T4
34
Ring
35
Tip
12
T5
36
Ring
37
Tip
14
T6
38
Ring
39
Tip
16
T7
40
Ring
42
Ring
18
T8
41
Tip
44
Ring
20
T9
43
Tip
46
Ring
22
T10
45
Tip
48
Ring
24
T11
47
Tip
74
Ring
26
T12
73
Tip
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-11
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
5 Cables
Pin
W Core
Serial No.
52
Ring
27
51
Tip
54
Ring
53
Tip
56
Ring
55 Shell
Remark s
Pin
R13
W
Remark s
Core
Serial No.
76
Ring
28
T13
75
Tip
78
Ring
30
T14
75
Tip
80
Ring
32
T15
Tip
79
Tip
Braid
Shell
Braid
29
R14
31
R15
Table 5-4 Pin assignments for a 120-ohm E1 cable Pin
5-12
W
Rema rks
Tape Color
Pin
Blue
Color of the Core
Relati onshi p
1
White
R0
2
Blue
Twiste d pair
3
White
R1
4
Green
Twiste d pair
5
White
R2
6
Grey
Twiste d pair
7
Red
R3
8
Orang e
Twiste d pair
9
Red
R4
10
Brown
Twiste d pair
11
Black
R5
12
Blue
Twiste d pair
13
Black
R6
14
Green
Twiste d pair
W
Rema rks
Tape Color
Blue
Color of the Core
Relati onshi p
25
White
T0
26
Orang e
Twiste d pair
27
White
T1
28
Brown
Twiste d pair
29
Red
T2
30
Blue
Twiste d pair
31
Red
T3
32
Green
Twiste d pair
33
Red
T4
34
Grey
Twiste d pair
35
Black
T5
36
Orang e
Twiste d pair
37
Black
T6
38
Brown
Twiste d pair
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Pin
W Color of the Core
Relati onshi p
15
Black
Twiste d pair
16
Grey
17
White
18
Blue
19
White
20
Green
21
White
22
Grey
23
Red
24
Orang e
49
Red
50
Brown
51
Black
52
Blue
53
Black
54
Green
55
Black
56 Shell
5 Cables
Rema rks
Tape Color
Pin
W
Rema rks
Color of the Core
Relati onshi p
39
Yello w
Twiste d pair
T7
40
Blue
41
White
T8
42
Orang e
Twiste d pair
43
White
T9
44
Brown
Twiste d pair
45
Red
T10
46
Blue
Twiste d pair
47
Red
T11
48
Green
Twiste d pair
73
Red
T12
74
Grey
Twiste d pair
75
Black
T13
76
Orang e
Twiste d pair
77
Black
T14
78
Brown
Twiste d pair
79
Yello w
Twiste d pair
T15
Grey
80
Blue
Braid
Shell
Braid
R7
Twiste d pair
R8
Twiste d pair
R9
Twiste d pair
R10
Twiste d pair
R11
Twiste d pair
R12
Twiste d pair
R13
Twiste d pair
R14
Twiste d pair
R15
Orang e
Tape Color
Orang e
5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel An E1 cable that is connected to the E1 panel is used when the E1 panel functions as a DDF. One end of the E1 cable has an Anea 96 connector that is connected to an E1 port on the IDU. The other end of the E1 cable has a DB37 connector that is connected to the E1 panel. Each E1 cable can transmit 16 E1 signals. The port impedance of the E1 cable is 75 ohms.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-13
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
5 Cables
Cable Diagram Figure 5-10 E1 cable connected to the E1 panel
X1: Cable connector, Anea 96, female
X2/X3: Cable connector, type D, 37 male
Label 1: "CHAN 0-7"
Label 2: "CHAN 8-15"
Pin Assignments Table 5-5 Pin assignments for the E1 cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector and a DB37 connector
5-14
Wire
Connecto r X1
Connecto r X2/X3
Remarks
Connecto r X1
Connecto r X2/X3
Remarks
W1
X1.2
X2.20
R0
X1.10
X2.36
R4
X1.1
X2.2
X1.9
X2.17
X1.26
X2.21
X1.34
X2.35
X1.25
X2.3
X1.33
X2.16
X1.4
X2.22
X1.12
X2.34
X1.3
X2.4
X1.11
X2.15
X1.28
X2.23
X1.36
X2.33
X1.27
X2.5
X1.35
X2.14
X1.6
X2.24
X1.14
X2.32
T0
R1
T1
R2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
T4
R5
T5
R6
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Wire
W2
5 Cables
Connecto r X1
Connecto r X2/X3
X1.5
X2.6
X1.30
X2.25
X1.29
X2.7
X1.8
X2.26
X1.7
X2.8
X1.32
X2.27
X1.31
X2.9
X1.18
X3.20
X1.17
X3.2
X1.42
X3.21
X1.41
X3.3
X1.20
X3.22
X1.19
X3.4
X1.44
X3.23
X1.43
X3.5
X1.22
X3.24
X1.21
X3.6
X1.46
X3.25
X1.45
X3.7
X1.24
X3.26
X1.23
X3.8
X1.48
X3.27
X1.47 Shell
Remarks
Connecto r X1
Connecto r X2/X3
X1.13
X2.13
X1.38
X2.31
X1.37
X2.12
X1.16
X2.30
X1.15
X2.11
X1.40
X2.29
X1.39
X2.10
X1.50
X3.36
X1.49
X3.17
X1.74
X3.35
X1.73
X3.16
X1.52
X3.34
X1.51
X3.15
X1.76
X3.33
X1.75
X3.14
X1.54
X3.32
X1.53
X3.13
X1.78
X3.31
X1.77
X3.12
X1.56
X3.30
X1.55
X3.11
X1.80
X3.29
X3.9
X1.79
X3.10
Braid
Shell
Braid
T2
R3
T3
R8
T8
R9
T9
R10
T10
R11
T11
Remarks
T6
R7
T7
R12
T12
R13
T13
R14
T14
R15
T15
5.7 Orderwire Cable An orderwire cable connects an orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire cable are terminated with an RJ11 connector. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the PHONE port on the AUX. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected to the port of the orderwire phone.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-15
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
5 Cables
Cable Diagram Figure 5-11 Orderwire cable 1
Main label 6
6
1
X1
X2
1
1. Orderwire port, RJ11 connector
Pin Assignments Table 5-6 Pin assignments for the orderwire cable Connector X1
Connector X2
Function
X1.3
X2.3
Tip
X1.4
X2.4
Ring
5.8 Network Cable A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are terminated with an RJ45 connector. Two types of interfaces use RJ45 connectors, which are medium dependent interfaces (MDIs) and MDI-Xs. MDIs are used by terminal equipment, for example, network card. The pin assignments for MDIs are provided in Table 5-7. MDI-Xs are used by network equipment. The pin assignments for MDI-Xs are provided in Table 5-8. Table 5-7 Pin assignments for MDIs Pin
5-16
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
1
TX+
Transmitting data (+)
BIDA+
Bidirectional data wire A (+)
2
TX-
Transmitting data (-)
BIDA-
Bidirectional data wire A (-)
3
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+
Bidirectional data wire B (+)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Pin
5 Cables
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
4
Reserved
-
BIDC+
Bidirectional data wire C (+)
5
Reserved
-
BIDC-
Bidirectional data wire C (-)
6
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-
Bidirectional data wire B (-)
7
Reserved
-
BIDD+
Bidirectional data wire D (+)
8
Reserved
-
BIDD-
Bidirectional data wire D (-)
Table 5-8 Pin assignments for MDI-Xs Pin
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
1
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+
Bidirectional data wire B (+)
2
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-
Bidirectional data wire B (-)
3
TX+
Transmitting data (+)
BIDA+
Bidirectional data wire A (+)
4
Reserved
-
BIDD+
Bidirectional data wire D (+)
5
Reserved
-
BIDD-
Bidirectional data wire D (-)
6
TX-
Transmitting data (-)
BIDA-
Bidirectional data wire A (-)
7
Reserved
-
BIDC+
Bidirectional data wire C (+)
8
Reserved
-
BIDC-
Bidirectional data wire C (-)
Straight-through cables are used between MDIs and MDI-Xs, and crossover cables are used between MDIs or between MDI-Xs. The only difference between straight-through cables and crossover cables is with regard to the pin assignment. The NMS/COM port, NE cascading port, and Ethernet electrical service ports of the OptiX RTN 950 support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. Straight-through cables and Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-17
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
5 Cables
crossover cables can be used to connect the NMS/COM port, EXT port, and Ethernet electrical service ports to MDIs or MDI-Xs.
Cable Diagram Figure 5-12 Network cable 1
Label 1 Main label
Label 2
8
8
1
1
1. Network port connector, RJ45
Pin Assignments Table 5-9 Pin assignments for the straight-through cable Connector X1
Connector X2
Color
Relation
X1.1
X2.1
White/Orange
Twisted pair
X1.2
X2.2
Orange
X1.3
X2.3
White/Green
X1.6
X2.6
Green
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
X1.5
X2.5
White/Blue
X1.7
X2.7
White/Brown
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Table 5-10 Pin assignments for the crossover cable
5-18
Connector X1
Connector X2
Color
Relation
X1.6
X2.2
Orange
Twisted pair
X1.3
X2.1
White/Orange
X1.1
X2.3
White/Green
X1.2
X2.6
Green
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Twisted pair
Twisted pair Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
5 Cables
Connector X1
Connector X2
Color
X1.5
X2.5
White/Blue
X1.7
X2.7
White/Brown
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Relation
Twisted pair
5-19
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A
Parameters Description
This chapter describes the parameters used in this document. A.1 Parameters for Network Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to network management. A.2 Radio Link Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links. A.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP). A.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services. A.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces. A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the Packet Plane This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet features on the packet plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet port parameters, and QoS parameters. A.7 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the EoPDH Plane This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet features on the EoPDH plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet port parameters, and QoS parameters. A.8 RMON Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances. A.9 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS/PWE3 services. A.10 Clock Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks. A.11 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces This topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-1
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.1 Parameters for Network Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to network management. A.1.1 Parameters for NE Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing network elements (NEs). A.1.2 Parameters for Communications Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for communications management. A.1.3 Parameters for Network Security Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to network security management.
A.1.1 Parameters for NE Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing network elements (NEs). A.1.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs. A.1.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE creation. A.1.1.3 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs. A.1.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs. A.1.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time This parameter describes the parameters that are used for localization management of the NE time. A.1.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the standard NTP key. A.1.1.7 Parameter Description: License Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the license. A.1.1.8 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs This parameter describes the parameters that are used for automatically disabling the functions of an NE.
A.1.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.
Navigation Path Choose File > Discovery > NE from the Main Menu.
A-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for the Search Field Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Address Type
IP Address of GNE
IP Address Range of GNE
l If the OSI protocol is used on the DCN, you can search for an NE based on NSAP Address only.
NSAP Address IP Address Range of GNE
l If the IP protocol is used on the DCN, you can search for an NE based on IP Address of GNE or IP Address Range of GNE. l To search for all the NEs that communicate with the gateway NE, select IP Address Range of GNE. l To select the gateway NE only, select IP Address of GNE. NOTE If Address Type is set to IP Address of GNE or IP Address Range of GNE, and if the U2000 (server) and the gateway NE are located in different network segments, ensure that the U2000 and relevant routers are configured with the IP routes for the network segment in which the U2000 and gateway NE are located. If Address Type is set to NSAP Address, ensure that the OSI protocol stack is installed.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-3
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Search Address
-
-
l If Address Type is set to IP Address of GNE, enter the IP address of the gateway NE, such as 129.9.x.x. l If Address Type is set to IP Address Range of GNE, enter the number of the IP network segment in which the gateway NE is located, such as 129.9.255.255. l If Address Type is set to NSAP Address, enter the NSAP address of the gateway NE.
User Name
-
-
This parameter specifies the user name of the gateway NE.
Password
-
-
This parameter specifies the password of the gateway NE.
A-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter for Searching for NEs Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Create NE after search
Selected
Deselected
l To create NEs in batches, it is recommended that you select Create NE after search. The NEs are automatically created after they are found.
Deselected
l After Create NE after search is selected, enter NE User and Password that are used for creating an NE. NOTE If only Create NE after search is selected, Search for NE is selected automatically.
NE User
-
-
l This parameter specifies the user name to be entered when an NE is created. l This parameter is valid only when Create NE after search is selected.
Password
-
-
l This parameter specifies the password to be entered when an NE is created. l This parameter is valid only when Create NE after search is selected.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-5
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Upload after create
Selected
Deselected
l This parameter specifies whether to automatically upload the NE data after the NE is found and created.
Deselected
l If only Upload after create is selected, Search for NE and Create NE after search are selected automatically.
Parameter for the Found NEs Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE ID
-
-
This parameter indicates the ID of the found NE, which consists of extended ID and NE ID. For example, in the case of NE9-25, the value 9 indicates the extended ID, and the value 25 indicates the NE ID.
GNE Address
-
-
This parameter indicates the address of the gateway NE that is connected to the found NE.
GNE ID
-
-
This parameter indicates the ID of the gateway NE that is connected to the found NE.
Created As GNE
Yes
Yes
l This parameter specifies the password to be entered when an NE is created.
No
l This parameter is valid only when Create NE after search is selected.
A-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Connection Mode
Common
Common
The communication between the client and the server is encrypted if this parameter is set to Security SSL.
Security SSL
Port
-
1400
This parameter specifies the communication port.
NE Status
Created
-
This parameter indicates whether the found NE is created.
Uncreated
A.1.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE creation.
Navigation Path 1.
In the Physical ViewPhysical Root, right-click New > NE.
2.
Choose RTN Series > OptiX RTN 950 from the Object Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Type
-
-
This parameter indicates the type of the NE to be created.
ID
1 to 49135
-
l The ID refers to the basic ID. If the extended ID is not used, the basic ID of an NE must be unique on the networks that are managed by the same NMS. l This parameter is set according to the planning information. l The NE ID consisting of the basic ID and extended ID identifies an NE on the NMS.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-7
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Extended ID
1 to 254
9
If the number of existing NEs does not exceed the range represented by the basic ID, do not change Extended ID.
Name
-
-
l This parameter specifies the name of the NE. l After you have specified the name of the NE, the name is displayed under the icon of the NE.
Remarks
-
-
This parameter specifies the remarks of the NE.
Gateway Type
Non-Gateway
Non-Gateway
l This parameter is set to Gateway if the new NE is a gateway NE.
Gateway
l This parameter is set to Non-Gateway if the new NE is a nongateway NE. l This parameter is set according to the DCN planning if the new NE can function as a gateway NE or a nongateway NE. Affiliated Gateway
-
-
This parameter indicates the gateway NE of the new NE when Gateway Type is set to Non-Gateway.
Affiliated Gateway Protocol
IP
IP
l This parameter needs to be set when Gateway Type is set to Gateway.
OSI
l When the OSI over DCC solution is used, this parameter is set to OSI. l In other cases, this parameter is set to IP.
A-8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IP Address
-
-
This parameter indicates the IP address of the new NE. This parameter needs to be set when Affiliated Gateway Protocol is set to IP.
Connection Mode
Common
Common
The communication between the client and the server is encrypted if this parameter is set to Security SSL.
Security SSL
Port
-
1400
This parameter specifies the communication port.
NE User
-
-
This parameter specifies the user name to be entered when an NE is created.
Password
-
-
This parameter specifies the password to be entered when an NE is created.
NSAP Address
-
-
This parameter indicates the NSAP address of the new NE. This parameter needs to be set when Affiliated Gateway Protocol is set to OSI. You need to set the area ID only, and the other parts are automatically generated by the NE.
A.1.1.3 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.
Navigation Path 1.
In the Main Topology, right-click the NE whose ID needs to be modified.
2.
Choose Object Attributes.
3.
Click Modify NE ID.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-9
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Changing NE IDs Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
New ID
-
-
l The new ID refers to the basic ID. If the extended ID is not used, the basic ID of an NE must be unique on the networks that are managed by the same NMS. l This parameter is set according to the planning information. NOTE The NE ID consisting of the basic ID and extended ID identifies an NE on the NMS.
1 to 254
New Extended ID
9
If the number of existing NEs does not exceed the range represented by the basic ID, do not change the extended ID.
A.1.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.
Navigation Path 1.
Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Main Menu.
2.
Click the NE Time Synchronization tab.
Parameters for NE Time Synchronization Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Name
-
-
This parameter indicates the name of the NE.
NE ID
-
-
This parameter indicates the ID of the NE.
A-10
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Synchronous Mode
Standard NTP
Null
l If this parameter is set to NM, the NE synchronizes the time of the NMS server.
NM Null
l If this parameter is set to Standard NTP, the NE synchronizes the Network Time Protocol (NTP) server through the standard NTP. Standard NTP Authentication
Enabled
Disabled
This parameter is valid only when Synchronous Mode is set to Standard NTP.
Disabled
Parameters for the Standard NTP Server Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Standard NTP Server Identifier
NE ID
NE ID
l If the NE functions as the gateway NE, this parameter is set to IP.
IP
l If the NE functions as a non-gateway NE and communicates with the gateway NE through the HWECC protocol, this parameter is set to NE ID. l If the NE functions as a non-gateway NE and communicates with the gateway NE through the IP protocol, this parameter is set to IP.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-11
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Standard NTP Server
-
-
l If the NE functions as the gateway NE, this parameter is set to the IP address of the external NTP server. l If the NE functions as a non-gateway NE, this parameter is set to the ID or IP address of the gateway NE.
Standard NTP Server Key
0 to 1024
0
l If the NTP server does not need to authenticated, this parameter is set to the value "0". l If the NTP server needs to be authenticated, the authentication is performed according to the allocated key of the NTP server. In this case, the NE authenticates the NTP server based on the key and the corresponding password (specified in the management of the standard NTP key).
Parameters for Setting Automatic Synchronization Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Synchronization Starting Time
-
-
l This parameter specifies the start time of the synchronization period. After this parameter is specified, the NMS and the NE synchronize the time once at the intervals of Synchronization Period(days). l It is recommended that you use the default value.
A-12
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
DST
Selected
Deselected
l This parameter indicates whether Synchronization Starting Time is the daylight saving time.
Deselected
l This parameter is set according to the actual situation. Synchronization Period (days)
1 to 300
l This parameter indicates the period of synchronizing the time of the NE with the time of the NMS.
1
l It is recommended that you use the default value.
A.1.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time This parameter describes the parameters that are used for localization management of the NE time.
Navigation Path 1.
Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Localization Management from the Main Menu.
2.
Select the NE for time localization management from the Object Tree, and then click .
Parameters for Localization Management of the NE Time Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE
-
-
This parameter indicates the name of the NE.
TimeZone
-
-
This parameter indicates the time zone.
DST
-
-
This parameter indicates whether DST is enabled.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-13
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Time Zone Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Time Zone
-
-
l After the time zone is changed, the current time of the NE is changed accordingly. l This parameter is set according to the place where the NE is located.
DST
Selected
Deselected
Deselected
l The parameters related to daylight saving time can be valid only when this parameter is selected. l This parameter is set according to the situation whether daylight saving time is used in the place where the NE is located.
1 to 120
Offset
-
This parameter specifies the offset value of the daylight saving time.
WEEK
This parameter specifies the method of adjusting the daylight saving time.
Unit: minute(s) Start Rule
WEEK DATE
Start Time
-
-
This parameter specifies the start daylight saving time.
End Rule
WEEK
WEEK
This parameter specifies the method of adjusting the daylight saving time.
-
This parameter specifies the end daylight saving time.
DATE End Time
-
A.1.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the standard NTP key.
Navigation Path
A-14
1.
Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Main Menu.
2.
Click the Standard NTP Key Management tab.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Key
1 to 1024
-
l This parameter indicates the key for NTP authentication. l This parameter is set according to the requirements of the external NTP server.
-
Password
-
l This parameter indicates the password that corresponds to Key. l This parameter is set according to the requirements of the external NTP server.
Yes
Trusted
Yes
No
l When this parameter is set to No, the key verification is not trusted. After receiving the key, the NE rejects the clock synchronization service. l When this parameter is set to Yes, the key verification is trusted. After receiving the key, the NE provides the clock synchronization service. l After receiving an unknown or incorrect key, the NE rejects the clock synchronization service. Hence, it is recommended that you set a trusted key only.
A.1.1.7 Parameter Description: License Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the license.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-15
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > License Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the License Management tab.
Parameters for Managing Licenses Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
This parameter displays the boards that need to be supported by licenses.
File Type
-
-
This parameter displays the license type corresponding to each board.
Capacity
-
-
This parameter displays the capacity of each board.
Load
-
-
This parameter displays whether the corresponding license file is loaded to each board.
A.1.1.8 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs This parameter describes the parameters that are used for automatically disabling the functions of an NE.
Navigation Path 1.
On the Main Topology, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE Function.
2.
Select the NE whose functions need to be automatically disabled from the Object Tree, and .
then click
Parameters for Automatically Disabling the Functions of NEs Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Name
-
-
This parameter indicates the name of the NE.
NE Type
OptiX RTN 950
-
This parameter indicates the type of the NE.
Operation Type
-
-
This parameter indicates the type of the operation, such as loopback, and shutdown of the laser.
Auto Disabling
Disabled
Enabled
This parameter specifies whether to automatically disable the operations such as loopback, and shutdown of the laser.
Enabled
A-16
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Auto Disabling Time(min)
1 to 2880
5
This parameter specifies the time of automatically disabling the operations such as loopback, and shutdown of the laser.
A.1.2 Parameters for Communications Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for communications management. A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting. A.1.2.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the DCC rate. A.1.2.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for DCC transparent transmission management. A.1.2.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC This topic describes the parameters that are related to the extended ECCs of Ethernet ports. A.1.2.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE ECC link management. A.1.2.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for IP route management. A.1.2.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for new static IP routes. A.1.2.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings This topic describes the parameters that are used for OSPF settings. A.1.2.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the proxy ARP. A.1.2.10 Parameter Description: Port OSPF Setting This section describes the parameters that are used for setting port OSPF parameters. A.1.2.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter This topic describes the parameters that are related to the network layer of the OSI protocol model. A.1.2.12 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table This topic describes the parameters that are related to OSI routing tables. A.1.2.13 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel This topic describes the parameters that are related to the OSI tunnels. A.1.2.14 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for bandwidth management of the inband DCN. A.1.2.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting ports of the inband DCN. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-17
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.1.2.16 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol Setting This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting a protocol of the inband DCN. A.1.2.17 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Access Control This section describes the parameters for configuring access control. A.1.2.18 Parameter Description: Access Control This topic describes the parameters that are used for access control of the NMS.
A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.
Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.
Parameters for NE Communication Setting Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IP Address
-
Before delivery, the IP address of the NE is set to 129.9.0.x. The letter x indicates the basic ID.
Gateway IP Address
-
0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask
-
255.255.0.0
In the HWECC solution, an IP address is set according to the following rules: l The IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway of the gateway NE should meet the planning requirements of the external DCN. l If an NE uses the extended ECC, the IP address must be in the same network segment. l The IP address of other NEs should be set according to the NE ID. In this case, the IP address of an NE should be set in the format of 0x81000000+ID. That is, if the ID is 0x090001, the IP address should be set to 129.9.0.1.
Extended ID
1 to 254
9
l Do not change the extended ID when the number of actual NEs does not exceed the range permitted by the basic NE ID. l It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value.
NSAP Address
A-18
-
-
This parameter is valid only when the OSI over DCC solution is applied. This parameter is used to set only the area ID of an NSAP address. The other parts of the NSAP address are automatically generated by the NE.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Connection Mode
Common + Security SSL
Common + Security SSL
l Specifies the connection mode that the gateway NE allows the NMS to use for connecting to the gateway NE.
Common
l If the gateway NE has no special security requirement for connection to the NMS, Connection Mode can be set to Common.
Security SSL
l If the gateway NE requests secure connection to the NMS for preventing information interception and cracking, Connection Mode needs to be set to Security SSL. l If NE communication security level needs to be the same as NMS communication security level, Connection Mode needs to be set to Common + Security SSL. l The default parameter value is recommended unless the gateway NE requires that the NMS use the SSL connection mode. l The parameter value takes effect only when it is set for a gateway NE and the gateway NE is connected to the NMS by means of the IP protocol.
A.1.2.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the DCC rate.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the DCC Rate Configuration tab.
Parameters for DCC Rate Configuration Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the port that is connected to the DCC channel.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-19
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
It is recommended that you use the default value, except for the following cases:
Disabled
l If the port is connected to the other ECC subnet, Enabled/Disabled is set to Disabled. l If the port is connected to a third-party network and does not exchange the network management information with other ports, Enabled/Disabled is set to Disabled. Channel
D1-D3 D4-D12 D1-D12 D1-D1
D1-D1 (for the PDH radio whose transmission capacity is less than 16xE1) D1-D3 (for other cases)
It is recommended that you use the default value, except for the following cases: l If the IP over DCC or OSI over DCC solution is adopted, Channel for the SDH line ports is set to a value that is the same as the value for third-party network. l If the DCC transparent transmission solution is adopted, the value of Channel for the SDH line ports should not conflict with the value that is set for the third-party network.
DCC Resources
-
-
This parameter indicates the DCC resources.
Communication Status
-
-
This parameter indicates the communication status.
Protocol Type
HWECC
HWECC
It is recommended that you use the default value, except for the following cases:
TCP/IP
l If the IP over DCC solution is adopted, Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP.
OSI
l If the OSI over DCC solution is adopted, Protocol Type is set to OSI. LAPD Role
User
User
Network
l This parameter is valid only when Protocol Type is set to OSI. l In the case of a DCC channel, LAPD Role must be set to User for one end and must be set to Network for the other end.
LAPD MTU
-
-
Displays the maximum LAPD packet size.
A.1.2.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for DCC transparent transmission management. A-20
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the DCC Transparent Transmission Management tab.
3.
Click Create.
Parameters for DCC Transparent Transmission Management Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Timeslot/ Porta
-
-
This parameter specifies the source timeslot or port.
Transparent Transmission of Overhead Bytes at Source Port
D1
-
l Only one overhead byte can be selected each time.
D2
l X1, X2, X3, and X4 indicate the customized overhead bytes that are used for transmitting asynchronous data services.
D3 D4 D5 D6
l An overhead byte cannot be a byte that is used. For example, an overhead byte cannot be a byte in the used DCC channel.
D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 E1 E2 F1 K1 K2 X1 X2 X3 X4 Sink Timeslot/ Porta
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
-
-
This parameter specifies the sink timeslot or port.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-21
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Transparent Transmission of Overhead Bytes at Sink Port
D1
-
l Only one overhead byte can be selected each time.
D2
l An overhead byte cannot be a byte that is used. For example, an overhead byte cannot be a byte in the used DCC channel.
D3 D4 D5 D6
l Generally, Transparent Transmission of Overhead Bytes at Sink Port can be set to a value that is the same as or different from the value in the case of Transparent Transmission of Overhead Bytes at Source Port.
D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 E1 E2 F1 K1 K2 X1 X2 X3 X4
NOTE
a. A bidirectional cross-connection is set up between the source port and the sink port. Hence, a port functions the same regardless of the source port or sink port.
A.1.2.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC This topic describes the parameters that are related to the extended ECCs of Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path Click an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > ECC Management from the Function Tree.
Parameters for the ECC Extended Mode Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ECC Extended Mode
Auto mode
Auto mode
It is recommended that you use the default value.
A-22
Specified mode
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Setting the Server Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IP
-
-
This parameter indicates the IP address of the server.
Port
1601 to 1699
0
l This parameter is valid only when ECC Extended Mode is set to Specified mode. l This parameter can be set only when the NE functions as the server of the extended ECC. In normal cases, the NE that is close to the NMS functions as the server. l This parameter can be set to any value from 1601 to 1699.
Parameters for Setting the Client Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Opposite IP
-
0.0.0.0
Port
1601 to 1699
0
l This parameter is valid only when ECC Extended Mode is set to Specified mode. l This parameter can be set only when the NE functions as the client of the extended ECC. Except for the NE that functions as the server, all other NEs that use the extended ECC can function as the client. l Opposite IP and Port are respectively set to the IP address of the server NE and the specified port number.
A.1.2.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE ECC link management.
Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > NE ECC Link Management from the Function Tree.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-23
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter for NE ECC Link Management Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination NE
-
-
This parameter specifies the sink NE of the ECC connection.
Transfer NE
-
-
This parameter specifies the next transfer NE and the direction of the ECC route.
Distance
-
-
l This parameter specifies the number of NEs (excluding the source NE and sink NE) through which the ECC route passes, namely, the number of ECC packet forwarding attempts. The value can be set to a value that is greater than the number of actual ECC packet forwarding attempts. If the value is set to a value that is less than the number of actual ECC packet forwarding attempts, however, the destination NE fails to be accessed. l If the value is set to 0, it indicates that the source NE is adjacent to the destination NE.
Level
-
-
l This parameter indicates that multiple ECC routes from the source NE to the destination NE may be available. An ECC route of a higher priority is selected to transmit the packets to the destination NE. l If the ECC route is generated automatically, the priority is 4. l If the ECC route is added manually, the priority is 5.
Mode
-
-
This parameter indicates the ECC routing mode.
SCC No.
-
-
This parameter specifies the physical port through which the ECC route passes. The value of this parameter is automatically assigned the NE.
A.1.2.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for IP route management.
A-24
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the IP Route Management tab.
Parameters for IP Route Management Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination Address
-
-
This parameter indicates the destination address of the packets. This parameter can be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or C only, but cannot be set to the IP address of the local host or the loopback address with the 127 field.
Subnet Mask
-
-
This parameter indicates the subnet mask of the destination address of the packets.
Gateway
-
-
This parameter indicates the IP address of the gateway on the subnetwork where the NE is located, namely, the IP address of the next hop of the packets.
Protocol
-
-
l DIRECT: indicates the route between the local NE and an adjacent NE. l STATIC: indicates the route that is created manually. l OSPF: indicates the route between the local NE and a non-adjacent NE. l RIP: indicates the route that is discovered by the routing information protocol. l OSPF_ASE: indicates the route whose Destination Address is beyond the OSPF domain. l OSPF_NSSA: indicates the route whose Destination Address is in a not so stubby area (NSSA). l A route can be deleted in the case of STATIC only, but cannot be edited in the other cases. l Compared with a dynamic route, a static route has a higher priority. If any conflict occurs, the static route is preferred.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-25
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Interface
-
-
This parameter indicates the interface that is used on the route. Interface is a concept specified in the TCP/IP protocol stack. In the TCP/IP protocol stack, you can create multiple types of interface, such as a loopback interface (namely, the interface whose IP address is 127.0.0.1), an Ethernet interface, and PPP interface. Each interface must have a unique interface name.
Metric
-
-
This parameter indicates the maximum number of routers through which the packets are transmitted. Metric is used to indicate the overhead bytes that are transmitted to the destination address. The smaller the value, the less the overhead bytes. If multiple routes can reach the same destination address, a route whose overhead is less is preferred to transmit the packets.
A.1.2.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for new static IP routes.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the IP Route Management tab.
3.
Click New.
Parameters for Creating IP Routes Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination Address
-
-
This parameter specifies the destination address of the packets. This parameter can be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or C only, but cannot be set to the IP address of the local host or the loopback address with the 127 field.
Subnet Mask
-
-
This parameter indicates the subnet mask of the destination address of the packets.
A-26
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Gateway
-
-
This parameter specifies the IP address of the gateway on the subnetwork where the NE is located, namely, the IP address of the next hop of the packets.
A.1.2.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings This topic describes the parameters that are used for OSPF settings.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the OSPF Parameter Settings tab.
OSPF Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Area
-
0.0.0.0
l The OSPF protocol supports the division of NEs into multiple areas. Only the NEs in the same area can transmit the OSPF packets to each other to generate the route. l When setting the area for the NEs, you need to set the NEs that run the OSPF protocol to the same area.
DCC Hello Timer (s)
1 to 255
10
l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the Hello packet timer at the DCC interface. l The Hello packets are used for detecting the neighbor router on the network that is connected to the router. By periodically transmitting the hello packets, you can determine whether the interface on the neighbor router is still in the active status. l DCC Hello Timer(s) determines the interval for the hello packet timer to transmit the hello packets. l In the case of two interconnected NEs, DCC Hello Timer(s) must be set to the same value.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-27
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s)
1 to 65535
40
l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies the dead time of a neighbor router at the DCC interface. l If the local router fails to receive the hello packets from the connected neighbor router within the time specified in DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s), it considers that the neighbor router is unavailable. l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) should be set to a value that is a minimum of twice the value of DCC Hello Timer (s). l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set to the same value. Otherwise, the OSPF protocol fails to operate normally.
DCC Retransmission Timer(s)
1 to 65535
5
DCC Retransmission Timer(s) specifies the interval for transmitting a request through the DCC interface to retransmit the link state advertisement (LSA) packets.
DCC Delay(s)
1 to 3600
1
l DCC Delay(s) specifies the delay time to transmit the LSA packets through the DCC interface. l The LSA packets in the LSA database of the local router are aged as the time elapses, but are not aged when they are being transmitted on the network. Hence, before the LSA packets are transmitted, you need to increase the age of the LSA packets based on the value of DCC Delay(s).
A-28
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAN Hello Timer (s)
1 to 255
10
l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the hello packet timer at the LAN interfaces. l The hello packets are used for detecting the neighbor router on the network that is connected to the router. By periodically transmitting the hello packets, you can determine whether the interface on the neighbor router is still in the active status. l LAN Hello Timer(s) determines the interval for the hello packet timer of the NE to transmit the hello packets. l In the case of two interconnected NEs, LAN Hello Timer(s) must be set to the same value.
LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s)
1 to 65535
40
l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies the dead time of a neighbor router at the LAN interface. l If the local router fails to receive the hello packets from the connected neighbor router within the time specified in LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s), it considers that the neighbor router is unavailable. l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) should be set to a value that is a minimum of two times the value of LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s). l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set to the same value. Otherwise, the OSPF protocol fails to operate normally.
LAN Retransmission Timer(s)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
1 to 65535
5
LAN Retransmission Timer(s) specifies the time for transmitting a request for retransmission of the LSA packets through the LAN interface.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-29
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAN Delay(s)
1 to 3600
1
l LAN Delay(s) specifies the delay time to transmit the LSA packets through the LAN interface. l The LSA packets in the LSA database of the local router are aged as the time elapses, but are not aged when they are being transmitted on the network. Hence, before the LSA packets are transmitted, you need to increase the age of the LSA packets based on the value of LAN Delay(s).
OSPF Status
Enabled
Enabled
Specifies whether to enable the OSPF.
Disabled
l Specifies whether to enable the STUB Area.
Disabled STUB Area
Enabled Disabled
l Set this parameter as required. NSSA Area
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether to enable the NSSA Area. l Set this parameter as required.
Direct route
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether to enable the Direct route. l Direct route: the route detected by the link layer protocol. l Set this parameter as required.
Static route
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether to enable the Static route. l Static route: the route manually configured by the network administrator. l Set this parameter as required.
RIP route
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether to enable the RIP route. l RIP route: the route detected by the routing protocol. l Set this parameter as required.
Opaque LSA of External Network Port
Enabled Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether to enable the Opaque LSA of External Network Port. l If this parameter is set to Enabled, it indicates that the Ethernet NM interface is used to transmit NM message. l Set this parameter as required.
A-30
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAN Interface
Enabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether to enable the OSPF at the Ethernet NM interface.
Disabled
l If this parameter is set to Enabled, it indicates that the Ethernet NM interface achieves OSPF communication with other equipment.
A.1.2.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the proxy ARP.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Proxy ARP tab.
Parameters for configuring the proxy ARP Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Proxy ARP
Disabled
Disabled
l The proxy ARP enables the NEs in the same network segment but different domains to communicate with each other.
Enabled
l To realize communication between such NEs, the source NE sends the ARP broadcast packet to address the route to the destination NE. The NE with the proxy ARP function enabled checks the routing table after sensing the ARP broadcast packet. If the routing table contains the destination address that the ARP broadcast packet looks for, the NE returns an ARP spoofing packet, which enables the NE that sends the ARP broadcast packet to consider that the MAC address of the NE that returns the ARP spoofing packet is the MAC address of the destination NE. In this manner, the packet that is to be sent to the destination NE is first sent to the NE with the proxy ARP function enabled and then forwarded to the destination NE.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-31
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.1.2.10 Parameter Description: Port OSPF Setting This section describes the parameters that are used for setting port OSPF parameters.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE and choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Port OSPF Parameter Settings tab.
Port OSPF Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the ports that allow OSPF parameters to be set.
Path Type
-
-
Displays the current DCC channel type.
OSPF Status
Enabled
Enabled
l Specifies whether to enable the OSPF. l Set this parameter as required.
Disabled Opaque LSA of External Network Port
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether DCC channels support Opaque LSAs. l Set this parameter as required.
A.1.2.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter This topic describes the parameters that are related to the network layer of the OSI protocol model.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Network Layer Parameters tab.
Network Layer Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE
-
-
This parameter indicates the name of the NE.
A-32
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Configuration Role
ES
L1
l An NE whose Configuration Role is set to L1 cannot function as a neighbor of an NE in the other area. It uses a route in the local area only and accesses the other area by distributing the default route of the nearest L2 NE.
L1 L2
l An NE whose Configuration Role is set to L2 can function as a neighbor of an NE in the other area and can use a route in the backbone area. The backbone area is a collection that is formed by consecutive L2 NEs. That is, the L2 NE of all the roles must be consecutive (connected to each other). NOTE Configuration Role cannot be set to ES.
-
Current Role
-
This parameter indicates the current role.
A.1.2.12 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table This topic describes the parameters that are related to OSI routing tables.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Routing Table tab.
Parameters for Link Adjacency Table Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the port used for OSI communication.
Data Link Layer
-
-
This parameter indicates the protocol that is used at the data link layer.
Adjacency No.
-
-
l This parameter specifies the identifier of the adjacency that is set up by two NEs through the OSI protocol. One adjacency number corresponds to an OSI adjacency. l The value is dynamically allocated by the NE.
Adjacency Type
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
-
-
This parameter indicates the type of the adjacency.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-33
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Adjacency State
-
-
This parameter indicates the state of the adjacency.
Peer End Area ID
-
-
This parameter indicates the area ID that is contained in the NSAP address of the opposite NE.
Peer End System ID
-
-
This parameter indicates the system ID of the opposite NE. Generally, the system ID is the MAC address.
Parameters for L1 and L2 Routing Tables Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination Area ID
-
-
This parameter indicates the area ID of the destination NE.
Destination SYSID
-
-
This parameter indicates the system ID of the destination NE. Generally, the system ID is the MAC address.
Metric
-
-
This parameter indicates the number of hops that reach the destination NE or destination area.
Adjacency No.1
-
-
This parameter indicates the number of the adjacent link that is connected to the destination NE.
Adjacency No.2
-
-
This parameter indicates the number of the adjacent link that is connected to the destination NE.
A.1.2.13 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel This topic describes the parameters that are related to the OSI tunnels.
Navigation Path
A-34
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the OSI Tunnel tab.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for OSI Tunnel Attributes Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Remote IP Address
-
-
This parameter indicates the IP address of the opposite end of the OSI tunnel.
LAPD Actor
User
User
l This parameter specifies the LAPD actor.
Network
l If the adjacent NEs run the OSI protocol, they can perform the LAPD negotiation only when the LAPD actor is set to User at one end and is set to Network at the other end. Efficient LAPD Enable
-
-
This parameter indicates whether the current LAPD is enabled.
Configurable LAPD Enable
Enabled
Enabled
This parameter specifies whether the LAPD is enabled.
Disabled
LAPD Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Remote IP Address
-
-
This parameter indicates the IP address of the opposite end of the OSI tunnel.
L2 Wait Time to Retry(s)
1 to 20
1
l This parameter specifies L2 Wait Time to Retry(s). l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) indicates the interval for retransmitting packets at the LAPD link layer. l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) needs to be set according to the network situation. If the network is in good situation, L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) can be set to a smaller value. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) to a greater value. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-35
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
L2 Retry Times
2 to 6
3
l This parameter specifies L2 Retry Times. l L2 Retry Times indicates the maximum number of packet retransmission attempts at the LAPD link layer. l L2 Retry Times needs to be set according to the network situation. If the network is in good situation, L2 Retry Times can be set to a smaller value. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set L2 Retry Times to a greater value. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
L3 Hello Timer(s)
1 to 100
3
l This parameter specifies L3 Hello Timer(s). l L3 Hello Timer(s) indicates the Hello packet timer at the LAPD link network layer. It is used for periodical transmission of the Hello packets. l The Hello timer determines the interval for transmitting the Hello packets once. L3 Hello Timer(s) needs to be set according to the network situation. If the network is in good situation, L3 Hello Timer(s) can be set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set L3 Hello Timer(s) to a smaller value. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
A-36
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
L3 ES Timer(s)
1 to 200
50
l This parameter specifies L3 ES Timer (s). l L3 ES Timer(s) indicates the ES configuration timer at the LAPD link network layer. It is used for setting the time to transmit the configuration information on the ES route. l L3 ES Timer(s) needs to be set according to the network situation. If the network is in good situation, L3 ES Timer(s) can be set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set L3 Hello Timer(s) to a smaller value. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
L3 IS Timer(s)
1 to 200
10
l This parameter specifies L3 IS Timer (s). l L3 IS Timer(s) indicates the IS configuration timer at the LAPD link network layer. It is used for setting the time to transmit the configuration information through the L1/L2 router. l L3 IS Timer(s) needs to be set according to the network situation. If the network is in good situation, L3 IS Timer(s) can be set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set L3 IS Timer (s) to a smaller value. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-37
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
L3 Hold Timer(s)
2 to 63
5
l This parameter specifies L3 Hold Timer (s). l L3 Hold Timer(s) indicates the hold timer at the LAPD link network layer. l L3 Hold Timer(s) needs to be set according to the network situation. If the network is in good situation, L3 Hold Timer(s) can be set to a smaller value. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set L3 IS Timer(s) to a greater value. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
1 to 63
COST
20
l This parameter specifies COST. l COST indicates the overhead value of the virtual LAPD that corresponds to the OSI tunnel. l The overhead value determines whether this link is perverted. If the overhead value is smaller, this link has a higher priority to be selected. l This parameter needs to set according to the planning information.
A.1.2.14 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for bandwidth management of the inband DCN.
Navigation Path
A-38
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Bandwidth Management tab.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Bandwidth Management Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Ethernet Board VLAN ID
2 to 4094
4094
l The equipment on the traditional DCN can be connected to the NMS through the SCC board, but the OptiX RTN 950 can also be connected to the NMS through an Ethernet interface. If an Ethernet port is used to carry the network management information, the NE differentiates the network management information and Ethernet service information according to the VLAN ID. l If the default VLAN ID of the inband DCN conflicts with the VLAN ID in the service, the Ethernet Board VLAN ID of the inband DCN can be changed manually. The same VLAN ID must be, however, is used on the network-wide inband DCN.
Bandwidth(Kbit/s)
64 to 1000
512
Bandwidth(Kbit/s) specifies the bandwidth for inband DCN messaging on the Ethernet link.
E1 Port Bandwidth(Kbit/s)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Tunnel Bandwidth (Kbit/s)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
IF Port Bandwidth (Kbit/s)
64 to 1000
512
IF Port Bandwidth(Kbit/s) specifies the bandwidth for inband DCN messaging on the radio link.
A.1.2.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting ports of the inband DCN.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Port Settings tab.
Parameters for Setting Ports Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Name
-
-
This parameter indicates the port name.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-39
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enabled Status
Enabled
Enabled
l Enabled Status specifies the enabling status of the port.
Disabled
l The network management information can be transmitted over the inband DCN when the DCN function is enabled for the ports at both ends of a link.
A.1.2.16 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol Setting This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting a protocol of the inband DCN.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree, and then choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Protocol Settings tab.
Parameters for Setting a Protocol Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Name
-
-
Displays the port name.
Protocol Type
IP
IP
l If the values of Protocol Type are different from each other, the equipment at both ends cannot be interconnected with each other. Therefore, Protocol Type must be set to the same value for the equipment at both ends of a link.
HWECC
l Set Protocol Type according to the network planning information. Generally, it is recommended that you set this parameter to IP.
A.1.2.17 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Access Control This section describes the parameters for configuring access control.
Navigation Path
A-40
l
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.
l
Click the Access Control tab.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Name
-
-
Displays the Ethernet ports that support this function.
Enabled Status
Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies the enabling status of the port.
Enabled
l If the Enabled Status is set to Enabled, this port can be used to support access of the management information from the NMS. l If the Enabled Status is set to Disabled, this port cannot be used to support access of the management information from the NMS.
IP Address
-
0.0.0.0
Specifies the IP address of the port.
Subnet Mask
-
0.0.0.0
Specifies the submask of the port.
A.1.2.18 Parameter Description: Access Control This topic describes the parameters that are used for access control of the NMS.
Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Access Control from the Function Tree.
Parameters for Ethernet Access Control Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
The First Network Port
Enabled
Enabled
After The First Network Port is set to Enabled for Ethernet access, the NE can access the NMS through the Ethernet port.
PORT
-
-
This parameter displays the NMS port and the NE cascading port on the system control, switching, and timing board.
Work Mode
adapt
-
This parameter specifies the working modes of the NMS port and the NE cascading port on the system control, switching, and timing board.
Disabled
10M Half_Duplex 10M Full_Duplex 100M Half_Duplex 100M Full_Duplex
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-41
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Actual Work Mode
-
-
This parameter displays the working modes of the NMS port and the NE cascading port on the system control, switching, and timing board.
Parameters for Access Control over Serial Ports Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable Serial Port Access
Selected
Selected
After Enable Serial Port Access is selected, the NE can access the NMS or command lines through the serial port.
Access Command Line
Selected
Deselected
If Access Command Line is selected, the serial interface can be used to access the command line terminal.
Access NM
Selected
Selected
If Access NM is selected, the serial interface can be used to access the NMS.
9600
l This parameter specifies the data transmission rate in the communications through serial ports.
Deselected
Deselected
Deselected Baud Rate
1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400
l This parameter is set according to the rate of the serial port at the opposite end, and the rates at both ends must be the same.
57600 115200
A.1.3 Parameters for Network Security Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to network security management. A.1.3.1 Parameter Description: NE User Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE user management. A.1.3.2 Parameter Description: NE User Management_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an NE user. A.1.3.3 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control This topic describes the parameters that are used for LCT access control.
A.1.3.1 Parameter Description: NE User Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE user management. A-42
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path 1.
Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > NE User Management from the Function Tree. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
2.
Close the dialog box.
Parameters for NE user management Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE
-
-
Displays the current NE name.
NE User
-
-
Displays the registered NE user name.
User Level
-
-
Displays the registered NE user level.
NE User Flag
-
-
Displays whether a registered NE user is logged in.
A.1.3.2 Parameter Description: NE User Management_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an NE user.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > NE User Management from the Function Tree.A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
2.
Close the dialog box.
3.
Click Add.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE User
-
-
Specifies the name of a registered NE user. NOTE The name of an NE cannot contain any space or Chinese characters.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-43
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
User Level
Monitor Level
Monitor Level
l A Debug Level NE user has all security and configuration authorities, and has the right to run debugging commands.
Operation Level Maintenance Level System Level Debug Level
l A System Level NE user has all security and configuration authorities. l A Maintenance Level NE user has some security authorities, some configuration authorities, the communication setting authority, and the log management authority. l An Operation Level NE user has all fault performance authorities, some security authorities, and some configuration authorities. l A Monitor Level NE user has the right to use all query commands, to log in, to log out, and to change its own password.
A-44
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE User Flag
LCT NE User
LCT NE User
l Specifies the NE user flag.
EMS NE User
l LCT NE User indicates NE users for NE management on the U2000 Local Craft Terminal (U2000 LCT).
CMD NE User General NE User
l EMS NE User indicates NE users for NE management on the U2000. l CMD NE User indicates NE users for NE management on the CMD. l General NE User indicates NE users for all NMS types. Detailed Description
-
-
Describes a configured NE user.
New Password
-
-
l Specifies the password for a new NE user.
Confirm Password
-
-
Enter the same value as New Password.
Whether the password is allowed to be modified immediately
Yes
Yes
Specifies whether the password of a registered NE user can be changed.
No
A.1.3.3 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control This topic describes the parameters that are used for LCT access control.
Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > LCT Access Control from the Function Tree.
Parameters for LCT Access Control Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE
-
-
This parameter indicates the name of the NE.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-45
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LCT Access Control Switch
Access Allowed
Access Allowed
l No NMS user logs in to the NE. In this case, when the LCT requests an LCT user to log in to the NE, the NE does not check the status of LCT Access Control Switch, and directly allows the LCT user to log in to the NE.
Disable Access
l An NMS user first logs in to the NE. In this case, when the LCT requests an LCT user to log in to the NE, the NE determines whether to allow the LCT user to log in to the NE through the LCT according to the status of LCT Access Control Switch. l An LCT user first logs in to the NE. In this case, when the NMS requests an NMS user to log in to the NE, the NMS user can directly log in to the NE. After the NMS user successfully logs in to the NE, the online LCT user is not affected. l When both the LCT user and NMS user log in to the NE, the online LCT user is not affected after LCT Access Control Switch is set to Disable Access.
A.2 Radio Link Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links. A.2.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function. A.2.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function. A.2.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF N+1 protection group. A.2.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF N+1 protection. A.2.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group. A.2.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection. A.2.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.
A-46
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.2.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the XPIC tab.
3.
Click New.
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IF Channel Bandwidth
28M
-
l This parameter specifies the channel spacing when the XPIC function is enabled.
40M 56M
l When this parameter is set to 56M or 40M, the high-power ODU must be used. NOTE The IFX2 board does not support the value 40M.
Polarization Direction-V
-
-
l This parameter indicates the polarization direction of a radio link. l It is recommended that you install the two XPIC IF boards that form an XPIC workgroup in the slots that are at the same layer or in the same column, and set the IF port on the XPIC IF board that has a smaller slot number to Link ID-V and the IF port on the other XPIC IF board to Link ID-H.
1 to 4094
1
l Set Link ID-V and Link ID-H. l A link ID is an identifier of a radio link and is used to prevent the radio links between sites from being wrongly connected. l When the link ID received by an NE is different from the link ID set for the NE, the NE reports an MW_LIM alarm and inserts the AIS. l These two parameters are set according to the planning information. These two parameters must be set to different values, but Link ID-V must be set to the
Polarization Direction-H
Link ID-V
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-47
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Link ID-H
Transmit Power (dBm)
Default Value 2
-
-
Description same value at both ends of a link and Link ID-H must also be set to the same value at both ends of a link.
l This parameter specifies the transmit power of an ODU. The value of this parameter must not exceed the rated power range supported by the ODU. l It is recommended that you set the transmit power of the ODU to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l Consider the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end when you set this parameter. Ensure that the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure stable radio services. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Maximum Transmit Power (dBm)
-
-
l This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power rang of the ODU in the guaranteed capacity modulation module. l This parameter is set to limit the maximum transmit power of the ODU within this preset range. l The maximum transmit power adjusted by using the ATPC function should not exceed this value. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A-48
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Transmission Frequency(MHz)
-
-
l This parameter indicates the channel central frequency. l The value of this parameter must not be less than the sum of the lower transmit frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing, and must not be more than the difference between the upper transmit frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
T/R Spacing(MHz)
-
-
l This parameter specifies the spacing between the transmit frequency and the receive frequency of an ODU to prevent mutual interference between the transmitter and the receiver. l If Station Type of the ODU is TX high, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive frequency. If Station Type of the ODU is TX low, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive frequency. l If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing, set this parameter to 0, indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. l A valid T/R spacing value is determined by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing should be set according to the technical specifications of the ODU. l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both the ends of a radio link.
Transmission Status
unmute mute
unmute
l When this parameter is set to mute, the ODU does not transmit microwave signals but can normally receive microwave signals. l When this parameter is set to unmute, the ODU normally transmits and receives microwave signals. l In normal cases, Transmission Status is set to unmute.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-49
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ATPC Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC function is enabled.
Enabled
l When this parameter is set to Enabled and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold at the receive end, the receiver notifies the transmitter to decrease or increase the transmit power until the RSL is within the range that is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold. l The settings of the ATPC attributes must be consistent at both ends of a radio link. l In the case of areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Disabled. l During the commissioning process, set this parameter to Disabled to ensure that the transmit power is not changed. After the commissioning, re-set the ATPC attributes. ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm)
-
-45.0
ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm)
-
-70.0
A-50
l The central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold is set as the expected receive power. l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) to the difference between the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB. l You can set the ATPC upper threshold only when ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Disabled.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter specifies whether the automatic threshold function is enabled.
Enabled
l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds according to the work mode of the radio link.
A.2.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the XPIC tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Group ID
-
-
This parameter indicates the ID of the work group.
Polarization Direction-V
-
-
This parameter indicates the IF port to which the polarization direction V corresponds.
Link ID-V
-
-
This parameter indicates the link ID to which the polarization direction V corresponds.
Polarization Direction-H
-
-
This parameter indicates the IF port to which the polarization direction H corresponds.
Link ID-H
-
-
This parameter indicates the link ID to which the polarization direction H corresponds.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-51
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IF Channel Bandwidth
28M
-
l IF Channel Bandwidth refers to the channel spacing of the corresponding radio links.
40M 56M
l When this parameter is set to 56M or 40M, the high-power ODU must be used. l This parameter is set according to the planning information. NOTE The IFX2 board does not support the value 40M.
Power to Be Received -V(dBm)
-90.0 to -20.0
-10.0
l This parameter is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off), indicating that the antenna is not aligned. l After the antenna alignment, after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When this parameter takes the default value, the antenna misalignment indicating function is disabled. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A-52
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Power to Be Received -H(dBm)
-90.0 to -20.0
-10.0
l This parameter is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off), indicating that the antenna is not aligned. l After the antenna alignment, after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When this parameter takes the default value, the antenna misalignment indicating function is disabled. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Maximum Transmit Power (dBm)
-
-
l This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power rang of the ODU in the guaranteed capacity modulation module. l This parameter is set to limit the maximum transmit power of the ODU within this preset range. l The maximum transmit power adjusted by using the ATPC function should not exceed this value. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-53
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Transmit Power (dBm)
-
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power range of the ODU. l It is recommended that you set the transmit power of the ODU to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l Consider the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end when you set this parameter. Ensure that the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure stable radio services. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Transmission Frequency(MHz)
-
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit frequency of the ODU, namely, the channel central frequency. l The value of this parameter must not be less than the sum of the lower TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing, and must not be more than the difference between the upper TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. l The difference between the transmit frequencies of both the ends of a radio link should be one T/R spacing. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information.
A-54
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
T/R Spacing(MHz)
-
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU to prevent mutual interference between the transmitter and receiver. l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive frequency. If the ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive frequency. l If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing, this parameter is set to 0, indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. l A valid T/R spacing value is determined by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing should be set according to the technical specifications of the ODU. l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link.
Transmission Status
unmute
unmute
mute
l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit status of the ODU. l If this parameter is set to mute, the transmitter of the ODU does not work but can normally receive microwave signals. l If this parameter is set to unmute, the ODU can normally transmit and receive microwave signals. l In normal cases, this parameter is set to unmute.
Parameters for Hybrid/AM Configuration Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Group ID
-
-
This parameter indicates the ID of the work group.
Polarization direction
-
-
This parameter indicates the IF port to which the polarization direction H or the polarization direction V corresponds.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-55
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
AM Enable Status
Disabled
Disabled
l When AM Enable Status is set to Disabled, the radio link uses only the specified modulation scheme. In this case, you need to select Manually Specified Modulation Mode.
Enabled
l When AM Enable Status is set to Enabled, the radio link uses the corresponding modulation scheme according to the channel conditions. Hence, the Hybrid radio can ensure the reliable transmission of the E1 services and provide bandwidth adaptively for the Ethernet services when the AM function is enabled. Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity
QPSK
-
16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM
This parameter specifies the highest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the planning information. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme. NOTE Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be higher than Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.
This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM
-
This parameter specifies the highest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the planning information. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme. NOTE Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be higher than Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.
This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled.
A-56
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Manually Specified Modulation Mode
QPSK
QPSK
This parameter specifies the modulation scheme that the radio link uses for signal transmission.
16QAM 32QAM
This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Disabled.
64QAM 128QAM 256QAM Transmit-End Modulation Mode
-
-
Displays the modulation mode at the transmit end.
Receive-End Modulation Mode
-
-
Displays the modulation mode at the receive end.
Parameters for ATPC Management Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Group ID
-
-
This parameter indicates the object to be set.
ATPC Enable Status
Disabled
-
l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC function is enabled.
Enabled
l If this parameter is set to Enabled and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold at the receive end, the receiver notifies the transmitter to decrease or increase the transmit power until the RSL is within the range that is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold. l The settings of the ATPC attributes must be consistent at both ends of a radio link. l In the case of areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Disabled. l During the commissioning process, set this parameter to Disabled to ensure that the transmit power is not changed. After the commissioning, re-set the ATPC attributes. ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
-
-
l Set the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-57
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm)
-
-
threshold to a value for the expected receive power. l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) o the difference between the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB. l You can set this parameter only when ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Disabled.
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status
Disabled
-
l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC automatic threshold function is enabled.
Enabled
l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds according to the work mode of the radio link. l If this parameter is set to Disabled, you need to manually set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm).
A.2.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF N+1 protection group.
Navigation Path
A-58
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1 Protection from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Create.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR time(s)
300 to 720
600
l This parameter specifies the wait-torestore (WTR) time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
l This parameter specifies whether the signal degradation switching function of N+1 protection is enabled. l When this parameter is set to Enabled, the signal degradation condition is considered as a trigger condition of protection switching. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Enabled.
Slot Mapping Relation Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Select Mapping Direction
Work Unit
Work Unit
l This parameter specifies the mapping direction of N+1 protection.
Protection Unit
l This parameter is set according to the planning information. Select Mapping Way
-
-
l In the case of N+1 protection, map N IF ports as Work Unit and map the remaining IF port as Protection Unit. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Mapped Board
-
-
This parameter indicates the working unit and protection unit that have been set.
A.2.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF N+1 protection.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-59
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1 Protection from the Function Tree.
Protection Group Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group ID
-
-
This parameter indicates the ID of the protection group.
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the WTR time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
SD Enable
Enabled
-
Disabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the SD switching function of N +1 protection is enabled. l When this parameter is set to Enabled, the SD condition is considered as a trigger condition of protection switching. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Enabled.
Protocol Status
-
-
This parameter indicates the status of the switching control protocol.
Protection Unit Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Unit
-
-
This parameter indicates the protection unit.
Line
-
-
This parameter indicates the information about the working board or protection board.
Switching Status
-
-
This parameter indicates the switching state.
Protected Unit
-
-
This parameter indicates the protected unit.
Remote/Local End Indication
-
-
This parameter indicates the local end or remote end.
A-60
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.2.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Create.
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Working Mode
HSB
HSB
l This parameter specifies the working mode of the IF 1+1 protection.
FD SD
l When Working Mode is set to HSB, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection. l When Working Mode is set to FD, the system uses two channels that have a frequency spacing between them, to transmit and receive the same signal. The remote end selects signals from the two received signals. With FD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. l When Working Mode is set to SD, the system uses two antennas that have a space distance between them, to receive the same signal. The equipment selects signals from the two received signals. With SD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. l The FD mode and SD mode are compatible with the HSB switching function. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-61
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Revertive Mode
Revertive Mode
Revertive Mode
l This parameter specifies the revertive mode of the IF 1+1 protection.
Non-Revertive
l When Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive Mode. l When Revertive Mode is set to NonRevertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
600
l This parameter specifies the wait-torestore (WTR) time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set WTR Time(s), a revertive switching occurs. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode. It is recommended that you use the default value.
A-62
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable Reverse Switching
Enabled
Enabled
l This parameter indicates whether the reverse switching function is enabled.
Disabled
l When both the main IF board and the standby IF board at the sink end report service alarms, they send the alarms to the source end by using the MWRDI overhead in the microwave frame. When Enable Reverse Switching at the source end is set to Enabled and the reverse switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs at the source end. l Enable Reverse Switching is valid only when Working Mode is set to HSB or SD. l Generally, if Working Mode is set to HSB, it is recommended that you set Enable Reverse Switching to Disabled; if Working Mode is set to SD, it is recommended that you set Enable Reverse Switching to Enabled. Working Board
-
-
This parameter specifies the working board of the protection group.
Protection Board
-
-
This parameter specifies the protection board of the protection group.
NOTE
Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s), and Enable Reverse Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.
A.2.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.
Protection Group Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group ID
-
-
This parameter indicates the ID of the protection group.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-63
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Working Mode
HSB
-
l This parameter indicates the working mode of the created IF 1+1 protection group.
FD SD
l In HSB mode, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection. l In FD mode, the system uses two channels that have a frequency spacing between them, to transmit and receive the same signal. The remote end selects signals from the two received signals. With FD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. l In SD mode, the system uses two antennas that have a space distance between them, to receive the same signal. The equipment selects signals from the two received signals. With SD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. l The FD mode and SD mode are compatible with the HSB switching function. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Revertive Mode
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive Mode
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the revertive mode of the protection group. l When this parameter is set to Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. l When this parameter is set to NonRevertive Mode, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive Mode.
A-64
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the WTR time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
Enable Reverse Switching
Enabled
-
Disabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the reverse switching function is enabled. l When both the main IF board and the standby IF board at the sink end report service alarms, they send the alarms to the source end by using the MWRDI overhead in the microwave frame. When this parameter at the source end is set to Enabled and the reverse switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs at the source end. l This parameter is valid only when Working Mode is set to HSB or SD.
Switching Status of Device
-
-
l This parameter indicates the switching state on the equipment side. l Unknown is displayed when the switching state on the channel side is not queried or not obtained after a query.
Switching Status of Channel
-
-
l This parameter indicates the switching state on the channel side. l Unknown is displayed when the switching state on the channel side is not queried or not obtained after a query.
Active Board of Device
-
-
This parameter indicates the current working board on the equipment side.
Active Board of Channel
-
-
This parameter indicates the current working board on the channel side.
NOTE
Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, and WTR Time(s) must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-65
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Slot Mapping Relation Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Unit
-
-
This parameter indicates the working board and protection board.
Slot Mapping Relation
-
-
This parameter indicates the names and ports of the working board and protection board.
Working Status of Device
-
-
This parameter indicates the working state on the equipment side.
Signal Status of Channel
-
-
This parameter indicates the status of the link signal.
A.2.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.
Navigation Path
A-66
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Configuring the IF Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Work Mode
1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the work mode of the radio link in "work mode number, service capacity, channel spacing, modulation mode" format.
2,4E1,3.5MHz, 16QAM 3,8E1,14MHz,QPS K 4,8E1,7MHz, 16QAM 5,16E1,28MHz,QP SK
l This parameter is set according to the planning information. The work modes of the IF boards at the two ends of a radio link must be the same. NOTE The IF1 board supports this parameter.
6,16E1,14MHz, 16QAM 7,STM-1,28MHz, 128QAM 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK 9,E3,14MHz, 16QAM 10,22E1,14MHz, 32QAM 11,26E1,14MHz, 64QAM 12,32E1,14MHz, 128QAM 13,35E1,28MHz, 16QAM 14,44E1,28MHz, 32QAM 15,53E1,28MHz, 64QAM
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-67
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Link ID
1 to 4094
1
l Link ID indicates or specifies the ID of a radio link. As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connections of radio links between sites. l If the value of Received Radio Link ID does not match the preset value of Link ID at the local end, the local end inserts the AIS signal to the downstream direction of the service. At the same time, the local end reports MW_LIM alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do not match. l Link ID is set according to the planning information. Each radio link of an NE should have a unique link ID, and the link IDs at both ends of a radio link should be the same.
Received Link ID
-
-
l This parameter indicates the received ID of the radio link. l If the value of Received Radio Link ID does not match the preset value of Radio Link ID at the local end, the local end inserts the AIS signal to the downstream direction of the service. At the same time, the local end reports an alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do not match. l When the radio link becomes faulty, this parameter is displayed as an invalid value.
IF Service Type
Hybrid(Native E1 +ETH) Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH) SDH
Hybrid(Native E1 +ETH)
l Displays or specifies the type of services carried by the IF board. l If the Integrated IP radio transmits Native E1 services, set this parameter to Hybrid(Native E1+ETH). l If the Integrated IP radio transmits Native STM-1 services, set this parameter to Hybrid(Native STM-1 +ETH). l If the SDH radio transmits SDH services, set this parameter to SDH. NOTE The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this parameter.
A-68
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IF Channel Bandwidth
7M
-
IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the channel spacing of the corresponding radio link. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
14M 28M 40M
NOTE
56M
l This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board. l The IFU2 board does not support the value 40M. l The IFX2 board does not support the values 7M, 14M, and 40M. l The ISX2 board supports the channel spacings of 7M and 14M only when the XPIC function is disabled.
AM Mode
-
-
This parameter is not applicable to the OptiX RTN 950.
AM Enable Status
Disabled
Disabled
l When AM Enable Status is set to Disabled, the radio link uses only the specified modulation scheme. In this case, you need to select Manually Specified Modulation Mode.
Enabled
l When AM Enable Status is set to Enabled, the radio link uses the corresponding modulation scheme according to the channel conditions. l Hence, the Integrated IP radio can ensure the reliable transmission of the E1 services and provide bandwidth adaptively for the Ethernet services when the AM function is enabled. l The ISX2/ISU2 does not support the AM function when IF Service Type is SDH. NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
Manually Specified Modulation Mode
QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
QPSK
l This parameter specifies the modulation scheme that the radio link uses for signal transmission. l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Disabled. NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-69
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity
QPSK
QPSK
l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled.
16QAM
l Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity specifies the lowest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the planning information. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the service transmission bandwidth that the Hybrid radio must ensure and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.
32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM
NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
QPSK
QPSK
16QAM
l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. l Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity specifies the highest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the planning information. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.
32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM
NOTE Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be higher than Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity. NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
STM-1 Capacity
-
-
l Specifies the STM-1 capacity of the IF board. l This parameter is available only when IF Service Type is set to Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH) and SDH. l If IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH), this parameter can be set to 0 or 1. l If IF Service Type is SDH, this parameter can be set to 1 or 2. NOTE The IF1, IFU2, and IFX2 boards do not support this parameter.
A-70
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Guarantee E1 Capacity
-
-
l If AM Enable Status is set to Enabled, this parameter needs to be set according to IF Channel Bandwidth, Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity, and the actually transmitted services. l If AM Enable Status is set to Disabled, this parameter needs to be set according to IF Channel Bandwidth, Manually Specified Modulation Mode, and the actually transmitted services. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH). NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
Guarantee E1 Capacity Range
-
-
Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF board in guarantee capacity modulation mode.
Data Service Bandwidth(Mbit/ s)
-
-
Displays the data service bandwidth of the IF board.
Enable E1 Priority
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter specifies whether to enable the E1 priority function.
Enabled
l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH). NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-71
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Full E1 Capacity
-
-
l This parameter specifies the number of transmitted E1 services in Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity. l This parameter is valid if Enable E1 Priority is set to Enabled. l E1 service bandwidth in full capacity mode ≤ Service bandwidth in full capacity mode - Service bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode + E1 service bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode. In addition, the number of E1 services in full capacity modulation mode should be smaller than or equal to the maximum number of E1 services in full capacity modulation mode. l The Full E1 Capacity must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH). NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
Full E1 Capacity Range
-
-
Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF board in full capacity modulation mode.
Parameters for Configuring the RF Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
TX Frequency (MHz)
-
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit frequency of the ODU, namely, the channel central frequency. l The value of this parameter must not be less than the sum of the lower TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing, and must not be more than the difference between the upper TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. l The difference between the transmit frequencies of both the ends of a radio link should be one T/R spacing. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information.
A-72
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Range of TX Frequency(MHz)
-
-
l This parameter indicates the range of the transmit frequency of the ODU. l The Range of Frequency(MHz) depends on the specifications of the ODU.
Actual TX Frequency(MHz)
-
-
This parameter indicates the actual transmit frequency of the ODU.
Actual RX Frequency(MHz)
-
-
This parameter indicates the actual receive frequency of the ODU.
T/R Spacing(MHz)
-
-
l This parameter specifies the spacing between the transmit frequency and the receive frequency of an ODU to prevent interference between them. l If Station Type of the ODU is TX high, the TX frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive frequency. If Station Type of the ODU is TX low, the TX frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive frequency. l If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing, set this parameter to 0, indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. l A valid T/R spacing value is determined by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing should be set according to the technical specifications of the ODU. l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both the ends of a radio link.
Actual T/R Spacing(MHz)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
-
-
This parameter indicates the actual T/R spacing of the ODU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-73
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Configuring the Power Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
TX Power(dBm)
-
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power range of the ODU. l This parameter cannot take a value greater than the preset value of Maximum Transmit Power(dBm). l It is recommended that you set the transmit power of the ODU to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l Consider the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end when you set this parameter. Ensure that the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure stable radio services. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information.
Range of TX Power(dBm)
-
-
This parameter indicates the range of the transmit power of the ODU.
Actual TX Power (dBm)
-
-
l This parameter indicates the actual transmit power of the ODU. l If the ATPC function is enabled, the queried actual transmit power may be different from the preset value.
A-74
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Power to Be Received(dBm)
-90.0 to -20.0
-10.0
l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled, When the antenna non-alignment indication function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off), indicating that the antenna is not aligned. l After the antenna alignment, after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When Power to Be Received(dBm) takes the default value, the antenna misalignment indicating function is disabled. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Actual RX Power (dBm)
-
-
This parameter indicates the actual receive power of the ODU.
TX Status
Unmute
Unmute
l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit status of the ODU.
Mute
l When this parameter is set to Mute, the transmitter of the ODU does not work but can normally receive microwave signals. l When this parameter is set to Unmute, the ODU can normally transmit and receive microwave signals. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you set TX Status to unmute. Actual TX Status
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
-
-
This parameter indicates the actual transmit status of the ODU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-75
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Equipment Information Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Frequency(GHz)
-
-
This parameter indicates the frequency band where the ODU operates.
Equip Type
-
-
l This parameter indicates the equipment type of the ODU. l PDH and SDH indicate the transmission capacity only and are irrelevant to the type of transmitted service.
Station Type
-
-
l This parameter indicates whether the ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low station. l The transmit frequency of a Tx high station is one T/R spacing higher than the transmit frequency of a Tx low station.
Produce SN
-
-
This parameter indicates the manufacturing serial number and the manufacturer code of the ODU.
Transmission Power Type
-
-
This parameter indicates the level of the output power of the ODU.
A.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP). A.3.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating linear MSP groups. A.3.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP This topic describes the parameters that are related to linear MSP groups.
A.3.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating linear MSP groups.
Navigation Path
A-76
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Create.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Type
1+1 Protection
1+1 Protection
l This parameter specifies the protection type of the linear MSP group.
1:N Protection
l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, one working channel and one protection channel are required. When the working channel fails, the service is switched from the working channel to the protection channel. l In the case of 1:N linear MSP, N working channels and one protection channel are required. Normal services are transmitted on the working channels and extra services are transmitted on the protection channel. When one working channel fails, the services are switched from this working channel to the protection channel, and the extra services are interrupted. l If extra services need to be transmitted or several working channels are required, select 1:N Protection. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-77
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Switching Mode
Single-Ended Switching
Single-Ended Switching (1 +1 Protection)
l This parameter specifies the switching mode of the linear MSP.
Dual-Ended Switching (1:N Protection)
l In single-ended mode, the switching occurs only at one end and the state of the other end remains unchanged.
Dual-Ended Switching
l In dual-ended mode, the switching occurs at both ends at the same time. l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N Protection, Switching Mode can be set to DualEnded Switching only. Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive Revertive
Non-Revertive (1+1 Protection)
l This parameter specifies the revertive mode of the linear MSP.
Revertive (1:N Protection)
l When this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. l When this parameter is set to Non-Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive. l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N Protection, Revertive Mode can be set to Revertive only.
A-78
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
600
l This parameter specifies the WTR time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the preset WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
SD Enable
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the switching at the SD alarm of the linear MSP is enabled. l When this parameter is set to Enabled, the B2_SD alarm is considered as a switching condition. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Enabled.
Protocol Type
New Protocol
New Protocol
Restructure Protocol
l The new protocol is supported at the early stage, and the mainstream protocol version is used currently. l The restructure protocol optimizes the new protocol and provides better measures to protect the new protocol, thus ensuring that the new protocol runs in a better manner. l The new protocol is more mature, and the restructure protocol complies with the standard. It is recommended that you use the new protocol. l You must ensure that the interconnected NEs run the protocols of the same type.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-79
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Slot Mapping Relation Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Select Mapping Direction
West Working Unit
West Working Unit
This parameter specifies the mapping direction of the linear MSP.
Select Mapping Mode
-
-
l This parameter specifies the mapping board and port in the mapping direction.
West Protection Unit
l If the protection type is set to 1+1 Protection, only one line port can be mapped as West Working Unit. l Only one line port can be mapped as West Protection Unit. l The line port mapped as West Protection Unit and the line port mapped as West Working Unit should be configured for different boards if possible. -
Mapped Board
-
This parameter indicates the preset slot mapping relations, including the mapping direction and the corresponding mapping mode.
A.3.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP This topic describes the parameters that are related to linear MSP groups.
Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group ID
-
-
This parameter indicates the ID of the protection group.
A-80
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Type
-
-
l This parameter indicates the protection type of the linear MSP group. l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, one working channel and one protection channel are required. When the working channel fails, the service is switched from the working channel to the protection channel. l In the case of 1:N linear MSP, N working channels and one protection channel are required. Normal services are transmitted on the working channels and extra services are transmitted on the protection channel. When one working channel fails, the services are switched from this working channel to the protection channel, and the extra services are interrupted. l If extra services need to be transmitted or several working channels are required, select 1:N Protection.
Switching Mode
Single-Ended Switching Dual-Ended Switching
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the switching mode of the linear MSP. l In single-ended mode, the switching occurs only at one end and the state of the other end remains unchanged. l In dual-ended mode, the switching occurs at both ends at the same time. l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N Protection, Switching Mode can be set to Dual-Ended Switching only.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-81
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the revertive mode of the linear MSP.
Revertive
l When this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. l When this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive. l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N Protection, Revertive Mode can be set to Revertive only. WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the WTR time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the preset WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
SD Enable
Enabled Disabled
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the reverse switching function is enabled. l When this parameter is set to Enabled, the B2_SD alarm is considered as a switching condition. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Enabled.
A-82
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protocol Type
New Protocol
-
l The new protocol is supported at the early stage, and the mainstream protocol version is used currently.
Restructure Protocol
l The restructure protocol optimizes the new protocol and provides better measures to protect the new protocol, thus ensuring that the new protocol runs in a better manner. l You must ensure that the interconnected NEs run the protocols of the same type. l The new protocol is more mature, and the restructure protocol complies with the standard. It is recommended that you use the new protocol. Protocol Status
-
-
This parameter indicates the protocol status of the linear MSP.
Protection Subnet
-
-
This parameter displays the protection subnet where the MS protection is configured.
Slot Mapping Relation Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Unit
-
-
This parameter indicates that which of the units, namely, the west protection unit or the west working unit, is currently in the protection status.
West Line
-
-
This parameter indicates the west protection unit and the west working unit of the linear MSP.
West Switching Status
-
-
This parameter indicates the switching status of the line.
Protected Unit
-
-
This parameter indicates the working channel protected by the current protection channel.
Remote/Local End Indication
-
-
When Switching Mode is set to DualEnded Switching, the central office end that issues the switching command is displayed.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-83
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services. A.4.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point crossconnections. A.4.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating SNCP services. A.4.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services This topic describes the parameters that are used for converting normal services into SNCP services. A.4.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring SDH services (namely, configuring cross-connections). A.4.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control This topic describes the parameters that are used for controlling SNCP services. A.4.6 Parameter Description: TU_AIS Insertion This section describes the parameters for TU_AIS insertion.
A.4.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point crossconnections.
Navigation Path
A-84
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the crossconnection.
3.
Click Create.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Level
VC12
VC12
l This parameter specifies the level of the service to be created.
VC3
l If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 channels, set this parameter to VC12.
VC4
l If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels, set this parameter to VC3. l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE, set this parameter to VC4. Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Unidirectional
l When this parameter is set to Unidirectional, create only the crossconnections from the service source to the service sink. l When this parameter is set to Bidirectional, create the crossconnections from the service source to the service sink and the crossconnections from the service sink to the service source. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Bidirectional.
Source Slot
-
-
This parameter specifies the slot of the service source.
Source VC4
-
-
l This parameter specifies the number of the VC-4 channel where the service source is located. l This parameter cannot be set when Source Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board.
Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)
-
-
l This parameter indicates the timeslot range of the service source. l This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-85
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink Slot
-
-
This parameter specifies the slot of the service sink.
Sink VC4
-
-
l This parameter specifies the number of the VC-4 channel where the service sink is located. l This parameter cannot be set when Sink Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board.
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)
-
-
l This parameter specifies the timeslot range of the service sink. l This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
E1 Priority
High
-
Low None
l This parameter specifies the priority of an E1 service. This parameter is available only if the E1 priority function is enabled for the ports configured in the cross-connections. l If E1 Priority is set to High, transmission of the E1 service is ensured in any modulation scheme. l If E1 Priority is set to Low, transmission of the E1 service is ensured only in fullcapacity modulation scheme l If the service priority is not specified during service creation, E1 Priority is None. In this case, the E1 priority of a service needs to be changed after the service is created.
Activate Immediately
Yes No
Yes
l This parameter specifies whether to immediately activate the configured service. l To immediately deliver the configured SDH service to the NE, set this parameter to Yes.
A-86
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.4.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating SNCP services.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the crossconnection.
3.
Click Create SNCP Service.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Type
SNCP
SNCP
This parameter indicates that the type of the service to be created is SNCP.
Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
l When this parameter is set to Unidirectional, create only the crossconnections from the SNCP service source to the SNCP service sink.
Unidirectional
l When this parameter is set to Bidirectional, create the crossconnections from the SNCP service source to the service sink and the crossconnections from the SNCP service sink to the service source. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Bidirectional. Level
VC12 VC3 VC4
VC12
l This parameter specifies the level of the SCNP service to be created. l If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 channels, set this parameter to VC12. l If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels, set this parameter to VC3. l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE, set this parameter to VC4.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-87
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Hold-off Time (100ms)
0 to 100
0
l This parameter specifies the duration of the hold-off time. l When a line is faulty, SNCP switching can be performed on the NE after a delay of time to prevent the situation where the NE performs SNCP switching and other protection switching at the same time. l Hold-off Time(100ms) is generally set to prevent SNCP protection switching, when SNCP works with N+1 protection. Hold-off Time(100ms) must be longer than the switching time of any protection mode that works with SNCP. Generally, Hold-off Time(100ms) is set to 200 ms. l When SNCP works with 1+1 FD/SD, trigger conditions for HSM switching or SNCP switching trigger HSM switching but do not trigger SNCP switching. Therefore, Hold-off Time(100ms) does not need to be set in this case. l The switching time of 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection is much longer than that of SNCP. Therefore, to shorten service interruptions, it is recommended that you do not set Hold-off Time(100ms) when SNCP works with 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection. l If only the SNCP scheme is available, it is recommended that you set the hold-off time to 0.
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive Revertive
Non-Revertive
l This parameter specifies whether to switch the service to the original working channel after the fault is rectified. l If this parameter is set to Revertive, the service is switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. If this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the service is not switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive.
A-88
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
600
l This parameter specifies the WTR time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the preset WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
Source Slot
-
-
This parameter specifies the slot of the service source.
Source VC4
-
-
l This parameter specifies the number of the VC-4 channel where the service source is located. l This parameter cannot be set when Source Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board.
Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)
-
-
l This parameter indicates the timeslot range of the service source. l This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Sink Slot
-
-
This parameter specifies the slot of the service sink.
Sink VC4
-
-
l This parameter specifies the number of the VC-4 channel where the service sink is located. l This parameter cannot be set when Sink Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-89
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)
-
-
l This parameter specifies the timeslot range of the service sink. l This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Selected
Configure SNCP Tangent Ring
Deselected
Deselected
l After the Configure SNCP Tangent Ring checkbox is selected, you can quickly configure the SNCP service for the SNCP ring tangent point. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you do not select this checkbox.
Selected
Activate Immediately
Deselected
Selected
l This parameter specifies whether to immediately activate the configured SNCP service. l After the Activate Immediately checkbox is selected, you can immediately activate the created SNCP service.
A.4.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services This topic describes the parameters that are used for converting normal services into SNCP services.
Navigation Path
A-90
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
If a bidirectional SDH service is created, select this service in Cross-Connection. Rightclick the selected service and choose Expand to Unidirectional from the shortcut menu.
3.
Select the unidirectional service. Right-click the selected service and choose Convert to SNCP Service from the shortcut menu.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Type
SNCP
SNCP
This parameter indicates that the type of the service to be created is SNCP.
Direction
Unidirectional
-
This parameter indicates the direction of the SNCP service.
Level
-
-
l This parameter indicates the level of the SNCP service. l If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 channels, the parameter value is VC12. l If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels, the parameter value is VC3. l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE, the parameter value is VC4.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-91
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Hold-off Time (100ms)
0 to 100
0
l This parameter specifies the duration of the hold-off time. l When a line is faulty, SNCP switching can be performed on the NE after a delay of time to prevent the situation where the NE performs SNCP switching and other protection switching at the same time. l Hold-off Time(100ms) is generally set to prevent SNCP protection switching, when SNCP works with N+1 protection. Hold-off Time(100ms) must be longer than the switching time of any protection mode that works with SNCP. Generally, Hold-off Time(100ms) is set to 200 ms. l When SNCP works with 1+1 FD/SD, trigger conditions for HSM switching or SNCP switching trigger HSM switching but do not trigger SNCP switching. Therefore, Hold-off Time(100ms) does not need to be set in this case. l The switching time of 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection is much longer than that of SNCP. Therefore, to shorten service interruptions, it is recommended that you do not set Hold-off Time(100ms) when SNCP works with 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection. l If only the SNCP scheme is available, it is recommended that you set the hold-off time to 0.
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive Revertive
Non-Revertive
l This parameter specifies whether to switch the service to the original working channel after the fault is rectified. If this parameter is set to "Revertive", the service is switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. l If this parameter is set to Revertive, the service is switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. If this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the service is not switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive.
A-92
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
600
l This parameter specifies the WTR time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the preset WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
Source Slot
-
-
This parameter specifies the slot of the service source.
Source VC4
-
-
l This parameter specifies the number of the VC-4 channel where the service source is located. l This parameter cannot be set when Source Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board.
Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)
-
-
l This parameter indicates the timeslot range of the service source. l This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Sink Slot
-
-
This parameter specifies the slot of the service sink.
Sink VC4
-
-
l This parameter specifies the number of the VC-4 channel where the service sink is located. l This parameter cannot be set when Sink Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-93
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)
-
-
l This parameter specifies the timeslot range of the service sink. l This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Configure SNCP Tangent Ring
-
-
After the Configure SNCP Tangent Ring checkbox is selected, you can quickly configure the SNCP service for the SNCP ring tangent point.
Activate Immediately
-
-
l This parameter indicates whether to immediately activate the configured SNCP service. l After the Activate Immediately checkbox is selected, you can immediately activate the created SNCP service.
A.4.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring SDH services (namely, configuring cross-connections).
Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
A-94
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Cross-Connection Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Level
VC12
-
l This parameter indicates the level of the service.
VC3
l If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 channels, VC12 is displayed.
VC4
l If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels, VC3 is displayed. l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE, VC4 is displayed. Source Slot
-
-
This parameter indicates the slot of the service source.
Source Timeslot/ Path
-
-
This parameter indicates the timeslot or timeslot range of the service source.
Sink Slot
-
-
This parameter indicates the slot of the source sink.
Sink Timeslot/ Path
-
-
This parameter indicates the timeslot or timeslot range of the service sink.
E1 Priority
High
-
l This parameter specifies the priority of an E1 service. This parameter is available only if the E1 priority function is enabled for the ports configured in the cross-connections.
Low None
l If E1 Priority is set to High, transmission of the E1 service is ensured in any modulation scheme. l If E1 Priority is set to Low, transmission of the E1 service is ensured only in fullcapacity modulation scheme l If the service priority is not specified during service creation, E1 Priority is None. In this case, the E1 priority of a service needs to be changed after the service is created. Activation Status
Yes
-
This parameter indicates whether to activate the service.
No Bound Group Number
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Lockout Status
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-95
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Trail Name
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Schedule No.
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Parameters for Automatically Created Cross-Connections Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Level
VC12
-
l This parameter indicates the level of the service.
VC3
l If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 channels, VC12 is displayed.
VC4
l If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels, VC3 is displayed. l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE, VC4 is displayed. Source Slot
-
-
This parameter indicates the slot of the service source.
Source Timeslot/ Path
-
-
This parameter indicates the timeslot or timeslot range of the service source.
Sink Slot
-
-
This parameter indicates the slot of the source sink.
Sink Timeslot/ Path
-
-
This parameter indicates the timeslot or timeslot range of the service sink.
Lockout Status
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Trail Name
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Schedule No.
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
A.4.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control This topic describes the parameters that are used for controlling SNCP services.
A-96
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SNCP Service Control from the Function Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Type
-
-
This parameter indicates the service protection type of the protection group.
Source
-
-
This parameter indicates the timeslots where the working service source and protection service source of the protection group are located.
Sink
-
-
This parameter indicates the timeslots where the working service sink and protection service sink of the protection group are located.
Level
VC12
-
l This parameter indicates the level of the service.
VC3
l If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 channels, VC12 is displayed.
VC4
l If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels, VC3 is displayed. l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE, VC4 is displayed. Current Status
-
-
This parameter indicates the current switching mode and switching status of the services of the protection group.
Revertive Mode
Revertive
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the revertive mode of the service.
Non-Revertive
l This parameter determines whether to switch the service from the protection channel to the original working channel after the fault is rectified. l If this parameter is set to Revertive, the service is switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. If this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the service is not switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-97
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the WTR time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the preset WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
Hold-off Time (100ms)
0 to 100
-
l This parameter specifies the duration of the hold-off time. l When a line is faulty, SNCP switching can be performed on the NE after a delay of time to prevent the situation where the NE performs SNCP switching and other protection switching at the same time. l Hold-off Time(100ms) is generally set to prevent SNCP protection switching, when SNCP works with N+1 protection. Hold-off Time(100ms) must be longer than the switching time of any protection mode that works with SNCP. Generally, Hold-off Time(100ms) is set to 200 ms. l When SNCP works with 1+1 FD/SD, trigger conditions for HSM switching or SNCP switching trigger HSM switching but do not trigger SNCP switching. Therefore, Hold-off Time(100ms) does not need to be set in this case. l The switching time of 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection is much longer than that of SNCP. Therefore, to shorten service interruptions, it is recommended that you do not set Hold-off Time(100ms) when SNCP works with 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection. l If only the SNCP scheme is available, it is recommended that you set the hold-off time to 0.
A-98
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
SD Initiation Condition
-
Null
l This parameter indicates or specifies the conditions that trigger the protection switching of the service. l After being selected as SD Initiation Condition, an alarm becomes a condition for triggering switching of an SNCP service. l It is recommended that you set SD Initiation Condition to the same condition for Working Service and Protection Service. l The protection switching conditions in SD Initiation Condition are optional values not included in the default values, and they are set according to the planning information.
Trail Status
-
-
This parameter indicates the status of the working service and protection service of the protection group.
Service Grouping
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Group Type
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Active Channel
-
-
This parameter indicates whether the working service or protection service is currently received by the protection group.
Trail Name
-
-
Displays the trail name.
A.4.6 Parameter Description: TU_AIS Insertion This section describes the parameters for TU_AIS insertion.
Navigation Path In the NE Explorer, select the IF board from the Object Tree and choose Alarm > Triggered Alarm Insertion from the Function Tree.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-99
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-1 Parameters on the main interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the slot ID of the IF board and the ID of the IF port.
High Channel
-
-
Displays the higher order path number of the IF board.
Low Channel
-
-
Displays the lower order path number of the IF board.
Insert E1_AIS to TU_AIS
Enable
Disable
If this parameter is set to Enable for an E1 path and the E1 path detects the E1_AIS alarm, the TU_AIS alarm is inserted into this path.
Disable
A.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces. A.5.1 PDH Port Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to PDH ports supported by Smart E1 interface boards. A.5.2 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet ports on the packet plane. A.5.3 Serial Port Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to serial ports. A.5.4 Microwave Interface Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF_ETH interfaces. A.5.5 IF Board Parameters This topic describes parameters that are related to IF boards. A.5.6 ODU Parameters This topic describes parameters that are related to ODUs. A.5.7 Parameters for SDH Interface Boards This topic describes parameters that are related to SDH interface boards. A.5.8 Parameters for PDH Interface Boards This topic describes parameters that are related to PDH interface boards. A.5.9 Parameters for Overhead This topic describes the parameters that are related to overhead.
A-100
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.5.1 PDH Port Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to PDH ports supported by Smart E1 interface boards. A.5.1.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of PDH ports. A.5.1.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of PDH ports.
A.5.1.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of PDH ports.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the General Attributes tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the ID of a service port.
Name
-
-
Specifies or displays the customized port name.
Port Mode
Layer 1
Layer 2
l Specifies the working mode of a PDH port.
Layer 2
l When this parameter is set to Layer 1, the port can transmit TDM signals. A port can transmit CES and serial services only if this parameter is set to Layer 1. l When this parameter is set to Layer 2, the port can transmit ATM signals.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-101
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Encapsulation Type
-
-
l Displays Encapsulation Type of a PDH port. l When Port Mode is Layer 1, Encapsulation Type takes its default value Null. l When Port Mode is Layer 2, Encapsulation Type takes its default value ATM.
A.5.1.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of PDH ports.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the name of a service port.
A-102
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Frame Format
Unframe
CRC-4 Multiframe
l Specifies the frame format.
Double Frame
l If a CES service uses the emulation mode of CESoPSN, this parameter can assume the value CRC-4 Multiframe or Double Frame. The value CRC-4 Multiframe is recommended.
CRC-4 Multiframe
l If a CES service uses the emulation mode of SAToP, this parameter needs to assume the value Unframe. l The value of Frame Format must be the same at the local and opposite ends. Line Encoding Format
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Displays the line encoding format. The parameter value is always HDB3.
A-103
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Loopback Mode
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
l Specifies the loopback status for a port.
Inloop
l Non-Loopback indicates that loopbacks are cancelled or not performed.
Outloop
l Inloop indicates that the signals that need to be transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l Outloop indicates that the received signals are looped back. l This function is used for fault locating for the PDH ports. This function affects services over related ports. Therefore, exercise precaution before starting this function. l Generally, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Impedance
A-104
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Displays the port impedance.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Frame Mode
30(ATM)
-
l 30 timeslots: In an E1 frame format, timeslots 1 to 15 and 17 to 31 are used to transmit service data, and timeslot 16 is used to transmit signaling.
31(ATM,CES)
l 31 timeslots: In an E1 frame format, timeslots 1 to 31 are used to transmit service data. l This parameter is unavailable if Frame Format is Unframe. l The port frame modes need to be the same at the local and opposite ends. Clock Mode
Master Mode
Master Mode
Slave Mode System Clock Mode
l Master Mode: The system clock is used as the output clock of services. l Slave Mode: The CES ACR clock is used as the output clock of services. The port inputting E1 clocks on Slave is set to Slave Mode. l System Clock Mode: The upstream E1 line clock of the opposite equipment is used as the output clock of services. The port inputting E1 clocks on Master is set to System Clock Mode
Composite Port Loopback
-
-
For the OptiX RTN 950, this parameter cannot be configured.
Service Load Indication
-
-
For the OptiX RTN 950, this parameter cannot be configured.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-105
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Equalize Input Signal
-
-
For the OptiX RTN 950, this parameter cannot be configured.
Equalize Outpput Signal
-
-
For the OptiX RTN 950, this parameter cannot be configured.
A.5.2 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet ports on the packet plane. A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of an Ethernet interface. A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control This topic describes the parameters that are related to flow control. A.5.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes. A.5.2.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 3 attributes of Ethernet ports. A.5.2.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.
A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of an Ethernet interface.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the General Attributes tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the port name.
Name
-
-
Specifies the port name.
A-106
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable Port
Enabled
Enabled
l Specifies whether an Ethernet port is enabled. An Ethernet port can receive, process, and forward Ethernet services only if this parameter is set to Enabled.
Disabled
l Set this parameter according to the planning information. NOTE Port 10 of the EFP8 board does not support this parameter.
Port Mode
Layer 2
Layer 2
Layer 3
l Port Mode specifies the mode of the Ethernet port. l If Port Mode is Layer 2, Encapsulation Type can be set to Null, 802.1Q, or QinQ. l If Port Mode is Layer 3, Encapsulation Type can be set to 802.1Q only and the port can carry MPLS tunnels. NOTE Port 10 of the EFP8 board does not support the value Layer 3.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-107
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Encapsulation Type
Null
-
l Encapsulation Type specifies the method of the port to process the received packets.
802.1Q QinQ
l If you set Encapsulation Type to Null, the port transparently transmits the received packets. l If you set Encapsulation Type to 802.1Q, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1q standard. l If you set Encapsulation Type to QinQ, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1ad QinQ standard.
A-108
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation
Auto-Negotiation
l The Ethernet ports of different types support different Working Mode.
10M Half-Duplex 10M Full-Duplex 100M Half-Duplex 100M Full-Duplex 1000M Full-Duplex
l When the equipment on the opposite side works in autonegotiation mode, set the Working Mode of the equipment on the local side to AutoNegotiation. l When the equipment on the opposite side works in full-duplex mode, set the Working Mode of the equipment on the local side to 10M FullDuplex, 100M FullDuplex, or 1000M Full-Duplex depending on the port rate of the equipment on the opposite side. l When the equipment on the opposite side works in half-duplex mode, set the Working Mode of the equipment on the local side to 10M HalfDuplex, 100M HalfDuplex, or AutoNegotiation depending on the port rate of the equipment on the opposite side. l FE ports support 10M full-duplex, 10M halfduplex, 100M fullduplex, 100M halfduplex, and autonegotiation. l GE electrical ports support 10M fullduplex, 10M halfduplex, 100M fullduplex, 100M half-
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-109
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description duplex, 1000M fullduplex, and autonegotiation. l GE optical ports support 1000M fullduplex and autonegotiation. NOTE Port 10 of the EFP8 board does not support this parameter.
Max Frame Length (byte)
1518 to 9600
1522
The value of Max Frame Length(byte) should be greater than the length of any frame to be transported.
Auto-Negotiation Ability
Auto-Negotiation
FE: 100M Full-Duplex
10M Half-Duplex
GE: 1000M Full-Duplex
l Auto-Negotiation Ability specifies the auto-negotiation capability of the Ethernet port.
10M Full-Duplex 100M Half-Duplex 100M Full-Duplex
l For GE optical ports, Auto-Negotiation Ability can be set to 1000M Full-Duplex only.
1000M Full-Duplex
l Auto-Negotiation Ability is valid only when Working Mode is set to AutoNegotiation. Logical Port Attribute
Optical Port
-
Electrical Port
l This parameter specifies the attribute of the logical port. l The SFP on the EM6F board supports the optical port and electrical port.
Physical Port Attribute
-
-
This parameter indicates the attribute of the physical port.
A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control This topic describes the parameters that are related to flow control. A-110
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Flow Control tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the port name.
Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode
Disabled
Disabled
l Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is valid only when Working Mode is not set to AutoNegotiation.
Enable Symmetric Flow Control
l Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode of the equipment on the local side must be consistent with the non-autonegotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the opposite side l The OptiX RTN 950 supports only two nonauto-negotiation flow control modes, namely, Disabled mode and Enable Symmetric Flow Control mode.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-111
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode
Disabled
Disabled
l Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode is valid only when Working Mode is set to Auto-Negotiation.
Enable Symmetric Flow Control
l Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode of the equipment on the local side must be consistent with the auto-negotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the opposite side l The OptiX RTN 950 supports only two auto-negotiation flow control modes, namely, Disabled mode and Enable Symmetric Flow Control mode. NOTE Port 10 of the EFP8 board does not support this parameter.
A.5.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface NOTE
The parameter Layer 2 Attributes is meaningful only when Port Mode is set to Layer 2.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the port name.
A-112
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
QinQ Type Domain
-
-
l When Encapsulation Type in the General Attributes tab page is set to QinQ, you need to set QinQ Type Domain. The default value is 88A8. l When Encapsulation Type in the General Attributes tab page is set to Null or 802.1Q, you cannot set QinQ Type Domain. In this case, QinQ Type Domain is displayed as FFFF and cannot be changed. l QinQ Type Domain should be set to the same value for all the ports on the EM6T/ EM6F board .
TAG
Tag Aware
Tag Aware
Access Hybrid
l If all the accessed services are frames with the VLAN tag (tagged frames), set TAG to Tag Aware. l If all the accessed services are frames without the VLAN tag (untagged frames), set TAG to Access. l If the accessed services contain tagged frames and untagged frames, set TAG to Hybrid. NOTE TAG specifies the TAG flag of a port. For details about the TAG flags and associated frameprocessing methods, see Table A-2.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-113
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Default VLAN ID
1 to 4094
1
l Default VLAN ID is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. l Default VLAN ID is set according to the actual situations. NOTE For details about the functions of Default VLAN ID, see Table A-2.
VLAN Priority
0 to 7
l VLAN Priority is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.
0
l When the VLAN priority is required to divide streams or to be used for other purposes, VLAN Priority is set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value. NOTE For details about the functions of VLAN Priority, see Table A-2.
Table A-2 Methods used by Ethernet interfaces to process data frames Port
Ingress UNI
A-114
Type of Data Frame
Processing Method Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
The port receives the frame.
The port discards the frame.
The port receives the frame.
Untagged frame
The port discards the frame.
The ports add the VLAN tag, to which Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority correspond, to the frame and receive the frame.
The ports add the VLAN tag, to which Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority correspond, to the frame and receive the frame.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Port
Egress UNI
A Parameters Description
Type of Data Frame
Processing Method Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
The port transmits the frame.
The port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame.
l If the VLAN ID in the frame is Default VLAN ID, the port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame. l If the VLAN ID in the frame is not Default VLAN ID, the port directly transmits the frame.
A.5.2.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 3 attributes of Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Layer 3 Attributes tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface NOTE
Layer 3 Attributes is valid only if Port Mode is set to Layer 3.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the port name.
Enable Tunnel
Disabled
Enabled
l If Enable Tunnel is set Enabled, a port identifies and processes MPLS labels.
Enabled
l Enable Tunnel is available if you set Port Mode to Layer 3 in the General Attributes tab. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-115
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Specify IP Address
Manually
Unspecified
l Specifies the method of setting the IP address of a port.
Unspecified
l The value Unspecified indicates that the IP addresses do not need to be configured. l The value Manually indicates that the IP address of the port can be manually configured. -
IP Address
0.0.0.0
l Specifies the IP address of a port. l This parameter is available when Specify IP Address is Manually. l The IP addresses of different ports on the NE cannot be in the same network segment, but the IP addresses of the ports at both ends of the MPLS tunnel must be in the same network segment.
-
IP Mask
255.255.255.252
l Specifies the subnet mask of a port. l This parameter is available when Specify IP Address is Manually.
A.5.2.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.
Navigation Path
A-116
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the port name.
Port Physical Parameters
-
-
This parameter indicates the physical parameters of the port.
MAC Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
l This parameter specifies the loopback state at the MAC layer. When this parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back.
Inloop
l In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value. PHY Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
Inloop
l This parameter specifies the loopback state at the PHY layer. When this parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet physical signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
MAC Address
-
-
This parameter indicates the MAC address of the port.
Transmitting Rate(kbit/ s)
-
-
This parameter indicates the rate at which the data packets are transmitted.
Receiving Rate(kbit/s)
-
-
This parameter indicates the rate at which the data packets are received.
Loopback Check
Enabled
Disabled
This parameter specifies whether to enable loop detection, which is used to check whether a loop exists on the port.
Disabled
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-117
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Loopback Port Shutdown
Enabled
Disabled
This parameter indicates whether to enable the loop port shutdown function.
Egress PIR Bandwidth (Kbit/s)
-
-
This parameter indicates the egress PIR bandwidth.
Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter specifies whether to limit the traffic rate of the broadcast packets according to the proportion of the broadcast packets in the total packets. When the equipment at the opposite end may encounter a broadcast storm, this parameter is set to Enabled.
Disabled
Enabled
l If Ethernet services are E-LAN services, the recommended value is Enabled. l This parameter takes effect only for E-LAN services in the ingress direction. Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold
0 to 100
30
When the proportion of the broadcast packets in the total packets exceeds the value of this parameter, the received broadcast packets are discarded. The value of this parameter should be more than the proportion of the broadcast packets in the total packets before the broadcast storm occurs. In normal cases, this parameter is set to default value.
A.5.3 Serial Port Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to serial ports.
A-118
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Basic Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of series ports. A.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Creation of Serial Ports This topic describes parameters that are used for creating serial ports.
A.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Basic Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of series ports.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Serial Port from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the General Attributes tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the name of the port where a serial service is configured.
Name
-
-
Specifies or displays the customized port name.
Level
-
-
l Specifies or displays the serial port level. l 64K Timeslot: 64 kbit/ s timeslots of E1 signals can be bound. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports 64K Timeslot only.
Used Port
-
-
Displays the physical port that carries a serial service.
64K Timeslot
-
-
Displays the timeslots that a serial service occupies. The timeslots can be consecutive or not.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-119
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Mode
Layer 2
Layer 3
l Displays or specifies the port mode.
Layer 3
l A port supports ATM encapsulation if its Port Mode is Layer 2. A port does not support encapsulation if its Port Mode is Layer 3. -
Encapsulation Type
-
l Displays and specifies the encapsulation type of a PW. l When Port Mode is Layer 2, this parameter displays ATM; when Port Mode is Layer 3, this parameter displays Null.
A.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Creation of Serial Ports This topic describes parameters that are used for creating serial ports.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the New tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Number(e.g:1,3-6)
-
-
Specifies the port where the serial service is configured.
Name
-
-
Specifies the customized port name.
A-120
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Level
64K Timeslot
64K Timeslot
l Specifies the serial port level. l When this parameter is set to 64K Timeslot , E1 timeslots can be bound. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports only the parameter value 64K Timeslot .
Used Board
-
-
Specifies the board where a serial port is located.
Used Port
-
-
Displays the board where a serial port is located.
High Channel
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Low Channel(e.g:1,3-6)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
64K Timeslot(e.g:1,3-6)
-
-
Specifies the 64 kbit/s timeslots to be bound with the serial port. The timeslots can be consecutive or not.
A.5.4 Microwave Interface Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF_ETH interfaces. A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of microwave interfaces. A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes of microwave interfaces. A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 3 attributes of an IF_ETH port. A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of microwave interfaces.
A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of microwave interfaces. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-121
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the General Attributes tab.
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding IF port.
Name
-
-
This parameter indicates or specifies the customized port name.
Port Mode
Layer 2
Layer 2
l If Port Mode is Layer 2, Encapsulation Type can be set to Null, 802.1Q, or QinQ.
Layer 3
l If Port Mode is Layer 3, Encapsulation Type can be set to 802.1Q only and the port can carry tunnels. Null
Encapsulation Type
802.1Q
802.1Q QinQ
l Encapsulation Type specifies the method of the port to process the received packets. l If Encapsulation Type is set to Null, the port transparently transmits the received packets. l If Encapsulation Type is set to 802.1Q, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1Q standard. l If Encapsulation Type is set to QinQ, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1ad QinQ standard.
A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes of microwave interfaces.
Navigation Path
A-122
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Layer 2 Attributes NOTE
The parameter Layer 2 Attributes is meaningful only when Port Mode is set to Layer 2.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding IF port.
QinQ Type Domain
-
-
l When Encapsulation Type in the General Attributes tab page is set to QinQ, you need to set QinQ Type Domain. The default value is 88A8. l When Encapsulation Type in the General Attributes tab page is set to Null or 802.1Q, you cannot set QinQ Type Domain. In this case, QinQ Type Domain is displayed as FFFF and cannot be changed.
Tag
Tag Aware
Tag Aware
Access Hybrid
l If all the accessed services are frames that contain the VLAN tag (tagged frames), set Tag to "Tag Aware". l If all the accessed services are frames that do not contain the VLAN tag (untagged frames), set Tag to "Access". l If the accessed services contain tagged frames and untagged frames, set Tag to "Hybrid". NOTE Tag specifies the TAG flag of a port. For details about the TAG flags and associated frameprocessing methods, see Table A-3.
Default VLAN ID
1 to 4094
1
l Default VLAN ID is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. l Default VLAN ID needs to be set according to the actual situations. NOTE For details about the functions of Default VLAN ID, see Table A-3.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-123
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN Priority
0
0
l VLAN Priority is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.
1
l When the VLAN priority is required to divide streams or to be used for other purposes, VLAN Priority needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
2 3 4 5 6
NOTE For details about the functions of VLAN Priority, see Table A-3.
7
Table A-3 Data frame processing Status
Ingress Port
Egress Port
Type of Data Frame
Processing Method Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
The port receives the frame.
The port discards the frame.
The port receives the frame.
Untagged frame
The port discards the frame.
The port receives the frame after the VLAN tag that corresponds to "Default VLAN ID" and "VLAN Priority" is added to the frame.
The port receives the frame after the VLAN tag that corresponds to "Default VLAN ID" and "VLAN Priority" is added to the frame.
Tagged frame
The port transmits the frame.
The port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame.
l If the VLAN ID in the frame is "Default VLAN ID", the port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame. l If the VLAN ID in the frame is not "Default VLAN ID", the port directly transmits the frame.
A-124
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 3 attributes of an IF_ETH port.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Layer 3 Attributes tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the corresponding IF port.
Enable Tunnel
Disabled
Disabled
l A port identifies and processes MPLS labels, if its Enable Tunnel is set Enabled.
Enabled
l Enable Tunnel is available if you set Port Mode to Layer 3 in the General Attributes tab. Specify IP Address
Manually
Unspecified
Unspecified
l Specifies the method of setting the IP address of a port. l The value Unspecified indicates that the IP addresses do not need to be configured for a port. l The value Manually indicates that the IP address of a port can be manually configured.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-125
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IP Address
-
0.0.0.0
l Specifies the IP address for a port. l This parameter is available when Specify IP Address is Manually. l The IP addresses of different ports on the NE cannot be in the same network segment, but the IP addresses of the ports at both ends of the MPLS tunnel must be in the same network segment.
-
IP Mask
255.255.255.252
l Specifies the subnet mask of a port. l This parameter is available when Specify IP Address is Manually.
A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of microwave interfaces.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Parameters for Advanced Attributes Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding IF port.
A-126
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Radio Link ID
1 to 4094
1
l This parameter specifies the ID of the radio link. As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connections of radio links between sites. l The ID of each radio link of an NE must be unique, and the link IDs at both ends of a radio link must be the same.
Received Radio Link ID
-
-
l This parameter indicates the received ID of the radio link. l If the value of Received Radio Link ID does not match with the preset value of Radio Link ID at the local end, the local end inserts the AIS signal to the downstream direction of the service. At the same time, the local end reports an alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do not match.
IF Port Loopback
-
-
l This parameter indicates the loopback status of the IF interface. l Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is cancelled or not performed. l Inloop indicates that the IF signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l Outloop indicates that the received IF signals are looped back. l Generally, this parameter is used to locate the faults that occur at each IF interface. The IF loopback is used for diagnosis. If this function is enabled, the services at the related ports are affected. In normal cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.
Composite Port Loopback
-
-
l This parameter indicates the loopback status on the composite interface. l Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is cancelled or not performed. l Inloop indicates that the composite signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l Outloop indicates that the received composite signals are looped back. l In normal cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-127
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Error Frame Discard Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies whether to discard the Ethernet frame when a CRC error occurs in an Ethernet frame.
Disabled
l If the Ethernet service transmitted on the IF_ETH port is a voice service or a video service, you can set this parameter to Disabled. MAC Address
-
-
This parameter indicates the MAC address of the port.
Transmitting Rate (Kbit/s)
-
-
This parameter indicates the transmit rate of the local port.
Receiving Rate (Kbit/s)
-
-
This parameter indicates the receive rate of the local port.
MAC Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
l This parameter specifies the loopback state at the MAC layer. When this parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back.
Inloop
l In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value. NOTE The ISU2 and ISX2 boards can not be set to Inloop.
Speed Transmission at L2
Disabled Enabled
Disabled
l If Speed Transmission at L2 is set to Enabled, the Layer-2 Ethernet packets transmitted at microwave ports will be compressed to improve transmission efficiency. l If the Layer 2 header compression function can be enabled for the ISU2 or ISX2 board, it is recommended that you set Speed Transmission at L2 to Enabled. l The settings of Speed Transmission at L2 must be the same at both ends of a radio link. NOTE The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this parameter.
A-128
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Speed Transmission at L3
Disabled
Disabled
l If Speed Transmission at L3 is set to Enabled, the IP packets transmitted at microwave ports will be compressed to improve transmission efficiency.
Enabled
l If the Layer 3 header compression function can be enabled for the ISU2 or ISX2 board, it is recommended that you set Speed Transmission at L3 to Enabled. l The settings of Speed Transmission at L3 must be the same at both ends of a radio link. NOTE l The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this parameter. l When Speed Transmission at L3 is set to Enabled, Encapsulation Type of the ISU2 and ISX2 boards cannot be set to Null.
Loopback Check
Disabled
Disabled
This parameter specifies whether to enable loop detection, which is used to check whether a loop exists on the port.
Disabled
This parameter indicates whether to enable the automatic shut-down of looped ports.
Disabled
l This parameter specifies whether to limit the traffic rate of the broadcast packets according to the proportion of the broadcast packets in the total packets. When the equipment at the opposite end may encounter a broadcast storm, this parameter is set to Enabled.
Enabled Loopback Port Shutdown
Disabled
Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
l If Ethernet services are E-LAN services, the recommended value is Enabled. l This parameter takes effect only for ELAN services in the ingress direction. Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
0 to 100
30
When the proportion of the broadcast packets in the total packets exceeds the value of this parameter, the received broadcast packets are discarded. The value of this parameter should be more than the proportion of the broadcast packets in the total packets before the broadcast storm occurs. In normal cases, this parameter is set to default value.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-129
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.5.5 IF Board Parameters This topic describes parameters that are related to IF boards. A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF attributes. A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes. A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes This section describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes. A.5.5.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATPC adjustment records. A.5.5.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) test.
A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF attributes.
Navigation Path l
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
l
Click the IF Attributes tab.
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding IF interface.
A-130
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Radio Link ID
1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the work mode of the radio link in "work mode number, service capacity, channel spacing, modulation mode" format.
2,4E1,3.5MHz, 16QAM 3,8E1,14MHz,QPS K
l This parameter is set according to the planning information. The work modes of the IF boards at the two ends of a radio link must be the same.
4,8E1,7MHz, 16QAM 5,16E1,28MHz,QP SK
NOTE The IF1 board supports this parameter.
6,16E1,14MHz, 16QAM 7,STM-1,28MHz, 128QAM 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK 9,E3,14MHz, 16QAM 10,22E1,14MHz, 32QAM 11,26E1,14MHz, 64QAM 12,32E1,14MHz, 128QAM 13,35E1,28MHz, 16QAM 14,44E1,28MHz, 32QAM 15,53E1,28MHz, 64QAM IF Service Type
Hybrid(Native E1 +ETH) Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH) SDH
Hybrid(Native E1 +ETH)
l Displays or specifies the type of services carried by the IF board. l If the Integrated IP radio transmits Native E1 services, set this parameter to Hybrid(Native E1+ETH). l If the Integrated IP radio transmits Native STM-1 services, set this parameter to Hybrid(Native STM-1 +ETH). l If the SDH radio transmits SDH services, set this parameter to SDH. NOTE The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this parameter.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-131
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Radio Link ID
1 to 4094
1
l Link ID indicates or specifies the ID of a radio link. As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connections of radio links between sites. l If the value of Received Radio Link ID does not match the preset value of Link ID at the local end, the local end inserts the AIS signal to the downstream direction of the service. At the same time, the local end reports MW_LIM alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do not match. l Link ID is set according to the planning information. Each radio link of an NE should have a unique link ID, and the link IDs at both ends of a radio link should be the same.
Received Radio Link ID
-
-
l This parameter indicates the received ID of the radio link. l If the value of Received Radio Link ID does not match the preset value of Radio Link ID at the local end, the local end inserts the AIS signal to the downstream direction of the service. At the same time, the local end reports an alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do not match. l When the radio link becomes faulty, this parameter is displayed as an invalid value.
A-132
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IF Port Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
l This parameter indicates or specifies the loopback status of the IF interface.
Inloop
l Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is cancelled or not performed.
Outloop
l Inloop indicates that the IF signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l Outloop indicates that the received IF signals are looped back. l Generally, IF Port Loopback is used to locate the faults that occur at each IF interface. The IF loopback is used for diagnosis. If this function is enabled, the services at the related ports are affected. In normal cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. 2M Wayside Enable Statusa
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the radio link transmits the wayside E1 service. l The wayside E1 service can be supported by the IF1 board in the 7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM, 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or 9,E3,14MHz, 16QAM mode.
2M Wayside Input Boarda
-
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the slot in which the 2M wayside service is accessed. l This parameter can be set only when 2M Wayside Enable Status is set to Enabled. l The wayside E1 service can be supported by the IF1 board in the 7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM, 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or 9,E3,14MHz, 16QAM mode.
350 MHz Consecutive Wave Status
Stop Start
Stop
l This parameter indicates or specifies the status of transmitting the 350 MHz carrier signals at the IF interface. l 350 MHz Consecutive Wave Status can be set to Start in the commissioning process only. In normal cases, this parameter is set to Stop. Otherwise, the services are interrupted.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-133
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
XPIC Enabledb
Enabled
Enabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the XPIC function of the XPIC IF board is enabled.
Disabled
l If the XPIC IF board does not perform the XPIC function, XPIC Enabled should be set to Disabled. Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslotc
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslot needs to be set consistently between two ends of a radio link.
NOTE
l a. The IFU2 and IFX2 boards do not support way-side services. l b. The IFU2, ISU2, and IF1 boards do not support the XPIC function. l c. The IF1 board does not support the IEEE-1588 timeslot function.
Parameters for Hybrid/AM Configuration NOTE
The IF1 board does not support Hybrid/AM configuration.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding IF port.
IF Channel Bandwidth
7M
-
IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the channel spacing of the corresponding radio link. This parameter is set according to the planning information.
14M 28M 40M 56M
NOTE l This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board. l The IFU2 board does not support the value 40M. l The IFX2 board does not support the values 7M, 14M, and 40M. l The ISX2 board supports the channel spacings of 7M and 14M only when the XPIC function is disabled.
A-134
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
AM Enable Status
Disabled
Disabled
l When AM Enable Status is set to Disabled, the radio link uses only the specified modulation scheme. In this case, you need to select Manually Specified Modulation Mode.
Enabled
l When AM Enable Status is set to Enabled, the radio link uses the corresponding modulation scheme according to the channel conditions. l Hence, the Integrated IP radio can ensure the reliable transmission of the E1 services and provide bandwidth adaptively for the Ethernet services when the AM function is enabled. l The ISX2/ISU2 does not support the AM function when IF Service Type is SDH. Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity
QPSK
QPSK
16QAM
l Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity specifies the lowest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the planning information. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the service transmission bandwidth that the Hybrid radio must ensure and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.
32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM
l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled.
QPSK
l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. l Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity specifies the highest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the planning information. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme. NOTE Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be higher than Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-135
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Manually Specified Modulation Mode
QPSK
QPSK
l This parameter specifies the modulation scheme that the radio link uses for signal transmission.
16QAM 32QAM
l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Disabled.
64QAM 128QAM 256QAM STM-1 Capacity
-
-
l Specifies the STM-1 capacity of the IF board. l This parameter is available only when IF Service Type is set to Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH) and SDH. l If IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH), this parameter can be set to 0 or 1. l If IF Service Type is SDH, this parameter can be set to 1 or 2. NOTE The IFU2 and IFX2 boards do not support this parameter.
Enable E1 Priority
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
l This parameter specifies whether to enable the E1 priority function. l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
Guarantee E1 Capacity
-
-
l If AM Enable Status is set to Enabled, this parameter needs to be set according to IF Channel Bandwidth, Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity, and the actually transmitted services. l If AM Enable Status is set to Disabled, this parameter needs to be set according to IF Channel Bandwidth, Manually Specified Modulation Mode, and the actually transmitted services. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
Guarantee E1 Capacity Range
A-136
-
-
Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF board in guarantee capacity modulation mode.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Data Service Bandwidth(Mbit/ s)
-
-
Displays the data service bandwidth of the IF board.
Full E1 Capacity
-
-
l This parameter specifies the number of transmitted E1 services in Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity. l This parameter is valid if Enable E1 Priority is set to Enabled. l E1 service bandwidth in full capacity mode ≤ Service bandwidth in full capacity mode - Service bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode + E1 service bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode. In addition, the number of E1 services in full capacity modulation mode should be smaller than or equal to the maximum number of E1 services in full capacity modulation mode. l The Full E1 Capacity must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
Full E1 Capacity
-
-
Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF board in full capacity modulation mode.
Transmit-End Modulation Mode
-
-
Displays the modulation mode at the transmit mode.
Receive-End Modulation Mode
-
-
Displays the modulation mode at the receive mode.
Guarantee AM Service Capacity (Mbit/s)
-
-
Displays the guarantee AM service capacity.
Full AM Service Capacity(Mbit/s)
-
-
Displays the full AM service capacity.
Transmitted AM Service Capacity (Mbit/s)
-
-
Displays the transmitted AM service capacity.
Received AM Service Capacity (Mbit/s)
-
-
Displays the received AM service capacity.
E1 Capacity For High Priority
-
-
Displays the number of configured highpriority E1s.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-137
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.
Navigation Path l
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
l
Click the ATPC Attributes tab.
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding IF interface.
ATPC Enable Status
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC function is enabled.
Enabled
l When this parameter is set to Enabled and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold at the receive end, the receiver notifies the transmitter to decrease or increase the transmit power until the RSL is within the range that is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold. l The settings of the ATPC attributes must be consistent at both ends of a radio link. l In the case of areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission, it is recommended that you set ATPC Enable Status to Disabled. l During the commissioning process, set this parameter to Disabled to ensure that the transmit power is not changed. After the commissioning, re-set the ATPC attributes. ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm)
A-138
-
-45.0
l Set the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold to a value for the expected receive power. l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm)
-
-70.0
Lower Threshold(dBm) to the difference between the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB. l You can set the ATPC upper threshold only when ATPC Automatic Threshold(dBm) is set to Disabled.
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status
Enabled
Disabled
l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC automatic threshold function is enabled.
Disabled
l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Enabled, the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds according to the work mode of the radio link. l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Disabled, you need to manually set ATPC Upper Automatic Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower Automatic Threshold(dBm). ATPC Upper Automatic Threshold(dBm)
-
-
ATPC Lower Automatic Threshold(dBm)
-
-
l This parameter indicates that the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds. l This parameter is valid only when ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Enabled.
A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes This section describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.
Navigation Path l
In the NE Explorer, select the IF board, and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
l
Click the AM Advanced Attributes tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-139
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding IF interface.
Modulation Mode
-
-
Displays the modulation schemes.
E1 Capacity
-
-
l You can specify the number of E1s that can be transmitted in intermediate modulation scheme, by setting the advanced attributes correspondingly. l Generally, it is recommended that this parameter takes the default value. To ensure that a specific number of E1s can be transmitted in intermediate modulation scheme, adjust the E1 capacity in each modulation scheme according to the network planning information. l If the E1 priority function is enabled, the maximum number of allowed E1 services in the current mode = Min {[Bandwidth of the air interface in the current mode - (Bandwidth for the assured capacity - Assured E1 number x 2Mbps)]/2Mbps, E1 number in the highest-gain modulation mode}.
-
Data Service Bandwidth(Mbit/ s)
-
Displays the data service bandwidth.
A.5.5.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATPC adjustment records.
Navigation Path Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ATPC Adjustment Records from the Function Tree.
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the port for the ATPC adjustment.
A-140
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Event NO.
-
-
This parameter indicates the number of the ATPC adjustment event.
Adjustment Time
-
-
This parameter indicates the time of the ATPC adjustment.
Adjustment Direction
-
-
This parameter indicates the direction of the adjustment at the port.
Switchover
-
-
This parameter indicates the switching operation at the port.
Transmitted Power(dBm)
-
-
This parameter indicates the transmitted power of the port to be switched.
Received Power (dBm)
-
-
This parameter indicates the received power of the port to be switched.
A.5.5.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) test.
Navigation Path Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the port for the PRBS test.
Direction
Cross
Cross
l This parameter indicates or specifies the direction of the PRBS test.
Tributary
l In the tributary direction, the PRBS test is performed to check the connectivity of the cable from the tributary board to the DDF. l In the cross-connect direction, the PRBS test is performed to check the processing of the service from the tributary board to the NE at the remote end. Duration
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
1 to 255
1
This parameter indicates or specifies the duration of the PRBS test.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-141
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Measured Time
s
s
This parameter indicates or specifies the time unit used for the PRBS test.
10min h Start Time
-
-
This parameter indicates the start time of the PRBS test.
Progress
-
-
This parameter indicates the progress percentage of the PRBS test.
Total PRBS
-
-
This parameter indicates the number of bit errors that occur in the PRBS test.
Accumulating Mode
Selected
Deselected
This parameter specifies whether to display the values in accumulative mode. If Accumulating Mode is selected, it indicates that the values are displayed in accumulative mode.
Deselected
A.5.6 ODU Parameters This topic describes parameters that are related to ODUs. A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio frequency attributes of an ODU. A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the power attributes of the ODU. A.5.6.3 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the equipment information of the ODU. A.5.6.4 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes of the ODU.
A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio frequency attributes of an ODU.
Navigation Path
A-142
l
Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree.
l
Click the Radio Frequency Attributes tab.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding ODU.
Transmit Frequency(MHz)
-
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit frequency of the ODU, namely, the central frequency of the channel. l The value of Transmit Frequency (MHz) must not be less than the sum of the minimum transmit frequency supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing, and must not be more than the difference between the maximum transmit frequency supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. l The difference between the transmit frequencies at both ends of a radio link should be one T/R spacing. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
T/R Spacing(MHz)
-
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU to prevent mutual interference of the transmitter and receiver. l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive frequency. If the ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive frequency. l If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing, T/R Spacing(MHz) is set to 0, indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. l A valid T/R spacing value is determined by the ODU itself, and T/R Spacing (MHz) should be set according to the technical specifications of the ODU. l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link.
Actual Transmit Frequency(MHz)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
-
-
This parameter indicates the actual transmit frequency of the ODU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-143
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Actual Receive Frequency(MHz)
-
-
This parameter indicates the actual receive frequency of the ODU.
Actual T/R Spacing(MHz)
-
-
This parameter indicates the actual T/R spacing of the ODU.
The range of frequency point (MHz)
-
-
This parameter indicates the working range of the frequency of the ODU.
A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the power attributes of the ODU.
Navigation Path l
Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree.
l
Click the Power Attributes tab.
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding ODU.
Maximum Transmit Power (dBm)
-
-
l Maximum Transmit Power(dBm) is set according to the planning information. This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power rang of the ODU in the guaranteed capacity modulation module. l This parameter is set to limit the maximum transmit power of the ODU within this preset range. l The maximum transmit power adjusted by using the ATPC function should not exceed Maximum Transmit Power (dBm).
A-144
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Transmit Power (dBm)
-
-
l Transmit Power(dBm) is set according to the planning information. This parameter specifies the transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power rang of the ODU or a value that exceeds Maximum Transmit Power (dBm). l It is recommended that you set the transmit power of the ODU to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l Consider the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end when you set this parameter. Ensure that the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure stable radio services.
Power to Be Received(dBm)
-90.0 to -20.0
-10.0
l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off), indicating that the antenna is not aligned. l After the antenna alignment, after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l Power to Be Received(dBm) is set according to the planning information. When this parameter takes the default value, the antenna misalignment indicating function is disabled.
TX High Threshold(dBm)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
-
-
l If the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of TX High Threshold(dBm), the system separately records the duration when the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is greater than the
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-145
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
TX Low Threshold (dBm)
-
-
preset value of TX High Threshold (dBm) and the duration when the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) in the performance events. l If the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) and is lower than the preset value of TX High Threshold(dBm), the system records the duration when the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) in the performance events. l If the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is lower than the preset value of TX Low Threshold(dBm), the system does not record it. l TX High Threshold(dBm) and TX Low Threshold(dBm) are valid only when the ATPC function is enabled.
RX High Threshold(dBm)
-
-
l If the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is lower than the preset value of RX Low Threshold(dBm), the system records the duration when the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is lower than the preset value of RX Low Threshold(dBm) and duration when the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is lower than the preset value of RX High Threshold (dBm)in the performance events. l If the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of RX Low Threshold(dBm) and is lower than the preset value of RX High Threshold(dBm), the system records the duration when the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is Lower than the preset value of RX High Threshold (dBm) in the performance events. l If the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is greater than the preset
A-146
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
RX Low Threshold (dBm)
-
-
Actual Transmit Power(dBm)
-
-
Description value of RX High Threshold(dBm), the system does not record it.
l This parameter indicates the actual transmit power of the ODU. l If the ATPC function is enabled, the queried actual transmit power may be different from the preset value.
Actual Receive Power(dBm)
-
-
This parameter indicates the actual receive power of the ODU.
Actual range of Power(dBm)
-
-
This parameter indicates the range of the actual transmit power of the ODU.
Transmission Power Type
-
-
This parameter indicates the level of the output power of the ODU.
A.5.6.3 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the equipment information of the ODU.
Navigation Path l
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree.
l
Click the Equipment Information tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-147
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding ODU.
Frequency(GHz)
-
-
This parameter indicates the frequency band where the ODU operates.
Equipment Type
-
-
l This parameter indicates the equipment type of the ODU. l PDH and SDH indicate the transmission capacity only and are irrelevant to the type of transmitted service.
T/R Spacing(MHz)
-
-
This parameter indicates the T/R spacing of the ODU.
Intermediate Frequency Bandwidth (MHz)
-
-
This parameter indicates the IF frequency bandwidth of the ODU.
IF Bandwidth Type
-
-
Displays the IF bandwidth type.
Station Type
-
-
l This parameter indicates whether the ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low station. l The transmit frequency of a Tx high station is one T/R spacing higher than the transmit frequency of a Tx low station.
Transmission Power Type
-
-
This parameter indicates the level of the output power of the ODU.
Produce Time
-
-
This parameter indicates the manufacturing time of the ODU.
Produce SN
-
-
This parameter indicates the manufacturing serial number and the manufacturer code of the ODU.
A.5.6.4 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes of the ODU.
Navigation Path
A-148
l
Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree.
l
Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding ODU.
RF Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
l This parameter indicates or specifies the loopback status of the RF interface of the ODU.
Inloop
l Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is canceled or not performed. l Inloop indicates that the RF signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l RF Loopback function is used for fault locating for the RF interfaces. The RF Loopback function is used for diagnosis and may affect the services that are transmitted over the interfaces. Hence, exercise precaution before starting this function. l In normal cases, RF Loopback is set to Non-Loopback. unmute
Configure Transmission Status
unmute
mute
l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit status of the ODU. l If Configure Transmission Status is set to mute, the transmitter of the ODU does not work but can normally receive microwave signals. l If Configure Transmission Status is set to unmute, the ODU can normally transmit and receive microwave signals. l In normal cases, Configure Transmission Status is set to unmute.
Actual Transmission Status
-
-
Displays the ODU manufacturer information.
Factory Information
-
-
This parameter indicates the manufacturer information about the ODU.
Remarks
-
-
Specifies the remarks of the ODU.
A.5.7 Parameters for SDH Interface Boards This topic describes parameters that are related to SDH interface boards. A.5.7.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-149
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the SDH interfaces. A.5.7.2 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown This topic describes the parameters that are related to the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.
A.5.7.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces This topic describes the parameters that are related to the SDH interfaces.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Select By Board/Port(Channel), and select Port or VC4 Channel from the list box.
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding SDH interface.
Optical Interface Namea
-
-
This parameter indicates or specifies the name of the optical interface.
Laser Switcha
On
On
l This parameter indicates or specifies the on/off state of the laser.
Off
l This parameter is set for SDH optical interfaces only. l In normal cases, this parameter is set to On. Optical(Electrical) Interface Loopbacka
Non-Loopback Inloop Outloop
Non-Loopback
l This parameter indicates or specifies the loopback status on the SDH interface. l Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is canceled or not performed. l Inloop indicates that the SDH signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l Outloop indicates that the received SDH signals are looped back. l This function is used for fault locating for the SDH interfaces. The Optical (Electrical) Interface Loopback function is used for diagnosis and may affect the services that are transmitted over the interfaces. Hence, exercise precaution before starting this function. l In normal cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.
A-150
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VC4 Loopbackb
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
l This parameter indicates or specifies the loopback status in the VC-4 path.
Inloop
l Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is canceled or not performed.
Outloop
l Inloop indicates that the VC-4 signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l Outloop indicates that the received VC-4 signals are looped back. l This function is used for fault locating for the VC-4 paths. The VC4 Loopback function is used for diagnosis and may affect the services that are transmitted over the interfaces. Hence, exercise precaution before starting this function. l In normal cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.
NOTE
l a: Indicates the parameters that are supported when Port is selected from the list box. l b: Indicates the parameters that are supported when VC4 Channel is selected from the list box.
A.5.7.2 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown This topic describes the parameters that are related to the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.
Navigation Path Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Automatic Laser Shutdown from the Function Tree.
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Optical Interface
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding optical interface.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-151
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Auto Shutdown
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the Auto Laser Shutdown function is enabled or disabled for the laser.
Enabled
l The ALS function allows the laser to shut down automatically when an optical port does not carry services, an optical fiber is broken, or no optical signal is received. l You can set On Period(ms), Off Period (ms), and Continuously On-test Period (ms) only when this parameter is set to Enabled. On Period(ms)
1000 to 3000
2000
This parameter indicates or specifies the period when a shutdown laser automatically starts up and tests whether the optical fiber is normal.
Off Period(ms)
2000 to 300000
60000
This parameter indicates or specifies the period when the laser does not work (with the ALS function being enabled).
Continuously Ontest Period(ms)
2000 to 300000
90000
This parameter indicates or specifies the period when a shutdown laser is manually started up and tests whether the optical fiber is normal.
A.5.8 Parameters for PDH Interface Boards This topic describes parameters that are related to PDH interface boards. A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PDH interfaces. A.5.8.2 Parameter Description: PRBS Test This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) test.
A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PDH interfaces.
Navigation Path
A-152
1.
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Select By Board/Port(Channel).
3.
Select Port from the list box. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding port.
Port Name
-
-
This parameter indicates or specifies the name of the port.
Tributary Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
l This parameter indicates or specifies the loopback status in the associated path of the tributary unit.
Inloop Outloop
l Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is canceled or not performed. l Inloop indicates that the PDH signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l Outloop indicates that the received PDH signals are looped back. l This function is used for fault locating for the paths of the tributary unit. The Tributary Loopback function is used for diagnosis and may affect the services that are transmitted over the interfaces. Hence, exercise precaution before starting this function. l In normal cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.
Port Impedance
-
-
This parameter indicates the impedance of a path, which depends on the tributary unit.
Service Load Indication
Load
Load
l This parameter indicates or specifies the service loading status in a specific path.
Non-Loaded
l When this parameter is set to Load, the board detects whether alarms exist in the path. l When this parameter is set to NonLoaded, the board does not detect whether there are alarms in the path. l If a path does not carry any services, you can set this parameter to Non-Loaded for the path to mask all the alarms. If a path carries services, you need to set this parameter to Load for the path.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-153
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Retiming Mode
Normal
Normal
l This parameter indicates or specifies the retiming mode of a specific path.
Retiming Mode of Tributary Clock
l By using the retiming function, the retiming reference signal from the SDH network and the service data signal are combined and then sent to the client equipment, thus decreasing the output jitter in the signal. In this way, the retiming function ensures that the service code flow can normally transfer the retiming reference signal.
Retiming Mode of Cross-Connect Clock
l When this parameter is set to Normal, the retiming function is not used. l When this parameter is set to Retiming Mode of Tributary Clock, the retiming function is used with the clock of the upstream tributary unit traced. l When this parameter is set to Retiming Mode of Cross-Connect Clock, the retiming function is used with the clock of the cross-connect unit traced. l It is recommended that the external clock, instead of the retiming function, should be used to provide reference clock signals for the equipment. l If the retiming function is required, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Retiming Mode of Cross-connect Clock. Port Service Type
-
-
This parameter indicates the type of services that are processed in a path. It depends on the services that are transmitted in a path.
Input Signal Equalization
Unequalized
Unequalized
l This parameter indicates whether the input signals are equalized.
Equalized
l It is recommended that you set this parameter to default value. Output Signal Equalization
Unequalized
Unequalized
Equalized
l This parameter indicates whether the output signals are equalized. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
A.5.8.2 Parameter Description: PRBS Test This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) test. A-154
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the port for the PRBS test.
Direction
Cross
Cross
l This parameter indicates or specifies the direction of the PRBS test.
Tributary
l In the tributary direction, the PRBS test is performed to check the connectivity of the cable from the tributary board to the DDF. l In the cross-connect direction, the PRBS test is performed to check the processing of the service from the tributary board to the NE at the remote end. Duration
1 to 255
1
This parameter indicates or specifies the duration of the PRBS test.
Measured Time
s
s
This parameter indicates or specifies the time unit used for the PRBS test.
10min h Start Time
-
-
This parameter indicates the start time of the PRBS test.
Progress
-
-
This parameter indicates the progress percentage of the PRBS test.
Total PRBS
-
-
This parameter indicates the number of bit errors that occur in the PRBS test.
Accumulating Mode
Selected
Deselected
This parameter specifies whether to display the values in accumulative mode. If Accumulating Mode is selected, it indicates that the values are displayed in accumulative mode.
Deselected
A.5.9 Parameters for Overhead This topic describes the parameters that are related to overhead. A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead This topic describes the parameters that are related to the regenerator section overheads (RSOHs). Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-155
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-4 path overheads (POHs). A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-12 path overheads (POHs).
A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead This topic describes the parameters that are related to the regenerator section overheads (RSOHs).
Navigation Path 1.
Select an SDH interface board in the NE Explorer Choose Configuration > Overhead Management > Regenerator Section Overhead from the Function Tree.
2.
Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.
Parameters for Setting the Display Format Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Display in Text Format
Selected
Selected
This parameter specifies the display in the text format.
Display in Hexadecimal
Selected
Deselected
This parameter specifies the display in the hexadecimal format.
Deselected
Deselected
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
-
-
This parameter indicates the object to be set.
J0 to be Sent ([Mode]Content)
-
[16 Bytes]HuaWei SBS
If the NE at the opposite end reports the J0_MM alarm, this parameter is set according to the J0 byte to be received at the opposite end.
J0 to be Received ([Mode]Content)
-
[Disabled]
l This parameter specifies the J0 byte to be received. l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the board does not monitor the received J0 byte. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
J0 Received ([Mode]Content)
A-156
-
-
This parameter indicates the J0 byte that is actually received.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-4 path overheads (POHs).
Navigation Path 1.
Select SDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the Function Tree.
2.
Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.
Parameters for Setting the Display Format Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Display in Text Format
Selected
Selected
This parameter specifies the display in the text format.
Display in Hexadecimal
Selected
Deselected
This parameter specifies the display in the hexadecimal format.
Deselected
Deselected
Parameters for the Trace Byte J1 Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
-
-
This parameter indicates the object to be set.
J1 to be Sent ([Mode]Content)
-
[16 Bytes]HuaWei SBS
If the NE at the opposite end reports the HP_TIM or LP_TIM alarm, this parameter is set according to the J1 byte to be received at the opposite end.
J1 to be Received ([Mode]Content)
-
[Disabled]
l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the board does not monitor the received J1 byte. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
J1 Received ([Mode]Content)
-
-
This parameter displays the J1 byte that is actually received.
Parameters for the Signal Flag C2 Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
-
-
This parameter indicates the object to be set.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-157
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
C2 to be Sent
-
-
If the NE at the opposite end reports the HP_SLM alarm, this parameter is set according to the C2 byte to be received at the opposite end.
C2 to be Received
-
-
If the NE at the local end reports the HP_SLM alarm, this parameter is set according to the C2 byte to be sent at the opposite end.
C2 Received
-
-
This parameter displays the C2 byte that is actually received.
Parameters for Overhead Termination Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
-
-
This parameter indicates the object to be set.
VC4 Overhead Termination
Termination
Auto
l If this parameter is set to PassThrough, the NE forwards the original overhead after monitoring the VC-4 path overhead regardless of the C2 byte.
Pass-Through Auto
l If this parameter is set to Termination, the NE generates the new VC-4 path overhead according to the board setting after monitoring the VC-4 path overhead regardless of the C2 byte. l If this parameter is set to Auto, the VC-4 path overhead in the VC-4 pass-through service is passed through, and the VC-4 path overhead in the VC-12 service is terminated. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-12 path overheads (POHs).
Navigation Path
A-158
1.
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Overhead Management > VC12 Path Overhead from the Function Tree.
2.
Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Setting the Display Format Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Display in Text Format
Selected
Selected
This parameter specifies the display in the text format.
Display in Hexadecimal
Selected
Deselected
This parameter specifies the display in the hexadecimal format.
Deselected
Deselected
Parameters for the Trace Byte Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
-
-
This parameter indicates the object to be set.
J2 to be Sent
-
[16 Bytes]HuaWei SBS
If the NE at the opposite end reports the LP_TIM or LP_TIM_VC12 alarm, this parameter is set according to the J2 byte to be received by the NE at the opposite end.
J2 to be Received
-
[Disabled]
l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the board does not monitor the received J2 byte. l It is recommended that you use the default value. NOTE IF boards do not support this parameter.
-
J2 Received
-
This parameter displays the J2 byte that is actually received.
A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the Packet Plane This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet features on the packet plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet port parameters, and QoS parameters. A.6.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services This topic describes the parameters that are related to Ethernet services. A.6.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet protocol. A.6.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet operation, administration and maintenance (OAM). A.6.4 QoS Parameters Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-159
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
This topic describes the parameters that are related to QoS.
A.6.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services This topic describes the parameters that are related to Ethernet services. A.6.1.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation This topic describes the interface parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet line (E-Line) service. A.6.1.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-Line services. A.6.1.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Item_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating VLAN forwarding table items. A.6.1.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet local area network (ELAN) service. A.6.1.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-LAN services. A.6.1.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a QinQ link.
A.6.1.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation This topic describes the interface parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet line (E-Line) service.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Create.
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-4 Service direction of UNI-UNI Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294
-
This parameter specifies the ID of the E-Line service.
Service Name
-
-
This parameter specifies the name of the E-Line service.
A-160
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Direction
UNI-UNI
UNI-UNI
l This parameter specifies the direction of the E-Line service.
UNI-NNI NNI-NNI
BPDU
Not Transparently Transmitted
l Set this parameter to UNI-UNI. Not Transparently Transmitted
Transparently Transmitted
l This parameter specifies the transparent transmission ID of the bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) packets. It is used to indicate whether the E-Line service transparently transmits the BPDU packets. l If the BPDU packets are used as the service packets and transparently transmitted to the opposite end, set this parameter to Transparently Transmitted. That is, the parameter value Transparently Transmitted takes effect only if Encapsulation Type of the source and sink ports of the E-Line service are Null. l In other cases, set this parameter to Not Transparently Transmitted. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
MTU(bytes)
-
-
This parameter cannot be set here.
Service Tag Role
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-161
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Port
-
-
l Before setting this parameter, check and ensure that the attributes in Ethernet Interface of the port are set correctly and are the same as the planning information. l The value of this parameter cannot be the same as the value of sink port. l The value of this parameter cannot be used for the E-LAN port. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A-162
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source VLANs
1 to 4094
-
l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l The number and value of VLANs must be the same value of Sink VLANs. l If this parameter is set to null, all the services at the source port are used as the service source. l If this parameter is not set to null, only the service that contains the VLAN ID at the source port can be used as the service source.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-163
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink Port
-
-
l Before setting this parameter, check and ensure that the attributes in Ethernet Interface of the port are set correctly and are the same as the planning information. l The value of this parameter cannot be the same as the value of Source Port. l The value of this parameter cannot be used for the E-LAN port. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A-164
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink VLANs
1 to 4094
-
l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l The number and value of VLANs must be the same value of Source VLANs. l If this parameter is set to null, all the services at the sink port are used as the service sink. l If this parameter is not set to null, only the service that contains the VLAN ID at the sink port can be used as the service sink.
Table A-5 Service direction of UNI-NNI (carried by PWs) Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294
-
This parameter specifies the ID of the E-Line service.
Service Name
-
-
This parameter specifies the name of the E-Line service.
Direction
UNI-UNI
UNI-UNI
l This parameter specifies the direction of the E-Line service.
UNI-NNI NNI-NNI
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l Set this parameter to UNI-NNI.
A-165
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
BPDU
Not Transparently Transmitted
Not Transparently Transmitted
For UNI-NNI ETH PWE3 services, the parameter value is always Not Transparently Transmitted.
Transparently Transmitted MTU(bytes)
-
-
This parameter cannot be set here.
Service Tag Role
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Source Port
-
-
l Before setting this parameter, check and ensure that the attributes in Ethernet Interface of the port are set correctly and are the same as the planning information. l The value of this parameter cannot be the same as the value of sink port. l The value of this parameter cannot be used for the E-LAN port. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A-166
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source VLANs
1 to 4094
-
l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l If this parameter is set to null, all the services at the source port are used as the service source. l If this parameter is not set to null, only the service that contains the VLAN ID at the source port can be used as the service source.
PRI
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Bearer Type
QinQ Link
PW
For UNI-NNI ETH PWE3 services, the parameter value is always PW.
PW
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-167
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Type
No Protection
No Protection
l If this parameter is set to PW APS, working and protection PWs need to be configured.
PW APS Slave Protection Pair
l If this parameter is set to Slave Protection Pair, you need to bind the slave PW APS protection group with the master PW APS protection group. The switching of the master PW APS protection group triggers the switching of the slave PW APS protection group simultaneously.
Table A-6 Service direction of UNI-NNI (carried by QinQ links) Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294
-
This parameter specifies the ID of the E-Line service.
Service Name
-
-
This parameter specifies the name of the E-Line service.
Direction
UNI-UNI
UNI-UNI
l This parameter specifies the direction of the E-Line service.
UNI-NNI NNI-NNI
BPDU
Not Transparently Transmitted
l Set this parameter to UNI-NNI. Not Transparently Transmitted
For UNI-NNI QinQ services, the parameter value is always Not Transparently Transmitted.
Transparently Transmitted MTU(bytes)
-
-
This parameter cannot be set here.
Service Tag Role
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
A-168
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Port
-
-
l Before setting this parameter, check and ensure that the attributes in Ethernet Interface of the port are set correctly and are the same as the planning information. l The value of this parameter cannot be the same as the value of sink port. l The value of this parameter cannot be used for the E-LAN port. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Source VLANs
1 to 4094
-
l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l If this parameter is set to null, all the services at the source port are used as the service source. l If this parameter is not set to null, only the service that contains the VLAN ID at the source port can be used as the service source.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-169
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PRI
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Bearer Type
QinQ Link
PW
For NNI-NNI QinQ services, the parameter value is always QinQ Link.
-
Selects or specifies the ID of a QinQ link. You can create a QinQ link or select an existing QinQ link.
PW
QinQ Link ID
-
Table A-7 Service direction of NNI-NNI Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294
-
This parameter specifies the ID of the E-Line service.
Service Name
-
-
This parameter specifies the name of the E-Line service.
Direction
UNI-UNI
UNI-UNI
l This parameter specifies the direction of the E-Line service.
UNI-NNI NNI-NNI
BPDU
Not Transparently Transmitted
l Set this parameter to NNI-NNI. Not Transparently Transmitted
For NNI-NNI QinQ services, the parameter value is always Not Transparently Transmitted .
Transparently Transmitted
MTU(bytes)
-
-
This parameter cannot be set here.
Service Tag Role
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
PRI
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
A-170
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bearer Type 1
QinQ Link
QinQ Link
Uses the QinQ link to carry the E-Line service.
QinQ Link ID 1
-
-
l Selects the QinQ link ID of the first QinQ link. l The QinQ link ID is preset in QinQ Link.
Bearer Type 2
QinQ Link
QinQ Link
Uses the QinQ link to carry the E-Line service.
QinQ Link ID 2
-
-
l Selects the QinQ link ID of the second QinQ link. l The QinQ link ID is preset in QinQ Link.
QinQ Link ID
-
-
Selects or specifies the ID of a QinQ link. You can create a QinQ link or select an existing QinQ link.
Parameters of PWs NOTE
l Parameters of PWs need to be configured only when Direction is UNI-NNI and Bearer Type is PW. l If the parameter Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS or Slave Protection Pair, all the parameters of working and protection PWs need to be configured. This section considers the parameters of the working PW as an example.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
-
-
Specifies the ID of the PW that carries services.
PW Signaling Type
Static
Static
Labels for static PWs need to be manually assigned.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-171
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW Type
Ethernet
Ethernet
l Specifies the type of the PW.
Ethernet Tagged Mode
l PW Type indicates whether P-TAG is added to Ethernet frames that are encapsulated for transmission on PWs. If it is not required to add VLAN IDs, set this parameter to Ethernet. If it is required to add VLAN IDs, set this parameter to Ethernet Tagged Mode and then set Request VLAN in the Advanced Attributes tab. PW Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Displays the direction of the PW.
PW Encapsulation Type
MPLS
MPLS
Displays the encapsulation type of the packets on the PW.
PW Ingress Label/ Source Port
16 to 1048575
-
Specifies the PW Ingress label.
PW Egress Label/Sink Port
16 to 1048575
-
Specifies the PW Egress label.
Tunnel selection mode
-
-
Displays the method to select tunnels.
Tunnel Type
MPLS
MPLS
Displays the type of the tunnel that carries the PW.
Tunnel
-
-
A tunnel needs to be selected. If no tunnel is available, creation of a PW will fail.
Egress Tunnel
-
-
For a bidirectional tunnel, the system will configure the egress tunnel automatically.
A-172
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Peer LSR ID
-
-
Specifies the LSR ID of the PW at the remote end. If an existing tunnel is selected, the LSR ID will be automatically assigned.
QoS Parameters (PW) NOTE
QoS parameters need to be configured only when Direction is UNI-NNI and Bearer Type is PW.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit
-
-
Specifies whether the bandwidth limit function is enabled. l This function limits the bandwidth of one or more PWs in an MPLS tunnel. l An ETH PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ETH PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel.
Policy
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
CIR(Kbit/s)
-
-
Specifies the committed information rate (CIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as PIR.
CBS(byte)
-
-
Specifies the committed burst size (CBS) of a PW.
PIR(Kbit/s)
-
-
Specifies the peak information rate (PIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as CIR.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-173
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PBS(byte)
-
-
Specifies the peak burst size (PBS) of a PW.
EXP
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
LSP Mode
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe: When stripping MPLS tunnel labels from packets, an egress node does not update the scheduling priority for the packets.
Parameters of Advanced Attributes (PW) Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Word
No Use
No Use
For ETH PWE3 services, the parameter value is always No Use.
Control Channel Type
None
Alert Label
l Specifies the mode of PW connectivity check.
Alert Label
l None indicates that VCCV is not used. l Alert Label indicates VCCV packets in Alert Label encapsulation mode. VCCV Verification Mode
Ping
Ping
None
l Specifies the VCCV verification mode. The VCCV verification is used for PW connectivity check. l If the VCCV-Ping test is required, do not set this parameter to None.
A-174
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Request VLAN
-
-
l Set this parameter when PW Type is Ethernet Tagged Mode. l If the received packets do not carry any VLAN IDs, the PW will add VLAN IDs to the packets as required by the setting of this parameter.
-
TPID
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support request VLAN TPID of the PW level.
Protection Group Parameters (PW APS) NOTE
The parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Type
-
-
Specifies the protection type.
Protection Group ID
-
-
Specifies the protection group ID.
Enabling Status
Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies the enabling status of the PW protection group.
Enabled
l During the creation of a protection group, set Enabling Status to Disabled. After the APS protection group is configured at both ends, set Enabling Status to Enabled. Protection Mode
-
-
Displays the protection mode. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports 1:1 protection mode.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-175
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Working PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the working PW.
Protection PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the protection PW.
Switching Mode
-
-
Displays the switching mode to be used when a PW fails. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports dual-ended switching.
Revertive Mode
Non-revertive
Revertive
Revertive
l This parameter specifies whether to switch services back to the original working PW after it recovers. l The value Revertive indicates that services are switched to the original working PW and the value Nonrevertive indicates that services are not switched to the original working PW. l The value Revertive is recommended.
Switchover Restoration Time(min)
1 to 12
1
l Specifies the WTR time of the protection group. l When the preset WTR time expires after the original working PW recovers, services are switched to the original working PW. l This parameter is available only when Restoration Mode is Revertive. l The default value is recommended.
A-176
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Switchover Delay Time (100ms)
0 to 100
0
l Specifies the hold-off time of the protection group. l If this parameter is set to a value other than 0, the protection group does not trigger switching once it detects faults, but waits until the hold-off time expires, and then detects whether any faults persist. If any faults persist, the switching is triggered; otherwise, no switching is triggered. l The default value is recommended.
-
Detection mode
-
Displays the detection mode of the PW APS protection group.
OAM Parameters NOTE
l The OAM parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS. l To configure PW OAM parameters, choose Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management > PW OAM Parameter from the Function Tree.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
OAM Status
-
-
Displays the enabling status of PW OAM.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-177
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Detection Mode
Auto-Sensing
Auto-Sensing
l Specifies the detection mode of OAM packets.
Manual
l Manual: The connectivity check (CC) packets are sent at the interval specified by the user. l Auto-Sensing: The connectivity check (CC) packets are sent at the interval of receiving PW OAM packets. l If Detection Mode is set to Manual, you need to set the PW OAM detection packets to be received and transmitted. l The value AutoSensing is recommended.
A-178
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Detection Packet Type
CV
CV
l CV: The detection packets are sent at a fixed interval.
FFD
l FFD: The detection packets are sent at the interval specified by the user. l If Detection Mode is set to Auto-Sensing, this parameter specifies the PW OAM detection packets to be transmitted. l If Detection Mode is set to Manual, this parameter specifies the PW OAM detection packets to be received and transmitted. l The value FFD is assumed for PW APS and the value CV is assumed for continuous connectivity check on PWs. Detection Packet Period (ms)
3.3
50
10
l Specifies the period of detection packets. l This parameter is configurable when Detection Packet Type is FFD and assumes the fixed value of 1000 when Detection Packet Type is CV.
20 50 100 200 500
l Set this parameter to 3.3 for PW APS. LSR ID to be Received
-
-
Specifies the LSR ID to be received.
PW ID to be Received
-
-
Specifies the PW ID to be received.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-179
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Protection Group Parameters (Slave Protection Pair) NOTE
The parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set to Slave Protection Pair.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Mode
-
-
Displays the protection mode.
Protection Group ID
-
-
Specifies the ID of the slave protection pair. The switching of the master PW APS protection group triggers the switching of the slave PW APS protection group simultaneously.
Working PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the working PW in the slave protection pair.
Protection PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the protection PW in the slave protection pair.
A.6.1.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-Line services.
Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294
-
This parameter indicates the ID of the E-Line service.
Service Name
-
-
This parameter indicates or specifies the name of the E-Line service.
Source Node
-
-
This parameter indicates the source node.
A-180
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink Node
-
-
This parameter indicates the sink node.
Service Tag Role
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
MTU(byte)
-
-
This parameter cannot be queried here.
BPDU
Not Transparently Transmitted
-
This parameter indicates the transparent transmission tag of the bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) packets. This parameter is used to indicate whether the Ethernet line transparently transmits the BPDU packets.
-
This parameter indicates whether E-Line service is deployed.
Transparently Transmitted
Deployment Status
-
Parameters Associated with UNI Ports Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the UNI port.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-181
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLANs
1 to 4094
-
This parameter indicates or specifies the VLAN ID of the UNI port. l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to UNI-UNI or UNI-NNI in the process of creating an E-Line service. l If this parameter is set to null, all the services of the UNI work as the service source or service sink. l If this parameter is not set to null, only the services of the UNI port whose VLAN IDs are included in the set value of this parameter work as the service source or service sink.
NNI Parameters (PW) Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
-
-
This parameter displays the PW ID.
Working Status
-
-
This parameter displays the working status of a PW.
A-182
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable Status
-
-
This parameter displays whether a PW is enabled.
PW Signaling Type
-
-
This parameter displays the PW signaling type. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 uses static PWs only.
PW Type
-
-
This parameter displays the configured PW type.
PW Direction
-
-
This parameter displays the direction of the PW.
PW Encapsulation Type
-
-
This parameter displays the PW encapsulation type. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 uses MPLS only.
PW Ingress Label/ Source Port
-
-
This parameter displays the configured PW ingress label.
PW Egress Label/Sink Port
-
-
This parameter displays the configured PW egress label.
Tunnel Type
MPLS
MPLS
This parameter displays the type of the tunnel that carries a PW.
Peer LSR ID
-
-
This parameter displays the opposite LSR ID.
Tunnel
-
-
This parameter displays the tunnel.
Control Word
-
-
For ETH PWE3 services, the parameter value is always No Use.
Control Channel Type
-
-
This parameter displays the control channel type.
VCCV Verification Mode
-
-
This parameter displays the VCCV mode.
Local Working Status
-
-
Displays the working status of the PW at the local end.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-183
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Remote Working Status
-
-
This parameter displays the working status of the PW at the remote end.
Compositive Working Status
-
-
This parameter displays the comprehensive working status of the PW.
Request VLAN
-
-
This parameter displays the request VLAN.
Deployment Status
-
-
This parameter displays the deployment status.
Tunnel Automatic Selection Policy
-
-
This parameter displays the automatic tunnel selection policy.
TPID
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support request VLAN TPID of the PW level.
Parameters Associated with NNI Ports Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
QinQ Link ID
1 to 4294967295
-
l This parameter indicates the QinQ link ID of the QinQ link connected to the NNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to UNI-UNI or UNI-NNI in the process of creating an E-Line service.
Port
-
-
l This parameter indicates the NNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to UNI-UNI or UNI-NNI in the process of creating an E-Line service.
A-184
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
S-VLAN ID
-
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the VLAN ID of the NNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to UNI-NNI or NNI-NNI in the process of creating an E-Line service. l This parameter is preset in QinQ Link.
QoS Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
-
-
This parameter displays the PW ID.
Direction
-
-
l This parameter displays the direction of the PW. l Egress indicates the egress direction of the PW. l Ingress indicates the ingress direction of the PW.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-185
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit
-
-
This parameter displays or specifies whether the bandwidth limit function is enabled for a PW to prevent network congestion. l Regarding transmission channels, this function can be used to limit the bandwidth of one or more PWs in an MPLS tunnel. l An ETH PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ETH PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel.
Policy
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
CIR (Kbit/s)
-
-
This parameter displays or specifies the committed information rate (CIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as PIR.
CBS (kbyte)
-
-
This parameter displays or specifies the committed burst size (CBS) of a PW.
PIR (kbit/s)
-
-
This parameter displays or specifies the peak information rate (PIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as CIR.
PBS (kbyte)
A-186
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
This parameter displays or specifies the peak burst size (PBS) of a PW.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
EXP
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
LSP Mode
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe: When stripping MPLS tunnel labels from packets, an egress node does not update the scheduling priority for the packets.
Parameters for the Port Attributes Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the port information.
Enable Port
-
-
l This parameter indicates whether to enable the port. l This parameter is preset in General Attributes of Ethernet Interface.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-187
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Encapsulation Type
Null
-
l This parameter indicates the encapsulation type of the port.
802.1Q QinQ
l This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to UNI-UNI or UNI-NNI in the process of creating an E-Line service. l If this parameter is set to Null, the port transparently transmits the received packets. l If this parameter is set to 802.1Q, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1Q standard. l If this parameter is set to QinQ, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1 QinQ standard. l This parameter is preset in General Attributes of Ethernet Interface. TAG
Tag Aware
-
Access Hybrid
l This parameter displays the tag of the port. l This parameter is preset in Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Interface .
Protection Group Parameters (PW APS) NOTE
The following parameters are available only after the PW APS protection group is configured.
A-188
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the protection group to be created.
Working PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the working PW.
Protection PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the protection PW.
Protection Mode
-
-
Displays the protection mode.
Enabling Status
Enabled
-
l Displays or specifies the enabling status of the PW protection group.
Disabled
l During the creation of a protection group, set Enabling Status to Disabled. After the APS protection group is configured at both ends, set Enabling Status to Enabled. Switchover Mode
-
-
Displays the switching mode to be used when a PW fails. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supporting dual-ended switching.
Restoration Mode
Non-revertive
-
Revertive
l Specifies whether to switch services to the original working PW after the fault is rectified. l The value Revertive indicates that services are switched to the original working PW and the value Nonrevertive indicates that services are not switched to the original working PW. l The value Revertive is recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-189
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Switchover Restoration Time(min)
1 to 12
-
l Displays or specifies the WTR time of the protection group. l When the preset WTR time expires after the original working PW recovers, services are switched to the original working PW. l This parameter is available only when Restoration Mode is Revertive.
Switchover Delay Time (100ms)
0 to 100
-
l Displays or specifies the hold-off time of the protection group. l If this parameter is set to a value other than 0, the protection group does not trigger switching once it detects faults, but waits until the hold-off time expires, and then detects whether any faults persist. If any faults persist, the switching is triggered; otherwise, no switching is triggered.
Deployment Status
-
-
Display the deployment status of the protection group.
Switchover Status
-
-
Displays the switchover status of the protection group.
Protocol Status
-
-
Displays the enabling status of the protocol.
Working Path Status
-
-
Displays the status of the current working path.
Protection Path Status
-
-
Display the status of the current protection path.
A-190
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Protection Group Parameters (Slave Protection Pair) NOTE
The following parameters are available only after the slave protection pair is configured.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group ID
-
-
Specifies the ID of the slave protection pair. The switching of the master PW APS protection group triggers the switching of the slave PW APS protection group simultaneously.
Working PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the working PW in the slave protection pair.
Protection PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the protection PW in the slave protection pair.
DNI PW ID
-
-
Displays the DNI PW ID.
PW Type
-
-
Displays the PW type.
Deployment Status
-
-
Displays the deployment status of the slave protection pair.
A.6.1.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Item_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating VLAN forwarding table items.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the VLAN Forwarding Table Item tab.
3.
Click New.
Parameters for VLAN Forwarding Table Item Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Interface Type
V-UNI
V-UNI
This parameter specifies the network attribute of the source interface.
Source Interface
-
-
This parameter specifies the source interface.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-191
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source VLAN ID
1 to 4094
-
This parameter specifies the VLAN ID of the source service.
Sink Interface Type
V-UNI
V-UNI
This parameter specifies the network attribute of the sink interface.
Sink Interface
-
-
This parameter specifies the sink interface.
Sink VLAN ID
1 to 4094
-
This parameter specifies the VLAN ID of the sink service.
NOTE
l The VLAN ID of the UNI-UNI E-Line service can be converted after a VLAN forwarding table item is created. In this case, a service from Source Interface to Sink Interface carries the VLAN ID specified in Sink VLAN ID when the service is transmitted from Sink Interface. l The VLAN ID in a VLAN forwarding table item is converted unidirectionally and can be converted from Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID only. The VLAN ID can be converted bidirectionally only when the other VLAN forwarding table item is configured reversely. l In normal cases, Ethernet services are bidirectional. Hence, you need to set bidirectional conversion of VLAN IDs.
A.6.1.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet local area network (ELAN) service.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294
-
l This parameter specifies the ID of the E-LAN service. l The OptiX RTN 950 supports simultaneous creation of an E-LAN service only.
A-192
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Name
-
-
This parameter specifies the name of the E-LAN service.
BPDU
-
-
l This parameter indicates the transparent transmission tag of the BPDU packets. l In the case of an ELAN service, this parameter supports only Not Transparently Transmitted and cannot be set manually. l Not Transparently Transmitted indicates that the BPDU packets are used as the protocol packets to compute the spanning tree topology of the network.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-193
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tag Type
C-Awared
C-Awared
l C-Awared indicates that the packets are learnt according to CTag (the VLAN tag on the client-side). To create the 802.1q bridge, set this parameter to CAwared.
S-Awared Tag-Transparent
l S-Awared indicates that the packets are learnt according to STag (the VLAN tag at the carrier service layer). To create the 802.1ad bridge, set this parameter to SAwared. l Tag-Transparent indicates that the packets are transparently transmitted. To create the 802.1d bridge, set this parameter to TagTransparent. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A-194
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Self-Learning MAC Address
Enabled
Enabled
l This parameter specifies whether to enable the MAC address self-learning function.
Disabled
l If the MAC selflearning function of an Ethernet LAN is enabled, the Ethernet LAN learns an MAC address according to the original MAC address in the packet and automatically refreshes the MAC address forwarding table. l If the MAC selflearning function of an Ethernet LAN is disabled, a static MAC address forwarding table is recommended to be configured. MAC Address Learning Mode
IVL
-
SVL
l This parameter indicates the mode used to learn an MAC address. l When the bridge uses the SVL mode, all the VLANs share one MAC address table. If the bridge uses the IVL mode, each VLAN has an MAC address table.
Deployment Status
-
-
This parameter indicates whether E-LAN service is deployed.
MTU(byte)
-
-
This parameter cannot be set here.
Service Tag Role
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-195
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for UNIs Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the UNI port.
SVLAN
1 to 4094
-
l This parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID of the UNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
VLANs/CVLAN
1 to 4094
-
l This parameter specifies the VLAN ID of the UNI port. l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l If this parameter is set to null, all the services of the UNI work as the service source or service sink. l If this parameter is not set to null, only the services of the UNI port whose VLAN IDs are included in the set value of this parameter work as the service source or service sink.
A-196
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters of NNIs Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
l This parameter indicates the NNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared.
SVLANs
-
-
l This parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID of the NNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared.
Parameters for the Split Horizon Group Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Split Horizon Group ID
-
1
l This parameter indicates the ID of the split horizon group. l The default split horizon group ID is 1 and cannot be set manually.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-197
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Split Horizon Group Member
-
-
l A split horizon group member indicates the logical port member in the split horizon group. l The port members that are added to the same split horizon group cannot communicate with each other. l The OptiX RTN 950 supports only the division of the split horizon group members according to the Ethernet physical port. l If a UNI or NNI logical port of the 802.1ad bridge is added to a split horizon group member, the physical port that is mounted with the logical port is automatically added to the split horizon group member.
A.6.1.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-LAN services.
Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
A-198
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294
-
l This parameter indicates the ID of the E-LAN service. l The supports simultaneous creation of an E-LAN service only.
Service Name
-
-
This parameter specifies the name of the E-LAN service.
BPDU
-
-
l This parameter indicates the transparent transmission tag of the BPDU packets. l In the case of an ELAN service, this parameter supports only Not Transparently Transmitted and cannot be set manually. l Not Transparently Transmitted indicates that the BPDU packets are used as the protocol packets to compute the spanning tree topology of the network.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-199
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tag Type
C-Awared
C-Awared
l C-Awared indicates that the packets are learnt according to CTag (the VLAN tag on the client-side). To create the 802.1q bridge, set this parameter to CAwared.
S-Awared Tag-Transparent
l S-Awared indicates that the packets are learnt according to STag (the VLAN tag at the carrier service layer). To create the 802.1ad bridge, set this parameter to SAwared. l Tag-Transparent indicates that the packets are transparently transmitted. To create the 802.1d bridge, set this parameter to TagTransparent.
A-200
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Self-Learning MAC Address
Enabled
Enabled
l This parameter indicates whether to enable the MAC address self-learning function. l If the MAC selflearning function of an Ethernet LAN is enabled, the Ethernet LAN learns an MAC address according to the original MAC address in the packet and automatically refreshes the MAC address forwarding table. l If the MAC selflearning function of an Ethernet LAN is disabled, a static MAC address forwarding table is recommended to be configured.
MAC Address Learning Mode
-
-
l This parameter indicates the mode used to learn an MAC address. l When the bridge uses the SVL mode, all the VLANs share one MAC address table. If the bridge uses the IVL mode, each VLAN has an MAC address table.
MTU(byte)
-
-
This parameter cannot be queried here.
Service Tag Role
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Deployment Status
-
-
This parameter indicates whether E-LAN service is deployed.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-201
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for UNIs Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the UNI port.
SVLAN
1 to 4094
-
l This parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID of the UNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
VLANs/CVLAN
1 to 4094
-
l This parameter specifies the VLAN ID of the UNI port. l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l If this parameter is set to null, the E-LAN service exclusively uses the corresponding UNI physical port. That is, the entire port is mounted to the bridge. l If this parameter is set to a non-null value, only the corresponding UNI port whose service packets contain this VLAN ID works as the logical port and is mounted to the bridge.
A-202
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for NNIs Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
l This parameter indicates the NNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared.
SVLANs
-
-
l This parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID of the UNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared. l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-203
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Static MAC Addresses Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
-
-
l This parameter is invalid if MAC Address Learning Mode is SVL. That is, the preset static MAC address entries are valid for all VLANs. l If MAC Address Learning Mode is set to IVL, the preset static MAC address entries are valid for only the VLANs whose VLAN ID is equal to the preset VLAN ID. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
MAC Address
-
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the static MAC address. l A static MAC address is an address that is set manually. It is not aged automatically and needs to be deleted manually. l Generally, a static MAC address is used for the port that receives but does not forward Ethernet service packets or the port whose MAC address need not be aged automatically.
Egress Interface
-
-
l This parameter specifies the Ethernet port that corresponds to the MAC address. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A-204
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Self-Learning MAC Address Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
-
-
l This parameter is invalid if MAC Address Learning Mode is SVL. That is, the preset self-learning MAC address entries are valid for all VLANs. l If MAC Address Learning Mode is set to IVL, the preset selflearning MAC address entries are valid for only the VLANs whose VLAN ID is equal to the preset VLAN ID. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
MAC Address
-
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the self-learning MAC address. A selflearning MAC address is also called a dynamic MAC address. l A self-learning MAC address is an entry obtained by a bridge in SVL or IVL learning mode. A self-learning MAC address can be aged.
Egress Interface
-
-
l This parameter specifies the Ethernet port that corresponds to the MAC address. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-205
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters Associated with MAC Address Learning Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Aging Ability
Enabled
Enabled
The OptiX RTN 950 supports enabling/ disabling of the aging function and aging time for the MAC address table. If one routing entry is not updated in a certain period, that is, if no new packet from this MAC address is received to enable the re-learning of this MAC address, this routing entry is automatically deleted. This mechanism is called aging, and this period is called aging time. The aging time of a MAC address table is 5 minutes by default.
Disabled Aging Time(min)
1 to 65535
5
Parameters for Disabled MAC Addresses Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
-
-
This parameter indicates or specifies the VLAN ID of the service. A disabled MAC address is valid for the VLAN whose VLAN ID is equal to the preset VLAN ID.
A-206
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MAC Address
-
-
l This parameter specifies or indicates the disabled MAC address. A disabled MAC address is also called a blacklisted MAC address. l This parameter is used for discarding an entry, also called a black hole entry, whose data frame that contains a specific destination MAC address. A disabled MAC address needs to be set manually and cannot be aged.
Parameters for the Split Horizon Group Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Split Horizon Group ID
-
1
l This parameter indicates the ID of the split horizon group. l The default split horizon group ID is 1 and cannot be set manually.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-207
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Split Horizon Group Member
-
-
l A split horizon group member indicates the logical port member in the split horizon group. l The port members that are added to different split horizon groups cannot communicate with each other. l The supports only the division of the split horizon group members according to the Ethernet physical port. l If a UNI or NNI logical port of the 802.1ad bridge is added to a split horizon group member, the physical port that is mounted with the logical port is automatically added to the split horizon group member.
Parameters for Unknown Frame Processing Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Frame Type
Unicast
-
This parameter indicates the type of the received unknown frame.
Broadcast
Selects the method of processing the unknown frame. If this parameter is set to Discard, the unknown frame is directly discarded. If this parameter is set to Broadcast, the unknown frame is broadcast at the forwarding port.
Multicast Handing Mode
Discard Broadcast
A-208
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.6.1.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a QinQ link.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > QinQ Link from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Parameters for the General Attributes Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
QinQ Link ID
1 to 4294967295
-
This parameter specifies the ID of the QinQ link. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports 1024 QinQ links, whose IDs must be different from each other.
Board
-
-
This parameter specifies the board where the QinQ link is located.
Port
-
-
This parameter specifies the port where the QinQ link is located.
S-Vlan ID
1 to 4094
-
l This parameter specifies the VLAN ID (at the network operator side) for the QinQ link. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A.6.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet protocol. A.6.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks. A.6.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) management. A.6.2.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-209
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.6.2.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups. A.6.2.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to MSTP bridges. A.6.2.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to the MSTP CIST. A.6.2.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST This topic describes the parameters that are related to the running information about the MSTP CIST. A.6.2.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a link aggregation group (LAG). A.6.2.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation This section describes the parameters for port priorities and system priorities. A.6.2.10 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Point LPT This topic describes the parameters that are related to point-to-point LPT. A.6.2.11 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Point LPT This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating point-to-point LPT. A.6.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Multipoint LPT This topic describes the parameters that are related to point-to-multipoint LPT. A.6.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Multipoint LPT This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating point-to-multipoint LPT.
A.6.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management.
2.
Click New.
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ERPS ID
1 to 8
-
l This parameter specifies the ID of the Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) instance. l The IDs of ERPS instances on an NE must be different from each other.
A-210
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
East Port
-
-
This parameter specifies the east port of the ERPS instance.
West Port
-
-
This parameter specifies the west port of the ERPS instance.
RPL Owner Ring Node Flag
Yes
No
l This parameter specifies whether the node on the ring is the ring protection link (RPL) owner.
No
l Only one node on the ring can be set as the RPL owner for each Ethernet ring. RPL Port
-
-
l This parameter specifies the RPL port. l There is only one RPL port and this RPL port must be the east or west port on the RPL owner node.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-211
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control VLAN
1 to 4094
-
l This parameter specifies the VLAN ID of Control VLAN. l Each node on the Ethernet ring transmits the R-APS packets on the dedicated ring APS (R-APS) channel to ensure consistency between the nodes when the ERPS switching is performed. Control VLAN is used for isolating the dedicated R-APS channel. Therefore, the VLAN ID in Control VLAN cannot be duplicate with the VLAN IDs that are contained in the service packets. l The Control VLAN must be set to the same value for all the NEs on an ERPS ring.
Destination Node
01-19-A7-00-00-01
01-19-A7-00-00-01
This parameter indicates the MAC address of the destination node. The default destination MAC address in the R-APS packets is always 01-19A7-00-00-01.
A.6.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) management.
Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.
A-212
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ERPS ID
1 to 8
-
This parameter indicates the ID of the ERPS instance.
East Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the east port of the ERPS instance.
West Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the west port of the ERPS instance.
RPL Owner Ring Node Flag
Yes
-
This parameter indicates whether a node on the ring is the ring protection link (RPL) owner.
RPL Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the RPL port.
Control VLAN
1 to 4094
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the VLAN ID of Control VLAN.
No
l Each node on the Ethernet ring transmits the R-APS packets on the dedicated ring APS (R-APS) channel to ensure consistency between the nodes when the ERPS switching is performed. Control VLAN is used for isolating the dedicated R-APS channel. Therefore, the VLAN ID in Control VLAN cannot be duplicate with the VLAN IDs that are contained in the service packets or inband DCN packets. l The Control VLAN must be set to the same value for all the NEs on an ERPS ring.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-213
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination Node
01-19-A7-00-00-01
-
This parameter indicates the MAC address of the destination node. The default destination MAC address in the R-APS packets is always 01-19A7-00-00-01.
Hold-Off Time(ms)
0 to 10000, in step of 100
0
l This parameter indicates or specifies the hold-off time of the ERPS hold-off timer. l The hold-off timer is used for negotiating the protection switching sequence when the ERPS coexists with other protection schemes so that the fault can be rectified in the case of other protection switching (such as LAG protection) before the ERPS occurs. When a node on the ring detects one or more new faults, it starts up the hold-off timer if the preset hold-off time is set to a value that is not 0. During the hold-off time, the fault is not reported to trigger an ERPS. When the holdoff timer times out, the node checks the link status regardless whether the fault that triggers the startup of the timer exists. If the fault exists, the node reports it to trigger an ERPS. This fault can be the same as or different from the fault that triggers the initial startup of the hold-off timer.
A-214
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Guard Time(ms)
10 to 2000, in step of 10
500
l This parameter indicates or specifies the guard time of the ERPS guard timer. l The nodes on the ring continuously forward the R-APS packets to the Ethernet ring. As a result, the outdated RAPS packets may exist on the ring network. After a node on the ring receives the outdated R-APS packets, an incorrect ERPS may occur. The ERPS guard timer is an R-APS timer used for preventing a node on the ring from receiving outdated R-APS packets. When a faulty node on the ring detects that the switching condition is cleared, the node starts up the guard timer and starts to forward the RAPS (NR) packets. During this period, the R-APS packets received by the node are discarded. The received R-APS packets are forwarded only after the time of the guard timer expires.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-215
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(mm:ss)
5 to 12, in step of 1
5
l This parameter indicates or specifies the WTR time of the WRT timer in the case of ERPS protection. l The WTR time refers to the duration from the time when the working channel is restored to the time when the switching is released. When the working channel is restored, the WTR timer of the RPL owner starts up. In addition, a signal that indicates the operation of the WTR timer is continuously output in the timing process. When the WTR timer times out and no switching request of a higher priority is received, the signal indicating the operation of the WTR timer is not transmitted. In addition, the WTR release signal is continuously output. l The WTR timer is used to prevent frequent switching caused by the unstable working channel.
Packet Transmit Interval(s)
1 to 10
5
This parameter displays or specifies the interval for sending R-APS packets periodically.
Entity Level
0 to 7
4
This parameter indicates or specifies the level of the maintenance entity.
Last Switching Request
-
-
This parameter indicates the last switching request.
A-216
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
RB Status
-
-
This parameter indicates the RB (RPL Blocked) status of the packets received by the working node. l noRB: The RPL is not blocked. l RB: The RPL is blocked.
DNF Status
-
-
This parameter indicates the DNF status of the packets received by the working node. l noDNF: The R-APS packets do not contain the DNF flag. In this case, the packets are forwarded by the node that detects the fault on a non-RPL link, and the node that receives the packets is requested to clear the forwarding address table. l DNF: The R-APS packets contain the DNF flags. In this case, the packets are forwarded by the node that detects the fault on an RPL link, and the node that receives the packets is informed not to clear the forwarding address table.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-217
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
State Machine Status
-
-
This parameter indicates the status of the state machine at the working node. l Idle: The Ethernet ring is in normal state. For example, no node on the Ethernet ring detects any faults or receives the R_APS (NR, RB) packets. l Protection: The Ethernet ring is in protected state. For example, a fault on the node triggers the ERPS, or a node on the ring is in the WTR period after the fault is rectified.
Node Carried with Current Packet
-
-
This parameter indicates the MAC address carried in the R-APS packets received by the current node. The MAC address refers to the MAC address of the source node that initiates the switching request.
East Port Status
-
-
Displays the status of the east port.
West Port Status
-
-
Displays the status of the west port.
A.6.2.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.
Navigation Path
A-218
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Port Group Parameters tab.
3.
Click Create.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protocol Type
MSTP
MSTP
This parameter specifies the protocol type.
STP
l MSTP: stands for Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol. The OptiX RTN 950 supports the CIST MSTP only. l STP: stands for Spanning Tree Protocol. Enable Protocol
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter specifies whether to enable the protocol of the port group or a member port in the port group. l If the STP or MSTP is enabled, the spanning tree topology is automatically reconfigured. As a result, the services are interrupted.
Parameters for Application Ports Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
This parameter specifies the board where the member of port group is located.
Available Port List
-
-
This parameter indicates the available port list in which a port can be added to the port group.
Selected Port List
-
-
This parameter indicates the selected ports that can be added to the port group.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-219
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.6.2.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Port Group Parameters tab.
3.
On the main interface, select the port group to be configured.
4.
Click Config. The Config Port Group dialog box is displayed.
Parameters for the Added Port Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
This parameter specifies the board where the member of port group is located.
Available Port List
-
-
This parameter indicates the available port list in which a port needs to be added to the port group.
Selected Port List
-
-
This parameter indicates the selected ports that need to be added to the port group.
A.6.2.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to MSTP bridges.
Navigation Path
A-220
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Bridge Parameters tab.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Group ID
-
-
l This parameter indicates the ID of the port group. l This parameter can be set to only the port group ID that is automatically allocated.
MST Domain Name
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Redaction Level
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Mapping List
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Group ID
-
-
l This parameter indicates the ID of the port group.
Bridge Parameters
l This parameter can be set to only the port Group ID that is automatically allocated. MST Domain Max Hop Count
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
-
20
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Specifies the maximum hop count of the MSTP.
A-221
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Network Diameter
2 to 7
7
l This parameter specifies the MSTP network diameter. l Network Diameter is related to the link whose number of switches is the most and is indicated by the number of switches that are connected to the link. When you set Network Diameter for the switches, the MSTP automatically sets Max Age(s), Hello Time(s), and Forward Delay(s) to the more appropriate values for the switches. l If the value of Network Diameter is greater, the network is in a larger scale.
Hello Time(s)
1 to 10
2
l This parameter specifies the interval for transmitting the CBPDU packets through the bridge. l The greater the value of this parameter, the less the network resources that are occupied by the spanning tree. The topology stability, however, decreases.
A-222
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Max Age(s)
6 to 40
20
l This parameter specifies the maximum age of the CBPDU packet that is recorded by the port. l The greater the value, the longer the transmission distance of the CBPDU, which indicates that the network diameter is greater. When the value of this parameter is greater, it is less possible that the bridge detects the link fault in a timely manner and thus the network adaptation ability is reduced.
Forward Delay(s)
4 to 30
15
l This parameter specifies the holdoff time of a port in the listening state and in the learning state. l The greater the value, the longer the delay of the network state change. Hence, the topology changes are slower and the recovery in the case of faults is slower.
Port Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the port in the port group.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-223
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable Edge Attribute
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter specifies the management edge attributes of the port.
Enabled
l This parameter specifies whether to set the port as an edge port. The edge port refers to the bridge port that is connected to the LAN. In normal cases, this port does not receive or transmit BPDU messages. l This parameter can be set to Enabled only when the port is directly connected to the data communications terminal equipment, such as a computer. In other cases, it is recommended that you use the default value. Actual Edge Attribute
A-224
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
This parameter indicates the actual management edge attributes of the port.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Point-to-Point Attribute
false
auto
l This parameter specifies the point-topoint attribute of the port.
true auto
l false: forced nonpoint-to-point link attribute l true: forced point-topoint link attribute l auto: automatically detected point-topoint link attribute l If this parameter is set to auto, the bridge determines Actual Point-to-Point Attribute of the port according to the actual working mode. If the actual working mode is full-duplex, the actual point-to-point attribute is true. If the actual working mode is half-duplex, Actual Point-to-Point Attribute is false. l Only the designated port whose Actual Point-to-Point Attribute is "True" can transmit the rapid state migration request and response. l It is recommended that you use the default value. Actual Point-to-Point Attribute
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
This parameter indicates the actual point-to-point attribute of the port.
A-225
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Max Transmit Packet Count
1 to 255
3
l This parameter specifies the maximum number of packets to be transmitted. l The maximum number of packets to be transmitted by the port refers to the maximum number of MSTP packets that the port can transmit within 1s. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information.
A.6.2.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to the MSTP CIST.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the CIST&MSTI Parameters tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Group
-
-
This parameter specifies the port group.
MSTI ID
0
0
This parameter indicates the MSTI ID. The value 0 indicates common and internal spanning tree (CIST). The OptiX RTN 950 supports only the MSTP that uses CIST.
A-226
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bridge Priority
0 to 61440, in step of 4096
32768
l The most significant 16 bits of the bridge ID indicate the priority of the bridge. l When the value is smaller, the priority is higher. As a result, the bridge is more possible to be selected as the root bridge. l If the priorities of all the bridges in the STP/ MSTP network use the same value, the bridge whose MAC address is the smallest is selected as the root bridge.
Port Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the port in the port group.
Priority
0 to 240, in step of 16
128
l The most significant eight bits of the port ID indicate the port priority. l When the value is smaller, the priority is higher.
Path Cost
1 to 200000000
200000
l This parameter indicates the status of the network that the port is connected to. l In the case of the bridges on both ends of the path, set this parameter to the same value.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-227
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.6.2.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST This topic describes the parameters that are related to the running information about the MSTP CIST.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the CIST Running Information tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Group ID
-
-
This parameter indicates the ID of the port group.
Protocol Running Mode
MSTP
-
l This parameter indicates the running mode of the protocol.
STP
l MSTP: stands for Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol. The OptiX RTN 950 supports only the CIST-based MSTP. l STP: stands for Spanning Tree Protocol.
A-228
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bridge Priority
0 to 61440, in step of 4096
32768
l This parameter indicates the priority of the bridge. l The most significant 16 bits of the bridge ID indicate the priority of the bridge. l When the value is smaller, the priority is higher. As a result, the bridge is more possible to be selected as the root bridge. l If the priorities of all the bridges in the STP network use the same value, the bridge whose MAC address is the smallest is selected as the root bridge.
Bridge MAC Address
-
-
This parameter indicates the MAC address of the bridge.
Root Bridge Priority
0 to 61440, in step of 4096
32768
This parameter indicates the priority of the root bridge.
Root Bridge MAC Address
-
-
This parameter indicates the MAC address of the root bridge.
External Path Cost ERPC
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Domain Root Bridge Priority
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Domain Root Bridge MAC Address
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Internal Path Cost IRPC
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-229
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Root Port Priority
0 to 240, in step of 16
128
l This parameter indicates the priority of the root port. l The most significant eight bits of the ID of the root port indicate the priority of the root port. l When the value is smaller, the priority is higher.
Root Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the root port.
Hello Time(s)
-
2
l This parameter indicates the interval for transmitting CBPDU packets through the bridge. l The greater the value of this parameter, the less the network resources that are occupied by the spanning tree. The topology stability, however, decreases.
Max Age(s)
6 to 40
20
l This parameter specifies the maximum age of the CBPDU packet that is recorded by the port. l The greater the value, the longer the transmission distance of the CBPDU, which indicates that the network diameter is greater. When the value of this parameter is greater, it is less possible that the bridge detects the link fault in a timely manner and thus the network adaptation ability is reduced.
A-230
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Forward Delay(s)
4 to 30
15
l This parameter specifies the holdoff time of a port in the listening state and in the learning state. l The greater the value, the longer the delay of the network state change. Hence, the topology changes are slower and the recovery in the case of faults is slower.
MST Domain Max Hop Count
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Topology Change Count
-
-
This parameter indicates the identifier of the topology change.
Last Topology Change Time(s)
-
-
This parameter indicates the duration of the last topology change.
Topology Change Count
-
-
This parameter indicates the count of the topology changes.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the port in the port group.
Enable Protocol
Enabled
Disabled
This parameter indicates whether the protocol of the port group or a member of the port group is enabled.
Disabled
This parameter indicates the role of a port.
Port Parameters
Disabled
Port Role
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-231
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Status
Discarding
Discarding
This parameter indicates the state of a port.
Learning
l Discarding: receives only BPDU packets
Forwarding
l Learning: only receives or transmits BPDU packets l Forwarding: forwards user traffic, and transmits/receives BPDU packets Priority
0 to 240, in step of 16
128
l The most significant eight bits of the port ID indicate the port priority. l When the value is smaller, the priority is higher.
Path Cost
1 to 200000000
200000
l This parameter indicates the status of the network that the port is connected to. l In the case of the bridges on both ends of the path, set this parameter to the same value.
Bridge Priority
0 to 61440, in step of 4096
32768
l The most significant 16 bits of the bridge ID indicate the priority of the bridge. l When the value is smaller, the priority is higher. As a result, the bridge is more possible to be selected as the root bridge. l If the priorities of all the bridges in the STP network use the same value, the bridge whose MAC address is the smallest is selected as the root bridge.
A-232
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bridge MAC Address
-
-
This parameter indicates the MAC address of the bridge.
Designated Port Priority
0 to 240, in step of 16
0
l The most significant eight bits of the port ID indicate the port priority. l When the value is smaller, the priority is higher.
Design Port
-
0
This parameter indicates the designated port.
Edge Port Attribute
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter specifies the management edge attributes of the port.
Enabled
l This parameter specifies whether to set the port as an edge port. The edge port refers to the bridge port that is connected to the LAN. In normal cases, this port does not receive or transmit BPDU messages. l This parameter can be set to Enabled only when the port is directly connected to the data communications terminal equipment, such as a computer. In other cases, it is recommended that you use the default value. Actual Edge Port Attribute
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
-
Disabled
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
This parameter indicates the actual management edge attributes of the port.
A-233
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Point to Point
false
auto
l This parameter specifies the point-topoint attribute of the port.
true auto
l false: forced nonpoint-to-point link attribute l true: forced point-topoint link attribute l auto: automatically detected point-topoint link attribute l If this parameter is set to auto, the bridge determines Actual Point to Point Attribute of the port according to the actual working mode. If the actual working mode is full-duplex, the actual point-to-point attribute is true. If the actual working mode is half-duplex, Actual Point to Point Attribute is false. l Only the designated port whose Actual Point-to-Point Attribute is "True" can transmit the rapid state migration request and response. l It is recommended that you use the default value. Actual Point to Point
A-234
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
This parameter indicates the actual point-to-point attribute of the port.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Max Count of Transmitting Message
1 to 255
3
l This parameter indicates the maximum number of packets to be transmitted. l The maximum number of packets to be transmitted by the port refers to the maximum number of MSTP packets that the port can transmit within 1s.
Protocol Running Mode
STP
-
MSTP
l This parameter indicates the running mode of the protocol. l MSTP: stands for Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol. The OptiX RTN 950 supports only the CIST-based MSTP. l STP: stands for Spanning Tree Protocol.
Hello Time(s)
1 to 10
2
l This parameter indicates the interval for transmitting the CBPDU packets through the bridge. l The greater the value of this parameter, the less the network resources that are occupied by the spanning tree. The topology stability, however, decreases.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-235
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Max Age(s)
6 to 40
20
l This parameter specifies the maximum age of the CBPDU packet that is recorded by the port. l The greater the value, the longer the transmission distance of the CBPDU, which indicates that the network diameter is greater. When the value of this parameter is greater, it is less possible that the bridge detects the link fault in a timely manner and thus the network adaptation ability is reduced.
4 to 30
Forward Delay(s)
15
l This parameter specifies the holding time of a port in the listening state and in the learning state. l The greater the value, the longer the delay of the network state change. Hence, the topology changes are slower and the recovery in the case of faults is slower.
-
Remain Hop
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
A.6.2.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).
Navigation Path 1.
A-236
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
2.
Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.
3.
Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAG No.
-
1
l This parameter specifies the LAG number to be set manually. l This parameter is valid only when Automatically Assign is not selected.
Automatically Assign
Selected
Selected
Deselected
l This parameter indicates whether LAG No. is allocated automatically. l When Automatically Assign is selected, LAG No. cannot be set.
LAG Name
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
This parameter specifies the LAG name.
A-237
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAG Type
Static
Static
l Static: You can create a LAG. When you add or delete a member port to or from the LAG, the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) protocol is required. In a LAG, a port can be in selected, standby, or unselected state. The aggregation information is exchanged among different equipment through the LACP protocol to ensure that the aggregation information is the same among all the nodes.
Manual
l Manual: You can create a LAG. When you add or delete a member port, the LACP protocol is not required. The port can be in the up or down state. The system determines whether to aggregate a port according to its physical state (UP or DOWN), working mode, and rate. Switch Protocol
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Switch Mode
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Link Trace Protocol
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
A-238
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Revertive Mode
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive Mode
l Revertive Mode can be set only when Load Sharing is set to NonSharing.
Non-Revertive Mode
l When Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode, the services are switched back to the former working channel after this channel is restored to normal. l When Revertive Mode is set to NonRevertive Mode, the status of the LAG does not change after the former working channel is restored to normal. That is, the services are still transmitted on the protection channel.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-239
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Load Sharing
Sharing
Non-Sharing
l Set Load Sharing to the same value as the peer equipment. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to Non-Sharing at both ends if the LAGs are used for protection and set Load Sharing to Sharing at both ends if the LAGs are used for increasing bandwidths.
Non-Sharing
l Sharing: Each member link of a LAG processes traffic at the same time and shares the traffic load. The sharing mode can increase a bandwidth utilization for the link. When the LAG members change, or certain links fail, the system automatically re-allocates the traffic. l Non-Sharing: Only one member link of a LAG carries traffic, and the other link is in the standby state. In this case, a hot backup mechanism is provided. When the active link of a LAG is faulty, the system activates the standby link, thus preventing link failure.
A-240
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Load Sharing Hash Algorithm
Source MAC
Source MAC
l This parameter is valid only when Load Sharing of a LAG is set to Sharing.
Destination MAC Source and Destination MAC Source IP Destination IP Source and Destination IP MPLS Label
l The load sharing computation methods include computation based on MAC addresses (based on the source MAC address, based on the destination MAC address, and based on the source MAC address + sink MAC address), computation based on IP addresses (based on the source IP address, based on the destination IP address, and based on the source IP address and sink IP address), and computation based on MPLS labels. l After the configuration data is deployed, Load Sharing Hash Algorithm takes effect for the entire NE. l For PW-carried UNINNI E-Line services, Load Sharing Hash Algorithm cannot be set to MPLS Label.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-241
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
System Priority
0 to 65535
32768
l System Priority indicates the priority of a LAG. The smaller the value of System Priority, the higher the priority. l When a local LAG negotiates with an opposite LAG through LACP packets, both LAGs can obtain the system priorities of each other. Then, the LAG of the higher system priority is considered as the comparison result of both LAGs so that the aggregation information is consistent at both LAGs. If the priorities of both LAGs are the same, the system MAC addresses are compared. Then, the comparison result based on the LAG with smaller system MAC address is considered as the result of both LAGs and is used to ensure that the aggregation information is consistent at both LAGs.
WTR Time(min)
1 to 30
10
l Specifies the WTR time for the LAG. l WTR Time(min) takes effect only when Revertive Mode is Revertive Mode.
A-242
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Switch LAG upon Air Interface SD
Disabled
Enabled
l This parameter specifies whether to enable the switching triggered by bit errors.
Enabled
l If Switch LAG upon Air Interface SD is set to Enabled, the MW_BER_SD alarm will trigger the LAG switching at the air interface.
Port Settings Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Main Board
-
-
l This parameter specifies the main board in a LAG. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Main Port
-
-
l This parameter specifies the main port in a LAG. l After a LAG is created, you can add Ethernet services to the main port only. Services cannot be added to a slave port. When Load Sharing is set to NonSharing, the link connected to the main port is used to transmit the services, and the link connected to the slave port is used for protection.
Board (Available Slave Ports)
-
-
l This parameter specifies the slave board in a LAG. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-243
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port (Available Slave Ports)
-
-
l This parameter specifies the salve port in a LAG. l The slave ports in a LAG are fixed. Unless they are manually modified, the system does not automatically add them to or delete them from the LAG.
Selected Standby Ports
-
-
This parameter indicates the selected slave ports.
A.6.2.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation This section describes the parameters for port priorities and system priorities.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Port Priority tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the port whose priority can be set.
Port Priority
0 to 65535
32768
l This parameter indicates the priorities of the ports in a LAG as defined in the LACP protocol. The smaller the value, the higher the priority. l When ports are added into a LAG, the port of the highest priority is preferred for service transmission.
A-244
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.6.2.10 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Point LPT This topic describes the parameters that are related to point-to-point LPT.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT Management > LPT from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Point-to-Point LPT tab.
Parameters on the main interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Binding Status
-
-
This parameter displays the binding status of pointto-point services.
Primary Function Point
-
-
This parameter displays the port where the primary point of point-to-point LPT resides.
Secondary Function Point Type
-
-
This parameter displays the type of secondary point for point-to-point LPT.
Secondary Function Point
-
-
This parameter displays the port where the secondary point of pointto-point LPT resides.
LPT Instance Status
-
-
This parameter displays the status of point-to-point LPT.
LPT Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
This parameter displays or specifies the enabling status of point-to-point LPT.
Disabled
The LPT function can take effect only when LPT Enabled is set to Enabled. Recovery Times(s)
1-600
1
This parameter displays or specifies the recovery time of point-to-point LPT.
Hold-Off Times(ms)
0-10000
1000
This parameter displays or specifies the hold-off time of point-to-point LPT.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-245
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Switching Mode
-
-
This parameter displays the switching mode of point-to-point LPT. Pointto-point LPT is available only in strict mode.
Fault Detection Mode
PW OAM
LPT OAM
This parameter displays the fault detection mode of point-to-multipoint LPT.
LPT OAM
l LPT-enabled NEs periodically transmit LPT OAM packets in specific formats to check the status of an L2 service network or QinQ service network. If the LPT OAM packets are absent for 3.5 fault detection periods or the number and contents of received LPT OAM packets are incorrect, the NEs consider that a network-side fault occurred and the LPT switching is triggered. l To detect a networkside fault on a PSN, LPT OAM or PW OAM packets can be used. Note that the PW OAM function must be enabled on NEs before usage of PW OAM packets. Fault Detection Period (100ms)
3-100
10
This parameter displays or specifies the fault detection period of pointto-point LPT.
User-Side Port Status
-
-
This parameter displays the status of a user-side port.
L2 net ID-L2 Peer net ID
-
-
This parameter displays the NET IDs of LPT packet out ports at both ends.
A-246
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.6.2.11 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Point LPT This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating point-to-point LPT.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT Management > LPT from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Point-to-Point LPT tab.
3.
Click Bind in the lower right corner of the pane based on the type of service network.
4.
Choose PW+QinQ or L2 net from the shortcut menu based on the type of service network.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
L2 net ID
1-4294967295
-
This parameter specifies the NET ID of LPT packet out port at the local end.
L2 Peer net ID
1-4294967295
-
This parameter specifies the NET ID of LPT packet out port at the opposite end.
Primary Function Point
-
-
This parameter specifies the port where the primary point of point-to-point LPT resides.
VLAN ID
1-4094
-
This parameter specifies the VLAN ID that is carried by a point-to-point LPT packet to traverse an L2 network.
LPT package out port
-
-
This parameter specifies the out port of a point-topoint LPT packet.
A.6.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Multipoint LPT This topic describes the parameters that are related to point-to-multipoint LPT.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT Management > LPT from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Point-to-Multipoint LPT tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-247
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters of Primary Point Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Primary Function Point Type
-
-
This parameter displays the type of primary point for point-to-multipoint LPT.
Primary Function Point
-
-
This parameter displays the port where the primary point of point-tomultipoint LPT resides.
LPT Instance Status
-
-
This parameter displays the status of point-tomultipoint LPT.
LPT Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
This parameter displays the enabling status of point-to-multipoint LPT.
Disabled Recovery Times(s)
1-600
1
This parameter displays or specifies the recovery time of point-to-multipoint LPT.
Hold-Off Times(ms)
0-10000
1000
This parameter displays or specifies the hold-off time of point-to-multipoint LPT.
Switching Mode
Strict mode
Strict mode
This parameter displays the switching mode of point-to-multipoint LPT. Point-to-point LPT is available only in strict mode.
Non-strict mode
l Strict mode A primary point triggers LPT switching when all its secondary points detect faults. l Non-strict mode A primary point triggers LPT switching when anyone of its secondary points detects a fault.
A-248
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Fault Detection Mode
PW OAM
LPT OAM
This parameter displays the fault detection mode of point-to-multipoint LPT.
LPT OAM
l LPT-enabled NEs periodically transmit LPT OAM packets in specific formats to check the status of an L2 service network or QinQ service network. If the LPT OAM packets are absent for 3.5 fault detection periods or the number and contents of received LPT OAM packets are incorrect, the NEs consider that a network-side fault occurred and the LPT switching is triggered. l To detect a networkside fault on a PSN, LPT OAM or PW OAM packets can be used. Note that the PW OAM function must be enabled on NEs before usage of PW OAM packets. Fault Detection Period (100ms)
3-100
10
This parameter displays or specifies the fault detection period of pointto-multipoint LPT.
User-Side Port Status
-
-
This parameter displays the status of a user-side port.
L2 net ID-L2 Peer net ID
-
-
This parameter displays the NET IDs of LPT packet out ports at both ends, when the service network is an L2 network.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-249
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters of Secondary Point Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Access Point Type
-
-
This parameter displays the type of second point for point-to-multipoint LPT.
Access Point
-
-
This parameter displays the port or PW ID for the secondary point of pointto-multipoint LPT.
User-Side Port Status
-
-
This parameter displays the status of a user-side port.
L2 net ID-L2 Peer net ID
-
-
This parameter displays the NET IDs of LPT packet out ports at both ends, when the service network is an L2 network.
A.6.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Multipoint LPT This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating point-to-multipoint LPT.
Navigation Path
A-250
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT Management > LPT from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Point-to-Multipoint LPT tab.
3.
Click New in the lower right corner of the pane based on the type of service network.
4.
Choose PW, QinQ, or L2 net from the shortcut menu based on the type of service network.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters of primary point Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Point Type
UNI
-
This parameter specifies the type of primary point for point-to-multipoint LPT. The value range of this parameter pertains to the type of service network.
PW QinQ L2 net
If the primary point is on the access side, select UNI; if the primary point is on the network side, set the parameter as follows. l If the service network is a PSN, select PW. l If the service network is a QinQ network, select QinQ. l If the service network is an L2 network, select L2 net. Board
-
-
This parameter specifies the board where the primary point of point-tomultipoint LPT resides. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to UNI.
Port
-
-
This parameter specifies the port where the primary point of point-tomultipoint LPT resides. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to UNI.
Point ID
-
-
This parameter specifies the service ID for the primary point of point-tomultipoint LPT. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to PW or QinQ.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-251
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
L2 net ID
1-4294967295
-
This parameter specifies the NET ID of a local NE. This parameter is valid only when Point Type of the primary point is set to UNI, and when Point Type of the secondary point is set to L2 net.
L2 Peer net ID
1-4294967295
-
This parameter specifies the NET ID of an opposite NE. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to L2 net.
VLAN ID
1-4094
-
This parameter specifies the VLAN ID that is carried by an LPT packet to traverse an L2 network. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to L2 net.
LPT package out port
-
-
This parameter specifies the out port of an LPT packet. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to L2 net.
Parameters of secondary point Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Point Type
UNI
-
This parameter displays or specifies the type of secondary point for pointto-multipoint LPT.
PW QinQ L2 net
A-252
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
This parameter specifies the board where the secondary point of pointto-multipoint LPT resides. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to PW, QinQ, or L2 net.
Available Points
-
-
This parameter displays the available ports where the secondary point of point-to-multipoint LPT can reside. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to PW, QinQ, or L2 net.
Selected Points
-
-
This parameter displays the selected port where the secondary point of pointto-multipoint LPT resides. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to PW, QinQ, or L2 net.
L2 net ID
1-4294967295
-
This parameter specifies the NET ID of a local NE. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to UNI.
L2 Peer net ID
1-4294967295
-
This parameter specifies the NET ID of an opposite NE. This parameter is valid only when Point Type of the primary point is set to UNI, and when Point Type of the secondary point is set to L2 net.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-253
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
1-4094
-
This parameter specifies the VLAN ID that is carried by an LPT packet to traverse an L2 network. This parameter is valid only when Point Type of the primary point is set to UNI, and when Point Type of the secondary point is set to L2 net.
LPT Package out port
-
-
This parameter specifies the out port of an LPT packet. This parameter is valid only when Point Type of the primary point is set to UNI, and when Point Type of the secondary point is set to L2 net.
A.6.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet operation, administration and maintenance (OAM). A.6.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance domains. A.6.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance associations. A.6.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association end point (MEP). A.6.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a remote MEP. A.6.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association intermediate point (MIP). A.6.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LB. A.6.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LT. A-254
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.6.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter This topic describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports. A.6.3.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring This topic describes the parameters that are used for monitoring the OAM error frames at the Ethernet port.
A.6.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance domains.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3.
Choose New > New Maintenance Domain.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance Domain Name
-
default
l This parameter specifies the name of the maintenance domain. l The maintenance domain refers to the network for the Ethernet OAM. l This parameter can contain a maximum of eight bytes.
Maintenance Domain Level
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
4
l Maintenance Domain Level specifies the level of the maintenance domain. l The values 0-2 indicate the carrier level, the values 3-4 indicate the supplier level, and the values 5-7 indicate the user level. l When the value is set to 0, the maintenance domain is at the lowest level. The values 0-7 indicate that the level increases in a sequential order. l The OAM packets whose level is higher than the preset value are transparently transmitted by the MEPs. The OAM packets whose level is lower than the preset value are directly discarded by the MEPs. The OAM packets whose level is the same as the preset value are responded to or terminated by the MEPs according to the message type.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-255
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.6.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance associations.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3.
Select the maintenance domain in which a maintenance association needs to be created. Choose New > New Maintenance Association.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance Domain Name
-
-
This parameter indicates the maintenance domain of the created maintenance association.
Maintenance Association Name
-
-
l This parameter specifies the name of the maintenance association, which is a domain related to a service. Through maintenance association division, the connectivity check (CC) can be performed on the network that transmits a service instance. l This parameter can contain a maximum of eight bytes.
Relevant Service
-
-
This parameter specifies the service instance that is related to the maintenance association.
CC Test Transmit Period
1s
1s
l This parameter specifies the interval for transmitting packets in the CC.
10s
l The CC is performed to check the availability of the service.
1m 10m
A.6.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association end point (MEP).
Navigation Path
A-256
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Maintenance Association tab. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3.
A Parameters Description
Select the maintenance association in which an MEP needs to be created. Choose New > New MEP Point.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance Domain Name
-
-
This parameter indicates the maintenance domain of the created MEP.
Maintenance Association Name
-
-
This parameter indicates the maintenance association of the created MEP.
Board
-
-
This parameter specifies the board where the MEP is located.
Port
-
-
This parameter specifies the port where the MEP is located.
VLAN
-
-
This parameter indicates the VLAN ID of the current service.
MP ID
1 to 2048
1
l This parameter specifies the MEP ID. l Each MEP needs to be configured with an MP ID, which is unique in the maintenance association. The MP ID is required in the OAM operation.
Direction
Ingress
Ingress
Egress
l Direction specifies the direction of the MEP. l Ingress indicates the direction in which the packets are transmitted to the port, and Egress indicates the direction in which the packets are transmitted from the port.
CC Status
Active Inactive
Active
l This parameter specifies whether to enable the CC function of the MEP. l In the case of the tests based on the MP IDs, CC Status must be set to Active.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-257
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
AIS Active Status
Active
Active
l This parameter specifies the AIS active status.
Inactive
l If several MDs exist on a link, to locate a fault accurately, set AIS Active Status to Active and Client Layer Level that functions to suppress the AIS information. l After a fault is detected by an MP, if this MP activates the AIS, it sends the AIS packet to a higher level MP, informing the higher level MP of the fault information; if this MP does not activate the AIS, it does not report the fault. Client Layer Level
1 to 7
1
l Normally, if an MP is set to level n, Client Layer Level that functions to suppress the AIS information should be set to n+1. l Client Layer Level is valid only if AIS Active Status is Active.
A.6.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a remote MEP.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3.
Choose OAM > Manage Remote MEP Point. Then, the Manage Remote MEP Point dialog box is displayed.
4.
Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance Domain Name
-
-
This parameter indicates the maintenance domain of the MEP.
Maintenance Association Name
-
-
This parameter indicates the maintenance association of the created MEP.
A-258
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Remote Maintenance Point ID(e.g:1,3-6)
1 to 2048
-
l This parameter specifies the ID of the remote MEP. l If other MEPs may initiate OAM operations to an MEP in the same MA, set the other MEPs to be the remote MEPs.
A.6.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association intermediate point (MIP).
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the MIP Point tab.
3.
Select the maintenance domain in which an MIP needs to be created, and then click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance Domain Name
-
-
This parameter indicates the maintenance domain of the MIP.
Board
-
-
This parameter specifies the board where the MIP is located.
Port
-
-
This parameter specifies the port where the MIP is located.
MP ID
1 to 2048
1
l This parameter specifies the MIP ID. l Each MIP needs to be configured with an MP ID, which is unique in the maintenance domain. The MP ID is required in the OAM operation. NOTE To create MEPs and MIPs in a service at a port, ensure that only one MIP can be created and the level of the MIP must be higher than the level of the MEP.
A.6.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LB. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-259
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3.
Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LB test.
4.
Choose OAM > Start LB.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination Maintenance Point ID
Selected
Deselected
This parameter needs to be selected if the LB test is performed on the basis of Destination Maintenance Point IDs.
Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address
Selected
Selected
This parameter needs to be selected if the LB test is performed on the basis of MAC addresses.
Maintenance Domain Name
-
-
This parameter indicates the name of the maintenance domain for the LB test.
Maintenance Association Name
-
-
This parameter indicates the name of the maintenance association for the LB test.
Source Maintenance Point ID
-
-
l This parameter specifies the source maintenance point in the LB test.
Destination Maintenance Point ID
-
Deselected
Deselected
l Only the MEP can be set to the source maintenance point. -
l This parameter specifies the destination maintenance point in the LB test. l Only the MEP ID can be set to the Destination Maintenance Point ID. l Destination Maintenance Point ID can be set only when MP ID is selected.
Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address
-
00-00-00-00-00-00
l This parameter specifies the MAC address of the port where the destination maintenance point is located in the LB test. l Only the MAC address of the MEP can be set to the MAC address of the Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address. l Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address can be set only when Sink Maintenance Point MAC Address.
A-260
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Transmitted Packet Count
1 to 255
3
l This parameter specifies the number of packets transmitted each time in the LB test. l When the value is greater, the required duration is longer.
Transmitted Packet Length
64 to 1400
64
l This parameter specifies the length of a transmitted LBM packet. l If the packet length is different, the test result may be different. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
0 to 7
Transmitted Packet Priority
7
l This parameter specifies the priority of transmitting packets. l 0 indicates the lowest priority, and 7 indicates the highest priority. In normal cases, this parameter is set to the highest priority.
-
Detection Result
-
This parameter indicates the relevant information and result of the LB test.
A.6.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LT.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3.
Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LT test.
4.
Choose OAM > Start LT.
Test Node Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination Maintenance Point ID
Selected
Deselected
This parameter needs to be selected if the LT test is performed on the basis of MP IDs.
Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address
Selected
Selected
This parameter needs to be selected if the LT test is performed on the basis of MAC addresses.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Deselected
Deselected
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-261
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance Domain Name
-
-
This parameter indicates the name of the maintenance domain for the LT test.
Maintenance Association Name
-
-
This parameter indicates the name of the maintenance association for the LT test.
Source Maintenance Point ID
-
-
l This parameter specifies the source maintenance point in the LT test.
Destination Maintenance Point ID
-
l Only the MEP can be set to the source maintenance point. -
l This parameter specifies the destination maintenance point in the LT test. l Only the MEP ID can be set to the Destination Maintenance Point ID. l Destination Maintenance Point ID can be set only when MP ID is selected.
Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address
-
00-00-00-00-00-00
l This parameter specifies the MAC address of the port where the destination maintenance point is located in the LT test. l Only the MAC address of the MEP can be set to the MAC address of the Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address. l Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address can be set only when Sink Maintenance Point MAC Address.
Parameters for the Detection Result Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Maintenance Point ID
-
-
This parameter indicates the source maintenance point in the LT test.
Destination Maintenance Point ID/MAC
-
-
This parameter indicates the MAC address of the port where the destination maintenance point is located in the LT test.
Response Maintenance Point ID/MAC
-
-
This parameter indicates the MAC address of the port where the responding maintenance point is located in the LT test.
A-262
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Hop Count
1 to 64
-
l This parameter indicates the number of hops from the source maintenance point to the responding maintenance point or to the destination maintenance point in the LT test. l The number of hops indicates the adjacent relation between the responding maintenance point to the source maintenance point. The number of hops increases by one when a responding point occurs on the link from the source maintenance point to the destination maintenance point.
-
Test Result
-
This parameter indicates the result of the LT test.
A.6.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter This topic describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the OAM Parameter tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding port.
Enable OAM Protocol
Enabled
Disabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the OAM protocol.
Disabled
l After the OAM protocol is enabled, the current Ethernet port starts to use the preset mode to create the OAM connection with the opposite end.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-263
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
OAM Working Mode
Active
Active
l This parameter indicates or specifies the working mode of the OAM.
Passive
l The port whose OAM working mode is set to Active can initiate the OAM connection. l The port whose OAM working mode is set to Passive can only wait for the opposite end to send the OAM connection request. l The OAM working mode of the equipment at only one end can be Passive. Link Event Notification
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the local link events can be notified to the opposite end. l If the alarms caused by link events can be reported, that is, if the number of performance events (for example, error frame period, error frame, error frame second, and error frame signal cycle) at the local end exceeds the preset threshold, these performance events are notified to the port at the opposite end through the link event notification function. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Remote Side Loopback Response
Disabled Enabled
Disabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the port responds to the remote loopback. l Remote loopback indicates that the local OAM entity transmits packets to the remote OAM entity for loopback. The local OAM entity can locate the fault and test the link performance through loopback data analysis. l If a port does not support remote loopback response, this port does not respond to the loopback request from the remote port regardless of the OAM port status.
A-264
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Loopback Status
Non-Loopback
-
This parameter indicates the loopback status at the local end.
Initiate Loopback at Local
NOTE Loopback Status is valid only after you choose OAM > Enable Remote Loopback.
Respond Loopback of Remote OAM Discovery Status
-
-
This parameter indicates the OAM discovery status at the local end.
Port Transmit Status
-
-
This parameter indicates the status of transmitting packets at the local end.
Port Receive Status
-
-
This parameter indicates the status of receiving packets at the local end.
A.6.3.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring This topic describes the parameters that are used for monitoring the OAM error frames at the Ethernet port.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding port.
Error Frame Monitor Window (ms)
1000 to 60000, in step of 100
1000
This parameter specifies the duration of monitoring error frames.
Error Frame Monitor Threshold (frames)
1 to 4294967295, in step of 1
1
l This parameter specifies the threshold of monitoring error frames.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
l Within the specified value of Error Frame Monitor Window(ms), if the number of error frames on the link exceeds the preset value of Error Frame Monitor Threshold(frame), an alarm is reported.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-265
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Error Frame Period Window (frame)
1488 to 892800000, in step of 1
892800000
This parameter specifies the window of monitoring the error frame period.
Error Frame Period Threshold (frames)
1 to 892800000, in step of 1
1
l This parameter specifies the threshold of monitoring the error frame period.
Error Frame Second Window(s)
10 to 900, in step of 1
60
This parameter specifies the time window of monitoring the error frame second.
Error Frame Second Threshold (s)
10 to 900, in step of 1
1
l This parameter specifies the threshold of monitoring error frame seconds.
Error Frame Signal Periodic Monitor Window (Entries)
1 to 60, in step of 1
1
This parameter specifies the window of monitoring the error frame signal period.
Error Frame Signal Periodic Monitor Threshold (Entries)
1 to 7500000000, in step of 1
1
l This parameter specifies the threshold of monitoring the error frame signal period.
l Within the specified value of Error Frame Period Window(frame), if the number of error frames on the link exceeds the preset value of Error Frame Period Threshold(frame), an alarm is reported.
l If any error frame occurs in one second, this second is called an errored frame second. Within the specified value of Error Frame Second Window(s), if the number of error frames on the link exceeds the preset value of Error Frame Second Threshold(s), an alarm is reported.
l Within the specified value of Error Frame Signal Periodic Monitor Window(Entries), if the number of error signals exceeds the preset value of Error Frame Signal Periodic Monitor Threshold(Entries), an alarm is reported.
A.6.4 QoS Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to QoS. A.6.4.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing DiffServ domains. A.6.4.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create A-266
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating DiffServ (DS) domains. A.6.4.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing DiffServ (DS) domain applied ports. A.6.4.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to port policies. A.6.4.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port policies. A.6.4.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating traffic classification. A.6.4.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port shaping management tasks.
A.6.4.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing DiffServ domains.
Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Mapping Relation ID
1 to 8
1
This parameter indicates the ID of the mapping relation between DiffServ domains.
Mapping Relation Name
-
Default Map
This parameter indicates the name of the mapping relation between DiffServ domains.
NOTE
If one default DiffServ domain exists on the OptiX RTN 950 equipment, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and Mapping Relation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to this domain.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-267
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CVLAN
0 to 7
-
l This parameter indicates the priority of the C-VLAN of the ingress packets. l C-VLAN indicates the client-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority.
SVLAN
0 to 7
-
l This parameter indicates the priority of the S-VLAN of the ingress packets. l S-VLAN indicates the server-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority.
IP DSCP
0 to 63
-
l This parameter indicates the DSCP priority of the IP addresses of the ingress packets. l The differentiated services code point (DSCP) refers to bits 0-5 of the differentiated services (DS) field in the packet and indicates the service class and discarding priority of the packet.
A-268
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MPLS EXP
0 to 7
-
l Displays the MPLS EXP value of ingress packets. l When a packet in an egress queue leaves an NNI port, the NNI port obtains the packet priority value according to the mappings between PHB service classes of egress queues and egress packet priorities (MPLS EXP values), and writes the obtained priority value into the EXP field of the egress MPLS packet. NOTE The MPLS EXP value can be modified in the default Diffserv domain (Default Map) only.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-269
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PHB
BE
-
l This parameter indicates the per-hop behavior (PHB) service class of the DiffServ domain.
AF1 AF2 AF3 AF4
l The PHB service class refers to the forwarding behavior of the DiffServ node on the behavior aggregate (BA) operation. The forwarding behavior can meet the specific requirements.
EF CS6 CS7
l The PHB service classes are BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. The priorities (C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, DSCP value, and MPLS EXP value) contained in the packets of the DiffServ domain and the eight PHB service classes meet the requirements of the specified or default mapping relation. NOTE The AF1 is classified into three sub service classes, namely, AF11, AF12, and AF13, only one of which is valid. It is the same case with the AF2, AF3, and AF4.
A-270
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Egress Mapping Relation Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PHB
BE
-
l This parameter indicates the PHB service class of the DiffServ domain.
AF1 AF2 AF3
l The PHB service class refers to the forwarding behavior of the DiffServ node on the behavior aggregate (BA) operation. The forwarding behavior can meet the specific requirements.
AF4 EF CS6 CS7
l The PHB service classes are BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. The priorities (C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, DSCP value and MPLS value) contained in the packets of the DiffServ domain and the eight PHB service classes meet the requirements of the specified or default mapping relation. NOTE The AF1 is classified into three sub service classes, namely, AF11, AF12, and AF13, only one of which is valid. It is the same case with the AF2, AF3, and AF4.
CVLAN
0 to 7
-
l This parameter indicates the priority of the C-VLAN of the egress packets. l C-VLAN indicates the client-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-271
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
SVLAN
0 to 7
-
l This parameter indicates the priority of the S-VLAN of the egress packets. l S-VLAN indicates the server-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority.
IP DSCP
0 to 63
-
l This parameter indicates the DSCP priority of the IP addresses of the ingress packets. l The DSCP refers to bits 0-5 of the DS field in the packet and indicates the service class and discarding priority of the packet.
MPLS EXP
0 to 7
-
l Displays the MPLS EXP value of egress packets. l When a packet arrives at an NNI port, the NNI port obtains the packet priority value depending on its trusted priority type (MPLS EXP value) and specifies the PHB service class of the packet according to the mappings between packet priorities and PHB service classes. NOTE The MPLS EXP value can be modified in the default Diffserv domain (Default Map) only.
A-272
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Application Ports Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the port that uses the DiffServ domain.
Packet Type
CVLAN
CVLAN
The packets trusted by the OptiX RTN 950 are the C_VLAN, S_VLAN and IP DSCP packets that contain the C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, DSCP value or MPLS value. By default, the untrusted packets are mapped to the BE service class for best-effort forwarding.
SVLAN IP-DSCP MPLS-EXP
NOTE l The trusted packet priorities of a UNI port include DSCP value, CVLAN priority, and SVLAN priority. For the E-Line services that are transparently transmitted end to end (UNI-UNI), a UNI port only trusts DSCP value. l An NNI port carrying MPLS/PWE3 services trusts only packets with MPLS EXP values. l The trusted packet priorities of a QinQ link NNI port are configured according to the planning information.
A.6.4.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating DiffServ (DS) domains.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-273
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Mapping Relation ID
2 to 8
-
This parameter specifies the ID of the mapping relation of a DS domain.
Mapping Relation Name
-
-
This parameter specifies the name of the mapping relation of a DS domain.
Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CVLAN
0 to 7
-
l This parameter specifies the C-VLAN priority of the ingress packets. l C-VLAN indicates the client-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority.
SVLAN
0 to 7
-
l This parameter specifies the S-VLAN priority of the ingress packets. l S-VLAN indicates the server-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority.
IP DSCP
0 to 63
-
l This parameter specifies the DSCP priority of the IP addresses of the ingress packets. l The differentiated services code point (DSCP) refers to bits 0-5 of the differentiated services (DS) field in the packet and indicates the service class and discarding priority of the packet.
A-274
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MPLS EXP
-
-
l Displays the MPLS EXP value of ingress packets. l When a packet in an egress queue leaves an NNI port, the NNI port obtains the packet priority value according to the mappings between PHB service classes of egress queues and egress packet priorities (MPLS EXP values), and writes the obtained priority value into the EXP field of the egress MPLS packet. NOTE The MPLS EXP value can be modified in the default Diffserv domain (Default Map) only.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-275
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PHB
BE
-
l This parameter indicates the PHB service class of the DS domain.
AF1 AF2 AF3
l The PHB service class refers to the forwarding behavior of the DS node on the behavior aggregate (BA) operation. The forwarding behavior can meet the specific requirements.
AF4 EF CS6 CS7
l The PHB service classes are BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. The priorities (C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, DSCP value and MPLS EXP value) contained in the packets of the DS domain and the eight PHB service classes meet the requirements of the specified or default mapping relation. NOTE The AF1 is classified into three sub service classes, namely, AF11, AF12, and AF13, only one of which is valid. It is the same case with the AF2, AF3, and AF4.
A-276
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Egress Mapping Relation Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PHB
BE
-
l This parameter indicates the PHB service class of the DS domain.
AF1 AF2 AF3
l The PHB service class refers to the forwarding behavior of the DS node on the behavior aggregate (BA) operation. The forwarding behavior can meet the specific requirements.
AF4 EF CS6 CS7
l The PHB service classes are BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. The priorities (C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, DSCP value and MPLS EXP value) contained in the packets of the DS domain and the eight PHB service classes meet the requirements of the specified or default mapping relation. NOTE The AF1 is classified into three sub service classes, namely, AF11, AF12, and AF13, only one of which is valid. It is the same case with the AF2, AF3, and AF4.
CVLAN
0 to 7
-
l This parameter specifies the C-VLAN priority of the egress packets. l C-VLAN indicates the client-side VLAN priority, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-277
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
SVLAN
0 to 7
-
l This parameter specifies the S-VLAN priority of the egress packets. l S-VLAN indicates the server-side VLAN priority, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority.
IP DSCP
0 to 63
-
l This parameter specifies the DSCP priority of the IP addresses of the egress packets. l The differentiated services code point (DSCP) refers to bits 0-5 of the differentiated services (DS) field in the packet and indicates the service class and discarding priority of the packet.
MPLS EXP
-
-
l Displays the MPLS EXP value of egress packets. l When a packet in an egress queue leaves an NNI port, the NNI port obtains the packet priority value according to the mappings between PHB service classes of egress queues and egress packet priorities (MPLS EXP values), and writes the obtained priority value into the EXP field of the egress MPLS packet. NOTE The MPLS EXP value can be modified in the default Diffserv domain (Default Map) only.
A-278
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Application Ports Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
This parameter specifies the board that uses the mapping relations between DS domains.
Available Port
-
-
This parameter displays the available port list from which you can select the port that uses the mapping relations between DS domains.
Port
-
-
This parameter displays the selected port list. The ports in the list use the mapping relations between DS domains.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-279
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Packet Type
cvlan
cvlan
l This parameter specifies the type of the packet.
svlan ip-dscp mpls-exp
l The packets trusted by the OptiX RTN 950 are the C_VLAN, S_VLAN, IP DSCP and MPLS packets that contain the C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, DSCP value or MPLS EXP value. By default, the untrusted packets are mapped to the BE service class for besteffort forwarding. NOTE l The trusted packet priorities of a UNI port include DSCP value, CVLAN priority, and SVLAN priority. For the E-Line services that are transparently transmitted end to end (UNI-UNI), a UNI port only trusts DSCP value. l An NNI port carrying MPLS/PWE3 services trusts only packets with MPLS EXP values. l The trusted packet priorities of a QinQ link NNI port are configured according to the planning information.
A.6.4.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing DiffServ (DS) domain applied ports.
Navigation Path
A-280
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Select the DS domain to be changed in the main interface. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3.
Click the Apply Port tab.
4.
Click Modify.
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Configuring the Applied Ports Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Mapping Relation Name
-
-
This parameter indicates the name of the mapping relation of a DS domain.
Packet Type
CVLAN
CVLAN
The packets trusted by the OptiX RTN 950 are the CVLAN, S-VLAN, IP DSCP packets, and MPLS packets that respectively contain the C-VLAN priority, S-VLAN priority, IP DSCP value and MPLS EXP value. By default, the untrusted packets are mapped to the BE service class for besteffort forwarding.
SVLAN IP-DSCP MPLS-EXP
NOTE l The trusted packet priorities of a UNI port include DSCP value, CVLAN priority, and SVLAN priority. For the E-Line services that are transparently transmitted end to end (UNI-UNI), a UNI port only trusts DSCP value. l An NNI port carrying MPLS/PWE3 services trusts only packets with MPLS EXP values. l The trusted packet priorities of a QinQ link NNI port are configured according to the planning information.
Board
-
-
This parameter specifies the board where the port is located.
Available Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the available port.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-281
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Selected Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the selected port. The selected port is applied to the DS domain.
NOTE
If one default DS domain exists on the OptiX RTN 950, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and Mapping Relation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to this domain.
A.6.4.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to port policies.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the CoS Configuration tab.
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Policy ID
-
-
This parameter indicates the policy ID of the port.
Policy Name
-
-
This parameter indicates or specifies the policy name of the port.
A-282
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS
CS7
-
l The BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7 service classes respectively map eight queuing entities. The OptiX RTN 950 provides different QoS policies for the queues at different service classes.
CS6 EF AF4 AF3 AF2 AF1 BE
l CS6-CS7: indicates the highest service grade, which is mainly involved in signaling transmission. l EF: indicates fast forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic whose delay is small and packet loss ratio is low, for example, voice and video services. l AF1-AF4: indicates assured forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic that requires rate guarantee but does not require delay or jitter limit. l BE: indicates that the traffic is forwarded in best-effort manner without special processing.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-283
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Grooming Police After Reloading
SP
CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SP
WRR
AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1: WRR
l The strict priority (SP) scheduling algorithm is designed for the key services. One important characteristic of the key services is that higher priorities are required to minimize the response delay in the case of congestion events. l The weighted round robin (WRR) scheduling algorithm divides each port into multiple output subqueues. The polling scheduling is performed among the output sub-queues to ensure that each subqueue has a certain period of service time. l The OptiX RTN 950 supports the setting of the SP+WRR scheduling algorithm of the CoS queue according to the requirement, and provides one or more queues that comply with the SP algorithm. Except for the default value, however, the value of the WRR scheduling algorithm and the value of the SP scheduling algorithm cannot be interleaved. That is, except for the default value, Grooming Police After Reloading can be changed from SP to WRR according to the queue priorities in a descending order (CS7-BE).
A-284
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Parameter
Value Range
A Parameters Description
Default Value
Description l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Policy Weight(%)
1 to 100
25
l This parameter specifies the weight of the policy in the WRR queue. The weight indicates the percentage of the bandwidth resources obtained by the WRR queue. l This parameter can be set only when Grooming Police After Reloading is set to WRR. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies whether traffic shaping is enabled for an egress queue corresponding to a PHB service class. l CIR (kbit/s), PIR (kbit/s), CBS (byte), and PBS (byte) can be set only when Bandwidth Limit is set to Enabled. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
CIR(kbit/s)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Traffic shaping for an egress queue uses the single token bucket two color marker algorithm. The value of the CIR must be equal to the value of the PIR. In actual traffic shaping processing, only the PIR is valid.
A-285
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PIR(kbit/s)
-
-
l When the buffer queue is empty, the packets are processed as follows: If the rate of a packet is equal to or lower than the PIR, it is directly forwarded; if the rate of a packet is higher than the PIR, it enters the buffer queue and then is forwarded at a rate equal to the PIR. l When the buffer queue is not empty, the packets whose rate passes the restriction of the PIR directly enter the buffer queue and then are forwarded at a rate equal to the PIR. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
CBS(byte)
-
-
l It is recommended that you set the value of the CBS equal to the value of the PIR. In actual traffic shaping processing, only the PBS is valid. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A-286
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PBS(byte)
-
-
l When the buffer queue is empty, certain burst packets can be forwarded if the rate of the packets is equal to or lower than the PIR in a certain period. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the PBS. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A.6.4.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port policies.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the CoS Configuration tab.
3.
Click New. The Create Port Policy dialog box is displayed.
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Policy ID
-
-
This parameter specifies the policy ID of the port.
Automatically Assign
Selected
Deselected
This parameter specifies whether to automatically allocate the policy ID of the port policy. After this parameter is selected, the system automatically allocates the policy ID, and then the policy ID cannot be set manually.
-
This parameter specifies the policy name of the port.
Deselected
Policy Name
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-287
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS
CS7
-
l The BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7 service classes respectively map eight queuing entities. The OptiX RTN 950 provides different QoS policies for the queues at different service class.
CS6 EF AF4 AF3 AF2 AF1 BE
l CS6-CS7: indicates the highest service grade, which is mainly involved in signaling transmission. l EF: indicates fast forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic whose delay is small and packet loss ratio is low, for example, voice and video services. l AF1-AF4: indicates assured forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic that requires rate guarantee but does not require delay or jitter limit. l BE: indicates that the traffic is forwarded in best-effort manner without special processing.
A-288
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Grooming Police After Reloading
SP
CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SP
WRR
AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1: WRR
l The strict priority (SP) scheduling algorithm is designed for the key services. One important characteristic of the key services is that higher priorities are required to minimize the response delay in the case of congestion events. l The weighted round robin (WRR) scheduling algorithm divides each port into multiple output subqueues. The polling scheduling is performed among the output sub-queues to ensure that each subqueue has a certain period of service time. l The OptiX RTN 950 supports the setting of the SP+WRR scheduling algorithm of the CoS queue according to the requirement, and provides one or more queues that comply with the SP algorithm. Except for the default value, however, the value of the WRR scheduling algorithm and the value of the SP scheduling algorithm cannot be interleaved. That is, except for the default value, Grooming Police After Reloading can be changed from SP to WRR according to the queue priorities in a descending order (CS7-BE).
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-289
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Policy Weight(%)
1 to 100
25
l Policy Weight(%) specifies the weight of the policy in the WRR queue. The weight indicates the percentage of the bandwidth resources obtained by the WRR queue. l This parameter can be set only when Grooming Police After Reloading is set to WRR. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
l Bandwidth Limit indicates or specifies whether traffic shaping is enabled for an egress queue corresponding to a PHB service class. l CIR (kbit/s), PIR (kbit/s), CBS (byte), and PBS (byte) can be set only when Bandwidth Limit is set to Enabled. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
CIR(kbit/s)
A-290
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Traffic shaping for an egress queue uses the single token bucket two color marker algorithm. The value of the CIR must be equal to the value of the PIR. In actual traffic shaping processing, only the PIR is valid.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PIR(kbit/s)
-
-
l When the buffer queue is empty, the packets are processed as follows: If the rate of a packet is equal to or lower than the PIR, it is directly forwarded; if the rate of a packet is higher than the PIR, it enters the buffer queue and then is forwarded at a rate equal to the PIR. l When the buffer queue is not empty, the packets whose rate passes the restriction of the PIR directly enter the buffer queue and then are forwarded at a rate equal to the PIR. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
CBS(byte)
-
-
l It is recommended that you set the value of the CBS equal to the value of the PIR. In actual traffic shaping processing, only the PBS is valid. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-291
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PBS(byte)
-
-
l When the buffer queue is empty, certain burst packets can be forwarded if the rate of the packets is equal to or lower than the PIR in a certain period. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the PBS. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A.6.4.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating traffic classification.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Traffic Classification Configuration tab.
3.
Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Traffic Classification ID
1 to 1024
-
This parameter specifies the ID of the traffic classification.
A-292
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ACL Action
Permit
Permit
l The access control list (ACL) determines whether to forward or discard the packets that enter the port according to the specified matching rules.
Deny
l When ACL Action is set to Permit, the ingress port accepts and then performs QoS processing for only the packets that meet the specified mapping rules. l When ACL Action is set to Deny, the ingress port discards the packets that meet the specified mapping rules.
Ingress Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Logical Relation Between Matched Rules
And
And
l This parameter specifies the logical relationship between the traffic classification matching rules. l The OptiX RTN 950 supports the setting of the logical AND between multiple matching rules.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-293
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Match Type
DSCP Value
-
l After you click Add or Delete, complex traffic classification can be performed on the traffic that enters the ingress port according to the preset matching rules.
CVlan ID CVlan priority SVlan ID SVlan priority
l In the case a specific service, complex traffic classification can be divided into basic traffic types according to the DSCP value, C-VLAN ID, CVLAN priority, SVLAN ID, or SVLAN priority. Traffic type is based on the associated Ethernet packets. Therefore, this parameter is set according to the packet type and the planning information. Match Value
DSCP Value: 0 to 63
-
CVlan ID: 1 to 4094 CVlan priority: 0 to 7 SVlan ID: 1 to 4094 SVlan priority: 0 to 7
l If the matching value of the packets is the same as the preset Match Value, the packets match the rules of complex traffic classification. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Wildcard
A-294
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
This parameter has a fixed value of 0.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS
-
-
l This parameter specifies the PHB service class queue mapped by the traffic classification packets.
CS7 CS6 EF AF4
l If this parameter is set to empty (-), the traffic classification packets map the PHB service class queue according the mapping relation specified in the topic about Diffserv domain management.
AF3 AF2 AF1 BE
l This parameter is set according to the planning information. Bandwidth Limit
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the CAR operation is performed for the flow in the ingress direction. l CIR (kbit/s), PIR (kbit/s), CBS (byte), and PBS (byte) can be set only when Bandwidth Limit is set to Enabled. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-295
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CIR(kbit/s)
-
-
l When the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR, the packets are marked blue and pass the CAR policing. These packets are first forwarded in the case of network congestion. l When the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but not more than the PIR, the packets whose rate is more than the CIR can pass the restriction of the CAR and are marked yellow. The processing method of the packets marked yellow can be set to "Pass" or "Remark". "Remark" indicates that the packets are mapped into another specified queue of a higher priority (this is equal to changing the priority of the packets) and then forwarded to the next port. If a network congestion event occurs again, the packets marked yellow can be processed according to the new priority. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A-296
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PIR(kbit/s)
-
-
l When the rate of the packets is more than the PIR, the packets that exceed the rate restriction are marked red and directly discarded. l When the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but not more than the PIR, the packets whose rate is more than the CIR can pass the restriction of the CAR and are marked yellow. The processing method of the packets marked yellow can be set to "Pass" or "Remark". "Remark" indicates that the packets are mapped into another specified queue of a higher priority (this is equal to changing the priority of the packets) and then forwarded to the next port. If a network congestion event occurs again, the packets marked yellow can be processed according to the new priority. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-297
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CBS(byte)
-
-
l During a certain period, if the rate of the packets whose processing method is marked "Pass" is not more than the CIR, certain burst packets are allowed and can be first forwarded in the case of network congestion. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the CBS. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
PBS(byte)
-
-
l During a certain period, if the rate of the packets whose processing method is marked "Pass" is more than the CIR but not more than the PIR, certain burst packets are allowed and marked yellow. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the PBS. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A-298
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Coloration Mode
Color Blindness
Color Blindness
l This parameter specifies the CAR operation performed by the equipment on the packets. The packets are dyed according to the result of the CAR operation. The dying rule is determined by the comparison between the rate of the packets and the preset CAR value. l The OptiX RTN 950 supports Color Blindness only.
Packet Color
Red
-
Packets can be dyed in three colors: red, yellow, and green. The packets in red are first discarded.
-
l This parameter specifies the method of handling the packets.
Yellow Green Handling Mode
Discard Pass Remark
l Discard: The packets are discarded. l Pass: The packets are forwarded. l Remark: The packets are remarked. "Remark" indicates that the packets are mapped into another specified queue of a higher priority (this is equal to changing the priority of the packets) and then forwarded to the next port.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-299
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Relabeled CoS
CS7
-
If the handling method is set to "Remark", you can reset the CoS of the packets.
CS6 EF AF4 AF3 AF2 AF1 BE
Egress Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled
Enable
l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the traffic shaping is performed in the egress function.
Enable
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR (kbit/s), CBS (byte), and PBS (byte) can be set only when Bandwidth Limit is set to Enabled. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A-300
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CIR(kbit/s)
-
-
l In the case that no packets exist in the egress queue: When the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR, these packets directly enter the egress queue. l In the case that certain packets exist in the egress queue: The packets whose rate passes the restriction of the PIR directly enter the egress queue, which forwards the packets to the next port at the CIR. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-301
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PIR(kbit/s)
-
-
l In the case that no packets exist in the egress queue: If the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but is not more than the PIR, the packets whose rate is more than the CIR enter the egress queue, which forwards the packets to the next port at the CIR. If the rate of the packets is more than the PIR, the packets are directly discarded. l In the case that certain packets exist in the egress queue: The packets whose rate passes the restriction of the PIR directly enter the egress queue, which forwards the packets to the next port at the CIR. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
CBS(byte)
-
-
l If the rate of the packets is not more than the CIR during a certain period, the burst packets are directly transmitted. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the CBS. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A-302
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PBS(byte)
-
-
l If the rate of the packets is more than the CIR but is not more than the PIR during a certain period, the burst packets enter the egress queue. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the PBS. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
A.6.4.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port shaping management tasks.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Parameters for Port Shaping Management Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Slot No.
-
-
This parameter specifies the slot ID.
Port
-
-
This parameter specifies the port.
CIR (kbit/s)
-
-
CBS (byte)
-
-
PIR (kbit/s)
-
-
Traffic shaping for an egress queue uses the single token bucket two color marker algorithm. The value of the CIR must be equal to the value of the PIR. In actual traffic shaping processing, only the PIR is valid. If the traffic shaping function is enabled, OptiX RTN 950 processes the packets in the buffer
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-303
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PBS (byte)
-
-
queue through the following methods when no packets are available in the queue. l When the buffer queue is empty, the packets are processed as follows: If the rate of a packet is equal to or lower than the PIR, it is directly forwarded; if the rate of a packet is higher than the PIR, it enters the buffer queue and then is forwarded at a rate equal to the PIR. l When the buffer queue is empty, certain burst packets can be forwarded if the rate of the packets is equal to or lower than the PIR in a certain period. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the PBS. l When the buffer queue is not empty, the packets whose rate passes the restriction of the PIR directly enter the buffer queue and then are forwarded at a rate equal to the PIR.
A-304
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.7 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the EoPDH Plane This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet features on the EoPDH plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet port parameters, and QoS parameters. A.7.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services This section describes the parameters for EoPDH-plane Ethernet services. A.7.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols This section describes the parameters for EoPDH-plane Ethernet protocols. A.7.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet OAM on the EoPDH plane. A.7.4 QoS Parameters This section describes the parameters for the QoS on the EoPDH plane. A.7.5 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet ports on the EoPDH plane.
A.7.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services This section describes the parameters for EoPDH-plane Ethernet services. A.7.1.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creation This section describes the parameters for creating an Ethernet line service. A.7.1.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creating QinQ-Based Ethernet Line Services This section describes the parameters associated with QinQ-based Ethernet line services, which need to be set on the NMS. A.7.1.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service This section describes the parameters for Ethernet line services. A.7.1.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creation of Ethernet LAN Services Based on IEEE 802.1d/802.1q Bridge This section describes the parameters for creating an Ethernet LAN service. A.7.1.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creating IEEE 802.1ad Bridge-Based Ethernet LAN Service This section describes the parameters associated with IEEE 802.1ad bridge-based Ethernet LAN services, which need to be set on the NMS. A.7.1.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service This section describes the parameters for creating an Ethernet LAN service. A.7.1.7 Parameter Description: VLAN Filtering Table_Creation This section describes the parameters for creating VLAN filtering tables. A.7.1.8 Parameter Description: Aging Time of MAC Address Table Entries This section describes the parameters associated with the aging time of MAC address table entries, which need to be set on the NMS. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-305
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.7.1.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creation This section describes the parameters for creating an Ethernet line service.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Deselect Display QinQ Shared Service.
3.
Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-8 Parameters on the main interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
Displays the board name.
Service Type
EPL
EPL
Specify the Ethernet service type to EPL.
Bidirectional
l If this parameter is set to Unidirectional, you only need to create a service from the service source to the service sink. That is, there is traffic only in the direction from the service source to the sink port.
EVPL(QinQ) Service Direction
Bidirectional Unidirectional
l If this parameter is set to Bidirectional, you need to create a service from the service source to the service sink and a service from the service sink to the service source. That is, there is traffic in the direction from the service source to the sink port and in the direction from the service sink to the source port at the same time. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Bidirectional. Source Port
-
-
l Specifies the port of the service source. l When you create bidirectional Ethernet services from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you set the PORT to the source port.
A-306
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source VLAN(e.g. 1,3-6)
1-4095
-
l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the hyphen (-) to represent consecutive numbers. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l The number of VLANs must be the same as the value of Sink VLAN(e.g. 1,3-6). l If this parameter is set to null, all the services at the source port are used as the service source. l If this parameter is not set to null, only the service that carries a specified VLAN ID at the source port can be used as the service source.
Sink Port
-
-
l Specifies the port of the service sink. l This parameter cannot take the same value as Source Port. l When you create bidirectional Ethernet services from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you set the VCTRUNK to the sink port.
Sink VLAN(e.g. 1,3-6)
1-4095
-
l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the hyphen (-) to represent consecutive numbers. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l The number of VLANs must be the same as the value of Source VLAN(e.g. 1,3-6). l If this parameter is set to null, all the services at the sink port are used as the service sink. l If this parameter is not set to null, only the service that carries a specified VLAN ID at the sink port can be used as the service sink.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-307
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Table A-9 Parameters for port attributes Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the ports involved in the Ethernet service.
Port Type
-
-
Displays the network attribute of the Ethernet port.
Port Enabled
Enabled
-
l When the source port or the sink port is set to a PORT, set Port Enabled to Enabled.
Disabled
l This parameter need not be set when the source port or sink port is a VCTRUNK. TAG
Tag Aware
-
Access Hybrid
l If all the accessed services are frames with VLAN tags (tagged frames), set this parameter to Tag Aware. l If all the accessed services are frames without VLAN tags (untagged frames), set this parameter to Access. l If the accessed services contain tagged frames and untagged frames, set this parameter to Hybrid.
Table A-10 Parameters for bound paths Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Configurable Ports
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16
-
Specifies the VCTRUNK to bind paths.
Level
-
-
Displays the level of the bound VC path. In the case of the EFP8 board, this parameter always takes the value of VC12-Xv.
Service Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Uplink
l Set this parameter to Bidirectional unless otherwise specified.
Downlink Available Resources
-
Available Timeslots
VC12-1-VC12-63
A-308
l Specifies the direction of the bound path.
-
l Displays the available VC4 paths. l In the case of the EFP8 board, this parameter always takes the value of VC4-1.
-
Specifies the available timeslots.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bound Path
-
-
You need to plan and set this parameter according to the following principles: l The capacity of the VCTRUNK is determined by the actual bandwidth required by the services. l The EFP8 board supports 16 VCTRUNKs. Each VCTRUNK can bind a maximum of 16 VC-12 paths and the total number of bound VC-12 paths cannot exceed 63.
Number of Bound Paths
-
-
Displays the number of the bound VC path.
Activation Status
-
-
Displays the activation status of the bound VC path.
A.7.1.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creating QinQ-Based Ethernet Line Services This section describes the parameters associated with QinQ-based Ethernet line services, which need to be set on the NMS.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board, and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Select Display QinQ Shared Service.
3.
Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-11 Parameters on the main interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
Displays the board name.
Service Type
EPL
EPL
Specifies the service type to EVPL(QinQ).
EVPL(QinQ)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-309
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
l When this parameter is set to Unidirectional, only the service from the service source to the service sink is created. That is, the service source is forwarded only to the sink port.
Unidirectional
l When this parameter is set to Bidirectional, both the service from the service source to the service sink and the service from the service sink to the service source are created. That is, when the service source is forwarded to the sink port, the service sink is forwarded to the source port. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Bidirectional. Operation Type
l Add S-VLAN
Strip S-VLAN
l Transparently transmit CVLAN
l When used for private line services, QinQ can process VLAN tags in different manners as required. l When Service Direction is set to Unidirectional, you can set Operation Type to Strip S-VLAN.
l Transparently transmit SVLAN
l Set this parameter according to actual situations.
l Transparently transmit SVLAN and CVLAN l Translate SVLAN l Translate SVLAN and transparently transmit CVLAN l Strip S-VLAN Source Port
-
-
l Specifies the port where the service source resides. l When creating a bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you use the PORT as the source port.
A-310
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source C-VLAN (e.g. 1, 3-6)
1-4095
-
l You can set this parameter to null, a number, or several numbers. When you set this parameter to several numbers, use "," to separate these discrete values and use "-" to indicate continuous numbers. For example, "1, 3-6" indicates numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l The number of VLANs set in this parameter should be the same as the number of VLANs set in Sink C-VLAN (e.g. 1, 3-6). l When you set this parameter to null, all the services of the source port work as the service source. l When you set this parameter to a nonnull value, only the services of the source port whose VLAN IDs are included in the value range of this parameter work as the service source.
Source S-VLAN
1-4095
-
l This parameter must be set to a numerical value. l Only the service of the source port whose S-VLAN ID is equal to the value of this parameter work as the service source.
Sink Port
-
-
l Specifies the port where the service sink resides. l This parameter must be set to be a value different from Source Port. l When creating a bidirectional Ethernet service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is recommended that you use the VCTRUNK as the sink port.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-311
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink C-VLAN(e.g. 1, 3-6)
1-4095
-
l You can set this parameter to null, a number, or several numbers. When you set this parameter to several numbers, use "," to separate these discrete values and use "-" to indicate continuous numbers. For example, "1, 3-6" indicates numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l The number of VLANs set in this parameter should be the same as the number of VLANs set in Source CVLAN(e.g. 1, 3-6). l When you set this parameter to null, all the services of the sink port work as the service sink. l When you set this parameter to a nonnull value, only the services of the sink port whose VLAN IDs are included in the value range of this parameter work as the service sink.
Sink S-VLAN
1-4095
-
l This parameter must be set to a numerical value. l Only the services of the sink port whose S-VLAN IDs are equal to the value of this parameter work as the service sink.
C-VLAN Priority
AUTO
AUTO
Displays the C-VLAN priority.
S-VLAN Priority
AUTO
AUTO
Specifies the S-VLAN priority. The bigger the value, the higher the priority.
Priority 0 to Priority 7
Table A-12 Parameters of port attributes Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the ports that are configured to transmit the service.
Port Type
-
-
Displays the network attribute of the Ethernet port.
Port Enabled
Enabled
-
l When the source port or the sink port is set to a PORT, set Port Enabled to Enabled.
Disabled
l This parameter need not be set when the source port or sink port is a VCTRUNK.
A-312
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
TAG
-
-
This parameter is invalid for QinQ line services.
Table A-13 Parameters for bound paths Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Configurable Ports
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16
-
Specifies the VCTRUNK to bind paths.
Level
-
-
Displays the level of the bound VC path. In the case of the EFP8 board, this parameter always takes the value of VC12-Xv.
Service Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Uplink
l Specifies the direction of the bound path. l Set this parameter to Bidirectional unless otherwise specified.
Downlink -
l Displays the available VC4 paths.
Available Resources
-
Available Timeslots
VC12-1-VC12-63
-
Specifies the available timeslots.
Bound Path
-
-
You need to plan and set this parameter according to the following principles:
l In the case of the EFP8 board, this parameter always takes the value of VC4-1.
l The capacity of the VCTRUNK is determined by the actual bandwidth required by the services. l The EFP8 board supports 16 VCTRUNKs. Each VCTRUNK can bind a maximum of 16 VC-12 paths and the total number of bound VC-12 paths cannot exceed 63. Number of Bound Paths
-
-
Displays the number of the bound VC path.
Activation Status
-
-
Displays the activation status of the bound VC path.
A.7.1.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service This section describes the parameters for Ethernet line services.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-313
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-14 Parameters on the main interface (Display QinQ Shared Service is not selected) Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
Displays the board name.
Service Type
-
-
Displays the service type.
Service Direction
-
-
Displays the service direction.
Source Port
-
-
Displays the port of the service source.
Source VLAN
-
-
Displays the VLAN ID of the service source.
Sink Port
-
-
Displays the port of the service sink.
Sink VLAN
-
-
Displays the VLAN ID of the service sink.
Activation Status
-
-
Displays whether to activate the service.
Table A-15 Parameters on the main interface (Display QinQ Shared Service is selected) Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
Displays the board name.
Service Type
-
-
Displays the service type.
Service Direction
-
-
Displays the service direction.
Source Port
-
-
Displays the port of the service source.
Source C-VLAN
-
-
Displays the VLAN ID of the service source.
Source S-VLAN
-
-
l Displays the S-VLAN ID of the service source. l This parameter can be set only for the QinQ-based EVPL service.
Sink Port
-
-
Displays the port of the service sink.
Sink C-VLAN
-
-
Displays the VLAN ID of the service sink.
Sink S-VLAN
-
-
l Displays the S-VLAN ID of the service sink. l This parameter can be set only for the QinQ-based EVPL service.
A-314
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
C-VLAN Priority
-
-
l Displays the priority of the C-VLAN. l This parameter can be set only for the QinQ-based EVPL service.
S-VLAN Priority
-
-
l Displays the priority of the S-VLAN. l This parameter can be set only for the QinQ-based EVPL service.
Activation Status
-
-
Displays whether to activate the service.
Table A-16 Parameters for port attributes Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the port name.
Port Type
-
-
Displays the network attribute of the Ethernet port.
Port Enabled
-
-
When the source port or sink port is a PORT, this parameter indicates whether the port is enabled.
TAG
-
-
Displays the tag attribute of the Ethernet port.
Table A-17 Parameters for bound paths Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCTRUNK Port
-
-
Displays the VCTRUNK that binds VC paths.
Level
-
-
Displays the level of the bound VC paths.
Service Direction
-
-
Displays the direction of the bound VC paths.
Bound Path
-
-
Displays the serial numbers of the bound VC paths.
Number of Bound Paths
-
-
Displays the number of the bound VC paths.
Activation Status
-
-
Displays whether the bound VC paths are activated.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-315
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.7.1.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creation of Ethernet LAN Services Based on IEEE 802.1d/802.1q Bridge This section describes the parameters for creating an Ethernet LAN service.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-18 Parameters on the main interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
Displays the board that is configured with a bridge.
VB name
-
-
Describes the bridge. It is recommended that you set this parameter to a character string that indicates the function of the bridge.
Bridge Type
802.1q
802.1q
l If this parameter is set to 802.1q, an IEEE 802.1q bridge is created.
802.1d
l If this parameter is set to 802.1d, an IEEE 802.1d bridge is created.
802.1ad Bridge Switch Mode
l IVL/Ingress Filter Enable (supported by the IEEE 802.1q bridge and IEEE 802.1ad bridge, unsupported by the IEEE 802.1d bridge) l SVL/Ingress Filter Disable (supported by the IEEE 802.1d bridge and IEEE 802.1ad bridge, unsupported by the IEEE 802.1q bridge)
l IVL/Ingress Filter Enable (IEEE 802.1q bridge and the IEEE 802.1ad bridge) l SVL/Ingress Filter Disable (IEEE 802.1d bridge)
l When the bridge uses the SVL mode, all the VLANs share one MAC address table. When the bridge uses the IVL mode, each VLAN has an MAC address table. l When the filtering function is enabled at the ingress port, the ingress port checks the VLAN tags of all incoming packets. If the VLAN ID contained in the VLAN tag of a packet is not included in the VLAN filtering table, the packet is discarded. When the filtering function is disabled at the ingress port, the ingress port does not check any VLAN tag of the incoming packets.
Bridge Learning Mode
-
-
Displays the learning mode of the bridge.
Ingress Filter
-
-
Displays whether the filtering function is enabled at the ingress port.
A-316
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MAC Address Selflearning
-
-
Displays whether the MAC address selflearning of the bridge is enabled.
Table A-19 Parameters for mounting services Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB Port
-
-
Displays the ID of the logical port on the bridge.
Mount Port
-
-
Displays or specifies which physical port or VCTRUNK on the Ethernet switch board is mounted to the bridge.
Port Type
-
-
Displays the network attribute of the port mounted to the bridge.
Port Enabled
Disabled
-
Displays or specifies whether the port mounted to the bridge is enabled.
-
Displays or specifies the tag attribute of the port mounted to the bridge.
-
Displays or specifies the default VLAN ID of the port mounted to the bridge.
Enabled TAG
Access Tag Aware Hybrid
Default VLAN ID
-
This parameter is valid only when you set the tag attribute of the port to Access or Hybrid. Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation
-
Displays or specifies the working mode of the port mounted to the bridge.
10M Half-Duplex 10M Full-Duplex 100M Half-Duplex 100M Full-Duplex Active
-
-
Displays whether to activate the service.
Service Direction
-
-
Displays the direction of the service.
C-VLAN
-
-
The IEEE 802.1d/802.1q bridge does not support this parameter.
S-VLAN
-
-
The IEEE 802.1d/802.1q bridge does not support this parameter.
S-VLAN Priority
-
-
The IEEE 802.1d/802.1q bridge does not support this parameter.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-317
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
C-VLAN Priority
-
-
The IEEE 802.1d/802.1q bridge does not support this parameter.
Table A-20 Parameters for mounting configuration Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Available Mounted Ports
-
-
Displays which physical port or VCTRUNK on the Ethernet switch board can be mounted to the bridge.
Selected Mounted Ports
-
-
Displays which physical port or VCTRUNK on the Ethernet switch board is mounted to the bridge.
Table A-21 Parameters for bound paths Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Configurable Ports
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16
-
Specifies the VCTRUNK to bind paths.
Level
-
-
Displays the level of the bound VC path. In the case of the EFP8 board, this parameter always takes the value of VC12-Xv.
Service Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Uplink
l Set this parameter to Bidirectional unless otherwise specified.
Downlink Available Resources
-
Available Timeslots
VC12-1-VC12-63
A-318
l Specifies the direction of the bound path.
-
l Displays the available VC4 paths. l In the case of the EFP8 board, this parameter always takes the value of VC4-1.
-
Specifies the available timeslots.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bound Path
-
-
You need to plan and set this parameter according to the following principles: l The capacity of the VCTRUNK is determined by the actual bandwidth required by the services. l The EFP8 board supports 16 VCTRUNKs. Each VCTRUNK can bind a maximum of 16 VC-12 paths and the total number of bound VC-12 paths cannot exceed 63.
Number of Bound Paths
-
-
Displays the number of the bound VC path.
Activation Status
-
-
Displays the activation status of the bound VC path.
A.7.1.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creating IEEE 802.1ad Bridge-Based Ethernet LAN Service This section describes the parameters associated with IEEE 802.1ad bridge-based Ethernet LAN services, which need to be set on the NMS.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board, and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-22 Parameters on the main interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
Displays the board where the bridge is configured.
VB Name
-
-
This parameter is a string that describes the bridge. It is recommended that you set this parameter to a character string that contains the information about the detailed application of the bridge.
Bridge Type
802.1q
802.1q
When this parameter is set to 802.1ad, create the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
802.1d 802.1ad Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-319
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bridge Switch Mode
l IVL/Ingress Filter Enable (supported by the 802.1q bridge and 802.1ad bridge, unsupported by the 802.1d bridge)
l IVL/Ingress Filter Enable (the 802.1q bridge and the 802.1ad bridge)
l When the bridge uses the SVL mode, all the VLANs share one MAC address table. When the bridge uses the IVL mode, all the VLANs correspond to their respective MAC address tables.
l SVL/Ingress Filter Disable (the 802.1d bridge)
l If the ingress filter is enabled, the VLAN tag is checked at the ingress port. If the VLAN ID does not equal the VLAN ID of the port defined in the VLAN filtering table, the packet is discarded. If the ingress filter is disabled, the preceding described check is not conducted.
l SVL/Ingress Filter Disable (supported by the 802.1d bridge and 802.1ad bridge, unsupported by the 802.1q bridge) Bridge Learning Mode
-
-
Displays the bridge learning mode.
Ingress Filter
-
-
Displays whether the ingress filter function is enabled.
MAC Address Selflearning
-
-
Displays whether the MAC address selflearning function of the bridge is enabled.
Table A-23 Parameters of service mounting Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB Port
-
-
Displays the ID of the logical port of the bridge.
Mount Port
-
-
Displays or specifies the external port or VCTRUNK on the Ethernet switching board that is connected to the bridge.
Port Type
-
-
Displays the network attribute of the external port/VCTRUNK connected to the bridge.
Port Enabled
Disabled
-
Displays or specifies whether the external port connected to the bridge is enabled.
-
This parameter is invalid in the case of Ethernet LAN services based on 802.1ad bridge.
Enabled TAG
A-320
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Default VLAN ID
-
-
Displays or specifies the default VLAN ID. This parameter is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation
Auto-Negotiation
Displays or specifies the working mode of the external port.
10M Half-Duplex 10M Full-Duplex 100M Half-Duplex 100M Full-Duplex Activate
-
-
Displays whether the service is activated.
Service Direction
-
-
Displays the service direction.
C-VLAN
-
-
Displays or specifies the C-VLAN ID that the data frames carry. Is valid only when the bridge is an IEEE 802.1ad bridge and Operation Type is set to Add S-VLAN Base for Port and CVLAN. Specifies the mapping relationship between the C-VLAN ID carried by the data frames and the S-VLAN ID to be added.
S-VLAN
-
-
Displays or specifies the S-VLAN ID that the data frames carry. l When Operation Type is set to Add SVLAN Base for Port, this parameter specifies that the data frames that enter the IEEE 802.1ad bridge need to be added with the S-VLAN ID. l When Operation Type is set to Add SVLAN Base for Port and C-VLAN, this parameter and C-VLAN specify the mapping relationship between the SVLAN ID to be added and the C-VLAN ID carried by the data frames that enter the IEEE 802.1ad bridge. l When Operation Type is set to Mount Port, this parameter is invalid. l When Operation Type is set to Mount Port and Base for Port and S-VLAN, this parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID to be carried by the data frames that enter the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
S-VLAN Priority
-
-
Displays or specifies the S-VLAN priority.
C-VLAN Priority
-
-
Displays or specifies the C-VLAN priority.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-321
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Table A-24 Parameters of service mounting Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Operation Type
Add S-VLAN base for port
Add S-VLAN base for port
For the meaning of each operation type, see Application of the QinQ Technology in 802.1ad Bridge Services.
Add S-VLAN base for Port and CVLAN Mount Port Mount Port and base for Port and SVLAN VB Port
-
-
Specifies the ID of the logical port of the bridge.
Mount Port
-
-
Selects the external port or VCTRUNK on the Ethernet switching board that is connected to the bridge.
Port Type
-
-
Displays the port type.
C-VLAN
1-4095
-
Is valid only when Operation Type is set to Add S-VLAN Base for Port and CVLAN. Specifies the mapping relationship between the C-VLAN ID carried by the data frames and the S-VLAN ID to be added.
S-VLAN
1-4095
-
l When Operation Type is set to Add SVLAN Base for Port, this parameter specifies that the data frames that enter the IEEE 802.1ad bridge need to be added with the S-VLAN ID. l When Operation Type is set to Add SVLAN Base for Port and C-VLAN, this parameter and C-VLAN specify the mapping relationship between the SVLAN ID to be added and the C-VLAN ID carried by the data frames that enter the IEEE 802.1ad bridge. l When Operation Type is set to Mount Port, this parameter is invalid. l When Operation Type is set to Mount Port and Base for Port and S-VLAN, this parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID to be carried by the data frames that enter the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
A-322
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
S-VLAN Priority
AUTO
AUTO
Specifies the S-VLAN priority.
Priority 0 to Priority 7 C-VLAN Priority
AUTO
AUTO
Specifies the C-VLAN priority.
Port Enabled
-
-
Displays or specifies whether the external port connected to the bridge is enabled.
Table A-25 Parameters for bound paths Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Configurable Ports
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16
-
Specifies the VCTRUNK to bind paths.
Level
-
-
Displays the level of the bound VC path. In the case of the EFP8 board, this parameter always takes the value of VC12-Xv.
Service Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Uplink
l Specifies the direction of the bound path. l Set this parameter to Bidirectional unless otherwise specified.
Downlink -
l Displays the available VC4 paths.
Available Resources
-
Available Timeslots
VC12-1-VC12-63
-
Specifies the available timeslots.
Bound Path
-
-
You need to plan and set this parameter according to the following principles:
l In the case of the EFP8 board, this parameter always takes the value of VC4-1.
l The capacity of the VCTRUNK is determined by the actual bandwidth required by the services. l The EFP8 board supports 16 VCTRUNKs. Each VCTRUNK can bind a maximum of 16 VC-12 paths and the total number of bound VC-12 paths cannot exceed 63. Number of Bound Paths
-
-
Displays the number of the bound VC path.
Activation Status
-
-
Displays the activation status of the bound VC path.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-323
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.7.1.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service This section describes the parameters for creating an Ethernet LAN service.
Navigation Path In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-26 Parameters on the main interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
Displays the board that is configured with a bridge.
VB ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the bridge.
VB Name
-
-
This parameter is a character string that describes the bridge. It is recommended that you set this character string to a value that indicates the specific purpose of the bridge.
Bridge Type
-
-
Displays the type of the bridge.
Bridge Switch Mode
-
-
Displays the switching mode of the bridge.
Bridge Learning Mode
-
-
Displays the learning mode of the bridge.
Ingress Filter
-
-
Displays whether the filtering function is enabled at the ingress port.
MAC Address selfLearning
-
-
Displays whether the MAC address selflearning of the bridge is enabled.
Active
-
-
Displays whether to activate the service.
Table A-27 Parameters for mounting services Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB Port
-
-
Displays the ID of the logical port of the bridge.
Mount Port
-
-
Displays or specifies which physical port or VCTRUNK on the Ethernet switch board is mounted to the bridge.
Port Type
-
-
Displays the network attribute of the port mounted to the bridge.
A-324
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Enabled
-
-
Displays or specifies whether the port mounted to the bridge is enabled.
Hub/Spoke
Hub
Hub
Displays or specifies the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port mounted to the bridge.
Spoke
l Hub ports can mutually access each other. l Hub ports and Spoke ports can mutually access each other. l Spoke ports cannot mutually access each other. TAG
-
-
Displays or specifies the TAG attribute of the mounted port in the case of Ethernet LAN services based on 802.1d bridge or 802.1q bridge. This parameter is invalid in the case of Ethernet LAN services based on 802.1ad bridge.
Default VLAN ID
-
-
Displays or specifies the default VLAN ID of the port mounted to the bridge. This parameter is valid only when you set the tag attribute of the port to Access or Hybrid.
Working Mode
-
-
Displays or specifies the working mode of the port mounted to the bridge.
Service Direction
-
-
Displays the direction of the service.
C-VLAN
-
-
Displays or specifies the C-VLAN ID carried by the data frame. This parameter is valid only when the bridge is an IEEE 802.1ad bridge and Operation Type is Add S-VLAN Base for Port and C-VLAN. This parameter specifies the mapping relation between the C-VLAN tag carried by the data frame and the S-VLAN tag to be added.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-325
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
S-VLAN
-
-
Displays or specifies the S-VLAN ID carried by the data frame. l When Operation Type is set to Add SVLAN Base for Port, this parameter specifies the S-VLAN to be added to the data frames that enter the IEEE 802.1ad bridge. l When Operation Type is set to Add SVLAN Base for Port and C-VLAN, this parameter and C-VLAN specify the mapping relation between the S-VLAN tag to be added and the C-VLAN tag carried by the data frame that enters the IEEE 802.1ad bridge. l When Operation Type is set to Mount Port, this parameter is invalid. l When Operation Type is set to Mount Port and Base for Port and S-VLAN, this parameter specifies the S-VLAN tag to be carried by the data frames that enter the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
S-VLAN Priority
-
-
Displays the priority of the S-VLAN.
C-VLAN Priority
-
-
Displays the priority of the C-VLAN.
Table A-28 Parameters for VLAN filtering table Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
-
-
Displays the VLAN ID that needs to be filtered in forwarding.
VB Port
-
-
Displays the ID of the logical port of the bridge.
Forwarding Physical Port
-
-
Displays the actually specified forwarding port. l Selected forwarding ports can send packets only among themselves. l Selected forwarding ports can only forward the packet that carries the VLAN ID tag. These ports discard the packet that carries other VLAN tags. l The broadcast packets transmitted by any of Selected forwarding ports can be forwarded only among Selected forwarding ports.
A-326
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Activation Status
-
-
Displays whether the VLAN ID entry is valid.
Table A-29 Parameters for VLAN unicast Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
-
-
l This parameter is invalid for the 802.1d bridge and the 802.1ad bridge that adopt the SVL learning mode. The entry applies to all VLANs. l In the case of the 802.1d bridge and the 802.1ad bridge that adopt the SVL learning mode, the entry applies to only the VLAN with the ID specified by this parameter. l Set this parameter according to the planning information.
MAC Address
-
-
l Displays or specifies the static MAC address. l A static MAC address is an address that is set manually. It does not age automatically and needs to be deleted manually. l Generally, a static MAC address is used for the port that receives but does not forward Ethernet service packets or the port whose MAC address need not age automatically.
VB Port
-
-
Displays the ID of the logical port of the bridge.
Physical Port
-
-
l Specifies the Ethernet port that corresponds to the MAC address. l Set this parameter according to the planning information.
Aging Status
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
-
-
Displays the aging status of the entries.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-327
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Table A-30 Parameters for disabling MAC addresses Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID(e.g. 1,3-6)
-
-
Displays or specifies the VLAN ID of the service. A disabled MAC address is valid for the VLAN with the ID as specified by this parameter.
MAC Address
-
-
l Displays or specifies the disabled MAC address. A disabled MAC address is also called a blacklisted MAC address. l The data frame that contains a disabled destination MAC address is discarded. A disabled MAC address needs to be set manually and does not age.
Table A-31 Parameters for bound paths Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCTRUNK Port
-
-
Displays the VCTRUNK to bind VC paths.
Level
-
-
Displays the level of the bound VC paths.
Service Direction
-
-
Displays the direction of the bound VC paths.
Bound Path
-
-
Displays the bound paths.
Number of Bound Paths
-
-
Displays the number of bound paths.
Table A-32 Parameters for self-learned MAC addresses Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MAC Address
-
-
l Displays or specifies the self-learned MAC address. A self-learned MAC address is also called a dynamic MAC address. l The entries of self-learned MAC addresses are obtained when the bridge uses the SVL or IVL learning mode. A self-learned MAC address ages.
VB Port
A-328
-
-
Displays the ID of the logical port of the bridge.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
-
-
l If the bridge uses the SVL learning mode, this parameter is invalid. That is, the preset self-learned MAC address entries are valid for all VLANs. l If the bridge uses the IVL learning mode, the preset self-learned MAC address entries are valid only for the VLAN with the ID specified by this parameter. l Set this parameter according to the planning information.
Table A-33 Parameters for VLAN MAC address table capacity Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
-
-
Displays the VLAN ID specified for querying the self-learned MAC addresses.
Actual MAC Address Table Capacity
-
-
Displays how many MAC addresses are actually self-learned in the query condition of a specific VLAN ID.
Table A-34 Parameters for VB port MAC address table capacity Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB Port
-
-
Displays the ID of the logical port of the bridge. The ID is specified for querying the self-learned MAC addresses.
Actual MAC Address Table Capacity
-
-
Displays how many MAC addresses are actually self-learned in the query condition of a specific VB port.
A.7.1.7 Parameter Description: VLAN Filtering Table_Creation This section describes the parameters for creating VLAN filtering tables.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Select an IEEE 802.1q or 802.1ad bridge and click the VLAN Filtering tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-329
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description NOTE
In the case of IEEE 802.1ad bridge-based Ethernet LAN services, the learning mode of the VB must be IVL.
3.
Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-35 Parameters on the main interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB
-
-
Displays the bridge whose VLAN filtering table is to be created.
VLAN ID(e.g. 1,3-6)
1-4095
1
Specifies the VLAN IDs in the VLAN filtering table. l You can set this parameter to a number or several numbers. When you set this parameter to several numbers, use "," to separate these discrete values and use "-" to indicate continuous numbers. For example, "1, 3-6" indicates numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l Set this parameter as required.
Available forwarding ports
-
-
Displays the ports mounted to the bridge.
Selected forwarding ports
-
-
Displays the selected forwarding ports. l The selected forwarding ports can send packets only among themselves. l The selected forwarding ports can only forward the packet that carries the VLAN ID (e.g:1,3-6) tag. These ports discard the packet that carries other VLAN tags. l The broadcast packet that carries the VLAN ID(e.g.1,3-6) tag can be forwarded only among the selected forwarding ports.
A.7.1.8 Parameter Description: Aging Time of MAC Address Table Entries This section describes the parameters associated with the aging time of MAC address table entries, which need to be set on the NMS.
Navigation Path In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board, and choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Aging Time from the Function Tree. A-330
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-36 Parameters on the main interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
Displays the Ethernet board.
MAC Address Aging Time
l 1 to 120 Min
5 Min
l If one entry is not updated in a certain period, that is, if no new packet from this MAC address is received to enable the re-learning of this MAC address, this entry is deleted automatically. This mechanism is called aging, and this period is called the aging time.
l 1 to 120 Hour l 1 to 120 Day
l If you set this parameter to a very large value, the bridge stores excessive MAC address table entries that are outdated, which exhausts the resources of the MAC address forwarding table. l If you set this parameter to a very small value, the bridge may delete the MAC address table entry that is required, which reduces the forwarding efficiency. l It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value.
A.7.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols This section describes the parameters for EoPDH-plane Ethernet protocols. A.7.2.1 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Protocol Enabling This section describes the parameters for the types of spanning tree protocols and for enabling the spanning tree protocols. A.7.2.2 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Parameters This section describes the parameters for the spanning tree protocol. A.7.2.3 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Parameters This section describes the parameters associated with the spanning tree protocol, which need to be set on the NMS. A.7.2.4 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Running Information This section describes the parameters associated with the type and enabled status of the spanning tree protocol, which need to be set on the NMS. A.7.2.5 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Running Information This section describes the parameters associated with the type and enabled status of the spanning tree protocol, which need to be set on the NMS. A.7.2.6 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Point-to-Point Attribute Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-331
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
This section describes the parameters associated with the point-to-point attribute of the spanning tree protocol, which need to be set on the NMS. A.7.2.7 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Enabling This section describes the parameters for enabling the IGMP snooping protocol. A.7.2.8 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Creation of Static Multicast Table Entries This section describes the parameters for creating static multicast table entries. A.7.2.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Aging Time of Multicast Table Entries This section describes the parameters for the aging time of multicast table entries. A.7.2.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Creation of LAGs This topic describes the parameters for creating a link aggregation group (LAG). A.7.2.11 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation This section describes the parameters for port priorities and system priorities. A.7.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Point Service LPT This section describes the parameters for creating point-to-point service LPT. A.7.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Multipoint Service LPT This section describes the parameters for creating point-to-multipoint service LPT. A.7.2.14 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation This section describes the parameters for creating port mirroring tasks.
A.7.2.1 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Protocol Enabling This section describes the parameters for the types of spanning tree protocols and for enabling the spanning tree protocols.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Protocol Enabled tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-37 Parameters on the main interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB
-
-
Displays the created bridge.
A-332
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protocol Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
l Indicates whether to enable the spanning tree protocol.
Disabled
l Try to avoid Layer 2 service loopbacks in the service networking. If no loop occurs, you need not start the STP/ RSTP. l If the loop is already formed in the service networking, you must start the STP or RSTP. STP
Protocol Type
RSTP
RSTP
l This parameter is valid only when Protocol Enabled is Enabled. l The protocol type should be set according to the requirement of the interconnected Ethernet equipment. The default value is recommended unless otherwise specified.
A.7.2.2 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Parameters This section describes the parameters for the spanning tree protocol.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Bridge Parameters tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-38 Parameters on the main interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB
-
-
Displays the created bridge.
Priority
0-61440
32768
l The most significant 16 bits of the bridge ID indicate the priority of the bridge. l When the value is smaller, the priority is higher. As a result, the bridge is more likely to be selected as the root bridge. l If the priorities of all the bridges on the STP network take the same value, the bridge whose MAC address is the smallest is selected as the root bridge.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-333
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MAC Address
-
-
Displays the MAC address of a bridge.
Max Age(s)
6-40
20
l Indicates the maximum age of the CBPDU packet that is recorded by the port. l The greater the value, the longer the transmission distance of the CBPDU packet, and the greater the network diameter. When the value of this parameter is greater, however, the link fault detection of the bridge is slower and thus the network adaptability is reduced.
1-10
Hello Time(s)
2
l Indicates the interval for transmitting CBPDU packets through the bridge. l The greater the value of this parameter, the less the network resources that are occupied by the spanning tree. As the value of this parameter increases, however, the topology stability decreases.
4-30
Forward Delay(s)
15
l Indicates the holding time of a port in the listening state and in the learning state. l The greater the value, the longer the delay of the network state change. Therefore, the topology changes are slower and recovery in the case of faults is slower.
1-10
TxHoldCout(per second)
6
Indicates how many times the port transmits CBPDU packets in every second.
A.7.2.3 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Parameters This section describes the parameters associated with the spanning tree protocol, which need to be set on the NMS.
Navigation Path
A-334
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board, and choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Port Parameters tab.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-39 Parameters on the main interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the created bridge.
Priority
0-240
128
l The most significant eight bits of the port ID indicate the port priority. l The smaller the value of this parameter, the higher the priority.
Port Path Cost
1-200000000
-
l Indicates the status of the network to which the port is connected. l In the case of the bridges on both ends of the path, set this parameter to the same value.
Status
-
-
Displays the state of a port.
Admin Edge Attribute
Enabled
Disabled
l Is valid only when the RSTP is used.
Disabled
l Specifies whether to set the port to an edge port. The edge port refers to the bridge port that is connected only to the LAN. The edge port receives the BPDU and does not transmit the BPDU. l Set this parameter to Enabled only when the Ethernet port on the Ethernet board is directly connected to the data communication terminal equipment, such as a computer. In other cases, it is recommended that this parameter takes the default value.
Protocol Enabled
Enabled Disabled
Enabled
l Specifies whether the STP or RSTP is enabled for the port. l When this parameter is set to Disabled, the port does not process or transmit the BPDU. l It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-335
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Auto Edge Detection
Enabled
Disabled
l Is valid only when Admin Edge Attribute is set to Enabled.
Disabled
l When this parameter is set to Enabled, if the bridge detects that this port is connected to the port of another bridge, the RSTP considers this port as a nonedge port. l When Admin Edge Attribute is set to Enabled, set this parameter to Enabled. In other cases, it is recommended that this parameter takes the default value.
A.7.2.4 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Running Information This section describes the parameters associated with the type and enabled status of the spanning tree protocol, which need to be set on the NMS.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board, and choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Bridge Running Information tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-40 Parameters on the main interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB
-
-
Displays the created bridge.
Priority
-
-
Displays the priority of the bridge. The most significant 16 bits of the bridge ID indicate the priority of the bridge.
MAC Address
-
-
Displays the MAC address of the bridge.
Designed Root Bridge Priority
-
-
Displays the priority of the specified bridge.
Designed Root Bridge MAC Address
-
-
Displays the MAC address of the specified bridge.
Root Path Cost
-
-
Displays the root path cost. The root path cost is the path cost of the root port and is used for calculating the network topology.
A-336
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Root Port
-
-
Displays the root port of the spanning tree protocol.
Max Age(s)
-
-
Displays the maximum age of the CBPDU packet that is recorded by the port.
Hello Time(s)
-
-
Displays the interval for transmitting the CBPDU packets through the bridge.
Forward Delay(s)
-
-
Displays the holding time of a port in listening state and in learning state.
HoldCout
-
-
Displays the number of times that each port transmits CBPDU packets per second.
A.7.2.5 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Running Information This section describes the parameters associated with the type and enabled status of the spanning tree protocol, which need to be set on the NMS.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board, and choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Port Running Information tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-41 Parameters on the main interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the logical port of the bridge.
Port ID
-
-
Displays the port ID.
Port Status
-
-
Displays the port status.
Port Path Cost
-
-
Displays the port path cost.
Designated Port D
-
-
Displays the ID of the specified port.
Designated Root Bridge Priority
-
-
Displays the priority of the specified root bridge.
Designated Root Bridge MAC Address
-
-
Displays the MAC address of the specified root bridge.
Designated Path Cost
-
-
Displays the specified path cost.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-337
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Designated Bridge Priority
-
-
Displays the priority of the specified bridge.
Designated Bridge MAC Address
-
-
Displays the MAC address of the specified bridge.
Topology Detection
-
-
Displays the enabled status of topology detection.
Edge Port Status
-
-
Displays the enabled status of the edge port.
Running Time(s)
-
-
Displays the duration when the topology remains unchanged.
A.7.2.6 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Point-to-Point Attribute This section describes the parameters associated with the point-to-point attribute of the spanning tree protocol, which need to be set on the NMS.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board, and choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Point to Point Attribute tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-42 Parameters on the main interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the internal and external ports on the Ethernet board.
A-338
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Point-to-point Attribute
Adaptive connection
Adaptive connection
l This parameter is valid only when the RSTP is used.
Link connection
l If this parameter is set to Adaptive connection, the bridge determines the actual point-to-point attribute of the port according to the actual working mode of the port. If the port works in full-duplex mode, the actual point-to-point attribute of the port is True. If the port works in half-duplex mode, the actual point-topoint attribute of the port is False.
Shared media
l If you set this parameter to Link connection, the actual point-to-point attribute of the port is True. l If you set this parameter to Shared media, the actual point-to-point attribute of the port is False. l Only the port whose actual point to point attribute is True can transmit the fast transition request and response messages. l It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value.
A.7.2.7 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Enabling This section describes the parameters for enabling the IGMP snooping protocol.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > IGMP Snooping Protocol from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Enable IGMP Snooping Protocol tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
Displays the board name.
VB
-
-
Displays the ID of the bridge.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-339
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protocol Enable
Enabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether to enable the IGMP snooping protocol.
Disabled
l If the IGMP multicast router exists on the interconnected Ethernet network, enable the IGMP snooping protocol according to the requirements of the router. The Discarded Tag of the Packet Excluded in the Multicast Group
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
l This parameter specifies the method of the port to process unknown multicast packets. When the IEEE 802.1q or 802.1ad bridge receives the multicast packets whose multicast addresses are not included in the multicast table, these packets are considered as unknown packets. l This parameter is valid only when Protocol Enable is Enabled. l If this parameter is set to Enabled, unknown multicast packets are discarded. l If this parameter is set to Disabled, unknown multicast packets are broadcast in the VLAN. l Set this parameter as required by the IGMP multicast server.
Max.NonResponse Times
1 to 4
3
If the bridge transmits an IGMP group query packet to the multicast member ports, the router port starts the timer for the query of the maximum response time. If the bridge does not receive the IGMP report packet within the maximum response time, the bridge adds one to the no-response times of the multicast member port. When the noresponse times of the port exceed the preset threshold, the bridge deletes the multicast member from the multicast group.
A.7.2.8 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Creation of Static Multicast Table Entries This section describes the parameters for creating static multicast table entries.
A-340
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > IGMP Snooping Protocol from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Static Multicast Table tab.
3.
Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the created bridge.
VLAN ID
-
-
Specifies the VLAN ID of the static multicast table entry.
MAC Address
-
-
l Specifies the MAC address in the static multicast table. l Set this parameter as required.
Multicast Port
-
-
l Specifies the port as an entry in the static multicast table. l An entry in the static multicast table does not age.
A.7.2.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Aging Time of Multicast Table Entries This section describes the parameters for the aging time of multicast table entries.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > IGMP Snooping Protocol from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Multicast Aging Time tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
Displays the board name.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-341
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Multicast Aging Time(Min)
1-120
8
l Specifies the aging time for multicast table entries. When a dynamic multicast table entry is not updated in a certain period (that is, no IGMP request from this multicast address is received), this entry is automatically deleted. This mechanism is called aging, and this period is called aging time. l If this parameter is set to a very great value, the bridge stores excessive multicast table entries that are no longer needed, which exhausts the resources of the multicast table. l If this parameter is set to a very small value, the bridge may delete the multicast table entry that is needed, which reduces the forwarding efficiency. l The default value is recommended.
A.7.2.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Creation of LAGs This topic describes the parameters for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.
3.
Click New.
Attribute Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAG No
1-12
1
Specifies the LAG number.
LAG Name
-
-
Specifies the LAG name.
A-342
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAG Type
Static
Static
l Static: A static LAG is created by the user. To add or delete a member port, you need to run the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) protocol. In a static LAG, a port can be in selected, standby, or unselected state. By running the LACP protocol, devices exchange aggregation information so that they share the same aggregation information.
Manual
l Manual: A manual LAG is created by the user. When you add or delete a member port, you need not run the LACP protocol. In a manual LAG, a port can be in the UP or DOWN state. The system determines whether to aggregate a port according to its physical state (UP or DOWN), working mode, and rate. Load Sharing
Sharing
Sharing
Non-Sharing
l Sharing: In a sharing LAG, all member ports always share the traffic load. The sharing mode can improve bandwidth utilization on a link. When the member ports are changed or some member ports fail, the traffic load of each member port is automatically re-allocated. l Non-Sharing: In a non-sharing LAG, only one member port carries the traffic load and the other member ports are in Standby state. Actually, a non-sharing LAG works in hot-standby mode. When the active port fails, the system selects a standby port to substitute for the failed port, thus preventing a link failure.
Sharing Mode
IP Sharing Mode
IP Sharing Mode
You can set this parameter only when Load Sharing is Sharing.
Revertive
l You can set this parameter only when Load Sharing is Non-Sharing.
MAC Sharing Mode Revertive Mode
Revertive Non-Revertive
l If this parameter is set to Revertive, services are automatically switched back to the working path after the working path recovers. l If this parameter is set to NonRevertive, services are still transmitted in the protection path after the working path recovers and the LAG remains the same.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-343
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Port Setting Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Main Port
-
-
l Specifies the main port in a LAG. l After a LAG is created, you can add Ethernet services to the main port only. That is, services cannot be added to a slave port. l When Load Sharing is set to NonSharing, the link connected to the main port is the working path and the links connected to the slave ports are protection paths.
Available Standby Ports
-
Selected Standby Ports
-
-
l Specifies the salve port in a LAG. l After a LAG is created, you need to perform manual operations to add or delete a slave port.
-
Displays the selected slave ports.
A.7.2.11 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation This section describes the parameters for port priorities and system priorities.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Link Aggregation Parameters tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the port name.
Port Priority
0-65535
32768
l This parameter is valid only when LAG Type of a LAG is set to Static. l This parameter indicates the priorities of the ports in a LAG as defined in the LACP protocol. The smaller the value, the higher the priority.
A-344
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for the system settings Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
System Priority
0-65535
32768
l This parameter is valid only when LAG Type of a LAG is set to Static. l This parameter indicates the priority of a LAG. The smaller the value, the higher the priority. l When the local LAG and the opposite LAG negotiate through LACP packets, one can obtain the system priority of the other. The LAG with the higher system priority is considered as the comparison result. Then, the aggregation information is consistent at both ends. If the local LAG and the opposite LAG have the same system priority, the MAC addresses are compared. The LAG with a lower MAC address is considered as the comparison result. Then, the aggregation information is consistent at both ends.
-
System MAC Address
-
Displays the MAC address of the system.
A.7.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Point Service LPT This section describes the parameters for creating point-to-point service LPT.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > LPT Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Query.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the port name.
VCTRUNK Port
-
-
Displays the VCTRUNK used by the Ethernet service.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-345
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Direction
-
-
l Displays the direction of the Ethernet service at the port. l The service direction is set to positive when the source port is a PORT and the sink port is a VCTRUNK; the service direction is set to reverse when the source port is a VCTRUNK and the sink port is a PORT.
Yes
LPT
No
Specifies whether to enable the LPT.
GFP(HUAWEI)
Ethernet
l Specifies the bearer mode of the LPT packets.
GFP-CSF
l The default value is recommended.
No Bearer Mode
GFP(HUAWEI)
PORT-Type Port Hold-Off Time(ms)
0-10000
100
l When the link on which Ethernet services are transmitted is configured with other protection schemes, you need to set the hold-off time of LPT. This enables the NE to notify the equipment at both ends of a transmission network of the fault on the transmission link only when the other protection schemes fail. l This parameter is valid only in the positive direction of LPT.
VCTRUNK Port Hold-Off Time(ms)
0-10000
100
l When the link on which Ethernet services are transmitted is configured with other protection schemes, you need to set the hold-off time of LPT. This enables the NE to notify the equipment at both ends of a transmission network of the fault on the transmission link only when the other protection schemes fail. l This parameter is valid only in the reverse direction of LPT.
A.7.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Multipoint Service LPT This section describes the parameters for creating point-to-multipoint service LPT.
Navigation Path 1.
A-346
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > LPT Management from the Function Tree. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
2.
Click PtoMP LPT. Then, the LPT Management dialog box appears.
3.
Click New.
Parameters for Convergence Points Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Specifies the port of the convergence point.
Bearer Mode
GFP(HUAWEI)
GFP(HUAWEI)
Ethernet
l This parameter can be set only when the selected port is a VCTRUNK.
GFP-CSF
l The default value is recommended.
Port Hold-Off Time(ms)
0-10000
0
When the link on which Ethernet services are transmitted is configured with other protection schemes, you need to set the hold-off time of LPT. This enables the NE to notify the equipment at both ends of a transmission network of the fault on the transmission link only when the other protection schemes fail.
Parameters for Access Points Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Specifies the port at the access node.
Bearer Mode
GFP(HUAWEI)
GFP(HUAWEI)
Ethernet
l This parameter can be set only when the selected port is a VCTRUNK.
GFP-CSF
l The default value is recommended.
A.7.2.14 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation This section describes the parameters for creating port mirroring tasks.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Port Mirroring from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
Displays the board name.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-347
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Mirror Listener Port
-
-
l After the mirroring function of the port is configured, you can monitor all the mirrored ports by analyzing the packets at the mirroring port only. As a result, you can easily manage the ports. l Mirror Listener Port indicates the port that sends the packets copied from Uplink Listened Port and Downlink Listened Port. l Mirror Listener Port cannot be set to a port that carries any service.
Mirrored Upstream Port
-
-
Mirrored Downstream Port
-
-
l Mirrored Upstream Port and Mirrored Downstream Port indicate the ports that copy packets for Mirror Listener Port. l Mirrored Upstream Port can be a PORT or a VCTRUNK. As a PORT, the port copies the packets that it receives; as a VCTRUNK, the port copies the packets that it transmits. Mirror Listener Port sends the packets copied from Mirrored Upstream Port. l Mirrored Downstream Port can be a PORT or a VCTRUNK. As a PORT, the port copies the packets that it transmits; as a VCTRUNK, the port copies the packets that it receives. Mirror Listener Port sends the packets copied from Mirrored Downstream Port. NOTE The transmit direction and receive direction mentioned in this section are related to the local NE.
A.7.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet OAM on the EoPDH plane. A.7.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MDs This topic describes the parameters for creating maintenance domains (MDs). A.7.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MAs This section describes the parameters for creating maintenance associations (MAs). A.7.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MPs This section describes the parameters for creating a maintenance point (MP). A.7.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LB This section describes the parameters for enabling the LB. A-348
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.7.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LT This topic describes the parameters for enabling the LT. A.7.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Parameter This section describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports. A.7.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Error Frame Monitoring This section describes the parameters for monitoring the OAM error frames at the Ethernet port. A.7.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_Remote OAM Parameter This section describes the parameters for monitoring the OAM errored frames at the Ethernet port.
A.7.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MDs This topic describes the parameters for creating maintenance domains (MDs).
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree.
2.
In the right pane, click OAM Configuration.
3.
Click New and choose Create MD from the drop-down list.
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-43 Parameters on the main interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance Domain Name
For example: MD1
-
Specifies the name of the MD.
Maintenance Domain Level
Consumer High(7)
Operator Low(0)
Specifies the level of the MD. The greater the value, the higher the level.
Consumer Middle(6) Consumer Low(5) Provider High(4) Provider Low(3) Operator High(2) Operator Middle(1) Operator Low(0)
A.7.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MAs This section describes the parameters for creating maintenance associations (MAs).
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-349
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree.
2.
In the right pane, click OAM Configuration.
3.
Click New and choose Create MA from the drop-down list.
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-44 Parameters on the main interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance Domain Name
For example: MD1
-
Displays the MD in which an MA is to be created.
Maintenance Association Name
For example: MA1
-
This parameter specifies the name of the MA, which is a service-related domain. By creating MAs, the connectivity check (CC) can be performed on the network that transmits a particular service instance.
A.7.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MPs This section describes the parameters for creating a maintenance point (MP).
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-45 Parameters on the main interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance Domain Name
-
NULL
Specifies the maintenance domain (MD) of the MP. NOTE An MD is not required for a common MP. For the creation of a common MP, select NULL.
A-350
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance Association Name
-
NULL
Specifies the maintenance association (MA) of the MP. NOTE An MA is not required for a common MP. For the creation of a common MP, select NULL.
Node
-
-
Specifies the port where you want to create an MP.
VLAN ID
-
-
l Configures the ID of the VLAN to which the service of the MP belongs. The information is contained in the OAM data packet. The MPs with the same VLAN ID in an MD can communicate with each other. l This parameter can be null in the case of PORT services, but need to be set in the case of PORT+VLAN services.
MP ID
Standard MP: 00-00-0000 to FFFF-1FFF
00-00-0000
Uniquely identifies an MP. From the highest to the lowest, the first byte indicates the network number, the second byte indicates the number of the node in the local network, and the third and forth bytes indicate the ID of the MP on the network node. The MP ID must be unique in the entire network.
MEP
Specifies the MP type defined in IEEE 802.1ag. An MP can be a maintenance association end point (MEP) or a maintenance association intermediate point (MIP).
Ingress
l Specifies the direction of the MEP.
Common MP: 00-00-0000 to FFFF-FF00 Type
MEP MIP
Direction
Ingress Egress
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
l Set this parameter to Ingress if the OAM data initiated by the MEP travels through the Ethernet switching unit on the local NE. Otherwise, set this parameter to Egress.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-351
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Advanced Attributes Table A-46 Parameters for advanced attributes Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Level
Consumer High(7)
Provider High(4)
Specifies the level of a common MP. The greater the value, the higher the level.
Consumer Middle (6)
NOTE This parameter is valid only for a common MP (NULL).
Consumer Low(5) Provider High(4) Provider Low(3) Operator High(2) Operator Middle(1) Operator Low(0) CC Status
Active
Inactive
Specifies whether to enable the connectivity check (CC) function at an MP.
5000
l Specifies the timeout duration of an LB test.
Inactive LB Timeout(ms)
3000 to 60000, in step of 100
l This parameter can be set only for an MEP. LT Timeout(ms)
3000 to 60000, in step of 100
5000
l Specifies the timeout duration of an LT test. l This parameter can be set only for an MEP.
CCM Sending Period(ms)
Standard MP:
Standard MP
1000
1000
10000
Common MP:
6000
5000
600000 Common MP: 1000 to 60000, in step of 100
Specifies the interval for sending the CCM packet at the MP where the CC test is performed. l If this parameter takes a very small value, service bandwidth decreases significantly. l If this parameter takes a very great value, the CC test will become less capable in detecting service interruptions. The default value is recommended. l This parameter can be set only for an MEP.
A.7.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LB This section describes the parameters for enabling the LB.
A-352
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree.
2.
Select the node that requires an LB test, click OAM Operation, and select Start LB.
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-47 Parameters on the main interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LB Source MP ID
-
-
Specifies the ID of the source maintenance point in the LB test.
LB Sink MP ID
-
-
Specifies the ID of the sink maintenance point in the LB test.
Test Result
-
-
Indicates the result of one LB test.
Test based on the MAC Address
Selected
Not selected
Select this parameter for an LB test based on MAC addresses.
Not selected
NOTE This parameter is valid only for a standard MP.
LB Sink MP MAC Address
-
-
Specifies the MAC address of the sink maintenance point in the LB test. This parameter is valid only in the case of Test based on the MAC Address.
A.7.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LT This topic describes the parameters for enabling the LT.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree.
2.
Select the node that requires an LT test, click OAM Operation, and select Start LT.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-353
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-48 Parameters on the main interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LT Source MP ID
-
-
Specifies the source MP in the LT test.
LT Sink MP ID
-
-
Specifies the sink MP in the LT test.
Responding MP ID
-
-
Displays the MP that responds to the test.
Responding MP Type
-
-
Displays the type of the MP that responds to the test.
Hop Count
-
-
Displays the count of hops between the source MP and the responding MP. That is, the number of responding MPs from the source MP to a certain responding MP in an LT test.
Test Result
-
-
Indicates the result of one LT test.
A.7.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Parameter This section describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Port OAM from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the OAM Parameter tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-49 Parameters on the main interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PORT
-
-
Displays the name of the external Ethernet port.
A-354
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable OAM Protocol
Enabled
Disabled
Specifies whether the point-to-point OAM protocol (IEEE 802.3ah protocol) is enabled.
Disabled
After the OAM protocol is enabled, the current Ethernet port starts to use the preset mode to set up an OAM connection with the opposite end. OAM Working Mode
Active
Active
Passive
The negotiation mode of IEEE 802.3ah includes active and passive modes. If this parameter is set to Active, the port can initiate an OAM connection. If this parameter is set to Passive, the port can only respond to the OAM connection requests from the opposite end.
Remote Alarm Support for Link Event
Enabled
Max OAM Packet Length(byte)
-
Enabled
Specifies whether the detected link event is notified to the opposite end (for example, error frame periods, error frames, and error frame seconds).
-
Displays the maximum length of the OAM packets.
Disabled
This parameter takes the same value as the Maximum Frame Length of the external port. -
Loopback Status
-
Displays the loopback status.
A.7.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Error Frame Monitoring This section describes the parameters for monitoring the OAM error frames at the Ethernet port.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-355
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Port OAM from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-50 Parameters on the main interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PORT
For example: PORT1
-
Displays the name of the external Ethernet port.
Error Frame Monitor Window (ms)
1000 to 60000, in step of 100
1000
In the specified Error Frame Monitor Window (ms), if the number of error frames exceeds the specified Error Frame Monitor Threshold (Entries) due to the link degradation, the link event alarm is reported.
Error Frame Monitor Threshold (frames)
1 to 4294967295, in step of 1
2
Specifies the threshold of monitoring error frames.
Error Frame Period Window (frames)
14880 to 8928000, in step of 1
148800
Within the specified value of Error Frame Period Window (frames), if the number of error frames on the link exceeds the preset value of Error Frame Period Threshold (frames), an alarm is reported.
Error Frame Period Threshold (frames)
1 to 892800000, in step of 1
2
Specifies the threshold of monitoring the error frame period.
Error Frame Second Window(s)
10 to 900, in step of 1
60
If any error frame occurs in one second, this second is called an error frame second. Within the specified value of Error Frame Second Window(s), if the number of error frames on the link exceeds the preset value of Error Frame Second Threshold (s), an alarm is reported.
Error Frame Second Threshold (s)
1 to 900, in step of 1
2
Specifies the threshold of monitoring error frame seconds.
A.7.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_Remote OAM Parameter This section describes the parameters for monitoring the OAM errored frames at the Ethernet port. A-356
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Port OAM from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Remote OAM parameter tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-51 Parameters on the main interface Field
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the name of the remote Ethernet port.
Remote OAM Working Mode
-
-
Displays the working mode of the remote Ethernet port.
Remote Alarm Support for Link Event
-
-
Displays whether the remote Ethernet port can notify link events to the local port.
Remote Side Loopback Response
-
-
Displays how the remote Ethernet port responds to a loopback.
Unidirectional Operation
-
-
Displays whether the remote Ethernet port supports unidirectional operations.
Max.OAM Packet Length (byte)
-
-
Displays the maximum OAM packet size supported by the remote Ethernet port.
A.7.4 QoS Parameters This section describes the parameters for the QoS on the EoPDH plane. A.7.4.1 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of Flows This parameter describes the parameters for creating flows. A.7.4.2 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR This section describes the parameters for creating CAR. A.7.4.3 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CoS This section describes the parameters for creating CoS. A.7.4.4 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR/CoS This section describes the parameters for creating CAR/CoS. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-357
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.7.4.5 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Shaping Management of Egress Queues This section describes the parameters for shaping management of egress queues.
A.7.4.1 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of Flows This parameter describes the parameters for creating flows.
Navigation Path
A-358
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Flow Configuration tab.
3.
Click New.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-52 Parameters on the main interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Flow Type
Port Flow
Port Flow
l Port flow: The packets from a certain port are classified as a type of flow. The Ethernet service associated with this flow type is the line service or Layer 2 switching service that uses this port as the service source.
Port+VLAN Flow Port+SVLAN Flow Port+CVLAN +SVLAN Flow Port+VLAN +Priority Flow
l Port+VLAN flow: The packets that are from a certain port and have a specified VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow. The associated Ethernet service of this flow type is the EVPL service (based on VLAN) or EVPLAN service (based on 802.1q bridge) that uses this PORT +VLAN as the service source. l Port+SVLAN flow: The packets that are from a certain port and have a specified SVLAN ID are classified as a type of flow. The associated Ethernet service of this flow type is the EVPL service (based on QinQ) or EVPLAN service (based on 802.1ad bridge) that uses this PORT +SVLAN as the service source. l Port+CVLAN+SVLAN flow: The packets that are received from or transmitted to a certain port and have a specified CVLAN+SVLAN are classified as a type of flow. The associated Ethernet service of this flow type is the EVPL service (based on QinQ) or EVPLAN service (based on 802.1ad bridge) that uses this PORT +CVLAN+SVLAN as the service source. l Port+VLAN+Priority flow: The packets that are from a certain port and have a specified VLAN ID and a specified VLAN priority are classified as a type of flow. The associated Ethernet service of this flow type is the line service that uses this Port+VLAN+Priority as the service source.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-359
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
PORT1-PORT9, VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16
PORT1
l When the associated service is the line service, set this parameter to the source port or sink port of the associated Ethernet service. l When the associated service is the Layer 2 switching service, set this parameter to a mounted port of the bridge.
1-4095
VLAN ID
1
l This parameter is valid only when Flow Type is set to Port+VLAN Flow or Port +VLAN+Priority Flow. l Set this parameter to the source VLAN of the associated Ethernet service.
C-VLAN
1-4095
1
l This parameter is valid only when Flow Type is set to Port+CVLAN+SVLAN Flow. l Set this parameter to the source CVLAN of the associated Ethernet service.
1-4095
S-VLAN
1
l This parameter is valid only when Flow Type is set to Port+SVLAN Flow or Port+SVLAN+CVLAN Flow. l Set this parameter to the source S-VLAN of the associated Ethernet service.
Priority
-
-
l This parameter is valid only when Flow Type is PORT+VLAN+Priority Flow. l This parameter indicates the VLAN priority of the flow-associated Ethernet services.
A.7.4.2 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR This section describes the parameters for creating CAR.
Navigation Path
A-360
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board, and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the CAR Configuration.
3.
Click New.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-53 Parameters on the main interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CAR ID
1-512
1
This parameter identifies a CAR operation, and is used to bind a flow to an associated CAR operation.
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Indicates whether to enable the CAR operation performed on the flow bound to the CAR.
0
l Indicates the CIR. When the rate of a packet is not more than the CIR, this packet passes the restriction of the CAR and is forwarded first even in the case of network congestion.
Disabled Committed information Rate (kbit/s)
0-100032 Step: 64
l The value of this parameter should not be more than the PIR. Committed Burst Size(kbyte)
0-1024
0
Indicates the CBS. When the rate of a packet that passes the restriction of the CAR is not more than the CIR in a certain period, some packets can burst and can pass the restriction of the CAR. These packets can be forwarded first even in the case of network congestion. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the CBS. Note that the CBS has an inherent size, and this parameter indicates the increment value only. The inherent size of the CBS is determined by the CIR. The greater the CIR, the greater the CBS.
Peak information Rate(kbit/s)
0-100032
0
l Indicates the PIR. When the rate of a packet is more than the PIR, the packet that exceeds the rate restriction is directly discarded. When the rate of packets is more than the CIR but is lower than or equal to the PIR, these packets whose rate exceeds the CIR can pass the restriction of the CAR and are marked yellow, and these packets are discarded first in the case of network congestion.
Step: 64
l The value of this parameter should not be more than the port bandwidth.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-361
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maximum Burst Size(kbyte)
0-1024
0
Indicates the MBS. When the rate of the packet that passes the restriction of the CAR is more than the CIR but is not more than the PIR, some packets can burst and are marked yellow, which enables these packets to be discarded first in the case of network congestion. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the MBS. Note that the MBS has an inherent size, and this parameter indicates the increment value only. The inherent size of the MBS is determined by the PIR. The greater the PIR, the greater the MBS.
A.7.4.3 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CoS This section describes the parameters for creating CoS.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the CoS Configuration tab.
3.
Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-54 Parameters on the main interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS ID
1-64
1
This parameter identifies a CoS operation, and is used to bind a flow to an associated CoS operation.
A-362
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS Type
simple
simple
l If the CoS type of a flow is set to simple, all the packets in this flow are directly scheduled to a specified egress queue.
VLAN Priority IPTOS
l If the CoS type of a flow is set to VLAN priority, the packets in this flow are scheduled to specified egress queues according to the user priorities specified in the VLAN tags of these packets.
DSCP
l If the CoS type of a flow is set to DSCP, the packets in this flow are scheduled to specified egress queues according to differentiated services code point (DSCP) in the IPv6 tags of these packets. l If the CoS type of a flow is set to IP TOS, the packets in this flow are scheduled to specified egress queues according to the TOS values carried in the IPv4 packets. This CoS type is applicable to IPv4 packets. CoS parameter
-
-
Displays the CoS parameters corresponding to different CoS types.
CoS Priority
0-7
-
This parameter determines to which egress queue a packet is schedule. l Each Ethernet port on the EFP8 board supports eight egress port queues. Queues 1-8 respectively correspond to the CoS priorities from 0 to 7. l Queue 8, with the CoS priority of 7, is as SP queue. Queues 1-7, with the CoS priorities from 0 to 6, are WRR queues. The weighted proportion of these WRR queues is 1:2:4:8:16:32:64 (from priority 0 to priority 6). On the EFP8 board, the weighted proportion of these WRR queues cannot be changed. l If the traffic shaping feature of some queues is enabled, bandwidth is allocated first to the queues whose traffic shaping feature is enabled based on the CIR. The remaining bandwidth is allocated to the eight queues by using the SP+WRR algorithm.
A.7.4.4 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR/CoS This section describes the parameters for creating CAR/CoS. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-363
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required Ethernet switching board, and then choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Flow Configuration tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-55 Parameters on the main interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Flow Type
-
-
Displays the type of a flow.
VB ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the bridge.
Port
-
-
Displays the port where a flow is to be created.
C-VLAN
-
-
l Displays the C-VLAN. l This parameter is valid is Flow Type is Port+VLAN Flow, Port+CVLAN +SVLAN Flow, or Port+VLAN +Priority Flow.
S-VLAN
-
-
l Displays the S-VLAN. l This parameter is valid when Flow Type is Port+SVLAN Flow or Port +CVLAN+SVLAN Flow.
Priority
-
-
l Displays the priority of the flow. l This parameter is valid when Flow Type is Port+VLAN+Priority Flow.
Bound CAR
-
None
This parameter indicates the CAR ID corresponding to a CAR operation. Different CAR IDs should be bound to different flows, even though the parameters of the CAR operations are the same.
Bound CoS
-
None
Indicates the CoS ID that corresponds to a CoS operation.
A.7.4.5 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Shaping Management of Egress Queues This section describes the parameters for shaping management of egress queues.
Navigation Path In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree. A-364
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-56 Parameters on the main interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the port name.
Port Queue
-
-
Displays the queue name.
Status
Enabled
Disabled
Indicates whether to enable the traffic shaping feature of an egress queue.
0
l When the rate of a packet is not more than the CIR, this packet directly enters the egress queue.
Disabled CIR(kbit/s)
0-100032 Step: 64
l The value of this parameter should not be more than the PIR. DCBS(kbyte)
-
0
Displays the excess burst size.
PIR(kbit/s)
0-100032
0
l When the rate of a packet is more than the PIR, the packet that exceeds the rate restriction is directly discarded. When the rate of packets is more than the CIR but not more than the PIR, the packets that exceed the restriction of the CIR enter the buffer of the CIR. When the buffer overflows, the packets are marked yellow and enter the egress queue, which enables the packets to be discarded first in the case of queue congestion.
Step: 64
l The value of this parameter should not be more than the port bandwidth. -
DMBS(kbyte)
0
Displays the maximum excess burst size.
A.7.5 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet ports on the EoPDH plane. A.7.5.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_External Port This section describes the parameters for Ethernet external ports. A.7.5.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Internal Port This section describes the parameters for Ethernet internal ports. A.7.5.3 Parameter Description: Type Field of QinQ Frames This section describes the parameters for setting the type field of QinQ frames.
A.7.5.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_External Port This section describes the parameters for Ethernet external ports. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-365
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Select External Port.
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-57 Parameters for the basic attributes Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the name of the external port.
Name
-
-
Displays or specifies the name of the external port.
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
l If the port gains access to services, set this parameter to Enabled. Otherwise, set this parameter to Disabled.
Disabled
l If this parameter is set to Enabled for the port that does not access services, an ETH_LOS alarm may be generated. This parameter is invalid for PORT9. Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation 10M Half-Duplex 10M Full-Duplex 100M Half-Duplex 100M Full-Duplex
Auto-Negotiation
l Different types of Ethernet ports support different working modes. l If the opposite port works in autonegotiation mode, set this parameter to Auto-Negotiation. l If the opposite port works in full-duplex mode, set this parameter to 10M FullDuplex or 100M Full-Duplex, depending on the rate of the opposite port. l If the opposite port works in half-duplex mode, set this parameter to 10M HalfDuplex or 100M Half-Duplex, depending on the rate of the opposite port, or set this parameter to AutoNegotiation. This parameter is invalid for PORT9.
A-366
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maximum Frame Length
1518-2000
1522
l Set this parameter to a value greater than the maximum length of all the data frames to be transmitted. l The default value is recommended if the jumbo frame is not considered and the data frames contain only one layer of VLAN tags or even no tags. The value of 1526 or greater is recommended if the data frames contain two layers of tags, such as QinQ.
Port Physical Parameters
-
-
Displays the actual working status of a PORT. This parameter is invalid for PORT9.
MAC Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
Loopback
l A MAC loopback is to loop back the Ethernet frames transmitted to the opposite port. l Use the default value unless otherwise specified.
PHY Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
Loopback
l A PHY loopback is to loop back the Ethernet physical signals transmitted to the opposite port. l Use the default value unless otherwise specified. This parameter is invalid for PORT9.
Table A-58 Parameters for flow control Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the name of the external port.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-367
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter is valid only when Working Mode is not set to AutoNegotiation.
Enable Symmetric Flow Control Mode
l If this parameter is set to Enable Symmetric Flow Control Mode, the port can send PAUSE frames and process the received PAUSE frames.
Send Only Receive Only
l If this parameter is set to Send Only, the port can send PAUSE frames in the case of congestion but cannot process the received PAUSE frames. l If this parameter is set to Receive Only, the port can process the received PAUSE frames but cannot send PAUSE frames in the case of congestion. l Set this parameter to the same as the nonautonegotiation flow control mode of the opposite port. Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode
Disabled
Disabled
Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control Enable Symmetric Control Enable Symmetric/ Dissymmetric Flow Control
l This parameter is valid only when Working Mode is Auto-Negotiation. l If this parameter is set to Enable Symmetric Control, the port can send PAUSE frames and process the received PAUSE frames. l If this parameter is set to Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control, the port can send PAUSE frames in the case of congestion but cannot process the received PAUSE frames. l If this parameter is set to Enable Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow Control, the port can function as follows: – Sends and processes PAUSE frames. – Sends but does not process PAUSE frames. – Processes but does not send PAUSE frames. l Set this parameter according to the autonegotiation flow control mode of the opposite port. This parameter is invalid for PORT9.
A-368
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Table A-59 Parameters for the tag attributes Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the name of the external port.
TAG
Tag Aware
Tag Aware
l With different tag attributes, the port processes frames in different modes. For details, see Table A-62.
Access Hybrid
l Set this parameter to Tag Aware if the port processes the frames with VLAN tags (or tagged frames). l Set this parameter to Access if the port processes the frames without VLAN tags (or untagged frames). l Set this parameter to Hybrid if the port processes the tagged frames and untagged frames.
Default VLAN ID
1-4095
1
l This parameter is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. l For the usage of this parameter, see Table A-62. l Set this parameter as required.
VLAN Priority
0-7
0
l This parameter is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. l For the usage of this parameter, see Table A-62. l When the VLAN priority is required for traffic classification or other purposes, set this parameter as required. Use the default value unless otherwise specified.
Entry Detection
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
l Indicates whether to check the incoming packets according to the tag attribute. l Set this parameter as required.
Table A-60 Parameters for the network attributes Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the name of the external port.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-369
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Attributes
UNI
UNI
l If this parameter is set to UNI, the port processes data frames according to the tag attribute.
C-Aware S-Aware
l If this parameter is set to C-Awareor SAware, the port processes the data frames by using the processing method of QinQ services. l Set this parameter to C-Aware or SAware when the port processes QinQ services. Otherwise, this parameter takes the default value.
Table A-61 Parameters for the advanced attributes Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the name of the external port.
Broadcast Packet Suppression
Disabled
Disabled
This parameter specifies whether to restrict the traffic of broadcast packets according to the proportion of the broadcast packets to the total packets. Set this parameter to Enabled when a broadcast storm may occur at the opposite port.
Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold
10%-100%
30%
When the proportion of the received broadcast packets to the total packets crosses the threshold, the port discards the received broadcast packets. Set this parameter to a value greater than the proportion when no broadcast storm occurs. The value of 30% or greater is recommended.
Traffic Threshold (Mbit/s)
0-100 (PORT1PORT8)
100 (PORT1PORT8)
0-1000 (PORT9)
1000 (PORT9)
Specifies the traffic threshold of the port. You can specify the traffic monitoring period by setting Port Traffic Threshold Time Window(Min).
A-370
Enabled
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Traffic Threshold Time Window(Min)
0-30
0
Specifies the traffic monitoring period. l If Port Traffic Threshold Time Window(Min) is set to 0, an associated alarm is reported at the moment when the traffic received at the port crosses the value of Traffic Threshold(Mbit/s). l If the Port Traffic Threshold Time Window(Min) is set to a value other than 0, an associated alarm is reported only when the traffic received at the port always crosses the value of Traffic Threshold(Mbit/s) in the monitoring period.
Loop Detection
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
This parameter specifies whether to enable loop detection, which is used to check whether a loop exists on the port.
Table A-62 Methods used by ports to process data frames Direction
Ingress port
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Type of Data Frame
Processing Method Tag aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
Receives the frame.
Discards the frame.
Receives the frame.
Untagged frame
Discards the frame.
The port receives the frame after adding to the frame the VLAN tag that contains Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority.
The port receives the frame after adding to the frame the VLAN tag that contains Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-371
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Direction
Egress port
Type of Data Frame
Processing Method Tag aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
Transmits the frame.
The port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame.
l If the VLAN ID in the frame is Default VLAN ID, the port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame. l If the VLAN ID in the frame is not Default VLAN ID, the port directly transmits the frame.
A.7.5.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Internal Port This section describes the parameters for Ethernet internal ports.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Select Internal Port.
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-63 Parameters for the tag attributes Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the name of the internal port.
A-372
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
TAG
Tag Aware
Tag Aware
l With different tag attributes, the port processes frames in different modes. For details, see Table A-68.
Access Hybrid
l Set this parameter to Tag Aware if the port processes the frames with VLAN tags (or tagged frames). l Set this parameter to Access if the port processes the frames without VLAN tags (or untagged frames). l Set this parameter to Hybrid if the port processes the tagged frames and untagged frames.
Default VLAN ID
1-4095
1
l This parameter is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. l For the usage of this parameter, see Table A-68. l Set this parameter as required.
VLAN Priority
0-7
0
l This parameter is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. l For the usage of this parameter, refer to Table A-68. l When the VLAN priority is required for traffic classification or other purposes, set this parameter as required. The default value is recommended unless otherwise specified.
Entry Detection
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
l Indicates whether to check the incoming packets according to the tag attribute. l Set this parameter as required.
Table A-64 Parameters for encapsulation or mapping Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the name of the internal port.
Mapping Protocol
GFP
GFP
The default value is recommended. The EFP8 board supports GFP only.
Scramble
Scrambling Mode [X43+1] Unscrambled
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Scrambling Mode [X43+1]
l Indicates the scrambling polynomial used by the mapping protocol. l The default value is recommended.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-373
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Set Inverse Value for CRC
-
-
This parameter is invalid for the EFP8 board.
Check Field Length
FCS32
FCS32
l When the Ethernet board uses the GFP mapping protocol, set this parameter to FCS32 or No.
No
l When you set this parameter to FCS32, a 32-bit FCS is used. l The default value is recommended. FCS Calculated Bit Sequence
Big endian
Big endian
Little endian
l When you set this parameter to Big endian, the least significant byte of the FCS is placed first and the most significant byte is placed last. l When you set this parameter to Little endian, the most significant byte of the FCS is placed first and the least significant byte is placed last. l The default value is recommended.
Table A-65 Parameters for the network attributes Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the name of the internal port.
Port Attributes
UNI
UNI
l If this parameter is set to UNI, the port processes data frames according to the tag attribute.
C-Aware S-Aware
l If this parameter is set to C-Aware or SAware, the port processes the data frames by using the processing method of QinQ services. l Set this parameter to C-Aware or SAware when the port processes QinQ services. Otherwise, this parameter takes the default value.
Table A-66 Parameters for the LCAS Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the name of the internal port.
A-374
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enabling LCAS
Disabled
Disabled
l Indicates whether to enable the LCAS function.
Enabled
l The LCAS can dynamically adjust the number of virtual containers for mapping required services to meet the bandwidth needs of the applications. As a result, the bandwidth utilization is improved. LCAS Mode
Huawei Mode
Huawei Mode
Standard Mode
l Indicates the sequence in which the LCAS sink sends the MST control packet and Rs-Ack control packet. l When you set this parameter to Huawei Mode, the LCAS sink first sends the RsAck and then sends the MST. l When you set this parameter to Standard Mode, the LCAS sink first sends the MST and then sends the RsAck. l If the equipment at the opposite end is the third-party equipment and does not support the Huawei mode, set this parameter to Standard Mode. Otherwise, set this parameter to Huawei Mode.
Hold Off Time(ms)
An integer ranging from 0, 2000 to 10000, in the increments of 100
2000
l When a member link is faulty, the LCAS performs switching after a delay of time to prevent the situation where an NE simultaneously performs a protection switching such as SNCP and performs an LCAS switching. This parameter specifies the duration of the delay. l The default value is recommended.
WTR Time(s)
0-720
300
l When the time after a member link is restored to normal reaches the specified value of this parameter, the VCG uses the restored member link. l The default value is recommended.
TSD
Disabled Enabled
Disabled
l Indicates whether the TSD is used as a condition for determining whether a member link is faulty. In the case of the VC-12, the TSD refers to the BIP_SD. In the case of the VC-3, the TSD refers to the B3_SD_VC3. l The default value is recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-375
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Min. MembersTransmit Direction
2-256
16
l Specifies the minimum number of members in the transmit direction. After the LCAS is enabled, the LCAS_PLCT alarm is reported when the number of effective members in the transmit direction becomes lower than the minimum number specified by this parameter. l The default value is recommended.
Mini. MembersReceive Direction
2-256
16
l Specifies the minimum number of members in the receive direction. After the LCAS is enabled, the LCAS_PLCT alarm is reported when the number of effective members in the receive direction becomes lower than the minimum number specified by this parameter. l The default value is recommended.
Table A-67 Parameters for bound paths Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Configurable Ports
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16
-
Specifies the VCTRUNK to bind paths.
Level
-
-
Displays the level of the bound VC path. In the case of the EFP8 board, this parameter always takes the value of VC12-Xv.
Service Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Uplink
l Set this parameter to Bidirectional unless otherwise specified.
Downlink Available Resources
-
Available Timeslots
VC12-1-VC12-63
A-376
l Specifies the direction of the bound path.
-
l Displays the available VC4 paths. l In the case of the EFP8 board, this parameter always takes the value of VC4-1.
-
Specifies the available timeslots.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bound Path
-
-
You need to plan and set this parameter according to the following principles: l The capacity of the VCTRUNK is determined by the actual bandwidth required by the services. l The EFP8 board supports 16 VCTRUNKs. Each VCTRUNK can bind a maximum of 16 VC-12 paths and the total number of bound VC-12 paths cannot exceed 63.
Number of Bound Paths
-
-
Displays the number of the bound VC path.
Activation Status
-
-
Displays the activation status of the bound VC path.
Table A-68 Methods used by ports to process data frames Direction
Ingress port
Egress port
Type of Data Frame
Processing Method Tag aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
Receives the frame.
Discards the frame.
Receives the frame.
Untagged frame
Discards the frame.
The port receives the frame after adding to the frame the VLAN tag that contains Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority.
The port receives the frame after adding to the frame the VLAN tag that contains Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority.
Tagged frame
Transmits the frame.
The port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame.
l If the VLAN ID in the frame is Default VLAN ID, the port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame. l If the VLAN ID in the frame is not Default VLAN ID, the port directly transmits the frame.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-377
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.7.5.3 Parameter Description: Type Field of QinQ Frames This section describes the parameters for setting the type field of QinQ frames.
Navigation Path In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Advance Attribute > QinQ Type Area Settings from the Function Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface Table A-69 Parameters on the main interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
Displays the Ethernet board on which the type field of QinQ frames needs to be set. If the Ethernet board is the EFP8 board, this parameter always takes the value of EFP8.
QinQ Type Area (Hexadecimal)
81 00
8100
88 A8 91 00
Specifies the type field of QinQ frames. Set this parameter according to the type field of the accessed QinQ frames.
0600 to FFFF
A.8 RMON Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances. A.8.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON statistics groups. A.8.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history groups. A.8.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history control groups. A.8.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON setting.
A.8.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON statistics groups.
Navigation Path
A-378
1.
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Statistics Group tab. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
-
-
This parameter specifies the object to be monitored.
Sampling Period
5 to 150
5
This parameter specifies the duration of the monitoring period.
Display Accumulated Value
Selected
Deselected
l This parameter specifies the method of displaying the performance events.
Deselected
l If this parameter is not selected, the displayed value is an increment compared to the value that is collected in last sampling period and stored in the register. l If this parameter is selected, the displayed value is an absolute value that is currently stored in the register. Graphics
Display Mode
List
List
l This parameter specifies the method of displaying the performance events. l If this parameter is set to Graphics, the number of performance events to be monitored at each time cannot be more than 10, and the unit should be the same.
Color
Legend
-
Description
l This parameter indicates the description of different colors. l This parameter is valid only when Display Mode is set to Graphics.
Event
-
-
l This parameter indicates the queried performance events. l This parameter is valid only when Display Mode is set to List.
A.8.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history groups.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the History Group tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-379
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
-
-
The parameter indicates the object to be monitored.
Ended from/to
-
-
This parameter specifies the start time and end time of the monitoring period.
History Table Type
30-Second
30-Second
This parameter specifies the monitoring period.
List
l This parameter specifies the method of displaying the performance events.
30-Minute Custom Period 1 Custom Period 2
Display Mode
Graphics List
l If this parameter is set to Graphics, the number of performance events to be monitored at each time cannot be more than 10, and the unit should be the same. Color
Legend
-
Description
l This parameter indicates the description of different colors. l This parameter is valid only when Display Mode is set to Graphics.
Event
-
-
l This parameter indicates the queried performance events. l This parameter is valid only when Display Mode is set to List.
Statistical Item
-
-
This parameter indicates the performance items to be monitored.
Statistical Value
-
-
This parameter indicates the statistical value of the monitored performance items.
Time Flag
-
-
This parameter indicates the time point of each performance event.
A.8.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history control groups.
Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON History Control Group. A-380
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
30-Second
Enabled
Disabled
This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the 30-Second monitoring function.
Enabled
This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the 30-Minute monitoring function.
Disabled
This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable Custom Period 1.
Disabled
This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable Custom Period 2.
300 to 43200 (Custom Period 1)
900(Custom Period 1)
300 to 86400 (Custom Period 2)
86400(Custom Period 2)
l This parameter indicates or specifies the monitoring period in Custom Period 1 and Custom Period 2.
History Register Count
1 to 50
16
RMON Monitor Start Time
-
Disabled 30-Minute
Enabled Disabled
Custom Period 1
Enabled Disabled
Custom Period 2
Enabled Disabled
Period Length(s)
6(Custom Period 2) -
l The value must be an integer multiple of 30. This parameter indicates or specifies the quantity of the history registers. This parameter specifies the RMON start time.
A.8.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON setting.
Navigation Path l
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
l
Click the RMON Setting tab.
Object Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
-
-
This parameter indicates the object to be collected.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-381
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
30-Second
Enabled
-
This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the 30-Second monitoring function.
Disabled
NOTE In the case of Object, 30-Second cannot be set.
30-Minute
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the 30-Minute monitoring function. l In RMON History Control Group of the NE, if 30-Minute is set to Disabled, Not Supported is displayed for this parameter.
Custom Period 1
Enabled
-
Disabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the monitoring function based on Custom Period 1. l In RMON History Control Group of the NE, if Custom Period 1 is set to Disabled, Not Supported is displayed for this parameter.
Custom Period 2
Enabled
-
Disabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the monitoring function based on Custom Period 2. l In RMON History Control Group of the NE, if Custom Period 2 is set to Disabled, Not Supported is displayed for this parameter.
Event Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Event
-
-
This parameter indicates the performance event to be monitored.
30-Second
Enabled
Disabled
This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the monitoring function based on 30-Second.
-
This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the 30-Minute monitoring function.
Disabled
This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the monitoring function based on Custom Period 1Custom Period 1 Monitor.
Disabled 30-Minute
Enabled Disabled
Custom Period 1
Enabled Disabled
A-382
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Custom Period 2
Enabled
Disabled
This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the monitoring function based on Custom Period 2Custom Period 2 Monitor.
Report All
l This parameter indicates or specifies the threshold detection method.
Disabled
Threshold Detect
Report All Do Not Detect
l If the number of detected events reaches the preset threshold, the events are reported to the NMS. Otherwise, the events are not reported to the NMS.
Report Only the Upper Threshold Report Only the Lower Threshold
l If an event does not support this parameter, Not Supported is displayed.
Upper Threshold
-
-
This parameter indicates or specifies the upper threshold. If the number of performance events exceeds the preset upper threshold, the corresponding performance events are reported.
Lower Threshold
-
-
This parameter indicates or specifies the lower threshold. If the number of performance events is less than the preset lower threshold, the corresponding performance events are reported.
Threshold Unit
-
-
This parameter indicates the unit of each threshold of the performance events.
A.9 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS/PWE3 services. NOTE
For parameters for PW-carried E-Line services, see A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the Packet Plane.
A.9.1 MPLS Tunnel Parameters This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS tunnels. A.9.2 CES Parameters This topic describes parameters that are related to CES services. A.9.3 ATM Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM services.
A.9.1 MPLS Tunnel Parameters This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS tunnels. A.9.1.1 Parameter Description: Basic Configurations of MPLS Tunnels Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-383
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
This topic describes parameters that are related to the basic configurations of MPLS tunnels. A.9.1.2 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Static Tunnel This topic describes parameters that are related to static tunnels. A.9.1.3 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Unidirectional Tunnels This topic describes parameters that are used for creating unidirectional tunnels. A.9.1.4 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Bidirectional Tunnels This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating bidirectional tunnels. A.9.1.5 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_OAM Parameters This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS OAM. A.9.1.6 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_FDI This topic describes FDI parameters. A.9.1.7 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Ping This topic describes the parameters that are related to the LSP Ping test. A.9.1.8 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Traceroute This topic describes the parameters that are related to the LSP Traceroute test. A.9.1.9 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Management This topic describes parameters that are related to PW management. A.9.1.10 Parameter Description: PW Management_MS-PW Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to MS-PW creation. A.9.1.11 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW OAM This topic describes parameters that are related to PW OAM. A.9.1.12 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Ping This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PW Ping test. A.9.1.13 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Traceroute This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PW Traceroute test. A.9.1.14 Parameter Description: MPLS APS Protection Management This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS APS protection management. A.9.1.15 Parameter Description: Tunnel Protection Group_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating a tunnel protection group. A.9.1.16 Parameter Description: PW APS Protection Group_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a PW APS protection group. A.9.1.17 Parameter Description: Slave Protection Pair of a PW APS Protection Group_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a slave protection pair of a PW APS protection group.
A.9.1.1 Parameter Description: Basic Configurations of MPLS Tunnels This topic describes parameters that are related to the basic configurations of MPLS tunnels.
Navigation Path In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Basic Configuration from the Function Tree. A-384
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LSR ID
-
0.0.0.0
l Specifies or displays the LSR ID of an NE. On a PSN, each NE is assigned a unique LSR ID. l This parameter must be set in IPv4 address format.
0-1015808
Start of Global Label Space
0
l Specifies the start value of a global label space. The OptiX RTN 950 supports a step of 2048. l The start value of a global label space is the smallest unicast tunnel label. When Start of Global Label Space is 0, the smallest unicast tunnel label is 16, with values 0 to 15 reserved. l On an MPLS-enabled network, global label spaces of NEs are recommended to overlap each other if possible.
Global Label Space Size
-
-
Displays the size of a global label space.
Start of Multicast Label Space
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
A.9.1.2 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Static Tunnel This topic describes parameters that are related to static tunnels.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Static Tunnel tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-385
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
3.
Click Query.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ID
-
-
Displays the tunnel ID.
Name
-
-
Specifies or displays the customized tunnel name.
Enable State
Enabled
Enabled
l Specifies or displays whether a tunnel is enabled.
Disabled
NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports only the value Enabled.
Node Type
-
-
l Displays the node type. l For bidirectional tunnels, this parameter displays the node types of forward tunnels.
Direction
-
-
Displays the direction of a tunnel.
CIR(kbit/s)
No Limit
-
l Specifies or displays the committed information rate (CIR) of a tunnel.
1024-1024000
l Generally, it is recommended that you set this parameter to No Limit. If you need to enable the CES CAC function or limit the PW bandwidth, set this parameter to be the same as the planned tunnel bandwidth. PIR(kbit/s)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
CBS(byte)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
PBS(byte)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Bandwidth Remaining (kbit/s)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
A-386
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
In Port
-
-
Displays the ingress port of a forward tunnel, which is also the egress port of the mapping reverse tunnel.
Forward In Label
-
-
Displays the MPLS label that a forward tunnel carries when entering a node.
Reverse Out Label
-
-
Specifies the MPLS label that a reverse tunnel carries when entering a tunnel.
Out Port
-
-
Displays the egress port of a forward tunnel, which is also the ingress port of the mapping reverse tunnel.
Forward Out Label
-
-
Displays the MPLS label that a forward tunnel carries when leaving a node.
Reverse In Label
-
-
Displays the MPLS label that a reverse tunnel carries when leaving a node.
Forward Next Hop Address
-
-
Displays the IP address of the next-hop port of a forward tunnel.
Reverse Next Hop Address
-
-
Displays the IP address of the next-hop port of a reverse tunnel.
Source Node
-
-
Displays the LSR ID of the ingress node.
Sink Node
-
-
Displays the LSR ID of the egress node.
Tunnel Type
-
-
Displays the tunnel type.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-387
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
EXP
0-7
-
l Specifies or displays the value of the EXP field in the packets transmitted through MPLS tunnels.
None
l For unidirectional tunnels, this parameter is available only if Node Type is Ingress. l For bidirectional tunnels, this parameter cannot be set if Node Type is Transit. l If this parameter is set to a value from 0 to 7, the EXP field takes its fixed value. l If this parameter takes its default value None, the EXP field varies based on the DiffServ mappings. LSP Mode
Pipe
-
l Displays or specifies the LSP mode. l Pipe: When stripping MPLS tunnel labels from packets, an egress node does not update the scheduling priority for the packets. l For bidirectional tunnels, this parameter is available only if Node Type is Egress. l For bidirectional tunnels, this parameter cannot be set if Node Type is Transit. NOTE On the OptiX RTN 950, this parameter can be set to Pipe only.
MTU(byte)
A-388
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group
-
-
Displays the MPLS APS protection group to which a tunnel belongs.
VLAN ID
-
-
l Specifies or displays the VLAN ID that Ethernet packets carry when transmitted over MPLS tunnels. l If packets need to traverse a Layer 2 network, set the VLAN ID for the tunnel carried by the NNI port according to the VLAN planning requirements on the Layer 2 network. l Set this parameter to the same value for both ends of a tunnel.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-389
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS
CS7
-
l This parameter specifies the PHB service class of an LLSP, if the type of an MPLS tunnel is L-LSP.
CS6 EF AF4 AF3
l CS6-CS7: indicates the highest service grade, which is mainly involved in signaling transmission.
AF2 AF1 BE
l EF: indicates fast forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic whose delay is small and packet loss ratio is low, for example, voice and video services. l AF1-AF4: indicates assured forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic that requires rate guarantee but does not require delay or jitter limit. l BE: indicates that the traffic is forwarded in best-effort manner without special processing. Deployment
-
-
Displays the deployment status of the tunnel.
A.9.1.3 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Unidirectional Tunnels This topic describes parameters that are used for creating unidirectional tunnels.
Navigation Path
A-390
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Static Tunnel tab. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3.
A Parameters Description
Click New and choose Unidirectional Tunnel from the drop-down list. The New Unicast Unidirectional Tunnel dialog box is displayed.
4.
Select New Reverse Tunnel.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tunnel ID
1-65535
-
l Specifies the tunnel ID. l The total number of tunnels and PWs must be equal to or less than 1024. The number of tunnels that carry PWs are not included in the total.
Tunnel Name
-
-
Specifies the tunnel name.
Node Type
Ingress
Ingress
Specifies the node type of a forward tunnel.
Egress Transit Direction
-
-
Indicates the direction of a tunnel.
CIR(kbit/s)
No Limit
No Limit
l Specifies the committed information rate (CIR) of a tunnel.
1024-1024000
l Generally, it is recommended that you set this parameter to No Limit. If you need to enable the CES CAC function or limit the PW bandwidth, set this parameter to be the same as the planned tunnel bandwidth. CBS(kbit/s)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
PIR(Byte)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
PBS(Byte)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
In Board/Logic Interface Type
-
-
Specifies the board where the ingress port of a forward tunnel is located.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-391
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
In Port
-
-
Specifies the ingress port of a forward tunnel, which is also the egress port of the mapping reverse tunnel.
In Labela
16-1048575
-
l Specifies the MPLS label that a tunnel carries when entering a node. l This parameter can be set for only egress and transit nodes.
Out Board/Logic Interface Type
-
-
Specifies the board where the egress port of a forward tunnel is located.
Out Port
-
-
Specifies the egress port of a forward tunnel, which is also the ingress port of the mapping reverse tunnel.
Out Labela
16-1048575
-
l Specifies the MPLS label that a tunnel carries when leaving a node. l This parameter can be set for only ingress and transit nodes.
Next Hop Address
-
-
l Specifies the port IP address of the next-hop node for a tunnel. l This parameter can be set for only ingress and transit nodes.
Source Node
-
-
l Specifies the LSR ID of the ingress node. l This parameter can be set for only egress nodes and transit nodes.
Sink Node
-
-
l Specifies the LSR ID of the egress node. l This parameter can be set for only ingress and transit nodes.
A-392
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tunnel Type
E-LSP
E-LSP
l Specifies the tunnel type.
L-LSP
l The value E-LSP indicates that the EXP field is used to identify packet scheduling priorities of PWs. An E-LSP tunnel can contain PWs of eight packet scheduling priorities. l The value L-LSP indicates that the MPLS label value is used to identify packet scheduling priorities of PWs. An L-LSP tunnel can contain PWs of the same packet scheduling priority. EXP
0-7
None
None
l Specifies the value of the EXP field in the packets transmitted through MPLS tunnels. l This parameter is available only if Node Type is Ingress. l If this parameter is set to a value from 0 to 7, the EXP field takes its fixed value. l If this parameter takes its default value None, the EXP field varies based on the DiffServ mappings.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-393
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LSP Mode
Pipe
Pipe
l Pipe: When stripping MPLS tunnel labels from packets, an egress node does not update the scheduling priority for the packets. l This parameter is available only if Node Type is Egress. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports only the value Pipe.
MTU
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
CoS
CS7
BE
l This parameter specifies the PHB service class of an LLSP, if the type of an MPLS tunnel is L-LSP.
CS6 EF AF4 AF3
l CS6-CS7: indicates the highest service grade, which is mainly involved in signaling transmission.
AF2 AF1 BE
l EF: indicates fast forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic whose delay is small and packet loss ratio is low, for example, voice and video services. l AF1-AF4: indicates assured forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic that requires rate guarantee but does not require delay or jitter limit. l BE: indicates that the traffic is forwarded in best-effort manner without special processing.
A-394
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
NOTE
At an MPLS node, in labels must be different from each other, out labels must also be different from each other, but out labels can be the same as in labels.
A.9.1.4 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Bidirectional Tunnels This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating bidirectional tunnels.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Static Tunnel tab.
3.
Click New and choose Bidirectional Tunnel from the drop-down list.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tunnel ID
1 to 65535
-
l Specifies the tunnel ID. l The total number of tunnels and PWs must be equal to or less than 1024. The number of tunnels that carry PWs is not included in the total.
Tunnel Name
-
-
Specifies the tunnel name.
Node Type
Ingress
Ingress
Specifies the node type of a forward tunnel.
-
Indicates the direction of a tunnel.
Egress Transit Direction
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-395
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CIR(kbit/s)
No Limit
No Limit
l Specifies the committed information rate (CIR) of a tunnel.
1024-1024000
l Generally, it is recommended that you set this parameter to No Limit. If you need to enable the CES CAC function or limit the PW bandwidth, set this parameter to be the same as the planned tunnel bandwidth. CBS(kbit/s)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
PIR(Byte)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
PBS(Byte)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
In Board/Logic Interface Type
-
-
Specifies the board where the ingress port of a forward tunnel is located.
In Port
-
-
Specifies the ingress port of a forward tunnel, which is also the egress port of the mapping reverse tunnel.
Forward In Labela
16 to 1048575
-
l Specifies the MPLS label that data carries when entering a forward tunnel. l This parameter can be set for only egress and transit nodes.
Reverse Out Labela
16 to 1048575
-
l Specifies the MPLS label that data carries when leaving a reverse tunnel. l This parameter can be set for only ingress and transit nodes.
Out Board/Logic Interface Type
A-396
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Specifies the board where the egress port of a forward tunnel is located.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Out Port
-
-
Specifies the egress port of a forward tunnel, which is also the ingress port of the mapping reverse tunnel.
Forward Out Labela
16 to 1048575
-
l Specifies the MPLS label that data carries when leaving a forward tunnel. l This parameter can be set for only ingress and transit nodes.
Reverse In Labela
16 to 1048575
-
l Specifies the MPLS label that data carries when entering a reverse tunnel. l This parameter can be set for only egress and transit nodes.
Forward Next Hop Address
-
-
l Indicates or specifies the IP address of the next hop in a forward tunnel. l This parameter can be set for only ingress and transit nodes.
Reverse Next Hop Address
-
-
l Indicates or specifies the IP address of the next hop in a reverse tunnel. l This parameter can be set for only egress and transit nodes.
Source Node
-
-
l Specifies the LSR ID of the ingress node. l This parameter can be set for only egress nodes and transit nodes.
Sink Node
-
-
l Specifies the LSR ID of the egress node. l This parameter can be set for only ingress and transmit nodes.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-397
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tunnel Type
E-LSP
E-LSP
l Specifies the tunnel type.
L-LSP
l The value E-LSP indicates that the EXP field is used to identify packet scheduling priorities of PWs. An E-LSP tunnel can contain PWs of eight packet scheduling priorities. l The value L-LSP indicates that the MPLS label value is used to identify packet scheduling priorities of PWs. An L-LSP tunnel can contain PWs of the same packet scheduling priority. EXP
0 to 7
None
None
l Specifies the value of the EXP field in the packets transmitted through MPLS tunnels. l This parameter cannot be set if Node Type is Transit. l If this parameter is set to a value from 0 to 7, the EXP field assumes the fixed value. l If this parameter takes the default value None, the EXP field is set based on the DiffServ mappings.
A-398
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LSP Mode
Pipe
Pipe
l Pipe: When stripping MPLS tunnel labels from packets, an egress node does not update the scheduling priority for the packets. l This parameter cannot be set if Node Type is Transit. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports only the value Pipe.
MTU
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
CoS
CS7
BE
l This parameter specifies the PHB service class of an LLSP, if the type of an MPLS tunnel is L-LSP.
CS6 EF AF4 AF3
l CS6-CS7: indicates the highest service grade, which is mainly involved in signaling transmission.
AF2 AF1 BE
l EF: indicates fast forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic whose delay is small and packet loss ratio is low, for example, voice and video services. l AF1-AF4: indicates assured forwarding. This service class is applicable to the traffic that requires rate guarantee but does not require delay or jitter limit. l BE: indicates that the traffic is forwarded in best-effort manner without special processing.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-399
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
NOTE
At an MPLS node, in labels must be different from each other, out labels must also be different from each other, but out labels can be the same as in labels.
A.9.1.5 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_OAM Parameters This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS OAM.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the OAM Parameter tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tunnel ID
-
-
Displays the tunnel ID.
Tunnel Name
-
-
Displays the tunnel name.
Node Type
-
-
l Displays the node type. l For bidirectional tunnels, this parameter displays the node types of forward tunnels.
Tunnel Direction
A-400
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Displays the direction of a tunnel.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
OAM Status
Enabled
Disabled
l Specifies or displays whether the local node can perform and respond to OAM operations.
Disabled
l If OAM Status is Enabled, the local NE can perform and respond to OAM operations. l If OAM Status is Disabled, the local NE cannot perform and respond to OAM operations. l If MPLS APS protection needs to be configured or a CC test needs to be performed for the tunnel, OAM Status needs to be set to Enabled.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-401
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Detection Mode
Auto-Sensing
Auto-Sensing
l Specifies or displays the MPLS OAM detection mode.
Manual
l Manual: During a CC test, MPLS OAM packets are sent at the interval specified by the user. l Auto-Sensing: During a CC test, MPLS OAM packets are sent at the interval for receiving MPLS OAM packets. l For a unidirectional tunnel, this parameter can be set for its egress node only. l For a bidirectional tunnel, if Detection Mode is set to Manual, you need to set the MPLS OAM detection packets to be received and transmitted. l Generally, the value Auto-Sensing is recommended.
A-402
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Detection Packet Type
CV
CV
l CV: The detection packets are sent at a fixed interval.
FFD
l FFD: The detection packets are sent at the interval specified by the user. l For the egress node of a unidirectional tunnel, if Detection Mode is set to Manual, this parameter specifies the type of MPLS OAM detection packets to be received. l For a bidirectional tunnel, if Detection Mode is set to AutoSensing, this parameter specifies the type of MPLS OAM detection packets to be transmitted. l For a bidirectional tunnel, if Detection Mode is set to Manual, this parameter specifies the types of MPLS OAM detection packets to be received and transmitted. l The value FFD is assumed for MPLS APS and the value CV is assumed for continuous connectivity check on MPLS tunnels.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-403
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Detection Packet Period (ms)
3.3
50
l Displays or specifies the OAM detection period.
10 20
l This parameter is available only when Detection Packet Type is FFD. It takes its fixed value of 1000 ms when Detection Packet Type is CV.
50 100 200 500
l Set this parameter to 3.3 for MPLS APS usually. If the packet transmission delay time of an MPLS tunnel exceeds 3.3 ms, the transmission interval of FFD packets needs to be a value greater than the delay time. Reverse Tunnel
-
-
l Specifies the mapping reverse tunnel of a forward tunnel. l For a bidirectional tunnel, this parameter cannot be set.
CV/FFD Status
-
-
Displays whether CV/ FFD is enabled.
LSP Status
-
-
Displays whether an LSP is available.
LSP Defect Type
-
-
Displays the LSP defect type.
Disable LSP Duration (ms)
-
-
Displays the duration when an LSP is unavailable.
LSP Defect Location
-
-
Displays the LSR ID of a node where LSP defects are detected.
A-404
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
SD Threshold
0-100
0
l Specifies or displays the SD threshold. When the OAM packet loss ratio is higher than the parameter value, the corresponding alarm is reported. l For a unidirectional tunnel, this parameter can be set for its egress node only. l When this parameter is set to 0, SD threshold detection is not supported.
0-100
SF Threshold
0
l Specifies or displays the SF threshold. When the OAM packet loss ratio is higher than the parameter value, the corresponding alarm is reported. l For a unidirectional tunnel, this parameter can be set for its egress node only. l When this parameter is set to 0, SF threshold detection is not supported. l The SD threshold is not higher than the SF threshold.
Source Node
-
-
Displays the source node of a tunnel.
Sink Node
-
-
Displays the sink node of a tunnel.
A.9.1.6 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_FDI This topic describes FDI parameters.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-405
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the FDI tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable FDI
Selected
Selected
l Specifies or displays whether Enable FDI is selected.
Not selected
l If the FDI function is enabled for a transit node, the transit node inserts an FDI packet to all LSPs that travel through the transit node when a fault occurs on the link between the ingress and transit nodes. On reception of the FDI packet, the egress node reports an alarm. In this case, if MPLS APS is configured correctly, protection switching is triggered before the egress node detects an LSP defect within a detection period. l Generally, the default parameter value is recommended.
A.9.1.7 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Ping This topic describes the parameters that are related to the LSP Ping test.
Navigation Path
A-406
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the OAM Parameters tab. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
3.
A Parameters Description
Select the required tunnel, click OAM Operation in the lower right corner, and choose Ping Test from the drop-down list.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Packet Count
1 to 4294967295
3
Specifies the number of test request packets.
EXP Value
0 to 7
7
l Specifies the EXP value of the MPLS label in test request packets. The value 7 indicates the highest priority. l The default value is recommended.
TTL
1 to 255
255
l Specifies the time-tolive (TTL) value of the MPLS label in test request packets. l The default value is recommended.
Transmit Interval (10ms)
1 to 1000
100
l Specifies the interval for transmitting test request packets. l The default value is recommended.
Packet Length
64 to 1400
64
l Specifies the length of test request packets. l The default value is recommended.
Wait-to-Response Timeout Time(10ms)
1 to 6000
300
l Specifies the wait-toresponse timeout value. l The default value is recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-407
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Response Mode
IPv4 UDP Response
IPv4 UDP Response
l Specifies the response mode of test request packets.
No Response Application Control Channel
l The value No Response indicates that the test performance event is reported without sending response packets. l The value Application Control Channel indicates that response is performed through the reverse channel. l The value IPv4 UDP Response indicates that the IPv4 UDP packets encapsulating MPLS echo reply messages are sent as response packets. l The value IPv4 UDP Response is reserved for scenarios where all nodes on an LSP communicate with each other over a DCN running IP protocols. l Set this parameter based on the situation of the egress node. If the egress node supports reverse channel response, set this parameter to Application Control Channel. If the egress node does not support reverse channel response but supports DCN channel response by means of IP protocols, set this parameter to IPv4 UDP Response.
A-408
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Parameter
Value Range
A Parameters Description
Default Value
Description NOTE For a unidirectional tunnel, Response Mode cannot be set to Application Control Channel.
A.9.1.8 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Traceroute This topic describes the parameters that are related to the LSP Traceroute test.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the OAM Parameters tab.
3.
Select the required tunnel, click OAM Operation in the lower right corner, and choose Traceroute Test from the drop-down list.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
EXP Value
0 to 7
7
l Specifies the EXP value of the MPLS label in test request packets. The value 7 indicates the highest priority. l The default value is recommended.
TTL
1 to 255
255
l Specifies the time-tolive (TTL) value of the MPLS label in test request packets. l The default value is recommended.
Packet Length
84 to 1400
84
l Specifies the length of test request packets. l The default value is recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-409
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Wait-to-Response Timeout Time(10ms)
1 to 6000
300
l Specifies the wait-toresponse timeout value. l The default value is recommended.
A-410
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Response Mode
IPv4 UDP Response
IPv4 UDP Response
l Specifies the response mode of test request packets.
No Response Application Control Channel
l The value No Response indicates that the test performance event is reported without sending response packets. l The value Application Control Channel indicates that response is performed through the reverse channel. l The value IPv4 UDP Response indicates that the IPv4 UDP packets encapsulating MPLS echo reply messages are sent as response packets. l The value IPv4 UDP Response is reserved for scenarios where all nodes on an LSP communicate with each other over a DCN running IP protocols. l Set this parameter based on the situation of the egress node. If the egress node supports reverse channel response, set this parameter to Application Control Channel. If the egress node does not support reverse channel response but supports DCN channel response by means of IP protocols, set this parameter to IPv4 UDP Response.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-411
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description NOTE For a unidirectional tunnel, Response Mode cannot be set to Application Control Channel.
A.9.1.9 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Management This topic describes parameters that are related to PW management.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the PW Management tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the PW that carries a service.
Enable State
-
-
Displays whether a PW is enabled.
PW Signaling Type
-
-
Displays the PW signaling type.
PW Type
-
NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 uses only static PWs.
-
l Displays the PW type. Different PW types perform different service processing modes. l When a PW transmits E-Line services, set PW Type to Ethernet or Ethernet Tagged Mode. l If a PW transmits CES services, set PW Type to CESoPSN or SATop. l If a PW transmits ATM services, set PW Type to ATM n-to-one VCC Cell transport, ATM one-to-one VCC Cell Mode, ATM n-to-one VPC Cell transport, or ATM one-to-one VPC Cell Mode.
Direction
-
-
Displays the direction of a PW.
PW Ingress Label/Source Port
-
-
Displays the ingress label at the source port of a PW.
A-412
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW Encapsulation Type
-
-
Displays the encapsulation type of the packets on a PW.
PW Egress Label/Sink Port
-
-
Displays the egress label at the sink port of a PW.
Opposite LSR ID
-
-
Displays the LSR ID of the node at the other end of a PW.
Local Working Status
-
-
Displays the working status of the PW at the local end.
Remote Working Status
-
-
Displays the working status of the PW at the remote end.
Compositive Working Status
-
-
Displays the working status of the entire PW.
Tunnel Type
-
-
Displays the type of the tunnel that carries a PW.
NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports only MPLS encapsulation.
NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports only MPLS tunnels.
Tunnel
-
-
Displays the ID of the tunnel that carries a PW.
Deployment Status
-
-
Displays the deployment status of a PW.
Tunnel Automatic Selection Policy
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
QoS Parameters Table A-70 CES services Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the PW that carries the service.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-413
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Direction
-
-
Displays the direction of the PW that carries the service.
CIR(kbit/s)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
EXP
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the PW that carries the service.
Direction
-
-
Displays the direction of the PW that carries the service.
Bandwidth Limit
-
-
Displays whether the bandwidth is limited.
CIR(kbit/s)
-
-
Displays the committed information rate (CIR) of a PW.
CBS(byte)
-
-
Displays the committed burst size (CBS) of a PW.
PIR(kbit/s)
-
-
Displays the peak information rate (PIR) of a PW
PBS(byte)
-
-
Displays the peak burst size (PBS) of a PW.
EXP
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
LSP Mode
-
-
Displays the LSP mode.
Table A-71 E-Line services
NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports only Pipe.
Policy
A-414
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Table A-72 ATM services Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the PW that carries the service.
Direction
-
-
Displays the direction of the PW that carries the service.
Bandwidth Limit
-
-
Displays whether the bandwidth is limited.
CIR(kbit/s)
-
-
Displays the committed information rate (CIR) of a PW.
CBS(byte)
-
-
Displays the committed burst size (CBS) of a PW.
PIR(kbit/s)
-
-
Displays the peak information rate (PIR) of a PW
PBS(byte)
-
-
Displays the peak burst size (PBS) of a PW.
EXP
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Policy
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Parameters for Advanced Attributes Table A-73 CES services Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
-
-
Displays the PW ID.
RTP Head
-
-
Displays whether the CES service packets carry an RTP header.
Packet Loading Time (us)
-
-
Displays the packet loading time.
Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us)
-
-
Displays the jitter buffer time for the received CES packets.
Ingress Clock Mode
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-415
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Egress Clock Mode
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Control Channel Type
-
-
Displays the control channel type.
VCCV Verification Mode
-
-
Displays the VCCV mode.
Enable CES Service Alarm Transparent Transmission
-
-
Displays whether CES service alarms are transparently transmitted.
Threshold of Entering R bit Inserting Status
-
-
Displays the threshold of the packet loss ratio of CES services. The corresponding alarm will be reported if the actual packet loss ratio crosses this threshold.
Threshold of Exiting R bit Inserting Status
-
-
Displays the threshold of received CES service packets. The corresponding alarm will be cleared after the actual number of received CES service packets crosses this threshold.
Sequence Number Mode
-
-
Displays the sequence number mode.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
-
-
Displays the PW ID.
Control Word
-
-
Displays whether the control word is used to transfer packet information. For ETH PWE3 services, this parameter is always not used.
Control Channel Type
-
-
Displays the control channel type.
VCCV Verification Mode
-
-
Displays the VCCV mode.
Table A-74 E-Line services
A-416
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Request VLAN
-
-
When PW Type is Ethernet Tag, this parameter displays the VLAN ID to be added to packets that are sent from the opposite end and do not carry any VLAN IDs.
TPID
-
-
When PW Type is Ethernet Tag, this parameter displays the TPID.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
-
-
Displays the PW ID.
Control Word
-
-
Displays whether the control word is used to transfer packet information.
Control Channel Type
-
-
Displays the control channel type.
VCCV Verification Mode
-
-
Displays the VCCV mode.
Max Concatenated Cell Count
-
-
Displays the maximum number of concatenated cells.
Packet Loading Time (us)
-
-
Displays the packet loading time.
Table A-75 ATM services
A.9.1.10 Parameter Description: PW Management_MS-PW Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to MS-PW creation.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the MS PW tab.
3.
Click New.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-417
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ID
-
-
Specifies the ID of MS-PW.
Name
-
-
Specifies the name of MS-PW.
MTU(bytes)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Service Type
Ethernet Service
Ethernet Service
l Specifies the type of services carried by the MS-PW.
CES Service
l Set this parameter according to the planning information.
ATM Service Connection Type
Port Transparent
Port Transparent
PVP
l This parameter is available only when Service Type is ATM Service. l PVP: Only the VPIs of the source and sink are exchanged.
PVC
l PVP: The VPIs and VCIs of the source and sink are exchanged. l Port Transparent: ATM transparent transmission refers to the transparent transmission of ATM cells that are encapsulated into PWs as payloads.
Parameters for the Basic Attributes of PWs Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
-
-
Specifies the ID of the PW that carries services.
PW Signaling Type
Static
Static
Specifies the signaling type of the PW. Labels for static PWs need to be manually assigned.
A-418
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW Type
-
-
l Specifies the type of the PW. l Set this parameter to Ethernet if Service Type is ETH Service and no VLAN IDs need to be added. If it is required to add VLAN IDs, set this parameter to Ethernet Tag Mode and then set Request VLAN in the Advanced Attribute tab. l If Service Type is CES Service, the value CESoPSN indicates structureaware emulation, which allows timeslot compression; the value SAToP indicates structure-agnostic emulation, which does not allow timeslot compression. l If Service Type is ATM Service, set this parameter according to the value of Connection Type.
PW Direction
-
-
Displays the direction of the PW.
PW Encapsulation Type
-
-
Displays the encapsulation type of the PW.
PW Ingress Label/ Source Port
16 to 1048575
-
Specifies the PW Ingress label.
PW Egress Label/Sink Port
16 to 1048575
-
Specifies the PW Egress label.
Tunnel Selection Mode
Manually
Manually
Specifies the method to select tunnels. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports only the value Manually.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-419
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tunnel Type
MPLS
MPLS
Specifies the type of the tunnel that carries the PW.
Tunnel
-
-
A created tunnel needs to be selected. If no tunnel is available, no PW can be created.
Peer LSR ID
-
-
Specifies the LSR ID of the PW at the remote end. If an existing tunnel is selected, the LSR ID will be automatically assigned.
Egress Tunnel
-
-
For a bidirectional tunnel, the system will configure the reverse tunnel automatically.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
EXP
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit
-
-
Specifies whether the bandwidth limit function is enabled.
QoS Parameters CES Services
Ethernet services
l This function limits the bandwidth of one or more PWs in an MPLS tunnel. l An ETH PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ETH PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel.
A-420
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Policy
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
CIR(Kbit/s)
-
-
Specifies the committed information rate (CIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as PIR.
CBS(byte)
-
-
Specifies the committed burst size (CBS) of a PW.
PIR(Kbit/s)
-
-
Specifies the peak information rate (PIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as CIR.
PBS(byte)
-
-
Specifies the peak burst size (PBS) of a PW.
EXP
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
LSP Mode
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe: When stripping MPLS tunnel labels from packets, an egress node does not update the scheduling priority for the packets.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-421
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
ATM services Table A-76 ATM services Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit
-
-
Specifies whether the bandwidth limit is enabled. l This function can be used to limit the bandwidth of one or more PWs, or the bandwidth of one or more ATM PWE3 services, in an MPLS tunnel. (One ATM PWE3 service corresponds to one PW.) l An ATM PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ATM PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel.
Policy
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
CIR (Kbit/s)
-
-
Specifies the committed information rate (CIR) of the PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as PIR.
CBS (kbyte)
-
-
Specifies the excess burst size of the PW.
PIR (kbit/s)
-
-
Specifies the peak information rate (PIR) of the PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as CIR.
PBS (kbyte)
A-422
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Specifies the maximum excess burst size of the PW.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
EXP
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Parameters for the Advanced Attributes of PWs CES Services Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
RTP Header
Disable
Disable
l Specifies the RTP header.
Enable
l The RTP header carries time stamps. l The default value is recommended. Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us)
375 to 16000
8000
l Specifies the jitter buffer time for the received CES packets. l A greater value of this parameter means fewer impacts of transmission jitters on CES services, greater delays of CES services, and more resources occupied by CES services. l The default value is recommended. NOTE Set Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us) to a value greater than the value of Packet Loading Time (us) at the opposite end and the local end.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-423
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Packet Loading Time (us)
125 to 5000
1000
l Specifies the length of fragments in the TDM data stream. Each fragment is encapsulated into one PW packet. l A greater value of this parameter means higher encapsulation efficiency but greater delays of CES services. l The default value is recommended.
Ingress Clock mode
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Egress Clock mode
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Control Channel Type
None
CW
l Specifies the mode of PW connectivity check.
CW Alert Label
l The value None indicates that the control word is not supported. That is, the PW connectivity check is not supported. l Alert Label indicates VCCV packets in Alert Label encapsulation mode. l The value CW indicates that the control word is supported.
VCCV Verification Mode
None
Ping
Ping
l Specifies the VCCV verification mode. The VCCV verification is used for PW connectivity check. l If the VCCV-Ping test is required, do not set this parameter to None.
A-424
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
64K Timeslot Number
1 to 31
1
l Specifies the number of 64 kbit/s timeslots that transmit service traffic. If Frame Mode of the opposite end is 30, the source 64 kbit/s timeslots at the local end must include the 16th timeslot. l On the two ends of a radio link, the timeslot lists can be different but the numbers of timeslots must be the same. l This parameter is unavailable if PW Type is SAToP.
Sequence Number Mode
Huawei Mode
Huawei Mode
Specifies the sequence number mode.
Standard Mode
Ethernet services Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Word
No Use
No Use
For ETH PWE3 services, the parameter value is always No Use.
Control Channel Type
None
Alert Label
l Specifies the mode of PW connectivity check.
Alert Label
l None indicates that VCCV is not used. l Alert Label indicates VCCV packets in Alert Label encapsulation mode.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-425
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCCV Verification Mode
Ping
Ping
l Specifies the VCCV verification mode. The VCCV verification is used for PW connectivity check.
None
l If the VCCV-Ping test is required, do not set this parameter to None. Request VLAN
-
-
l Set this parameter when PW Type is Ethernet Tagged Mode. l If the received packets do not carry any VLAN IDs, the PW will add VLAN IDs to the packets as required by the setting of this parameter.
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support request VLAN TPID of the PW level.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Word
Must Use
Must Use
l Specifies whether to use the control word. In the MPLS packet switching network, the control word is used to transmit packet information.
TPID
ATM services
No Use
l Set Control Word to Must Use if PW Type is ATM 1:1.
A-426
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Channel Type
CW
CW
l Specifies the mode of PW connectivity check.
None Alert Label
l The value None indicates that the control word is not supported. That is, the PW connectivity check is not supported. l The value CW indicates that the control word is supported. l The value Alert Label indicates VCCV packets in Alert Label encapsulation mode.
VCCV Verification Mode
Ping
Ping
None
l Specifies the VCCV verification mode. The VCCV verification is used for PW connectivity check. l If the VCCV-Ping test is required, do not set this parameter to None.
Max. Concatenated Cell Count
1 to 31
10
l Specifies the maximum number of concatenated cells. l If the value 1 is assumed, only one ATM cell is encapsulated in one packet. If the value from 2 to 31 is assumed, a maximum of 2 to 31 ATM cells are encapsulated into one packet.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-427
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Packet Loading Time (us)
100 to 50000
1000
l Specifies the packet loading time. Once the packet loading time expires, the packet is sent out even if the concatenated cells are less than the maximum. l If Max. Concatenated Cell Count assumes the value 1, this parameter is ineffective. That is, the packet will be sent out once the cell is loaded.
A.9.1.11 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW OAM This topic describes parameters that are related to PW OAM.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the PW OAM Parameter tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the PW that carries the service.
PW Type
-
-
Displays the type of the PW that carries the service.
A-428
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
OAM Status
Enabled
Disabled
l Specifies or displays whether the local node can perform and respond to OAM operations.
Disabled
l If OAM Status is Enabled, the local NE can perform and respond to OAM operations. l If OAM Status is Disabled, the local NE cannot perform and respond to OAM operations. l If PW APS protection needs to be configured or a CC test needs to be performed for the tunnel, OAM Status needs to be set to Enabled. Associate AC State
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Detection Mode
Auto-Sensing
Auto-Sensing
l Specifies or displays the detection mode for PW OAM packets.
Manual
l Manual: During a CC test, PW OAM packets are sent at the interval specified by the user. l Auto-Sensing: During a CC test, PW OAM packets are sent at the interval for receiving PW OAM packets. l If Detection Mode is set to Manual, you need to set the type of PW OAM detection packets to be received and transmitted. l The value AutoSensing is recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-429
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Detection Packet Type
CV
CV
l CV: The detection packets are sent at a fixed interval.
FFD
l FFD: The detection packets are sent at the interval specified by the user. l If Detection Mode is set to Auto-Sensing, this parameter specifies the type of PW OAM detection packets to be transmitted. l If Detection Mode is set to Manual, this parameter specifies the type of PW OAM detection packets to be received and transmitted. l The value FFD is assumed for PW APS and the value CV is assumed for continuous connectivity check on PWs. Detection Packet Period (ms)
3.3
50
10 20
l Displays or specifies the OAM detection period. l If Detection Packet Type is FFD, this parameter can be set; if Detection Packet Type is CV, the value is always 1000.
50 100 200 500
l Set this parameter to 3.3 for PW APS usually. If the packet transmission delay time of a PW exceeds 3.3 ms, the transmission interval of FFD packets needs to be a value greater than the delay time.
A-430
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
SD Threshold (%)
0-100
0
l Specifies or displays the SD threshold. When the OAM packet loss ratio is higher than the parameter value, the corresponding alarm is reported. l When this parameter is set to 0, SD threshold detection is not supported.
SF Threshold (%)
0-100
0
l Specifies or displays the SF threshold. When the OAM packet loss ratio is higher than the parameter value, the corresponding alarm is reported. l When this parameter is set to 0, SF threshold detection is not supported. l The SD threshold is not higher than the SF threshold.
LSR ID to Be Received
-
-
l Specifies or displays the LSR ID to be received. l This parameter is available only if OAM Status is Disabled.
PW ID to be Received
-
-
l Specifies or displays the PW ID to be received. l This parameter is available only if OAM Status is Disabled.
Local Working Status
-
-
Displays whether PWs at the local end are available.
Local PW Defect Type
-
-
Displays the local PW defect type.
Local Disable PW Duration(ms)
-
-
Displays the duration when the local PW is unavailable.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-431
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Local PW Defect Location
-
-
Displays the local PW defect location.
Remote Working Status
-
-
Displays whether PWs at the remote end are available.
Remote PW Defect Type
-
-
Displays the remote PW defect type.
Remote Disable PW Duration(ms)
-
-
Displays the duration when the remote PW is unavailable.
Remote PW Defect Location
-
-
Displays the remote PW defect location.
A.9.1.12 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Ping This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PW Ping test.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the PW OAM Parameter tab.
3.
Select the required PW and click OAM Operation > Ping Test.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Packet Count
1 to 4294967295
3
Specifies the number of test request packets.
EXP Value
0 to 7
7
l Specifies the EXP value of the PW label in test request packets. The value 7 indicates the highest priority. l The default value is recommended.
TTL
1 to 255
255
l Specifies the time-tolive (TTL) value of the PW label in test request packets. l The default value is recommended.
A-432
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Transmit Interval (10ms)
1 to 1000
100
l Specifies the interval for transmitting test request packets. l The default value is recommended.
Packet Length
64 to 1400
64
l Specifies the length of test request packets. l The default value is recommended.
Wait-to-Response Timeout Time(10ms)
1 to 6000
300
l Specifies the wait-toresponse timeout value. l The default value is recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-433
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Response Mode
IPv4 UDP Response
IPv4 UDP Response
l Specifies the response mode of test request packets.
No Response Application Control Channel Response
l The value No Response indicates that the test performance event is reported without sending response packets. l The value Application Control Channel Response indicates that response is performed through the reverse channel. l The value IPv4 UDP indicates that the IPv4 UDP packets encapsulating MPLS echo reply messages are sent as response packets. l The value IPv4 UDP is reserved for scenarios where all nodes on an LSP communicate with each other over a DCN running IP protocols. l Set this parameter based on the situation of the remote PE. If the remote PE supports reverse channel response, set this parameter to Application Control Channel Response. If the remote PE does not support reverse channel response but supports DCN channel response by means of IP protocols, set this parameter to IPv4 UDP Response.
A-434
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Peer PW ID
-
-
Specifies the PW ID of the peer end.
Peer IP
-
-
Specifies the IP address of the peer port.
A.9.1.13 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Traceroute This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PW Traceroute test.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the PW OAM Parameter tab.
3.
Select the required PW, click OAM Operation in the lower right corner, and choose Traceroute Test from the drop-down list.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
EXP Value
0 to 7
7
l Specifies the EXP value of the PW label in test request packets. The value 7 indicates the highest priority. l The default value is recommended.
TTL
1 to 255
255
l Specifies the time-tolive (TTL) value of the PW label in test request packets. l The default value is recommended.
Packet Length
84 to 1400
84
l Specifies the length of test request packets. l The default value is recommended.
Wait-to-Response Timeout Time(10ms)
1 to 6000
300
l Specifies the wait-toresponse timeout value. l The default value is recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-435
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Response Mode
IPv4 UDP Response
IPv4 UDP Response
l Specifies the response mode of test request packets.
No Response Application Control Channel Response
l The value No Response indicates that the test performance event is reported without sending response packets. l The value Application Control Channel Response indicates that response is performed through the reverse channel. l The value IPv4 UDP indicates that the IPv4 UDP packets encapsulating MPLS echo reply messages are sent as response packets. l The value IPv4 UDP is reserved for scenarios where all nodes on an LSP communicate with each other over a DCN running IP protocols. l Set this parameter based on the situation of the remote PE. If the remote PE supports reverse channel response, set this parameter to Application Control Channel Response. If the remote PE does not support reverse channel response but supports DCN channel response by means of IP protocols, set this parameter to IPv4 UDP Response.
A-436
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.9.1.14 Parameter Description: MPLS APS Protection Management This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS APS protection management.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Tunnel APS Management tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group ID
-
-
l Displays the protection group ID. l The system automatically assigns IDs to the protection groups according to their creation sequence.
Protection Type
-
-
Displays the protection group type.
Switching Mode
Dual-Ended
-
l Displays or specifies the switching mode of a protection group.
Single-Ended
l The value SingleEnded indicates that services are switched only in the direction where faults occur. l The value DualEnded indicates that services in both positive and reverse directions are switched to their protection channels when faults occur. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Dual-Ended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-437
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
BDI Status
Disabled
-
l Specifies or displays whether the protection switching is triggered upon receiving BDI packets.
Enabled
l This parameter is available only when Switching Mode is set to Single-Ended. l If BDI Status is set to Enabled, the egress node notifies the ingress node of any detected faults by sending BDI packets; upon receiving BDI packets, the ingress node triggers protection switching. Transmit and receive Status of Protocol Packet
-
-
Displays the protocol packet status.
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
-
l Specifies or displays whether to switch services to the original working tunnel after the fault is rectified.
Revertive
l The value Revertive indicates to perform the switching; the value Non-Revertive indicates not to perform the switching. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive.
A-438
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(min)
1-12
-
l Specifies and displays the WTR time of the protection group. l When the preset WTR time expires after the original working tunnel recovers, services are switched to the original working tunnel. l This parameter is available only when Revertive Mode is Revertive. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to 5.
Hold-Time(100ms)
0-100
-
l Specifies the hold-off time of the protection group. l If this parameter is set to a value other than 0, the protection group does not trigger switching once it detects faults, but wait until the hold-off time expires, and then detect whether any faults persist. If any faults persist, the switching is triggered; otherwise, no switching is triggered. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to 0.
Protocol Status
-
-
Displays the protocol status.
Switching Status
-
-
Displays the switching status of the protection group.
Deployment Status
-
-
Displays the deployment status of the protection group.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-439
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Unit
-
-
Displays whether a tunnel is a working or protection tunnel.
Active Tunnel
-
-
Displays the currently used tunnel.
Tunnel Status
-
-
Displays the tunnel status.
Tunnel Type
-
-
Displays the tunnel type.
Tunnel Direction
-
-
Displays the direction of a tunnel.
Ingress Tunnel
-
-
Displays the ingress tunnel.
Egress Tunnel
-
-
Displays the egress tunnel.
A.9.1.15 Parameter Description: Tunnel Protection Group_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating a tunnel protection group.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Tunnel APS Management tab.
3.
Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Type
1:1
1:1
Specifies the protection type of the tunnel protection group. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports only the value 1:1.
A-440
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Switching Mode
Single-Ended
Dual-Ended
l Specifies the switching mode to be adopted when a tunnel fails.
Dual-Ended
l The value SingleEnded indicates that services are switched only in the direction where faults occur. l The value DualEnded indicates that services are switched to the protection channel in both directions when faults occur. l The value DualEnded is recommended. BDI Status
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether the protection switching is triggered upon receiving BDI packets. l This parameter is available only when Switching Mode is set to Single-Ended. l If BDI Status is set to Enabled, the egress node notifies the ingress node of any detected faults by sending BDI packets; upon receiving BDI packets, the ingress node triggers the protection switching.
Working Tunnel Type
MPLS Tunnel
MPLS Tunnel
Specifies the type of the working tunnel. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports only the value MPLS Tunnel.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-441
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Working Ingress Tunnel ID
-
-
l Specifies the working tunnel of the protection group in the ingress direction. l If this parameter is set for a bidirectional tunnel, a value is automatically assigned to the parameter Working Egress Tunnel ID.
Working Ingress Tunnel Name
-
-
Displays the name of the working tunnel in the ingress direction.
Working Egress Tunnel ID
-
-
l Specifies the working tunnel of the protection group in the egress direction. l For a bidirectional tunnel, if the parameter Working Ingress Tunnel ID is set, a value is automatically assigned to the parameter Working Egress Tunnel ID.
Working Egress Tunnel Name
-
-
Displays the name of the working tunnel in the egress direction.
Protection Tunnel Type
-
-
Displays the type of protection tunnel, which is the same as the type of working tunnel.
Protection Ingress Tunnel ID
-
-
l Specifies the working tunnel of the protection group in the ingress direction. l If this parameter is set for a bidirectional tunnel, a value is automatically assigned to the parameter Protection Egress Tunnel ID.
A-442
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Ingress Tunnel Name
-
-
Displays the name of the protection tunnel in the ingress direction.
Protection Egress Tunnel ID
-
-
l Specifies the protection tunnel of the protection group in the egress direction. l For a bidirectional tunnel, if the parameter Protection Ingress Tunnel ID is set, a value is automatically assigned to the parameter Protection Egress Tunnel ID.
Protection Egress Tunnel Name
-
-
Displays the name of the protection tunnel in the egress direction.
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
Non-Revertive
l This parameter specifies whether to switch services back to the original working tunnel after it recovers.
Revertive
l The value Revertive indicates to switch services back to the original working tunnel after it recovers; the value NonRevertive indicates not to switch services back to the original working tunnel after it recovers. l The value Revertive is recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-443
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(min)
1 to 12
5
l Specifies the WTR time of the protection group. l When the preset WTR time expires after the original working tunnel recovers, services are switched to the original working tunnel. l This parameter is available only when Revertive Mode is Revertive. l The default value is recommended.
Hold-Time(100ms)
0 to 100
0
l Specifies the hold-off time of the protection group. l If this parameter is set to a value other than 0, the protection group does not trigger switching once it detects faults, but waits until the hold-off time expires, and then detects whether any faults persist. If any faults persist, the switching is triggered; otherwise, no switching is triggered. l The default value is recommended.
Protocol Status
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
l Specifies the protocol status. l During the creation of a protection group, set Protocol Status to Disabled. After the APS protection group is configured at both ends, set Protocol Status to Enabled.
A-444
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.9.1.16 Parameter Description: PW APS Protection Group_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a PW APS protection group.
Navigation Path The navigation path for CES services is as follows: 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CES Service Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Protection Group tab.
3.
Click the PW APS tab.
4.
Click New.
The navigation path for E-Line services is as follows: 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Protection Group tab.
3.
Click the PW APS tab.
4.
Click New.
The navigation path for ATM services is as follows: 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM Service Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Protection Group tab.
3.
Click the PW APS tab.
4.
Click New.
Parameters for the Basic Attributes of PWs Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
-
-
Specifies the ID of the PW that carries services.
PW Signaling Type
Static
Static
Specifies the signaling type of the PW. Labels for static PWs need to be manually assigned.
PW Type
-
-
Displays the PW type.
PW Direction
-
-
Displays the direction of the PW.
PW Encapsulation Type
-
-
Displays the encapsulation type of the PW.
PW Ingress Label/ Source Port
16 to 1048575
-
Specifies the PW Ingress label.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-445
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW Egress Label/Sink Port
16 to 1048575
-
Specifies the PW Egress label.
Tunnel selection mode
-
-
Displays the method to select tunnels.
Tunnel Type
MPLS
MPLS
Displays the type of the tunnel that carries the PW.
Tunnel
-
-
A tunnel needs to be selected. If no tunnel is available, creation of a PW will fail.
Peer LSR ID
-
-
Specifies the LSR ID of the PW at the remote end. If an existing tunnel is selected, the LSR ID will be automatically assigned.
Egress Tunnel
-
-
For a bidirectional tunnel, the system will configure the reverse tunnel automatically.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
EXP
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
QoS Parameters Table A-77 CES services
A-446
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Table A-78 E-Line services Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled
-
Specifies whether the bandwidth limit function is enabled.
Enabled
l This function limits the bandwidth of one or more PWs in an MPLS tunnel. l An ETH PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ETH PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel. Policy
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
CIR(kbit/s)
-
-
Specifies the committed information rate (CIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as PIR.
CBS(byte)
-
-
Specifies the committed burst size (CBS) of a PW.
PIR(kbit/s)
-
-
Specifies the peak information rate (PIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as CIR.
PBS(byte)
-
-
Specifies the peak burst size (PBS) of a PW.
EXP
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
LSP Mode
-
-
Displays the LSP mode. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports only Pipe.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-447
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Table A-79 ATM services Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled
-
Specifies whether the bandwidth limit function is enabled.
Enabled
l This function limits the bandwidth of one or more PWs in an MPLS tunnel. l An ATM PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ATM PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel. CIR(kbit/s)
-
-
Specifies the committed information rate (CIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as PIR.
CBS(byte)
-
-
Specifies the committed burst size (CBS) of a PW.
PIR(kbit/s)
-
-
Specifies the peak information rate (PIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as CIR.
PBS(byte)
-
-
Specifies the peak burst size (PBS) of a PW.
EXP
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Policy
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
A-448
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Advanced Attributes Table A-80 CES services Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
RTP Head
-
-
Displays whether the CES service packets carry an RTP header.
Packet Loading Time (us)
-
-
Displays the packet loading time.
Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us)
-
-
Displays the jitter buffer time for the received CES packets.
Ingress Clock Mode
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Egress Clock Mode
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Control Channel Type
-
-
Displays the mode of PW connectivity check.
VCCV Verification Mode
-
-
Displays the VCCV verification mode. The VCCV verification is used for PW connectivity check.
Enable CES Service Alarm Transparent Transmission
-
-
Displays whether CES service alarms are transparently transmitted.
Threshold of Entering R bit Inserting Status
-
-
Displays the threshold of the packet loss ratio of CES services. The corresponding alarm will be reported if the actual packet loss ratio crosses this threshold.
Threshold of Exiting R bit Inserting Status
-
-
Displays the threshold of received CES service packets. The corresponding alarm will be cleared after the actual number of received CES service packets crosses this threshold.
Sequence Number Mode
-
-
Displays the sequence number mode.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-449
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Table A-81 E-Line services Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Word
-
-
Displays whether the control word is used to transfer packet information. For ETH PWE3 services, this parameter is always not used.
Control Channel Type
-
-
Displays the control channel type.
VCCV Verification Mode
-
-
Displays the VCCV mode.
Request VLAN
-
-
When PW Type is Ethernet Tag, this parameter displays the VLAN ID to be added to packets that are sent from the opposite end and do not carry any VLAN IDs.
TPID
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support VLAN TPID of the PW level.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Word
-
-
Displays whether the control word is used to transfer packet information.
Control Channel Type
-
-
Displays the control channel type.
VCCV Verification Mode
-
-
Displays the VCCV mode.
Max Concatenated Cell Count
-
-
Displays the maximum number of concatenated cells.
Packet Loading Time (us)
-
-
Displays the packet loading time.
Table A-82 ATM services
A-450
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Protection Group Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Type
-
-
Specifies the protection type.
Protection Group ID
-
-
Specifies the protection group ID.
Enabling Status
Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies the enabling status of the PW protection group.
Enabled
l During the creation of a protection group, set Enabling Status to Disabled. After the APS protection group is configured at both ends, set Enabling Status to Enabled. Protection Mode
-
-
Displays the protection mode. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports 1:1 protection mode.
Working PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the working PW.
Protection PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the protection PW.
Switching Mode
-
-
Displays the switching mode to be used when a PW fails. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports dual-ended switching.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-451
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Revertive Mode
Non-revertive
Revertive
l This parameter specifies whether to switch services back to the original working PW after it recovers.
Revertive
l The value Revertive indicates that services are switched to the original working PW and the value Nonrevertive indicates that services are not switched to the original working PW. l The value Revertive is recommended. Switchover Restoration Time(min)
1 to 12
1
l Specifies the WTR time of the protection group. l When the preset WTR time expires after the original working PW recovers, services are switched to the original working PW. l This parameter is available only when Restoration Mode is Revertive. l The default value is recommended.
A-452
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Switchover Delay Time (100ms)
0 to 100
0
l Specifies the hold-off time of the protection group. l If this parameter is set to a value other than 0, the protection group does not trigger switching once it detects faults, but waits until the hold-off time expires, and then detects whether any faults persist. If any faults persist, the switching is triggered; otherwise, no switching is triggered. l The default value is recommended.
-
-
Displays the detection mode of the PW APS protection group.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
OAM Status
-
-
Displays the enabling status of PW OAM.
Detection mode
OAM Parameters
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-453
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Detection Mode
Auto-Sensing
Auto-Sensing
l Specifies the detection mode of OAM packets.
Manual
l Manual: The connectivity check (CC) packets are sent at the interval specified by the user. l Auto-Sensing: The connectivity check (CC) packets are sent at the interval of receiving PW OAM packets. l If Detection Mode is set to Manual, you need to set the PW OAM detection packets to be received and transmitted. l The value AutoSensing is recommended.
A-454
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Detection Packet Type
CV
CV
l CV: The detection packets are sent at a fixed interval.
FFD
l FFD: The detection packets are sent at the interval specified by the user. l If Detection Mode is set to Auto-Sensing, this parameter specifies the PW OAM detection packets to be transmitted. l If Detection Mode is set to Manual, this parameter specifies the PW OAM detection packets to be received and transmitted. l The value FFD is assumed for PW APS and the value CV is assumed for continuous connectivity check on PWs. Detection Packet Period (ms)
3.3
50
10
l Specifies the period of detection packets. l This parameter is configurable when Detection Packet Type is FFD and assumes the fixed value of 1000 when Detection Packet Type is CV.
20 50 100 200 500
l Set this parameter to 3.3 for PW APS. LSR ID to be Received
-
-
Specifies the LSR ID to be received.
PW ID to be Received
-
-
Specifies the PW ID to be received.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-455
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.9.1.17 Parameter Description: Slave Protection Pair of a PW APS Protection Group_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a slave protection pair of a PW APS protection group.
Navigation Path The navigation path for CES services is as follows: 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CES Service Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Protection Group tab.
3.
Click the Slave Protection Pair tab.
4.
Click New.
The navigation path for E-Line services is as follows: 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Protection Group tab.
3.
Click the Slave Protection Pair tab.
4.
Click New.
The navigation path for ATM services is as follows: 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM Service Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Protection Group tab.
3.
Click the Slave Protection Pair tab.
4.
Click New.
Parameters for the Basic Attributes of PWs Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
-
-
Specifies the ID of the PW that carries services.
PW Signaling Type
Static
Static
Specifies the signaling type of the PW. Labels for static PWs need to be manually assigned.
PW Type
-
-
Displays the PW type.
PW Direction
-
-
Displays the direction of the PW.
PW Encapsulation Type
-
-
Displays the encapsulation type of the PW.
A-456
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW Ingress Label/ Source Port
16 to 1048575
-
Specifies the PW Ingress label.
PW Egress Label/Sink Port
16 to 1048575
-
Specifies the PW Egress label.
Tunnel selection mode
-
-
Displays the method to select tunnels.
Tunnel Type
MPLS
MPLS
Displays the type of the tunnel that carries the PW.
Tunnel
-
-
A tunnel needs to be selected. If no tunnel is available, creation of a PW will fail.
Peer LSR ID
-
-
Specifies the LSR ID of the PW at the remote end. If an existing tunnel is selected, the LSR ID will be automatically assigned.
Egress Tunnel
-
-
For a bidirectional tunnel, the system will configure the reverse tunnel automatically.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
EXP
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
QoS Parameters Table A-83 CES services
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-457
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Table A-84 E-Line services Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled
-
Specifies whether the bandwidth limit function is enabled.
Enabled
l This function limits the bandwidth of one or more PWs in an MPLS tunnel. l An ETH PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ETH PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel. Policy
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
CIR(kbit/s)
-
-
Specifies the committed information rate (CIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as PIR.
CBS(byte)
-
-
Specifies the committed burst size (CBS) of a PW.
PIR(kbit/s)
-
-
Specifies the peak information rate (PIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as CIR.
PBS(byte)
-
-
Specifies the peak burst size (PBS) of a PW.
EXP
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
LSP Mode
-
-
Displays the LSP mode. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports only Pipe.
A-458
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Table A-85 ATM services Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled
-
Specifies whether the bandwidth limit function is enabled.
Enabled
l This function limits the bandwidth of one or more PWs in an MPLS tunnel. l An ATM PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ATM PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel. CIR(kbit/s)
-
-
Specifies the committed information rate (CIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as PIR.
CBS(byte)
-
-
Specifies the committed burst size (CBS) of a PW.
PIR(kbit/s)
-
-
Specifies the peak information rate (PIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as CIR.
PBS(byte)
-
-
Specifies the peak burst size (PBS) of a PW.
EXP
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Policy
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-459
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Advanced Attributes Table A-86 CES services Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
RTP Head
-
-
Displays whether the CES service packets carry an RTP header.
Packet Loading Time (us)
-
-
Displays the packet loading time.
Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us)
-
-
Displays the jitter buffer time for the received CES packets.
Ingress Clock Mode
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Egress Clock Mode
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Control Channel Type
-
-
Displays the mode of PW connectivity check.
VCCV Verification Mode
-
-
Displays the VCCV verification mode. The VCCV verification is used for PW connectivity check.
Enable CES Service Alarm Transparent Transmission
-
-
Displays whether CES service alarms are transparently transmitted.
Threshold of Entering R bit Inserting Status
-
-
Displays the threshold of the packet loss ratio of CES services. The corresponding alarm will be reported if the actual packet loss ratio crosses this threshold.
Threshold of Exiting R bit Inserting Status
-
-
Displays the threshold of received CES service packets. The corresponding alarm will be cleared after the actual number of received CES service packets crosses this threshold.
Sequence Number Mode
-
-
Displays the sequence number mode.
A-460
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Table A-87 E-Line services Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Word
-
-
Displays whether the control word is used to transfer packet information. For ETH PWE3 services, this parameter is always not used.
Control Channel Type
-
-
Displays the control channel type.
VCCV Verification Mode
-
-
Displays the VCCV mode.
Request VLAN
-
-
When PW Type is Ethernet Tag, this parameter displays the VLAN ID to be added to packets that are sent from the opposite end and do not carry any VLAN IDs.
TPID
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support VLAN TPID of the PW level.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Word
-
-
Displays whether the control word is used to transfer packet information.
Control Channel Type
-
-
Displays the control channel type.
VCCV Verification Mode
-
-
Displays the VCCV mode.
Max Concatenated Cell Count
-
-
Displays the maximum number of concatenated cells.
Packet Loading Time (us)
-
-
Displays the packet loading time.
Table A-88 ATM services
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-461
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Protection Group Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Mode
-
-
Displays the protection mode.
Protection Group ID
-
-
Specifies the ID of the slave protection pair. The switching of the master PW APS protection group triggers the switching of the slave PW APS protection group simultaneously.
Working PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the working PW in the slave protection pair.
Protection PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the protection PW in the slave protection pair.
A.9.2 CES Parameters This topic describes parameters that are related to CES services. A.9.2.1 Parameter Description: CES Service Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to CES service management. A.9.2.2 Parameter Description: CES Service Management_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating CES services.
A.9.2.1 Parameter Description: CES Service Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to CES service management.
Navigation Path In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CES Service Management from the Function Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the CES service to be created.
Service name
-
-
Displays or specifies the service name.
A-462
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Level
-
-
Displays the level of the received TDM frames.
Source Board
-
-
Displays the source board of the CES service.
Source High Channel
-
-
For the OptiX RTN 950, this parameter cannot be configured.
Source Low Channel
-
-
Displays the source lower order path.
Source 64K Timeslot
-
-
Displays the source 64 kbit/s timeslot.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-463
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Priority List
CS7
-
l Specifies the priority of a CES service. This parameter is available only when Mode is set to UNI-NNI.
CS6 EF AF4 AF3
l This parameter needs to be configured if QoS processing needs to be performed for different CES services.
AF2 AF1 BE
l CS6-CS7: indicate the highest service classes, which are mainly involved in signaling transmission. l EF: indicates the expedited forwarding of service, which is applicable to services of low transmission delay and low packet loss rate, for example, voice and video services. l AF1-AF4: indicate the assured forwarding classes of service, which are applicable to services that require an assured rate but no delay or jitter limit. l BE: is applicable to services that need not be processed in a special manner. l The default value is recommended. PW ID
A-464
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Displays the ID of the PW that carries the CES service. This parameter is meaningful when the CES service type is UNI-NNI.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tunnel
-
-
Displays the tunnel that carries the PW. The tunnel must have been configured in advance. This parameter is meaningful when the CES service type is UNI-NNI.
Sink Board
-
-
Displays the sink board of the CES service. This parameter is meaningful when the CES service type is UNI-UNI.
Sink High Channel
-
-
For the OptiX RTN 950, this parameter cannot be configured.
Sink Low Channel
-
-
Displays the sink lower order path. This parameter is meaningful when the CES service type is UNIUNI.
Sink 64K Timeslot
-
-
Displays the sink 64 kbit/s timeslot. This parameter is meaningful when the CES service type is UNI-UNI.
Deployment Status
-
-
Displays the deployment status of the CES service.
Parameters for the Basic Attributes of PWs Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the PW that carries the CES service.
Working Status
-
-
Displays working status of the PW.
PW Status
-
-
Displays the enabling status of the PW.
PW Signaling Type
-
-
Displays the PW signaling type. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports static PWs only.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-465
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW Type
-
-
Displays the PW type for CES service encapsulation. CESoPSN: Indicates structure-aware TDM circuit emulation service over packet switched network. Timeslot compression can be set. SAToP: Indicates structure-agnostic TDM over packet. Timeslot compression cannot be set.
PW Encapsulation Type
-
-
Displays the tunnel type for PW encapsulation. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports MPLS only.
PW Ingress Label/ Source Port
-
-
Displays the Ingress label of the PW that carries the CES service.
PW Egress Label/Sink Port
-
-
Displays the Egress label of the PW that carries the CES service.
Peer LSR ID
-
-
Displays the LSR ID of the PW at the remote end.
Local Working Status
-
-
Displays the working status of the PW at the local end.
Remote Working Status
-
-
Displays the working status of the PW at the remote end.
Compositive Working Status
-
-
Displays the compositive working status of the PW. The compositive working status is up when both ends are up, and is down when one end is down.
Tunnel type
-
-
Displays the type of the tunnel that carries the PW. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports MPLS tunnels only.
A-466
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tunnel
-
-
Displays the ID of the tunnel that carries the CES service.
Deployment Status
-
-
Displays the deployment status of the tunnel.
Tunnel Automatic Selection Policy
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
-
-
Displays the PW ID.
Direction
-
-
Displays the direction of the PW.
CIR(kbit/s)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
EXP
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
QoS Parameters
Parameters of Advanced Attributes Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
-
-
Displays the PW ID.
RTP Header
-
-
Displays the RTP header. The RTP header carries time stamps.
Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us)
375 to 16000
-
l Displays or specifies the jitter buffer time. l The jitter buffer time guarantees the realtime performance of the CES service. NOTE Set Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us) to a value greater than the value of Packet Loading Time (us) at the opposite end and the local end.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-467
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Packet Loading Time (us)
-
-
Displays the packet loading time.
Ingress Clock Mode
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Egress Clock Mode
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Control Channel Type
-
-
Displays the mode of PW connectivity check.
VCCV Verification Mode
-
-
Displays the VCCV verification mode. The VCCV verification is used for PW connectivity check.
Enable CES Service Alarm Transparent Transmission
Enabled
-
Displays or specifies the enabling status of the transparent transmission of CES service alarms. If this function is enabled, the fault on the AC side of the CES service is notified to the remote end. Upon receiving the fault notification from the network side or the remote end, the local NE inserts the corresponding alarm to the AC side.
Threshold of Entering R Bit Inserting Status
1-65535
-
Displays or specifies the threshold of packet loss ratio of CES services. The corresponding alarm will be reported once the actual packet loss ratio crosses this threshold. This parameter is available only when the transparent transmission of CES service alarms is enabled.
A-468
Disabled
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Threshold of Exiting R Bit Inserting Status
1-65535
-
Displays or specifies the threshold of received CES service packets. The corresponding alarm will be cleared after the actual number of received CES service packets crosses this threshold. This parameter is available only when the transparent transmission of CES service alarms is enabled.
Sequence Number Mode
Huawei Mode
-
Specifies the sequence number mode. The Sequence Number Mode must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link.
Standard Mode
Protection Group Parameters (PW APS) NOTE
The following parameters are available only after the PW APS protection group is configured.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the protection group to be created.
Working PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the working PW.
Protection PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the protection PW.
Protection Mode
-
-
Displays the protection mode.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-469
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enabling Status
Enabled
-
l Displays or specifies the enabling status of the PW protection group.
Disabled
l During the creation of a protection group, set Enabling Status to Disabled. After the APS protection group is configured at both ends, set Enabling Status to Enabled. Switchover Mode
-
-
Displays the switching mode to be used when a PW fails. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supporting dual-ended switching.
Restoration Mode
Non-revertive
-
Revertive
l Specifies whether to switch services to the original working PW after the fault is rectified. l The value Revertive indicates that services are switched to the original working PW and the value Nonrevertive indicates that services are not switched to the original working PW. l The value Revertive is recommended.
A-470
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Switchover Restoration Time(min)
1 to 12
-
l Displays or specifies the WTR time of the protection group. l When the preset WTR time expires after the original working PW recovers, services are switched to the original working PW. l This parameter is available only when Restoration Mode is Revertive.
Switchover Delay Time (100ms)
0 to 100
-
l Displays or specifies the hold-off time of the protection group. l If this parameter is set to a value other than 0, the protection group does not trigger switching once it detects faults, but waits until the hold-off time expires, and then detects whether any faults persist. If any faults persist, the switching is triggered; otherwise, no switching is triggered.
Deployment Status
-
-
Display the deployment status of the protection group.
Switchover Status
-
-
Displays the switchover status of the protection group.
Protocol Status
-
-
Displays the enabling status of the protocol.
Working Path Status
-
-
Displays the status of the current working path.
Protection Path Status
-
-
Display the status of the current protection path.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-471
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Protection Group Parameters (Slave Protection Pair) NOTE
The following parameters are available only after the slave protection pair is configured.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group ID
-
-
Specifies the ID of the slave protection pair. The switching of the master PW APS protection group triggers the switching of the slave PW APS protection group simultaneously.
Working PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the working PW in the slave protection pair.
Protection PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the protection PW in the slave protection pair.
DNI PW ID
-
-
Displays the DNI PW ID.
PW Type
-
-
Displays the PW type.
Deployment Status
-
-
Displays the deployment status of the slave protection pair.
A.9.2.2 Parameter Description: CES Service Management_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating CES services.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CES Service Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID(e.g.1,3-6)
1 to 4294967295
-
Specifies the service ID.
Service name
-
-
Specifies the service name.
A-472
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Level
E1
E1
The value E1 indicates that the CES service is used to transmit the TDM services from E1 ports.
Mode
UNI-NNI
UNI-NNI
l Specifies the mode of CES service.
UNI-UNI
l The value UNI-NNI indicates that the CES service is carried by a PW. Therefore, the information about the PW needs to be configured. Source Board
-
-
Specifies the board where the source (UNI) of the CES service is located.
Source High Channel
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Source Low Channel (e.g.1,3-6)
-
-
If Level is set to E1, this parameter indicates the E1 port where the service source is located. If Mode is set to UNI-NNI, this parameter can assume only one value.
Source 64K Timeslot (e.g.1,3-6)
1-31
1-31
l Specifies the 64 kbit/s timeslot that transmits data. This parameter can assume multiple values. If Frame Mode of the opposite end is 30, the source 64 kbit/s timeslots at the local end must include the 16th timeslot. l On the two ends of a radio link, the timeslot lists can be different but the numbers of timeslots must the same. l This parameter does not need to be set if Mode is UNI-NNI and PW Type is SAToP.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-473
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Priority List
CS7
EF
l Specifies the priority of a CES service. This parameter is available only when Mode is set to UNI-NNI.
CS6 EF AF4 AF3
l This parameter needs to be configured if QoS processing needs to be performed for different CES services.
AF2 AF1 BE
l CS6-CS7: indicate the highest service classes, which are mainly involved in signaling transmission. l EF: indicates the expedited forwarding of service, which is applicable to services of low transmission delay and low packet loss rate, for example, voice and video services. l AF1-AF4: indicate the assured forwarding classes of service, which are applicable to services that require an assured rate but no delay or jitter limit. l BE: is applicable to services that need not be processed in a special manner. l The default value is recommended.
A-474
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW Type
CESoPSN
CESoPSN
l Specifies the type of the PW. This parameter is available only when Mode is UNI-NNI.
SAToP
l CESoPSN: Indicates structure-aware TDM circuit emulation service over packet switched network. Timeslot compression can be set. SAToP: Indicates structureagnostic TDM over packet. Timeslot compression cannot be set. Protection Type
No Protection
No Protection
PW APS Slave Protection Pair
l Specifies the protection mode of the PW. This parameter is available only when Mode is UNI-NNI. l If this parameter is set to PW APS, working and protection PWs need to be configured. l When this parameter is set to Slave Protection Pair , you need to bind the slave PW APS protection group with the master PW APS protection group. The switching of the master PW APS protection group triggers the switching of the slave PW APS protection group simultaneously.
Sink Board
-
-
l Specifies the board where the sink of the CES service is located. l This parameter is available only when Mode is set to UNIUNI.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-475
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink High Channel
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Sink Low Channel(e.g. 1,3-6)
-
-
l If Level is set to E1, this parameter indicates the E1 port where the service sink is located. l This parameter is available only when Mode is set to UNIUNI.
Sink 64K Timeslot(e.g. 1,3-6)
1-31
1-31
l Specifies the 64 kbit/s timeslot that the service sink occupies. On the two ends of a radio link, the timeslot lists can be different but the numbers of timeslots must the same. l This parameter is available only when Mode is set to UNIUNI.
Parameters for the Basic Attributes of PWs NOTE
If the parameter Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS or Slave Protection Pair, all the parameters of working and protection PWs need to be configured. This section considers the parameters of the working PW as an example.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
-
-
Specifies the ID of the PW that carries services.
PW Signaling Type
Static
Static
Specifies the signaling type of the PW. Labels for static PWs need to be manually assigned.
PW Type
-
-
Displays the PW type.
PW Direction
-
-
Displays the direction of the PW.
A-476
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW Encapsulation Type
-
-
Displays the encapsulation type of the PW.
PW Ingress Label/ Source Port
16 to 1048575
-
Specifies the PW Ingress label.
PW Egress Label/Sink Port
16 to 1048575
-
Specifies the PW Egress label.
Tunnel selection mode
-
-
Displays the method to select tunnels.
Tunnel Type
MPLS
MPLS
Displays the type of the tunnel that carries the PW.
Tunnel
-
-
A tunnel needs to be selected. If no tunnel is available, creation of a PW will fail.
Peer LSR ID
-
-
Specifies the LSR ID of the PW at the remote end. If an existing tunnel is selected, the LSR ID will be automatically assigned.
Egress Tunnel
-
-
For a bidirectional tunnel, the system will configure the reverse tunnel automatically.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
EXP
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
QoS Parameters
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-477
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for the Advanced Attributes of PWs Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
RTP Header
Disable
Disable
l Specifies the RTP header.
Enable Huawei RTP
l The RTP header carries time stamps. l The default value is recommended. Jitter Compensation Buffering Time (us)
375 to 16000
8000
l Specifies the jitter buffer time for the received CES packets. The step is 125. l A greater value of this parameter means fewer impacts of transmission jitters on CES services, greater delays of CES services, and more resources occupied by CES services. l The default value is recommended. NOTE Set Jitter Compensation Buffering Time(us) to a value greater than the value of Packet Loading Time (us) at the opposite end and the local end.
Packet Loading Time (us)
125 to 5000
1000
l Specifies the length of fragments in the TDM data stream. The step is 125. l A greater value of this parameter means higher encapsulation efficiency but greater delays of CES services. l The default value is recommended.
Ingress Clock Mode
Null
Null
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Adaptive Clock Mode Egress Clock Mode
A-478
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Channel Type
None
CW
l Specifies the mode of PW connectivity check.
CW Alert Label
l The value None indicates that the control word is not supported. That is, the PW connectivity check is not supported. l Alert Label indicates VCCV packets in Alert Label encapsulation mode. l The value CW indicates that the control word is supported.
VCCV Verification Mode
None
Ping
Ping
l Specifies the VCCV verification mode. The VCCV verification is used for PW connectivity check. l If the VCCV-Ping test is required, do not set this parameter to None.
Enable CES Service Alarm Transparent Transmission
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
If this function is enabled, the fault on the AC side of the CES service is notified to the remote end. On receiving the fault notification from the network side or the remote end, the local NE inserts the corresponding alarm to the AC side.
A-479
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Threshold of Entering R Bit Inserting Status
1-65535
100
l The corresponding alarm will be reported if the number of consecutive lost packets crosses the threshold specified by this parameter. l This function is available only when the transparent transmission of CES service alarms is enabled.
Threshold of Exiting R Bit Inserting Status
1-65535
5
l The corresponding alarm will be cleared if the number of consecutive received packets crosses the threshold specified by this parameter. l This function is available only when the transparent transmission of CES service alarms is enabled.
Sequence Number Mode
Huawei Mode
Standard Mode
Standard Mode
Specifies the sequence number mode. The Sequence Number Mode must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link.
Protection Group Parameters (PW APS) NOTE
The parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Type
-
-
Specifies the protection type.
Protection Group ID
-
-
Specifies the protection group ID.
A-480
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enabling Status
Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies the enabling status of the PW protection group.
Enabled
l During the creation of a protection group, set Enabling Status to Disabled. After the APS protection group is configured at both ends, set Enabling Status to Enabled. Protection Mode
-
-
Displays the protection mode. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports 1:1 protection mode.
Working PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the working PW.
Protection PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the protection PW.
Switching Mode
-
-
Displays the switching mode to be used when a PW fails. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports dual-ended switching.
Revertive Mode
Non-revertive
Revertive
Revertive
l This parameter specifies whether to switch services back to the original working PW after it recovers. l The value Revertive indicates that services are switched to the original working PW and the value Nonrevertive indicates that services are not switched to the original working PW. l The value Revertive is recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-481
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Switchover Restoration Time(min)
1 to 12
1
l Specifies the WTR time of the protection group. l When the preset WTR time expires after the original working PW recovers, services are switched to the original working PW. l This parameter is available only when Restoration Mode is Revertive. l The default value is recommended.
Switchover Delay Time (100ms)
0 to 100
0
l Specifies the hold-off time of the protection group. l If this parameter is set to a value other than 0, the protection group does not trigger switching once it detects faults, but waits until the hold-off time expires, and then detects whether any faults persist. If any faults persist, the switching is triggered; otherwise, no switching is triggered. l The default value is recommended.
-
Detection mode
-
Displays the detection mode of the PW APS protection group.
OAM Parameters NOTE
l The OAM parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS. l To configure PW OAM parameters, choose Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management > PW OAM Parameter from the Function Tree.
A-482
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
OAM Status
-
-
Displays the enabling status of PW OAM.
Detection Mode
Auto-Sensing
Auto-Sensing
l Specifies the detection mode of OAM packets.
Manual
l Manual: The connectivity check (CC) packets are sent at the interval specified by the user. l Auto-Sensing: The connectivity check (CC) packets are sent at the interval of receiving PW OAM packets. l If Detection Mode is set to Manual, you need to set the PW OAM detection packets to be received and transmitted. l The value AutoSensing is recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-483
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Detection Packet Type
CV
CV
l CV: The detection packets are sent at a fixed interval.
FFD
l FFD: The detection packets are sent at the interval specified by the user. l If Detection Mode is set to Auto-Sensing, this parameter specifies the PW OAM detection packets to be transmitted. l If Detection Mode is set to Manual, this parameter specifies the PW OAM detection packets to be received and transmitted. l The value FFD is assumed for PW APS and the value CV is assumed for continuous connectivity check on PWs. Detection Packet Period (ms)
3.3
50
10
l Specifies the period of detection packets. l This parameter is configurable when Detection Packet Type is FFD and assumes the fixed value of 1000 when Detection Packet Type is CV.
20 50 100 200 500
l Set this parameter to 3.3 for PW APS. LSR ID to be Received
-
-
Specifies the LSR ID to be received.
PW ID to be Received
-
-
Specifies the PW ID to be received.
A-484
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Protection Group Parameters (Slave Protection Pair) NOTE
The parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set to Slave Protection Pair.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Mode
-
-
Displays the protection mode.
Protection Group ID
-
-
Specifies the ID of the slave protection pair. The switching of the master PW APS protection group triggers the switching of the slave PW APS protection group simultaneously.
Working PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the working PW in the slave protection pair.
Protection PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the protection PW in the slave protection pair.
A.9.3 ATM Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM services. A.9.3.1 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA group management. A.9.3.2 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_Bound Path Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are related to the bound paths in the ATM TRUNK. A.9.3.3 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Status This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA group status. A.9.3.4 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Link Status This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA link status. A.9.3.5 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_ATM Interface Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM interface management. A.9.3.6 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table This topic describes the parameters that are related to configuration of the ATM service class mapping table. A.9.3.7 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of the ATM service class mapping table. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-485
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.9.3.8 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM policy management. A.9.3.9 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of ATM policies. A.9.3.10 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM service management. A.9.3.11 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of ATM services. A.9.3.12 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Segment and End Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to segment end attributes of ATM OAM. A.9.3.13 Parameter Description: ATM OMA Management_CC Activation Status This topic describes the parameters that are related to the CC activation status of ATM OAM. A.9.3.14 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Remote End Loopback Status This topic describes the parameters that are related to the remote end loopback status of ATM OAM. A.9.3.15 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_LLID This topic describes the parameters that are related to LLID configuration.
A.9.3.1 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA group management.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the IMA Group Management tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCTRUNK
-
-
Displays the ATM TRUNK.
A-486
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IMA Protocol Enable Status
Enabled
Disabled
l Specifies the IMA protocol enable status.
Disabled
l Set IMA Protocol Enable Status to Enabled if the links bound in the ATM TRUNK require the IMA protocol; otherwise, set this parameter to Disabled. l After IMA Protocol Enable Status is set to Enabled, the E1 links or Fractional E1 timeslots bound in the ATM TRUNK start running the IMA protocol. Minimum Number of Active Transmitting Links
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
1 to 16
1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l The links of the IMA group can carry services only when the number of activated links in the transmit/ receive direction is not smaller than the value of Minimum Number of Active Transmitting Links/ Minimum Number of Active Receiving Links. l The values of Minimum Number of Active Transmitting Links and Minimum Number of Active Receiving Links must be the same because the OptiX RTN 950 supports Symmetrical Mode and Symmetrical Operation only. The parameters Minimum Number of Active Transmitting Links and Minimum
A-487
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Minimum Number of Active Receiving Links
1 to 16
1
Number of Active Receiving Links must assume the same value on the two ends of an IMA link. l The default value is recommended.
IMA Protocol Version
1.0
1.1
l Specifies the IMA protocol version.
1.1
l The parameter IMA Protocol Version must assume the same value on the two ends of an IMA link. l The default value is recommended.
A-488
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IMA Transmit Frame Length
32
128
l Specifies the IMA transmit frame length.
64
l Based on the IMA frame format, the receive end rebuilds the ATM cell stream with the cells arriving from diverselydelayed links. Longer IMA frames result in higher transmission efficiency and occupy more resources. Once a member link fails, the impact on the entire IMA group increases as the length of IMA frames increases.
128 256
l The IMA Transmit Frame Length must assume the same value on the two ends of an IMA link. l The default value is recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-489
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IMA Symmetry Mode
Symmetrical Mode and Symmetrical Operation
Symmetrical Mode and Symmetrical Operation
l Specifies the symmetrical mode of the IMA group. l If the symmetrical mode and symmetrical operation is adopted, the bandwidth of the IMA group is always consistent in the transmit direction and in the receive direction, even when some member links fail. In symmetrical mode: – Bandwidth of the IMA group = min {bandwidth in the transmit direction, bandwidth in the receive direction} – The unidirectional failure of one member link is equivalent to the bidirectional failure of one member link.
A-490
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maximum Delay Between Links (ms)
1 to 120
25
l Specifies the maximum differential delay that is allowed between the member links. l If the differential delay between a member link and the other member links exceeds the value, this link will be deactivated and deleted from the IMA group. l If this parameter is set to a value higher than the normal value range, the delay of IMA services will be prolonged and even packet loss will occur; if this parameter is set to a value lower than the normal value range, a working link will be deleted by mistake. l The Maximum Delay Between Links (ms) must assume the same value on the two ends of an IMA link. l The default value is recommended.
Clock Mode
CTC Mode
CTC Mode
ITC Mode
l Specifies the clock mode of the IMA group. l Clock Mode is set to the same value for the interconnected ends of IMA links.
A.9.3.2 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_Bound Path Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are related to the bound paths in the ATM TRUNK.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-491
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Binding tab.
3.
Click Configuration.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Available Boards
-
-
Selects the available boards.
Configurable Ports
-
-
Selects the configurable ATM trunks.
Level
E1
E1
Specifies the level of bound paths.
Fractional E1
l If ATM/IMA services need to be mapped into the ATM TRUNK that binds one or more E1 ports, select E1 in Level. l If ATM/IMA services need to be mapped into the ATM TRUNK that binds one or more serial ports, select Fractional E1 in Level. Direction
-
-
Displays the direction of bound paths. The fixed value is bidirectional.
Optical Interface
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Available Resources
-
-
Displays the ports that carry the available paths for IMA services. NOTE For Fractional ATM/IMA services, set Port Mode in PDH Interface to Layer 1 and configure Setting Serial Port Parameters.
Available Timeslots
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Selected Bound Paths
-
-
Displays the bound paths.
A-492
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCTRUNK
-
-
Displays the name of the ATM TRUNK.
Level
-
-
Displays the level of bound paths.
Direction
-
-
Displays the direction of bound paths. The fixed value is bidirectional.
Bound Paths
-
-
Displays the bound paths.
Number of Bound Paths
-
-
Displays the number of bound paths.
Display in Combination
Selected
Selected
Specifies whether to display bound paths in combination.
Not selected
A.9.3.3 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Status This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA group status.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the IMA Group States tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCTRUNK
-
-
Displays the VCTRUNK.
Near-End Group Status
-
-
Displays the status of the near-end group.
Far-End Group Status
-
-
Displays the status of the far-end group.
Transmit Rate (cell/s)
-
-
Displays the cell transmission rate.
Receive Rate (cell/s)
-
-
Displays the cell receiving rate.
Number of Transmit Links
-
-
Displays the number of transmit links.
Number of Receive Links
-
-
Displays the number of receive links.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-493
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Number of Activated Transmit Links
-
-
Displays the number of activated transmit links.
Number of Activated Receive Links
-
-
Displays the number of activated receive links.
A.9.3.4 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Link Status This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA link status.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the IMA Link States tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCTRUNK
-
-
Displays the VCTRUNK.
E1 Link
-
-
Displays E1 links.
Differential Delay Check Status
-
-
Displays the status of the deferential delay check.
Near-End Receiving Status
-
-
Displays the near-end receiving status.
Near-End Transmitting Status
-
-
Displays the near-end transmitting status.
Far-End Receiving Status
-
-
Displays the far-end receiving status.
Far-End Transmitting Status
-
-
Displays the far-end transmitting status.
A.9.3.5 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_ATM Interface Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM interface management.
Navigation Path 1.
A-494
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
2.
A Parameters Description
Click the ATM Interface Management tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the port.
Name
-
-
Displays or specifies the name of port.
Port Type
UNI
UNI
Specifies the type of ATM port.
NNI
l UNI: the port connecting user-side devices. For example, the UNI port applies to the user-side interface on the common ATM network or to the userside interface of the PE on the PSN network that transmits ATM PWE3 services. l NNI: the port connecting networkside devices. For example, the NNI port applies to the networkside interface on the common ATM network.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-495
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ATM Cell Payload Scrambling
Disabled
Enabled
Specifies whether to enable payload scrambling of ATM cells.
Enabled
l The ITU-T G.804 stipulates that the payload (48 bytes) of ATM cells must be scrambled before it is mapped into E1 signals. Therefore, it is recommended that you set ATM Cell Payload Scrambling to Enabled. l ATM Cell Payload Scrambling must assume the same value on the two ends of an ATM link. Otherwise, packet loss will occur. Min. VPI
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Max. VPI
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Min. VCI
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Max. VCI
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
VCC-Supported VPI Count
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Loopback
No Loopback
No Loopback
Specifies the loopback status of the port.
Outloop Inloop
A.9.3.6 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table This topic describes the parameters that are related to configuration of the ATM service class mapping table.
A-496
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv domain Management > ATM COS Mapping Configuration from the Function Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Mapping Relation ID
-
-
Specifies the ID of the mapping table.
Mapping Relation Name
-
-
Specifies the name of the mapping relationship.
UBR
BE AF11 AF12 AF13 AF21 AF22 AF23 AF31 AF32 AF33 AF41 AF42 AF43 EF CS6 CS7
UBR: BE
Displays or specifies the PHB service classes that correspond to different ATM service types. l Eight PHB service classes are available: BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. The OptiX RTN 950 provides different QoS policies for the queues of different service classes. l CS6 to CS7: highest service classes, mainly applicable to signaling transmission. l EF: fast forwarding, applicable to services of low transmission delays and low packet loss rates. l AF1 to AF4: assured forwarding, applicable to services that require an assured transmission rate rather than delay or jitter limits.
CBR RT-VBR NRT-VBR UBR+
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
CBR: EF RT-VBR: AF31 NRT-VBR: AF21 UBR+: AF11 PORT-TRANS: BE
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-497
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description NOTE The AF1 class includes three subclasses: AF11, AF12, and AF13. Only one of these subclasses can take effect for one queue. It is the same case with AF2, AF3, and AF4.
PORT-TRANS
l BE: best effort, applicable to services that do not require special processing.
A.9.3.7 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of the ATM service class mapping table.
Navigation Path
A-498
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv domain Management > ATM COS Mapping Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Mapping Relation ID
2 to 8
-
Specifies the ID of the mapping table.
Mapping Relation Name
-
-
Specifies the name of the mapping relationship.
UBR
BE AF11 AF12 AF13 AF21 AF22 AF23 AF31 AF32 AF33 AF41 AF42 AF43 EF CS6 CS7
UBR: BE CBR: EF RT-VBR: AF31 NRT-VBR: AF21 UBR+: AF11 PORT-TRANS: BE
Specifies the PHB service classes that correspond to different ATM service types. l Eight PHB service classes are available: BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. The OptiX RTN 950 provides different QoS policies for the queues of different service classes. l CS6 to CS7: highest service classes, mainly applicable to signaling transmission. l EF: fast forwarding, applicable to services of low transmission delays and low packet loss rates. l AF1 to AF4: assured forwarding, applicable to services that require an assured transmission rate rather than delay or jitter limits.
CBR RT-VBR NRT-VBR UBR+ PORT-TRANS
NOTE The AF1 class includes three subclasses: AF11, AF12, and AF13. Only one of these subclasses can take effect for one queue. It is the same case with AF2, AF3, and AF4.
l BE: best effort, applicable to services that do not require special processing.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-499
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.9.3.8 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM policy management.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > ATM Policy from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the ATM Policy tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Policy ID
-
1
Displays the policy ID of the ATM service.
Policy Name
-
-
Displays or specifies the policy name of the ATM service. The maximum length of the value is 64 bytes.
A-500
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Configuring ATM Traffic Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Type
UBR
UBR
Displays or specifies the type of the ATM service.
CBR RT-VBR NRT-VBR UBR+
l The UBR service is characterized by nonreal-time applications and many bursts. The UBR service does not specify traffic-related service guarantees. To be specific, the UBR service only requires that the network side provides the service with the best effort. The network side does not provide any assured QoS for the UBR service. In the case of network congestion, the UBR cells are discarded first. l The CBR service requires tightly constrained delay variation and requires that data be transmitted at a constant rate. In addition, the CBR service requests a static amount of bandwidth and the highest priority. The CBR service is characterized by stable traffic and few bursts. l The rt-VBR service requires tightly constrained delay and delay variation. Compared with the CBR service, the rtVBR service allows sources to transmit data at a rate that varies with time. Equivalently, the sources can be
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-501
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description described as bursty. In addition, the rt-VBR service does not require a static amount of bandwidth. l Compared with the rtVBR service, the nrtVBR service does not require tightly constrained delay or delay variation, and is intended for non-realtime applications. l The UBR+ service is supplementary to the UBR service and is intended for applications that require assured minimum cell rate, which is indicated by the minimum cell rate (MCR) parameter. The other characteristics of the UBR+ service are the same as the corresponding characteristics of the UBR service.
Traffic Type
-
-
Clp01Pcr(cell/s)
90 to 74539
-
Clp01Scr(cell/s)
90 to 74539
-
Clp0Pcr(cell/s)
90 to 74539
-
Clp0Scr(cell/s)
90 to 74539
-
Max. Cell Burst Size (cell)
2 to 200000
-
Cell Delay Variation Tolerance (0.1us)
7 to 13300000
-
Discard Traffic Frame
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
A-502
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
The Table A-89 lists the ATM service type, traffic type descriptor, and the related traffic parameters. ATM policies are configured based on these mapping relationships.
Displays or specifies the frame discarding mark in ATM policies. This parameter is effective to AAL5 traffic.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
UPC/NPC
Enabled
Disabled
Displays or specifies UPC/NPC.
Disabled
l UPC is user-side parameter control and NPC is network-side parameter control. l After UPC/NPC is enabled, the cells with a frame discarding mark will be discarded in network congestion.
Table A-89 Mapping relationship between ATM service types, traffic types, and traffic parameters ATM Service Type
ATM Traffic Type Descriptor
Traffic Parameter 1
Traffic Parameter 2
Traffic Parameter 3
Traffic Parameter 4
UBR
NoTrafficDescriptor
-
-
-
-
NoClpTaggingNoScr
Clp01Pcr
CDVT
-
-
NoClpNoScr
Clp01Pcr
-
-
-
NoClpNoScrCdvt
Clp01Pcr
CDVT
-
-
ClpTransparentNoScr
Clp01Pcr
CDVT
-
-
ClpNoTaggingNoScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Pcr
-
-
ClpTaggingNoScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Pcr
-
-
NoClpNoScr
Clp01Pcr
-
-
-
NoClpNoScrCdvt
Clp01Pcr
CDVT
-
-
NoClpScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp01Scr
MBS
-
ClpNoTaggingScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Scr
MBS
-
ClpTaggingScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Scr
MBS
-
ClpTransparentScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp01Scr
MBS
CDVT
NoClpScrCdvt
Clp01Pcr
Clp01Scr
MBS
CDVT
ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Scr
MBS
CDVT
ClpTaggingScrCdvt
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Scr
MBS
CDVT
atmnotrafficdescriptormcr
Clp01Mcr
-
-
-
atmnoclpmcr
Clp01Pcr
Clp01Mcr
-
-
CBR
nrtVBR
rtVBR
UBR+
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-503
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
ATM Service Type
ATM Traffic Type Descriptor
Traffic Parameter 1
Traffic Parameter 2
Traffic Parameter 3
Traffic Parameter 4
atmnoclpmcrcdvt
Clp01Pcr
Clp01Mcr
CDVT
-
Parameters for the application object Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
-
-
Displays the ID configured for the ATM service.
Service Name
-
-
Displays the name configured for the ATM service.
Link ID
-
-
Displays the link ID.
Direction
-
-
Displays the direction of the service.
A.9.3.9 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of ATM policies.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS Management > Policy Management > ATM Policy from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Policy ID
-
1
Specifies the policy ID of the ATM service. The policy ID can also be automatically allocated.
A-504
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Policy Name
Synchronous signal
Synchronous signal
Specifies the policy name of the ATM service. The maximum length of the value is 64 bytes.
Signaling Voice Data
NOTE You can select one of the five ATM service policy names from the drop-down list or enter the policy name.
Video
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-505
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Type
UBR
UBR
Specifies the type of the ATM service.
CBR RT-VBR NRT-VBR UBR+
l The UBR service is characterized by nonreal-time applications and many bursts. The UBR service does not specify traffic-related service guarantees. To be specific, the UBR service only requires that the network side provides the service with the best effort. The network side does not provide any assured QoS for the UBR service. In the case of network congestion, the UBR cells are discarded first. l The CBR service requires tightly constrained delay variation and requires that data be transmitted at a constant rate. In addition, the CBR service requests a static amount of bandwidth and the highest priority. The CBR service is characterized by stable traffic and few bursts. l The rt-VBR service requires tightly constrained delay and delay variation. Compared with the CBR service, the rtVBR service allows sources to transmit data at a rate that varies with time. Equivalently, the sources can be described as bursty. In
A-506
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Parameter
Value Range
A Parameters Description
Default Value
Description addition, the rt-VBR service does not require a static amount of bandwidth. l Compared with the rtVBR service, the nrtVBR service does not require tightly constrained delay or delay variation, and is intended for non-realtime applications. l The UBR+ service is supplementary to the UBR service and is intended for applications that require assured minimum cell rate, which is indicated by the minimum cell rate (MCR) parameter. The other characteristics of the UBR+ service are the same as the corresponding characteristics of the UBR service.
Traffic Type
-
-
Clp01Pcr(cell/s)
90 to 74539
-
Clp01Scr(cell/s)
90 to 74539
-
Clp0Pcr(cell/s)
90 to 74539
-
Clp0Scr(cell/s)
90 to 74539
-
Max. Cell Burst Size (cell)
2 to 200000
-
Cell Delay Variation Tolerance (0.1us)
7 to 13300000
-
Discard Traffic Frame
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
For the mapping relationships between ATM service types, ATM traffic type descriptors, and traffic parameters, see Table A-90. ATM policies are configured based on these mapping relationships.
Specifies the frame discarding mark in ATM policies. This parameter is effective to AAL5 traffic.
A-507
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
UPC/NPC
Enabled
Disabled
l UPC is user-side parameter control and NPC is network-side parameter control.
Disabled
l After UPC/NPC is enabled, the cells with a frame discarding mark will be discarded in network congestion.
Table A-90 Mapping relationship between ATM service types, ATM traffic types, and traffic parameters ATM Service Type
ATM Traffic Type Descriptor
Traffic Parameter 1
Traffic Parameter 2
Traffic Parameter 3
Traffic Parameter 4
UBR
NoTrafficDescriptor
-
-
-
-
NoClpTaggingNoScr
Clp01Pcr
CDVT
-
-
NoClpNoScr
Clp01Pcr
-
-
-
NoClpNoScrCdvt
Clp01Pcr
CDVT
-
-
ClpTransparentNoScr
Clp01Pcr
CDVT
-
-
ClpNoTaggingNoScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Pcr
-
-
ClpTaggingNoScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Pcr
-
-
NoClpNoScr
Clp01Pcr
-
-
-
NoClpNoScrCdvt
Clp01Pcr
CDVT
-
-
NoClpScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp01Scr
MBS
-
ClpNoTaggingScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Scr
MBS
-
ClpTaggingScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Scr
MBS
-
ClpTransparentScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp01Scr
MBS
CDVT
NoClpScrCdvt
Clp01Pcr
Clp01Scr
MBS
CDVT
ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Scr
MBS
CDVT
ClpTaggingScrCdvt
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Scr
MBS
CDVT
atmnotrafficdescriptormcr
Clp01Mcr
-
-
-
atmnoclpmcr
Clp01Pcr
Clp01Mcr
-
-
atmnoclpmcrcdvt
Clp01Pcr
Clp01Mcr
CDVT
-
CBR
nrtVBR
rtVBR
UBR+
A-508
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.9.3.10 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM service management.
Navigation Path In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM Service Management from the Function Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
-
-
Displays the service ID.
Service Name
-
-
Displays or specifies the service name.
Service Type
-
-
Displays the ATM service type.
Deployment Status
-
-
Displays the deployment status of the ATM service.
Connection Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Connection ID
-
-
Displays the connection ID of the ATM service.
Connection Name
-
-
Displays or specifies the connection name of the ATM service.
Source Port
-
-
Displays the source port of the ATM service.
PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the PW that carries ATM PWE3 services, if any.
Sink Port
-
-
Displays the sink board of the ATM service.
Source VPI
-
-
Displays the VPI of the source port of the ATM service.
Source VCI
-
-
Displays the VCI of the source port of the ATM service.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-509
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink VPI
-
-
Displays the VPI of the sink port of the ATM service.
Sink VCI
-
-
Displays the VCI of the sink port of the ATM service.
Uplink Policy
-
-
Displays the QoS policy of the uplink ATM connection.
Down link Policy
-
-
Displays the QoS policy of the downlink ATM connection.
Parameters for Port Attributes Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the port of the ATM IMA service.
Port Type
-
-
Displays the port type of the ATM IMA service.
Max. VPI
-
-
Displays the maximum VPI.
Max. VCI
-
-
Displays the maximum VCI.
VCC-Supported VPI Count
-
-
Displays the count of VPIs that are used for VC exchange.
Parameters for Bound Paths Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCTRUNK
-
-
Displays the VCTRUNK.
Level
-
-
Displays the level of bound paths.
Direction
-
-
Displays the direction of bound paths. The fixed value is bidirectional.
Bound Paths
-
-
Displays the bound paths.
A-510
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Number of Bound Paths
-
-
Displays the number of bound paths.
IMA Group Status
-
-
Displays the status of the IMA group.
Parameters of PWs Tab
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
General Attributes
PW ID
-
-
Displays the PW ID.
Work Status
-
-
Displays the working status of a PW.
-
-
Displays whether a PW is enabled.
-
-
Displays the PW signaling type.
PW Signaling Type
NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 uses static PWs only.
PW Type
-
-
l Displays the configured PW type. l This parameter corresponds to the connection type. The encapsulation type can be 1:1 or N: 1 if the connection type is PVP or PVC.
PW Direction
-
-
Displays the direction of the PW.
PW Encapsulation Type
-
-
Displays the encapsulation type of the packets on the PW. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 uses MPLS only.
-
-
Displays the configured PW Ingress label.
PW Outgoing Label / Sink Port
-
-
Displays the configured PW Egress label.
Peer LSR ID
-
-
Displays the LSR ID of the destination.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-511
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Tab
QoS
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tunnel Type
-
-
Displays the type of the tunnel.
Ingress Tunnel No
-
-
Displays the tunnel ID of the ingress tunnel.
Egress Tunnel No
-
-
Displays the tunnel ID of the egress tunnel.
Local Operating Status
-
-
Displays the local running status of PW.
Remote Operating Status
-
-
Displays the remote running status of PW.
Overall Operating Status
-
-
Displays the comprehensive working status of the PW.
Tunnel for Auto Selection
-
-
Displays the tunnel that is automatically selected.
PW ID
-
-
Displays the PW ID.
Direction
-
-
Displays the direction of the PW.
Bandwidth Limit
-
-
Displays or specifies whether the bandwidth limit is enabled. l This function can be used to limit the bandwidth of one or more PWs, or the bandwidth of one or more ATM PWE3 services, in an MPLS tunnel. (One ATM PWE3 service corresponds to one PW.) l An ATM PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ATM PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel.
A-512
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Tab
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CIR (Kbit/s)
-
-
Displays or specifies the committed information rate. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as PIR.
CBS (kbyte)
-
-
Displays or specifies the excess burst size of the PW.
PIR (kbit/s)
-
-
Displays or specifies the peak information rate. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as CIR.
Advanced Attributes
PBS (kbyte)
-
-
Displays or specifies the maximum excess burst size of the PW.
EXP
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Policy
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Control Word
Must Use
-
Displays or specifies whether to use the control word. In the MPLS packet switching network, the control word is used to transmit packet information.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
No Use
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-513
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Tab
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Channel Type
CW
-
l Displays or specifies the mode of PW connectivity check.
None Alert Label
l The value None indicates that the control word is not supported. That is, the PW connectivity check is not supported. l The value CW indicates that the control word is supported. l The value Alert Label indicates VCCV packets in Alert Label encapsulation mode. VCCV Verification Mode
Ping
-
None
l Displays or specifies the VCCV verification mode. The VCCV verification is used for PW connectivity check. l If the VCCV-ping function is required, do not set VCCV Verification Mode of PWs to None.
A-514
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Tab
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Max. Concatenated Cell Count
1 to 31
-
l Displays or specifies the maximum number of concatenated cells. l If the value 1 is assumed, only one ATM cell is encapsulated in one packet. If the value from 2 to 31 is assumed, a maximum of 2 to 31 ATM cells are encapsulated into one packet.
Packet Loading Time (us)
100 to 50000
-
l Displays or specifies the packet loading time. Once the packet loading time expires, the packet is sent out even if the concatenated cells are less than the maximum. l If Max. Concatenated Cell Count assumes the value 1, this parameter is ineffective. That is, the packet will be sent out once the cell is loaded.
Parameters for CoS Mapping Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the PW that carries the service.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-515
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS Mapping
-
-
Specifies the policy for mapping different ATM service levels to CoS priorities. By setting this parameter, different quality measures are provided for different ATM services.
Protection Group Parameters (PW APS) NOTE
The following parameters are available only after the PW APS protection group is configured.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the protection group to be created.
Working PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the working PW.
Protection PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the protection PW.
Protection Mode
-
-
Displays the protection mode.
Enabling Status
Enabled
-
l Displays or specifies the enabling status of the PW protection group.
Disabled
l During the creation of a protection group, set Enabling Status to Disabled. After the APS protection group is configured at both ends, set Enabling Status to Enabled. Switchover Mode
-
-
Displays the switching mode to be used when a PW fails. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supporting dual-ended switching.
A-516
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Restoration Mode
Non-revertive
-
l Specifies whether to switch services to the original working PW after the fault is rectified.
Revertive
l The value Revertive indicates that services are switched to the original working PW and the value Nonrevertive indicates that services are not switched to the original working PW. l The value Revertive is recommended. Switchover Restoration Time(min)
1 to 12
-
l Displays or specifies the WTR time of the protection group. l When the preset WTR time expires after the original working PW recovers, services are switched to the original working PW. l This parameter is available only when Restoration Mode is Revertive.
Switchover Delay Time (100ms)
0 to 100
-
l Displays or specifies the hold-off time of the protection group. l If this parameter is set to a value other than 0, the protection group does not trigger switching once it detects faults, but waits until the hold-off time expires, and then detects whether any faults persist. If any faults persist, the switching is triggered; otherwise, no switching is triggered.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-517
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Deployment Status
-
-
Display the deployment status of the protection group.
Switchover Status
-
-
Displays the switchover status of the protection group.
Protocol Status
-
-
Displays the enabling status of the protocol.
Working Path Status
-
-
Displays the status of the current working path.
Protection Path Status
-
-
Display the status of the current protection path.
A.9.3.11 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of ATM services.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM Service Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967295
-
Specifies the service ID.
Service Name
-
-
Specifies the service name.
A-518
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Type
UNIs-NNI
UNIs-NNI
l Specifies the type of the ATM service.
UNI-UNI
l UNIs-NNI: This value applies to ATM PWE3 services. The attributes in Connection, PW, and CoS Mapping need to be configured. l UNI-UNI: This value applies to common ATM services. Only the attributes in Connection need to be configured. Connection Type
PVC
PVC
PVP Transparent
Specifies the connection type of the ATM service. For common ATM services (UNI-UNI): l PVP: Only the VPIs of the source and sink are exchanged. l PVC: The VPIs and VCIs of the source and sink are exchanged. For ATM PWE3 services (UNIs-NNI): l PVP: This value applies to the N-to-1/1to-1 VPC encapsulation mode. l PVC: This value applies to the N-to-1/1to-1 VCC encapsulation mode. For transparently transmitted ATM services, set Connection Type to Transparent.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-519
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Type
No Protection
No Protection
l Specifies the protection mode of the PW. This parameter is available only when Service Type is UNIsNNI.
PW APS Slave Protection Pair
l Set this parameter according to the planning information.
Connection Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Connection Name
-
-
Specifies the name of the ATM connection.
Source Board
-
-
Specifies the source board of the ATM service.
Source Port
-
-
Specifies the source port of the ATM service.
Source VPI(eg.35,36-39)
UNI: 0 to 255
-
Specifies the VPI of the source port of the ATM service.
NNI: 0 to 4095 Source VCI(eg.35,36-39)
32 to 65535
-
Specifies the VCI of the source port of the ATM service.
PW ID
1 to 4294967295
-
Specifies the ID of the PW that carries services.
Sink Board
-
-
Specifies the sink board of the ATM service.
Sink Port
-
-
Specifies the sink board of the ATM service. NOTE This parameter does not need to be set if Service Type is UNIs-NNI. This parameter needs to be set if Service Type is UNI-UNI and the value must be different from that of the source board.
Sink VPI(eg.35,36-39)
UNI: 0 to 255
-
NNI: 0 to 4095
A-520
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Specifies the VPI of the sink port of the ATM service. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink VCI(eg.35,36-39)
32 to 65535
-
Specifies the VCI of the sink port of the ATM service.
Uplink Policy
-
-
Specifies the QoS policy of the uplink ATM connection.
Down link Policy
-
-
Specifies the QoS policy of the downlink ATM connection.
Parameters of PWs NOTE
If the parameter Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS, all the parameters of working and protection PWs need to be configured. This section considers the parameters of the working PW as an example.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
-
-
Specifies the ID of the PW that carries services.
Working Status
-
-
Displays the working status of the PW. NOTE This parameter is available only after the PW parameters are configured.
Enable Status
-
-
Displays the enabling status of the PW. NOTE This parameter is available only after the PW parameters are configured.
PW Signaling Type
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Static
Static
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Labels for static PWs need to be manually assigned.
A-521
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW Type
The ATM connection type is PVC:
The ATM connection type is PVC:
l Specifies the type of the PW.
l ATM n-to-one VCC cell transport
ATM n-to-one VCC cell transport
l ATM one-to-one VCC Cell Mode
The ATM connection type is PVP:
l In the case of ATM 1_to_1 encapsulation, one PW carries one VPC or VCC.
The ATM connection type is PVP:
ATM n-to-one VPC cell transport
l In the case of ATM n_to_1 encapsulation, one PW carries one or more VPCs or VCCs.
l ATM n-to-one VPC cell transport l ATM one-to-one VPC Cell Mode PW Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Displays the direction of the PW.
PW Encapsulation Type
MPLS
MPLS
Displays the encapsulation type of the packets on the PW.
PW Ingress Label / Source Port
16 to 1048575
-
Specifies the PW Ingress label.
PW Egress Label / Sink Port
16 to 1048575
-
Specifies the PW Egress label.
Tunnel Selection Mode
Manually
Manually
Displays the method to select tunnels.
Tunnel Type
MPLS
MPLS
Displays the type of the tunnel that carries the PW.
Tunnel
-
-
A tunnel needs to be selected. If no tunnel is available, creation of a PW will fail.
Peer LSR ID
-
-
Specifies the LSR ID of the PW at the remote end. If an existing tunnel is selected, the LSR ID will be automatically assigned.
A-522
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
QoS Parameters Table A-91 ATM services Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit
-
-
Specifies whether the bandwidth limit is enabled. l This function can be used to limit the bandwidth of one or more PWs, or the bandwidth of one or more ATM PWE3 services, in an MPLS tunnel. (One ATM PWE3 service corresponds to one PW.) l An ATM PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ATM PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel.
Policy
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
CIR (Kbit/s)
-
-
Specifies the committed information rate (CIR) of the PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as PIR.
CBS (kbyte)
-
-
Specifies the excess burst size of the PW.
PIR (kbit/s)
-
-
Specifies the peak information rate (PIR) of the PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as CIR.
PBS (kbyte)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Specifies the maximum excess burst size of the PW.
A-523
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
EXP
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
Parameters of Advanced Attributes Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Word
Must Use
Must Use
l Specifies whether to use the control word. In the MPLS packet switching network, the control word is used to transmit packet information.
No Use
l Set Control Word to Must Use if PW Type is ATM 1:1. Control Channel Type
CW
CW
None Alert Label
l Specifies the mode of PW connectivity check. l The value None indicates that the control word is not supported. That is, the PW connectivity check is not supported. l The value CW indicates that the control word is supported. l The value Alert Label indicates VCCV packets in Alert Label encapsulation mode.
VCCV Verification Mode
Ping
Ping
None
l Specifies the VCCV verification mode. The VCCV verification is used for PW connectivity check. l If the VCCV-Ping test is required, do not set this parameter to None.
A-524
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Max. Concatenated Cell Count
1 to 31
10
l Specifies the maximum number of concatenated cells. l If the value 1 is assumed, only one ATM cell is encapsulated in one packet. If the value from 2 to 31 is assumed, a maximum of 2 to 31 ATM cells are encapsulated into one packet.
Packet Loading Time (us)
100 to 50000
1000
l Specifies the packet loading time. Once the packet loading time expires, the packet is sent out even if the concatenated cells are less than the maximum. l If Max. Concatenated Cell Count assumes the value 1, this parameter is ineffective. That is, the packet will be sent out once the cell is loaded.
Protection Group Parameters (PW APS) NOTE
The parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Type
-
-
Specifies the protection type.
Protection Group ID
-
-
Specifies the protection group ID.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-525
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enabling Status
Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies the enabling status of the PW protection group.
Enabled
l During the creation of a protection group, set Enabling Status to Disabled. After the APS protection group is configured at both ends, set Enabling Status to Enabled. Protection Mode
-
-
Displays the protection mode. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports 1:1 protection mode.
Working PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the working PW.
Protection PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the protection PW.
Switching Mode
-
-
Displays the switching mode to be used when a PW fails. NOTE The OptiX RTN 950 supports dual-ended switching.
Revertive Mode
Non-revertive
Revertive
Revertive
l This parameter specifies whether to switch services back to the original working PW after it recovers. l The value Revertive indicates that services are switched to the original working PW and the value Nonrevertive indicates that services are not switched to the original working PW. l The value Revertive is recommended.
A-526
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Switchover Restoration Time(min)
1 to 12
1
l Specifies the WTR time of the protection group. l When the preset WTR time expires after the original working PW recovers, services are switched to the original working PW. l This parameter is available only when Restoration Mode is Revertive. l The default value is recommended.
Switchover Delay Time (100ms)
0 to 100
0
l Specifies the hold-off time of the protection group. l If this parameter is set to a value other than 0, the protection group does not trigger switching once it detects faults, but waits until the hold-off time expires, and then detects whether any faults persist. If any faults persist, the switching is triggered; otherwise, no switching is triggered. l The default value is recommended.
-
Detection mode
-
Displays the detection mode of the PW APS protection group.
OAM Parameters NOTE
l The OAM parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS. l To configure PW OAM parameters, choose Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management > PW OAM Parameter from the Function Tree.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-527
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
OAM Status
-
-
Displays the enabling status of PW OAM.
Detection Mode
Auto-Sensing
Auto-Sensing
l Specifies the detection mode of OAM packets.
Manual
l Manual: The connectivity check (CC) packets are sent at the interval specified by the user. l Auto-Sensing: The connectivity check (CC) packets are sent at the interval of receiving PW OAM packets. l If Detection Mode is set to Manual, you need to set the PW OAM detection packets to be received and transmitted. l The value AutoSensing is recommended.
A-528
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Detection Packet Type
CV
CV
l CV: The detection packets are sent at a fixed interval.
FFD
l FFD: The detection packets are sent at the interval specified by the user. l If Detection Mode is set to Auto-Sensing, this parameter specifies the PW OAM detection packets to be transmitted. l If Detection Mode is set to Manual, this parameter specifies the PW OAM detection packets to be received and transmitted. l The value FFD is assumed for PW APS and the value CV is assumed for continuous connectivity check on PWs. Detection Packet Period (ms)
3.3
50
10
l Specifies the period of detection packets. l This parameter is configurable when Detection Packet Type is FFD and assumes the fixed value of 1000 when Detection Packet Type is CV.
20 50 100 200 500
l Set this parameter to 3.3 for PW APS. LSR ID to be Received
-
-
Specifies the LSR ID to be received.
PW ID to be Received
-
-
Specifies the PW ID to be received.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-529
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Protection Group Parameters (Slave Protection Pair) NOTE
The parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set to Slave Protection Pair.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Mode
-
-
Displays the protection mode.
Protection Group ID
-
-
Specifies the ID of the slave protection pair. The switching of the master PW APS protection group triggers the switching of the slave PW APS protection group simultaneously.
Working PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the working PW in the slave protection pair.
Protection PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the protection PW in the slave protection pair.
Parameters for CoS Mapping Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the PW that carries service.
CoS Mapping
-
-
Specifies the policy for mapping different ATM service levels to CoS priorities. By setting this parameter, different quality measures are provided for different ATM services.
A.9.3.12 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Segment and End Attributes This topic describes the parameters that are related to segment end attributes of ATM OAM.
A-530
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Segment End Attributes tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source
-
-
Displays the source node of the ATM/IMA service.
Sink
-
-
Displays the sink node of the ATM/IMA service.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-531
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Connection Direction
Source
-
Displays the direction of the ATM connection.
Sink
l Source: indicates the forward direction. – For common ATM services (UNIUNI), Source indicates the direction from the source end to the sink end of the ATM connection. – For ATM PWE3 services (UNINNI), Source indicates the direction from the UNI port side to the MPLS interface side. l Sink: indicates the backward direction. – For common ATM services (UNIUNI), Sink indicates the direction from the sink end to the source end of the ATM connection. – For ATM PWE3 services (UNINNI), Sink indicates the direction from the MPLS interface side to the UNI port side.
A-532
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Segment and End Attribute
Non segment and Endpoint
Non segment and Endpoint
Specifies the segment and end attributes of the source and sink of the ATM connection.
Segment point Endpoint Segment and Endpoint
l Non segment and endpoint: intermediate point, which refers to the OAM node between two segment points or two end points. Therefore, intermediate points can be further classified into intermediate points between segment points, and intermediate points between end points. – Upon detecting a fault, an intermediate point reports the corresponding alarms and inserts segment AIS cells and end AIS cells to the downstream. Afterwards, the intermediate point periodically sends these cells. – An intermediate point does not catch any AIS/RDI cells. l Segment point: an end point of a segment. One ATM link consists of multiple segments. – Upon detecting a fault, a segment point reports the corresponding alarms and inserts end AIS cells to the downstream. Afterwards, the segment point
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-533
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description periodically sends these cells. – A segment point catches segment AIS/RDI cells only. l End point: an end point of an ATM link. It is usually an edge point on the ATM network. – Upon detecting a fault, an end point reports the corresponding alarms but does not insert any AIS cells. – An end point catches end AIS/ RDI cells only. l Segment and endpoint: a segment-end point, or an edge point of a segment and an end. – Upon detecting a fault, a segmentend point reports the corresponding alarms but does not insert any AIS cells. – A segment-end point catches the AIS/RDI cells of a segment and an end.
A.9.3.13 Parameter Description: ATM OMA Management_CC Activation Status This topic describes the parameters that are related to the CC activation status of ATM OAM.
Navigation Path
A-534
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the CC Activation Status tab. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source
-
-
Displays the source node of the ATM/IMA service.
Sink
-
-
Displays the sink node of the ATM/IMA service.
Connection Direction
Source
-
Specifies the connection direction.
Sink
l Source: indicates the forward direction. – For common ATM services (UNIUNI), Source indicates the direction from the source end to the sink end of the ATM connection. – For ATM PWE3 services (UNINNI), Source indicates the direction from the UNI port side to the MPLS interface side. l Sink: indicates the backward direction. – For common ATM services (UNIUNI), Sink indicates the direction from the sink end to the source end of the ATM connection. – For ATM PWE3 services (UNINNI), Sink indicates the direction from the MPLS interface side to the UNI port side.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-535
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Segment and End Attribute
-
-
Specifies the segment and end attributes of nodes. l Segment point: an end point of a segment. One ATM link consists of multiple segments. Segment CC cells are terminated at segment points. l End point: an end point of an ATM link. It is usually an edge point on an ATM network. End-to-end CC cells are terminated at end points.
A-536
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CC Activate Flag
Deactivate
-
l Specifies the CC activation flag.
Source activate Sink activate Source + sink activate
l Deactivate: This node does not transmit or receive CC cells. l Source activate: This point transmits but does not receive CC cells. l Sink activate: This point receives but does not transmit CC cells. If this point does not receive any service cells or CC cells within a time interval of 3.5 (±0.5) seconds, it will report the LOC alarm and transmit AIS cells in the forward direction. l Source + sink activate: This node transmits and receives CC cells. If this point does not receive any service cells or CC cells within a time interval of 3.5 (±0.5) seconds, it will report the LOC alarm and transmit AIS cells in the forward direction. l Once the node receives any CC cells or service cells, the LOC alarm will be cleared.
A.9.3.14 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Remote End Loopback Status This topic describes the parameters that are related to the remote end loopback status of ATM OAM.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-537
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Remote Loopback Test tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source
-
-
Displays the source node of the ATM/IMA service.
Sink
-
-
Displays the sink node of the ATM/IMA service.
A-538
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Connection Direction
Source
-
Displays the direction of the ATM connection.
Sink
l Source: indicates the forward direction. – For common ATM services (UNIUNI), Source indicates the direction from the source end to the sink end of the ATM connection. – For ATM PWE3 services (UNINNI), Source indicates the direction from the UNI port side to the MPLS interface side. l Sink: indicates the backward direction. – For common ATM services (UNIUNI), Sink indicates the direction from the sink end to the source end of the ATM connection. – For ATM PWE3 services (UNINNI), Sink indicates the direction from the MPLS interface side to the UNI port side.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-539
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Segment and End Attribute
-
-
Specifies the segment and end attribute. l Segment LB cells are looped back only at a Segment point, Segment and Endpoint, or Non segment and Endpoint. l End-to-end LB cells are looped back only at an Endpoint or Segment and Endpoint.
Loopback Point NE
-
-
l Specifies the NE where the loopback point is located. l Before an end-to-end LB test, you need to set end points in the test domain. After the test, remove the end points. l Before a segment-tosegment LB test, you need to set segment points in the test domain. After the test, remove the segment points.
-
Test Result
-
Displays whether the loopback command is successfully issued.
A.9.3.15 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_LLID This topic describes the parameters that are related to LLID configuration.
Navigation Path
A-540
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the LLID tab.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Country Code (Hexadecimal Code)
-
00 00
Displays or specifies the country code of the ATM service. The value is 2 bytes in length.
Network Code (Hexadecimal Code)
-
00 01
Displays or specifies the network code of the ATM service. The value is 2 bytes in length.
NE Code (Hexadecimal Code)
-
00 30 00 04 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
l Displays or specifies the NE code of the ATM service. The value is 11 bytes in length. l The default NE code can be used if it is unique on the network. l NE code and NE ID are associated. Therefore, each NE on the network has a unique NE code.
A.10 Clock Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks. A.10.1 Physical Clock Parameters This topic describes physical clock parameters. A.10.2 CES ACR Clock Parameters This topic describes CES ACR clock parameters. A.10.3 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports This topic describes parameters that are used for configuring an external time port as an RS-485 monitoring port.
A.10.1 Physical Clock Parameters This topic describes physical clock parameters. A.10.1.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source. A.10.1.2 Parameter Description: Priority Table for the PLL Clock Source of the External Clock Port Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-541
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table for the phase-locked loop (PLL) clock source of the external clock port. A.10.1.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet This topic describes the parameters that are related to a clock subnet. A.10.1.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality This topic describes the parameters that are related clock quality. A.10.1.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control This topic describes the parameters that are related to SSM output control. A.10.1.6 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the clock ID function. A.10.1.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to clock source restoration. A.10.1.8 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching This topic describes the parameters that are related to the switching status of a clock source. A.10.1.9 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching Conditions This section describes the parameters that are related to the switching conditions of clock sources. A.10.1.10 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source This topic describes the parameters of the output phase-locked source of the external clock source. A.10.1.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status This topic describes the parameters that are related to the clock synchronization status.
A.10.1.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.
Navigation Path
A-542
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Source Priority.
2.
Click the System Clock Source Priority List tab.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Source
-
-
l External clock source 1 indicates the external clock source at the CLK or TIME1 port on the CST or CSH board in physical slot 7. External clock source 2 indicates the external clock source at the CLK or TIME1 port on the CST or CSH board in physical slot 8. l The internal clock source is always at the lowest priority and indicates that the NE works in the free-run mode. l The clock sources and the corresponding clock source priority levels are determined according to the clock synchronization schemes.
External Clock Source Mode
2Mbit/s
2Mbit/s
2MHz
l This parameter indicates the type of the external clock source signal. l This parameter is set according to the external clock signal. In normal cases, the external clock signal is a 2 Mbit/s signal.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-543
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Synchronous Status Byte
SA4 to SA8
SA4
l This parameter is valid only when External Clock Source Mode is set to 2Mbit/s. l This parameter indicates which bit of the TS0 in odd frames of the external clock signal is used to transmit the SSM. l This parameter needs to be set only when the SSM or extended SSM is enabled. In normal cases, the external clock sources use the SA4 to transmit the SSM.
Clock Source Priority Sequence (Highest:1)
-
-
Displays the priority sequence of clock sources. 1 indicates the highest clock source priority.
A.10.1.2 Parameter Description: Priority Table for the PLL Clock Source of the External Clock Port This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table for the phase-locked loop (PLL) clock source of the external clock port.
Navigation Path
A-544
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Source Priority from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Priority for PLL Clock Sources of 1st External Output tab.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for configuring the priority table for the PLL clock source of the external clock port Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Source
-
Internal Clock Source
l When the PLL clock source of the external clock port extracts the system clock (namely, the local clock of the NE), Clock Source takes its default value Internal Clock Source. In this case, no manual configuration is required. l When the PLL clock source of the external clock port needs to extract the clock from an SDH line board, clock from a radio link, clock from a PDH tributary board, or synchronous Ethernet clock, set Clock Source to the corresponding clock source according to the network planning information.
Current Status
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Displays the valid status of clock sources.
A-545
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Lock Status
-
-
l The PLL clock source of the external clock port extracts only an unlocked clock source. l If a clock source is in locked state, the PLL clock source of the external clock port does not extract the clock source until the clock source is changed from the locked state to the unlocked state. l The internal clock source should not be in locked state.
Clock Source Priority (Highest: 1)
-
-
Displays the priority level of a clock source. 1 is the highest priority.
A.10.1.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet This topic describes the parameters that are related to a clock subnet.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration.
2.
Click the Clock Subnet tab.
Parameters for Setting a Clock Subnet Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Affiliated Subnet
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this parameter.
A-546
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Status
Start Extended SSM Protocol
Stop SSM Protocol
l The SSM protocol is a scheme used for synchronous management on an SDH network and indicates that the SSM is passed by the lower four bits of the S1 byte and can be exchanged between the nodes. The SSM protocol ensures that the equipment automatically selects the clock source of the highest quality and highest priority, thus preventing mutual clock tracing.
Start Standard SSM Protocol Stop SSM Protocol
l After the standard SSM protocol is started, the NE first performs the protection switching on the clock source according to the clock quality level information provided by the S1 byte. If the quality level of the clock source is the same, the NE then performs the protection switching according to the clock priority table. That is, the NE selects an unlocked clock source that is of the highest quality and highest priority from all the current available clock sources as the clock source to be synchronized and traced by the local station. l If the SSM protocol is stopped, it indicates
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-547
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description that the S1 byte is not used. The NE selects and switches a clock source only according to the sequence specified in the priority table. The clock source of the highest priority is used as the clock source to be traced. l After the SSM protocol is stopped, each NE performs the protection switching on the clock according to the preset priority table of the clock source only when the clock source of a higher priority is lost.
Clock Source
A-548
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
This parameter indicates the clock source that is configured for an NE. In Clock Source Priority, you can set whether to add or delete a clock source.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Source ID
(None)
(None)
l This parameter is valid only when the extended SSM protocol is started.
1 to 15
l Clock source IDs are allocated for the following clock sources only: – External clock source – Internal clock source of the node that accesses the external clock sources – Internal clock source of the joint node of a ring and a chain or the joint node of two rings – Line clock source that enters the ring when the intra-ring line clock source is configured at the joint node of a ring and a chain or the joint node of two rings
A.10.1.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality This topic describes the parameters that are related clock quality.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration.
2.
Click the Received Quality tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-549
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Clock Source Quality Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Source
-
-
This parameter indicates the name of the configured clock source. In Clock Source Priority, you can set whether to add or delete a clock source.
Configured Quality
Unknown Synchronization Quality
Automatic Extraction
This parameter specifies the quality level that is configured for the clock source. This function is required only in a special scenario or in a test. Generally, this parameter need not be set.
-
This parameter indicates the clock source quality signal received by the NE. The NE extracts the clock source quality signal from the S1 byte of each clock source.
G.811 Clock Signal G.812 Transit Clock Signal G.812 Local Clock Signal G.813 SDH Equipment Timing Source (SETS) Signal Do Not Use For Synchronization Automatic Extraction Received Quality
-
Parameters for Manual Setting of 0 Quality Level Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Name
-
-
This parameter indicates the name of the NE.
A-550
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Quality Level 0
Do Not Use For Synchronization
Do Not Use For Synchronization
This parameter specifies the clock quality whose level is manually set to zero.
G.811 Reference Clock Between G.811 Reference Clock and G.812 Transit Clock G.812 Transit Clock Between G.812 Transit Clock and G.812 Local Clock G.812 Local Clock Between G.812 Local Clock and synchronous equipment timing source (SETS) SETS Clock Between synchronous equipment timing source (SETS) and quality unavailable
l Do Not Use For Synchronization: the notification information in the reverse direction of the selected synchronization clock source to avoid direct mutual locking of adjacent NEs. l G.811 Reference Clock: the clock signal specified in ITU-T G. 811. l Between G.811 Reference Clock and G.812 Transit Clock: lower than the quality level of the clock signal specified in ITU-T G.811 but higher than the quality level of the transit exchange clock signal specified in ITU-T G. 812. l G.812 Transit Clock: the transit exchange clock signal specified in ITU-T G.812. l Between G.812 Transit Clock and G. 812 Local Clock: lower than the quality level of the transit exchange clock signal specified in ITU-T G. 812 but higher than the quality level of the local exchange clock signal specified in ITU-T G.812. l G.812 Local Clock: the local exchange
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-551
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description clock signal specified in ITU-T G.812. l Between G.812 Local Clock and synchronous equipment timing source (SETS): lower than the quality level of the local exchange clock signal specified in ITU-T G.812 but higher than the quality level of the clock signal of the SETS. l SETS Clock: the clock signal of the SETS. l Between synchronous equipment timing source (SETS) and quality unavailable: lower than the quality level of the clock signal of the SETS but higher than the quality level unavailable in the synchronous timing source.
A.10.1.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control This topic describes the parameters that are related to SSM output control.
Navigation Path
A-552
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration.
2.
Click the SSM Output tab.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Line Port
-
-
l This parameter indicates the name of the line clock port. l Line Port: indicates the SSM quality information output port of the current available line clock source and the external clock source. This output port can transmit the quality information of the clock source by outputting the S1 byte to the downstream NE.
Output S1 Byte Info
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
l Output S1 Byte Info is valid only when the SSM protocol or the extended SSM protocol is started. l Output S1 Byte Info indicates whether the SSM is output at the line port. l When the line port is connected to an NE in the same clock subnet, set Output S1 Byte Info to Enabled. Otherwise, set this parameter to Disabled.
A.10.1.6 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the clock ID function.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration.
2.
Click the Clock ID Output tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-553
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Line Port
-
-
l This parameter indicates the name of the line clock port. l Line Port: indicates the SSM quality information output port of the current available line clock source and the external clock source. This output port can transmit the quality information of the clock source by outputting the S1 byte to the downstream NE.
Output Clock ID
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
l Output Clock ID is valid only when the extended SSM protocol is started. l Output Clock ID indicates whether the clock source ID is output at the line port. l If the line ports are connected to the NEs in the same clock subnet and if the extended SSM protocol is started on the opposite NE, Output Clock ID is set to Enabled. Otherwise, this parameter is set to Disabled.
A.10.1.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to clock source restoration.
A-554
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Switching.
2.
Click the Clock Source Reversion tab.
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Name
-
-
This parameter indicates the name of the NE.
Higher Priority Clock Source Reversion
Auto-Revertive
Auto-Revertive
l When the quality of a higher-priority clock source degrades, the NE automatically switches the clock source to a lowerpriority clock source. If this parameter is set to Auto-Revertive, the NE automatically switches the clock source to the higherpriority clock source when this higherpriority clock source restores. If this parameter is set to Non-Revertive, the NE does not automatically switch the clock source to the higher-priority clock source when this higher-priority clock source restores.
Non-Revertive
l Correct setting of Clock Source Switching Condition ensures the reliability of the clock source switching. To improve the clock quality, select AutoRevertive. Otherwise, to prevent jitter of the clock, generally, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Non-Revertive.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-555
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Source WTR Time(min.)
0 to 12
5
l This parameter specifies the duration from the time when the clock source restoration is detected to the time when the clock source switching is triggered. This parameter is used to avoid frequent switching of the clock source due to instability of the clock source state within a short time. l This parameter is valid only when Higher Priority Clock Source Reversion is set to AutoRevertive.
A.10.1.8 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching This topic describes the parameters that are related to the switching status of a clock source.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Source Switching.
2.
Click the Clock Source Switching tab.
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Source
-
-
This parameter indicates the name of the clock source.
Current Status
Valid
-
This parameter indicates whether the clock source is valid.
Invalid
A-556
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Lock Status
Lock
-
l This parameter specifies the locking status of the clock source in the priority table.
Unlock
l Lock: A clock source in the priority table is in the locked state. The clock source in the locked state cannot be switched. l Unlock: A clock source in the priority table is in the unlocked state. The clock source in the unlocked state can be switched. Switching Source
-
-
This parameter indicates the clock source to be traced by the NE after the switching.
Switching Status
Normal
-
This parameter indicates the switching status of the current clock source.
Manual Switching Forced Switching
A.10.1.9 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching Conditions This section describes the parameters that are related to the switching conditions of clock sources.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source Switching from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Clock Source Switching Conditions tab.
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Name
-
-
Displays the name of the NE.
Clock Source
-
-
Displays the clock source.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-557
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
AIS Alarm
Yes
No
l The default value is recommended.
No
l When this parameter is set to Yes, it indicates that clock source switching occurs if the clock source reports the AIS alarm. l When this parameter is set to No, it indicates that no clock source switching occurs if the clock source reports the AIS alarm. B1 BER ThresholdCrossing
-
-
The parameter is invalid.
RLOS,RLOF and OOF/ RLOC Alarms
Yes
Yes
This parameter indicates that clock switching occurs when the clock source reports the RLOS, RLOF, OOF, or LOC alarm.
CV Threshold-Crossing
-
-
The parameter is invalid.
CV Threshold
-
-
The parameter is invalid.
B2-EXC Alarm
Yes
No
l The default value is recommended.
No
l When this parameter is set to Yes, it indicates that clock source switching occurs if the clock source reports the B2-EXC alarm. l When this parameter is set to No, it indicates that no clock source switching occurs if the clock source reports the B2-EXC alarm.
A.10.1.10 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source This topic describes the parameters of the output phase-locked source of the external clock source. A-558
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Phase-Locked Source Output by External Clock.
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
2M Phase-Locked Source Number
External Clock Source 1
-
This parameter indicates the number of the external clock source output of the NE.
External Clock Output Mode
2Mbit/s
2Mbit/s
l This parameter specifies the mode of the output clock.
External Clock Source 2
2MHz
l This parameter needs to be set according to the requirements of the interconnected equipment. Generally, the output external clock signal is a 2 Mbit/s signal. External Clock Output Timeslot
SA4 to SA8
ALL
ALL
l This parameter is valid only when External Clock Output Mode is set to 2Mbit/s. l This parameter indicates which bit of the TS0 in odd frames of the output clock signal is used to transmit the SSM. l If this parameter is set to ALL, it indicates that all the bits of the TS0 are used to transmit the SSM. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-559
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
External Source Output Threshold
Threshold Disabled
Threshold Disabled
l This parameter specifies the lowest quality of the output clock. If the clock quality is lower than the value of this parameter, it indicates that the external clock source does not output any clock signal.
Not Inferior to G.813 SETS Signal Not Inferior to G.812 Local Signal Not Inferior to G.812 Transit Clock Signal Not Inferior to G.811 Clock Signal
l If this parameter is set to Threshold Disabled, it indicates that the external clock source always outputs the clock signal. l It is recommended that you use the default value. 2M Phase-Locked Source Failure Condition
No Failure Condition
No Failure Condition
AIS LOF AIS OR LOF
l This parameter specifies the failure condition of the 2 Mbit/s phase-locked clock source. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
2M Phase-Locked Source Failure Action
Shut Down Output
Shut Down Output
2M Output S1 Byte Unavailable Send AIS
l This parameter is valid only when 2M PhaseLocked Source Failure Condition is not set to No Failure Condition. l This parameter specifies the operation of the 2 Mbit/s phaselocked loop (PLL) when the 2 Mbit/s phase-locked clock source meets the failure conditions. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
A-560
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.10.1.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status This topic describes the parameters that are related to the clock synchronization status.
Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Synchronization Status.
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Name
-
-
This parameter indicates the name of the NE.
NE Clock Mode
-
-
This parameter indicates the working mode of the NE clock.
S1 Byte Synchronization Quality Info
-
-
This parameter indicates the synchronization quality information of the S1 byte.
S1 Byte Clock Synchronous Source
-
-
This parameter indicates the clock synchronization source of the S1 byte.
Synchronous Source
-
-
This parameter indicates the synchronization source.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-561
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Data Output Method in Holdover Mode
Normal Data Output
Normal Data Output
l When all the reference timing signals are lost, the slave clock changes to the holdover mode. At this time, the slave clock works based on the latest frequency information stored before the reference timing signals are lost. Then, the frequency of the oscillator drifts slowly to ensure that the offset between the frequency of the slave clock and the reference frequency is very small. As a result, the impact caused by the drift is limited within the specified requirement.
Keep the Latest Data
l Normal Data Output: The slave clock works based on the latest frequency information stored before the reference timing signals are lost, and the holdover duration depends on the size of the phase-locked clock register on the equipment. The holdover duration can be up to 24 hours. l Keep the Latest Data: The slave clock works in holdover mode all the time based on the latest frequency information stored before the reference timing signals are lost.
A.10.2 CES ACR Clock Parameters This topic describes CES ACR clock parameters. A-562
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.10.2.1 Parameter Description: ACR Clock Source This topic describes parameters that are related to the ACR clock source. A.10.2.2 Parameter Description: Clock Domain This topic describes parameters that are related to clock domains. A.10.2.3 Parameter Description: Clock Domain_Creation This topic describes the parameters for creating a clock domain.
A.10.2.1 Parameter Description: ACR Clock Source This topic describes parameters that are related to the ACR clock source.
Navigation Path In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Clock > ACR Clock from the Function Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ACR Clock Source
-
-
Identifies the ACR clock domain.
CES Service
-
-
This parameter displays or specifies the CES service that the master ACR clock source uses.
Current CES Service
-
-
This parameter displays the CES service from which the current ACR clock source is obtained.
A.10.2.2 Parameter Description: Clock Domain This topic describes parameters that are related to clock domains.
Navigation Path In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Domain from the Function Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Domain
-
-
Displays the clock domain.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-563
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Domain Board
-
-
Displays the board where the clock domain is located.
Clock Port
-
-
Displays the Smart E1 ports that are bound to a clock domain.
A.10.2.3 Parameter Description: Clock Domain_Creation This topic describes the parameters for creating a clock domain.
Navigation Path 1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Domain from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Domain
System Clock Domain
System Clock Domain
Specifies the clock domain to be bound.
CES ACR1 Clock Domain CES ACR2 Clock Domain CES ACR3 Clock Domain CES ACR4 Clock Domain Clock Domain Board
-
-
Displays the board where the clock domain is located.
Board
-
-
Specifies the board where the Smart E1 port is located.
Available Port
-
-
Displays the Smart E1 ports that are not bound to a clock domain.
Selected Port
-
-
Displays the Smart E1 ports that are bound to a clock domain.
A-564
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.10.3 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports This topic describes parameters that are used for configuring an external time port as an RS-485 monitoring port.
Navigation Path In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Auxiliary Interface from the Function Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the port that functions as the auxiliary port.
Interface Mode
1st external clock
1st external clock
Specifies the working mode of the auxiliary port.
2nd external clock 1st external time 2nd external time MON Orderwire S1/F1 Commissioning serial port
l If the running status of the outdoor cabinet needs to be monitored, set Interface Mode to MON. l For an external time input/output port, set Interface Mode to 1st external time or 2nd external time.
A.11 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces This topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces. A.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features. A.11.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced This topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features. A.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port This topic describes the parameters that are used for F1 data ports. A.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port This topic describes the parameters that are used for broadcast data ports. A.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface This topic describes the parameters that are used for environment monitoring interfaces.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-565
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the General tab.
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Call Waiting Time (s)
1 to 9
9
l This parameter indicates the waiting time after the local station dials the number. If the calling station does not receive the response message from the called station within the call waiting time, it automatically removes the communication connection. l If less than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire subnet, it is recommended that you set this parameter to five seconds. If more than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire subnet, it is recommended that you set this parameter to nine seconds. l The call waiting time should be set to the same for all the NEs.
Dialling Mode
Pulse Dual-Tone Frequency
A-566
Dual-Tone Frequency
This parameter indicates the dialling mode of the orderwire phone.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Conference Call
-
888
l This parameter indicates the telephone number of the network-wide orderwire conference call. l When an OptiX RTN 950 dials the telephone number 888, the orderwire phones of all the NEs on the orderwire subnet ring. When an OptiX RTN 950 receives the call, the orderwire phones on the other NEs do not ring. In this case, the orderwire point-to-multipoint group call changes to a point-to-point call between two NEs. l The telephone number of the orderwire conference call should be the same for all the nodes on the same subnet. l The telephone number of the orderwire conference call must have the same length as the telephone number of the orderwire phone (phone 1) at the local site.
100 to 99999999
Phone 1
101
l This parameter specifies the orderwire phone number of the local station. An addressing call refers to a point-to-point call. l The length of the orderwire phone number of each NE should be the same. It is recommended that you set the phone number to a three-digit number. l The orderwire phone number of each NE should be unique. It is recommended that the phone numbers are allocated from 101 for the NEs in a sequential order according to the NE IDs. l The orderwire phone number cannot be set to the group call number 888 and cannot start with 888.
Available Orderwire Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the available port for the orderwire phone.
Selected Orderwire Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the selected port for the orderwire phone.
A.11.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced This topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-567
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Advanced tab.
Parameters for Bytes Occupied by Orderwire Phones Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Orderwire Occupied Bytes
E1
E1
l This parameter specifies the overhead byte that is used to transmit the orderwire signals.
E2
l Regardless the parameter value, the radio link always uses a customized overhead byte to transmit the orderwire signals. Hence, this parameter should be set according to the occupied SDH overhead bytes in the ordinary SDH.
A.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port This topic describes the parameters that are used for F1 data ports.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the F1 Data Port tab.
Parameters Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Available Data Path
-
-
l This parameter indicates the available F1 data channel. l Two data channels should be selected for the configuration.
Number
-
-
This parameter indicates the number of the F1 data port.
Data Channel 1
-
-
l If an SDH optical or electrical line port is selected, this parameter corresponds to the F1 byte in the SDH frame at the line port. l If an IF port is selected, this parameter corresponds to the customized F1 byte in the microwave frame at the IF port.
A-568
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Parameter
Value Range
A Parameters Description
Default Value
Description l If F1 is selected, this parameter corresponds to the F1/S1 interface on the AUX board. The F1/S1 interface complies with ITU-T G.703 and operates at the rate of 64 kbit/s.
Data Channel 2
A.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port This topic describes the parameters that are used for broadcast data ports.
Navigation Path 1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Broadcast Data Port tab.
Parameters for Broadcast Data Ports Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Overhead Byte
SERIAL1 to SERIAL4
SERIAL1
l In the case of an SDH optical/electrical line, the preset overhead byte is used to transmit the asynchronous data services. l In the case of a radio link, a customized serial overhead byte in the microwave frame is used to transmit the asynchronous data services.
Broadcast Data Source
-
No Data
l When this parameter is set to the SERIAL1, the F1/S1 interface on the corresponding AUX board is used. l When this parameter is set to the SDH optical/electrical line port, the value of Overhead Byte of this port is used. l When this parameter is set to the IF port, the customized Serial byte in the microwave frame of this port is used.
Available Broadcast Data Sink
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
-
-
This parameter indicates the available broadcast data sink.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-569
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Selected Broadcast Data Sink
-
-
l When this parameter is set to the SERIAL1, the F1/S1 interface on the corresponding AUX board is used. l When this parameter is set to the SDH optical/electrical line port, the value of Overhead Byte of this port is used. l When this parameter is set to the IF port, the customized Serial byte in the microwave frame of this port is used.
A.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface This topic describes the parameters that are used for environment monitoring interfaces.
Navigation Path Select the AUX board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Environment Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor Interface from the Function Tree.
Parameters for the General Attributes Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Operation Object
-
-
This parameter indicates the operation object.
Relay Control Mode
Auto Control
Auto Control
l Auto Control: If an alarm is reported, the alarming relay is started up automatically. Otherwise, the alarming relay is shut down.
Manual Control
l Manual Control: Relay Status in Major Alarm(K0) and Relay Status in Critical Alarm(K1) need to be set. Relay Status in Major Alarm(K0)
Disabled Enabled
Disabled
l This parameter indicates that the status of the relay is set manually for major alarms. l Enable: The relay is set to the "ON" status for major alarms. l Disabled: The relay is set to the "OFF" status for major alarms. l This parameter is valid only when Relay Control Mode is set to Manual Control.
A-570
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Relay Status in Critical Alarm(K1)
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter indicates that the status of the relay is set manually for critical alarms.
Enabled
l Enable: The relay is set to the enabled status for critical alarms. l Disabled: The relay is set to the disabled status for critical alarms. l This parameter is valid only when Relay Control Mode is set to Manual Control.
Parameters for the Input Relay Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Operation Object
-
-
This parameter indicates the operation object.
Path Name
-
-
This parameter indicates or specifies the name of the channel.
Using Status
Unused
Unused
This parameter specifies whether the alarm interface of the input relay is used.
Relay Turns Off/ High Level
l If this parameter is set to Relay Turns Off/High Level, an alarm is generated when the relay is turned off.
Used Alarm Mode
Relay Turns Off/ High Level Relay Turns On/ Low Level
l If this parameter is set to Relay Turns On/Low Level, an alarm is generated when the relay is turned on. l This parameter is valid only when Using Status is set to Used.
Alarm Severity
Critical Alarm
Critical Alarm
This parameter specifies the severity of the alarm that is generated at the input relay.
Major Alarm Minor Alarm Warning Alarm
Parameters for the Output Relay Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Operation Object
-
-
This parameter indicates the operation object.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-571
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Path Name
-
-
This parameter indicates or specifies the name of the output channel.
Use or Not
Unused
Unused
This parameter specifies whether the alarm interface of the output relay is used.
Used
Parameters for the Temperature Attributes Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Operation Object
-
-
This parameter indicates the operation object.
Monitor Status
-
-
This parameter indicates whether the temperature attribute is monitored.
Temperature Upper Threshold (DEG.C)
-
-
This parameter indicates the upper temperature threshold of the board. When the actual temperature is higher than the preset value, an alarm is generated.
Temperature Lower Threshold (DEG.C)
-
-
This parameter indicates the lower temperature threshold of the board. When the actual temperature is lower than the preset value, an alarm is generated.
Parameters for the Alarm Relay Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Alarm Severity
Critical Alarm
-
This parameter indicates the severity of the alarm.
CSK-1
This parameter specifies the channel of the output alarm relay.
Major Alarm Minor Alarm Warning Alarm Alarm Output Channel
CSK-1 CSK-2 CSK-3 CSK-4
A-572
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
B Board Loopback Types
B
Board Loopback Types
Different service interface boards support different loopback types. Table B-1 Loopback types that service interface boards support Board
Loopback Type
Remarks
SL1D
l Inloops at optical ports
-
l Outloops at optical ports l Inloops on VC-4 paths l Outloops on VC-4 paths SP3S/SP3D/ML1/MD1
l Inloops at E1 tributary ports
-
l Outloops at E1 tributary ports EM6T/EM6F
l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports
-
l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports EFP8
l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports
The bridging port of the EFP8 does not support loopbacks at the PHY layer.
l Inloops on VC-12 paths IF1
l Inloops at IF ports
-
l Outloops at IF ports l Inloops at composite ports l Outloops at composite ports
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
B-1
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
B Board Loopback Types
Board
Loopback Type
Remarks
IFU2/IFX2
l Inloops and outloops at IF ports
-
l Inloops and outloops at multiplexing ports l Inloops at the MAC layer of IF_ETH ports ISU2/ISX2
l Inloops and outloops at IF ports
-
l Inloops and outloops at multiplexing ports
B-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
C Indicators of Boards
C
Indicators of Boards
Indicators of Boards Table C-1 Status explanation for indicators on the CST Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.
PROG
Blinks on (green) and off at 100 ms intervals
Software is being loaded to the board during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
Blinks on (green) and off at 300 ms intervals
The board software is in BIOS boot state during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
On (green)
l When the board is being powered on or being reset, the upper layer software is being initialized. l When the board is running, the software is running normally.
Blinks on (red) and off at 100 ms intervals
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
The BOOTROM self-check fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-1
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
C Indicators of Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
On (red)
l The memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The logic file or upper layer software is lost during the running process of the board. l The pluggable storage card is faulty.
SYNC
SRV
On (green)
The clock is working properly.
On (red)
The clock source is lost or a clock switchover occurs.
On (green)
The system is working properly.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the system.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in the system.
Off
In an unprotected system, there is no power supplied to the system. In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one.
ACT
On (green)
In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. In an unprotected system, the board has been activated.
Off
In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one. In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.
Table C-2 Status explanation for indicators on the CSH Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.
C-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
C Indicators of Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
PROG
Blinks on (green) and off at 100 ms intervals
Software is being loaded to the board during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
Blinks on (green) and off at 300 ms intervals
The board software is in BIOS boot state during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
On (green)
l When the board is being powered on or being reset, the upper layer software is being initialized. l When the board is running, the software is running normally.
Blinks on (red) and off at 100 ms intervals
The BOOTROM self-check fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
On (red)
l The memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The logic file or upper layer software is lost during the running process of the board. l The pluggable storage card is faulty.
SYNC
SRV
On (green)
The clock is working properly.
On (red)
The clock source is lost or a clock switchover occurs.
On (green)
The system is working properly.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the system.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in the system.
Off
In an unprotected system, there is no power supplied to the system. In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one.
ACT
On (green)
In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. In an unprotected system, the board has been activated.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-3
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
C Indicators of Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
Off
In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one. In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.
Table C-3 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1 Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.
SRV
LINK
ODU
On (green)
The services are normal.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the services.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services.
On (green)
The radio link is normal.
On (red)
The radio link is faulty.
On (green)
The ODU is working properly.
On (red)
l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU.
RMT
C-4
On (yellow)
The ODU is reporting minor alarms.
Blinks on (yellow) and off at 300 ms intervals
The antennas are not aligned.
On (yellow)
The remote equipment is reporting defects.
Off
The remote equipment is free of defects.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
C Indicators of Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
ACT
On (green)
l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. l In an unprotected system, the board has been activated. l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one.
Off
l In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.
Table C-4 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2 Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.
SRV
LINK
ODU
On (green)
The services are normal.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the services.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services.
On (green)
The radio link is normal.
On (red)
The radio link is faulty.
On (green)
The ODU is working properly.
On (red)
l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU.
RMT
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
On (yellow)
The ODU is reporting minor alarms.
Blinks on (yellow) and off at 300 ms intervals
The antennas are not aligned.
On (yellow)
The remote equipment is reporting defects.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-5
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
C Indicators of Boards
Indicator
ACT
State
Meaning
Off
The remote equipment is free of defects.
On (green)
l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. l In an unprotected system, the board has been activated. l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one.
Off
l In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.
Table C-5 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2 Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.
SRV
LINK
ODU
On (green)
The services are normal.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the services.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services.
On (green)
The radio link is normal.
On (red)
The radio link is faulty.
On (green)
The ODU is working properly.
On (red)
l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU.
C-6
On (yellow)
The ODU is reporting minor alarms.
Blinks on (yellow) and off at 300 ms intervals
The antennas are not aligned.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
C Indicators of Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
RMT
On (yellow)
The remote equipment is reporting defects.
Off
The remote equipment is free of defects.
On (green)
l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one.
ACT
l In an unprotected system, the board has been activated. Off
l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one. l In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.
Table C-6 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2 Indicator
State
Meaning
XPIC
On (green)
The XPIC input signal is normal.
On (red)
The XPIC input signal is lost.
Off
The XPIC function is disabled.
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working.
STAT
l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV
LINK
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
On (green)
The services are normal.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the services.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services.
On (green)
The radio link is normal.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-7
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
C Indicators of Boards
Indicator
ODU
State
Meaning
On (red)
The radio link is faulty.
On (green)
The ODU is working properly.
On (red)
l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU.
RMT
ACT
On (yellow)
The ODU is reporting minor alarms.
Blinks on (yellow) and off at 300 ms intervals
The antennas are not aligned.
On (yellow)
The remote equipment is reporting defects.
Off
The remote equipment is free of defects.
On (green)
l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. l In an unprotected system, the board has been activated.
Off
l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one. l In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.
Table C-7 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2 Indicator
State
Meaning
XPIC
On (green)
The XPIC input signal is normal.
On (red)
The XPIC input signal is lost.
Off
The XPIC function is disabled.
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
STAT
C-8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Indicator
C Indicators of Boards
State
Meaning
Off
l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.
SRV
LINK
ODU
On (green)
The services are normal.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the services.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services.
On (green)
The radio link is normal.
On (red)
The radio link is faulty.
On (green)
The ODU is working properly.
On (red)
l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU.
RMT
ACT
On (yellow)
The ODU is reporting minor alarms.
Blinks on (yellow) and off at 300 ms intervals
The antennas are not aligned.
On (yellow)
The remote equipment is reporting defects.
Off
The remote equipment is free of defects.
On (green)
l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. l In an unprotected system, the board has been activated.
Off
l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one. l In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-9
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
C Indicators of Boards
Table C-8 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.
SRV
PROG
On (green)
The system is working properly.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the system.
On (yellow)
A minor alarm occurs in the system.
Off
There is no power supplied to the system.
Blinks on (green) and off at 100 ms intervals
Software is being loaded to the board during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
Blinks on (green) and off at 300 ms intervals
The board software is in BIOS boot state during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
On (green)
l When the board is being powered on or being reset, the upper layer software is being initialized. l When the board is running, the software is running normally.
Blinks on (red) and off at 100 ms intervals
The BOOTROM self-check fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
On (red)
The memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails during the poweron or resetting process of the board. The logic file or upper layer software is lost during the running process of the board. The pluggable storage card is faulty.
LINK1a
LINK2a
C-10
On (green)
The GE1 port is connected correctly and is not receiving or transmitting data.
Blinking (yellow)
The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting data.
Off
The GE1 port is not connected or is connected incorrectly.
On (green)
The GE2 port is connected correctly and is not receiving or transmitting data.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
Indicator
C Indicators of Boards
State
Meaning
Blinking (yellow)
The GE2 port is receiving or transmitting data.
Off
The GE2 port is not connected or is connected incorrectly.
NOTE
a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the corresponding GE ports.
Table C-9 Status explanation for indicators on the EFP8 Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.
PROG
Blinks on (green) and off at 100 ms intervals
Software is being loaded to the board during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
Blinks on (green) and off at 300 ms intervals
The board software is in BIOS boot state during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
On (green)
l When the board is being powered on or being reset, the upper layer software is being initialized. l When the board is running, the software is running normally.
Blinks on (red) and off at 100 ms intervals
The BOOTROM self-check fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
On (red)
l The memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The logic file or upper layer software is lost during the running process of the board. l The pluggable storage card is faulty.
SRV
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
On (green)
The system is working properly.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-11
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
C Indicators of Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the system.
On (yellow)
A minor alarm occurs in the system.
Off
There is no power supplied to the system.
Table C-10 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.
SRV
LOS1
LOS2
C-12
On (green)
The services are normal.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the services.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services.
Off
The services are not configured.
On (red)
The first optical port of the SL1D is reporting the R_LOS alarm.
Off
The first optical port of the SL1D is free of R_LOS alarms.
On (red)
The second optical port of the SL1D is reporting the R_LOS alarm.
Off
The second optical port of the SL1D is free of R_LOS alarms.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
C Indicators of Boards
Table C-11 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.
SRV
On (green)
The services are normal.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the services.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services.
Off
The services are not configured.
Table C-12 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1 Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.
SRV
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
On (green)
The services are normal.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the services.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services.
Off
The services are not configured.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-13
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
C Indicators of Boards
Table C-13 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.
SRV
On (green)
The system is working properly.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the system.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in the system.
Off
There is no power supplied to the system.
Table C-14 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU Indicator
Status
Description
PWR
On (green)
The power supply is connected.
Off
There is no power supplied to the PIU or the power supply is connected incorrectly.
Table C-15 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN Indicator
State
Meaning
FAN
On (green)
The fan is working properly.
On (red)
The fan is faulty.
Off
The fan is not powered on or is not installed.
NOTE
The CRIT, MAJ, or MIN indicator on the front panel of the FAN indicates the current alarm severity of the subrack.
C-14
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
D
D Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board
Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board
Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board Table D-1 Weight and power consumption of each board Board
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Weight (kg)
Power Consumption (W)
CST
0.72 kg
< 20.7 W
CSH
0.74 kg
< 25.3 W
IF1
0.72 kg
< 12.0 W
IFU2
0.79 kg
< 23.0 W
IFX2
0.80 kg
< 33.0 W
ISU2
0.60 kg
< 22.0 W
ISX2
0.60 kg
< 23.0 W
EM6T
0.37 kg
< 10.4 W
EM6F
0.40 kg
< 11.3 W
EFP8
0.60 kg
< 13.5 W
SL1D
0.30 kg
< 3.4 W
ML1
0.45 kg
< 7.0 W
MD1
0.50 kg
< 12.2 W
SP3S
0.50 kg
< 5.7 W
SP3D
0.64 kg
< 9.6 W
AUX
0.27 kg
< 1.3 W
PIU
0.12 kg
< 0.5 W
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
D-1
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
D Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board
Board FAN
Weight (kg) 0.30 kg
Power Consumption (W) < 4.1 W (room temperature) < 29.6 W (high temperature)
Empty chassis (with only the backplane)
D-2
2.80 kg
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
E Glossary
E
Glossary
Terms are listed in an alphabetical order. E.1 0-9 This section provides the terms starting with numbers. E.2 A-E This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E. E.3 F-J This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J. E.4 K-O This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O. E.5 P-T This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T. E.6 U-Z This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
E-1
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
E Glossary
E.1 0-9 This section provides the terms starting with numbers. 1U
The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/1.75 in.)
E.2 A-E This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E.
A ABR
See available bit rate
ACAP
See adjacent channel alternate polarization
access control list
A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have access to a resource.
ACL
See access control list
adaptive modulation
A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode according to the channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment adopts a highefficiency modulation mode to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrum utilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment adopts the low-efficiency modulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of the link that carries high-priority services.
ADC
See analog to digital converter
add/drop multiplexer
Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signals contained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/ or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM.
Address Resolution Protocol
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses through ARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the host converts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame. The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipment through its IP address.
adjacent channel alternate polarization
A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals.
ADM
See add/drop multiplexer
administrative unit
The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to the multiplex section frame start.
AF
See assured forwarding
aggregation
A collection of objects that makes a whole. An aggregation can be a concrete or conceptual set of whole-part relationships among objects.
E-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
AIS
E Glossary
See alarm indication signal
alarm automatic report When an alarm is generated on the device side, the alarm is reported to the Network Management System (NMS). Then, an alarm panel prompts and the user can view the details of the alarm. alarm cascading
The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets.
Alarm Filtering
An NE reports the detected alarm to the element management system (EMS). Based on the filter state of the alarm, the EMS determines whether to display or save the alarm information. If the filter state of an alarm is set to Filter, the alarm is not displayed or stored on the EMS. The alarm, however, is still monitored by the NE.
alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure has been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers. alarm suppression
A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be the networkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific function module of a specific board.
AM
See adaptive modulation
analog to digital converter
An electronic circuit that converts continuous signals to discrete digital numbers. The reverse operation is performed by a digital-to-analog converter (DAC).
APS
See automatic protection switching
ARP
See Address Resolution Protocol
assured forwarding
One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF. It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay. For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic that exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward the traffic instead of discarding the packets.
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells. A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous in the sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate. Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode.
ATM
See Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATM PVC
ATM permanent virtual circuit
ATPC
See automatic transmit power control
attenuator
A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fiber Link. Generally used to ensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong.
AU
See administrative unit
automatic protection switching
Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switch to a standby facility to recover the traffic.
automatic transmit power control
A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detected at the receiver
available bit rate
A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possible forwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-time quality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
E-3
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
E Glossary
B backward defect indication
When detecting a defect, the sink node of an LSP uses backward defect indication (BDI) to inform the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.
bandwidth
A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.
base station controller
A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM network. It interworks with the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface. It provides the following functions: radio resource management, base station management, power control, handover control, and traffic measurement. One BSC controls and manages one or more BTSs in an actual network.
base transceiver station A Base Transceiver Station terminates the radio interface. It allows transmission of traffic and signaling across the air interface. The BTS includes the baseband processing, radio equipment, and the antenna. basic input/output system
A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output control programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer.
BDI
See backward defect indication
BE
See best effort
BER
See bit error rate
best effort
A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwarded following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of the network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the time it reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter, packet loss ratio, and high reliability.
binding strap
The binding strap is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side (made of transparent polypropylene material) and one mat side (made of black nylon material).
BIOS
See basic input/output system
BIP
See bit interleaved parity
bit error
An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding bit in the received digital signal.
bit error rate
Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure the communications quality of a network.
bit interleaved parity
A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by the transmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by setting the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes the BIP-X.
BPDU
See bridge protocol data unit
E-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
E Glossary
bridge protocol data unit
The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
broadcast
A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is determined by the broadcast address.
BSC
See base station controller
BTS
See base transceiver station
buffer
A storage area used for handling data in transit. Buffers are used in internetworking to compensate for differences in processing speed between network devices. Bursts of data can be stored in buffers until they can be handled by slower processing devices. In a program, buffers are created to hold some amount of data from each of the files that will be read or written. In a streaming media application, the program uses buffers to store an advance supply of audio or video data to compensate for momentary delays.
C cable tie
The tape used to bind the cables.
cable tray
N/A
cable trough
N/A
CAR
See committed access rate
CBR
See constant bit rate
CBS
See committed burst size
CC
See connectivity check
CCC
See circuit cross connect
CCDP
See co-channel dual polarization
CCM
See continuity check message
CE
See customer edge
central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer's main data-transfer path, the bus. CES
See circuit emulation service
CF
See compact flash
CGMP
See Cisco Group Management Protocol
channel
A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two or more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio (microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmitted per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per second. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s), and Tb/s (1012 bit/s).
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
E-5
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
E Glossary
CIR
See committed information rate
circuit cross connect
An implementation of MPLS L2VPN through the static configuration of labels.
circuit emulation service
A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original sequence at the reception end.
Cisco Group Management Protocol
N/A
CIST
See common and internal spanning tree
CIST root
A switch of the highest priority is elected as the root in an MSTP network.
clock tracing
The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a network.
co-channel dual polarization
A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization is twice the transmission capacity of the single polarization.
coarse wavelength division multiplexing
A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into the same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDM does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.
colored packet
A packet whose priority is determined by defined colors.
committed access rate
A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface. CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate can be defined.
committed burst size
committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
committed information The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normal rate conditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred to the leaky bucket. common and internal spanning tree
The single spanning tree calculated by STP and RSTP together with the logical continuation of that connectivity by using MST Bridges and regions, calculated by MSTP to ensure that all LANs in the bridged local area network are simply and fully connected.
compact flash
Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used in portable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory in a standardized enclosure.
concatenation
A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can be used a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.
connectivity check
Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved by each MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically.
E-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
E Glossary
constant bit rate
A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.
continuity check message
CCM is used to detect the link status.
corrugated pipe
Used to protect optical fibers.
CPU
See central processing unit
CRC
See cyclic redundancy check
cross polarization interference cancellation
A technology used in the case of the Co-Channel Dual Polarization (CCDP) to eliminate the cross-connect interference between two polarization waves in the CCDP.
customer edge
A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.
CWDM
See coarse wavelength division multiplexing
cyclic redundancy check
A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
D data communication network
A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the Data Communication Function (DCF).
data communications channel
The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to transmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12 is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.
Datagram
A kind of PDU which is used in Connectionless Network Protocol, such as IP datagram, UDP datagram.
DC
See direct current
DC-C
See DC-return common (with ground)
DC-C
DC-return common (with ground)
DC-C
See DC-return common (with ground)
DC-I
See DC-return isolate (with ground)
DC-return common (with ground)
A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DC-return common (with ground)
A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
E-7
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
E Glossary
DC-return isolate (with A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with ground) the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment. DCC
See data communications channel
DCN
See data communication network
DDF
See digital distribution frame
DDN
See digital data network
DE
See discard eligible
differentiated services
A service architecture that provides the end-to-end QoS function. It consists of a series of functional units implemented at the network nodes, including a small group of perhop forwarding behaviors, packet classification functions, and traffic conditioning functions such as metering, marking, shaping and policing.
differentiated services code point
A marker in the header of each IP packet that prompts network routers to apply differentiated grades of service to various packet streams. It is specified by the DiffServ policy proposed by the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force). This allows Internet and other IP-based network service providers to offer different levels of service to customers.
DiffServ
See differentiated services
digital data network
A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex technology.
digital distribution frame
A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange with transmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection, cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals.
digital modulation
A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of the carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, the information can be transmitted by the carrier.
direct current
Electrical current whose direction of flow does not reverse. The current may stop or change amplitude, but it always flows in the same direction.
discard eligible
A bit in the frame relay header. It indicates the priority of a packet. If a node supports the FR QoS, the rate of the accessed FR packets is controlled. When the packet traffic exceeds the specified traffic, the DE value of the redundant packets is set to 1. In the case of network congestion, the packets with DE value as 1 are discarded at the node.
Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical dense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routing datagrams with its neighbors.
DS boundary node
A DS node that connects one DS domain to a node either in another DS domain or in a domain that is not DS-capable.
DS domain
In the DifferServ mechanism, the DS domain is a domain consisting of a group of network nodes that share the same service provisioning policy and same PHB. It provides point-to-point QoS guarantees for services transmitted over this domain.
DS interior node
A DS node located at the center of a DS domain. It is a non-DS boundary node.
DS node
A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node.
DSCP
See differentiated services code point
E-8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
E Glossary
dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent radio waves orthogonally polarized. DVMRP
See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
E E-Aggr
See Ethernet aggregation
E-LAN
See Ethernet LAN
E-Line
See Ethernet line
E-Tree
See Ethernet-tree
EBS
See excess burst size
ECC
See embedded control channel
EF
See expedited forwarding
electromagnetic compatibility
Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.
electromagnetic interference
Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.
electrostatic discharge
The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different electrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field.
embedded control channel
A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer, to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM) information between NEs.
EMC
See electromagnetic compatibility
EMI
See electromagnetic interference
Engineering label
A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.
EPL
See Ethernet private line
EPLAN
See Ethernet private LAN service
equalization
A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate for the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading.
ERPS
See Ethernet ring protection switching
ESD
See electrostatic discharge
ESD jack
Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap.
Ethernet
A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/ s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining.
Ethernet
A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/ s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining..
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
E-9
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
E Glossary
Ethernet aggregation
A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual connection).
Ethernet LAN
A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet virtual connection).
Ethernet line
A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual connection).
Ethernet private LAN service
An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a dedicated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks.
Ethernet private line
A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-point connections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network.
Ethernet ring protection switching
protection switching mechanisms for ETH layer Ethernet ring topologies.
Ethernet virtual private LAN service
An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a shared bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks.
Ethernet virtual private line
An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over shared bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks.
Ethernet-tree
An Ethernet service type that is based on a Point-to-multipoint Ethernet Virtual Connection.
ETS
European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI
See European Telecommunications Standards Institute
European Telecommunications Standards Institute
A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
EVPL
See Ethernet virtual private line
EVPLAN
See Ethernet virtual private LAN service
excess burst size
A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the traffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
Exercise Switching
An operation to check if the protection switching protocol functions normally. The protection switching is not really performed.
expansion
Connecting a storage system to more disk enclosures through connection cables, thus expanding the capacity of the storage system.
expedited forwarding
The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP value of EF PHB is "101110".
E-10
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
E Glossary
E.3 F-J This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.
F failure
If the fault persists long enough to consider the ability of an item with a required function to be terminated. The item may be considered as having failed; a fault has now been detected.
fast Ethernet
Any network that supports transmission rate of 100Mbits/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 times faster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and so on. Fast Ethernet is extended from the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the following three types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables), 100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core optical fibers).
fast link pulse
The link pulse that is used to encode information during automatic negotiation.
FD
See frequency diversity
FDI
See forward defect indication
FE
See fast Ethernet
FEC
See forward error correction
FFD
fast failure detection
fiber patch cord
A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for connections between subracks or inside a subrack.
field programmable gate array
A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but also overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the limited number of gate arrays.
FIFO
See First in First out
File Transfer Protocol
A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computers on the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be an FTP client and the other an FTP server.
First in First out
A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked.
Forced switch
For normal traffic signals, switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exists on the protection section, by issuing a forced switch request for that traffic signal.
forward defect indication
Forward defect indication (FDI) is generated and traced forward to the sink node of the LSP by the node that first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the defect and its location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected higher level client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers.
forward error correction
A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during transmission are corrected at the receive end.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
E-11
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
E Glossary
Forwarding plane
Also referred to as the data plane. The forwarding plane is connection-oriented, and can be used in Layer 2 networks such as an ATM network.
FPGA
See field programmable gate array
fragment
Piece of a larger packet that has been broken down to smaller units.
Fragmentation
Process of breaking a packet into smaller units when transmitting over a network medium that cannot support the original size of the packet.
frame
A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame length is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle. A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words, a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements prespecified by the sending and receiving parties.
frequency diversity
A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certain frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading.
FTP
See File Transfer Protocol
full-duplex
A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in both directions, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-line telephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heard at the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road with one lane for each direction.
G gateway network element
A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and the NM application layer
GE
See gigabit Ethernet
generic framing procedure
A framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has been standardized by ITU-T SG15.
generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that initiatively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This is to adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream router to avoid packet discarding and congestion. GFP
See generic framing procedure
gigabit Ethernet
GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet. It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge (switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth. In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus.
Global Positioning System
A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, and timing services to worldwide users.
GNE
See gateway network element
GPS
See Global Positioning System
E-12
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
E Glossary
graphical user interface A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options with graphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen. GTS
See generic traffic shaping
GUI
See graphical user interface
guide rail
Components to guide, position, and support plug-in boards.
H HA
See high availability
half-duplex
A transmitting mode in which a half-duplex system provides for communication in both directions, but only one direction at a time (not simultaneously). Typically, once a party begins receiving a signal, it must wait for the transmitter to stop transmitting, before replying.
HDLC
See high level data link control
hierarchical quality of service
A type of QoS that can control the traffic of users, and perform the scheduling according to the priority of user services. HQoS has a perfect traffic statistics function, and the administrator can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each service. Hence, the bandwidth can be allocated reasonably through traffic analysis.
high availability
Typically, a scheme in which two modules operate in active/standby mode to achieve high availability. When the active module fails, the standby module automatically takes over the system functions of the active module.
high level data link control
The HDLC protocol is a general purpose protocol which operates at the data link layer of the OSI reference model. Each piece of data is encapsulated in an HDLC frame by adding a trailer and a header.
High Speed Downlink Packet Access
A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirement for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables the maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing the WCDMA network topology.
higher order path
In an SDH network, the higher order path layers provide a server network from the lower order path layers.
Hold priority
The priority of the tunnel with respect to holding resources, ranging from 0 (indicates the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the resources occupied by the tunnel can be preempted by other tunnels.
hop
A network connection between two distant nodes. For Internet operation a hop represents a small step on the route from one main computer to another.
hot standby
A mechanism of ensuring device running security. The environment variables and storage information of each running device are synchronized to the standby device. When the faults occur on the running device, the standby device can take over the services in the faulty device in automatic or manual way to ensure the normal running of the entire system.
HP
See higher order path
HQoS
See hierarchical quality of service
HSB
See hot standby
HSDPA
See High Speed Downlink Packet Access
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
E-13
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
E Glossary
HSM
hitless switch mode
HTB
high tributary bus
hybrid radio
The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid radio supports the AM function.
I ICMP
See Internet Control Message Protocol
IDU
See indoor unit
IEC
See International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE
See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF
See Internet Engineering Task Force
IF
See intermediate frequency
IGMP
See Internet Group Management Protocol
IGMP snooping
A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyze the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) packet between hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner, the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.
IMA
See inverse multiplexing over ATM
indoor unit
The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing, multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services.
Inloop
A method of looping the signals from the cross-connect unit back to the cross-connect unit.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical, electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.
intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF signal. Intermediate System
The basic unit in the IS-IS protocol used to transmit routing information and generate routes.
Intermediate System to A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to forward Intermediate System datagrams or packets through a packet-based network, a process called routing. routing protocol internal spanning tree
A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a special MSTI whose ID is 0.
International Electrotechnical Commission
The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and nongovernmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronic standards.
International Organization for Standardization
An international association that works to establish global standards for communications and information exchange. Primary among its accomplishments is the widely accepted ISO/OSI reference model, which defines standards for the interaction of computers connected by communications networks.
E-14
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
E Glossary
International Telecommunication UnionTelecommunication Standardization Sector
An international body that develops worldwide standards for telecommunications technologies. These standards are grouped together in series which are prefixed with a letter indicating the general subject and a number specifying the particular standard. For example, X.25 comes from the "X" series which deals with data networks and open system communications and number "25" deals with packet switched networks.
Internet Control Message Protocol
A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction and other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP software on one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See also communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1).
Internet Engineering Task Force
A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet. Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged with studying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groups that concentrate on specific topics, such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisher of the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard.
Internet Group Management Protocol
The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol
The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sent across an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet delivery service. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. The entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the two fundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.
Internet protocol version 6
A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed as the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
Internet protocol version 6
A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed as the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
inverse multiplexing over ATM
The ATM inverse multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and demultiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This is referred to as an IMA group.
IP
See Internet Protocol
IPV6
See Internet protocol version 6
IPv6
See Internet protocol version 6
IS-IS
See Intermediate System to Intermediate System routing protocol
ISO
See International Organization for Standardization
IST
See internal spanning tree
ITU-T
See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
E-15
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
E Glossary
J Jitter
Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system instability.
E.4 K-O This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.
L L2VPN
See Layer 2 virtual private network
label switched path
A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on normal routing mechanisms, or through configuration.
label switching router
Basic element of MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups received in the label forwarding table.
LACP
See Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAG
See link aggregation group
LAN
See local area network
LAN
See local area network
LAPS
link access protocol-SDH
Laser
A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor laser as the light source.
layer 2 switch
A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is the second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.
Layer 2 virtual private A virtual private network achieved by Layer 2 switching technologies in the packet network switched (IP/MPLS) network. LB
See loopback
LCAS
See link capacity adjustment scheme
LCT
local craft terminal
line rate
The maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value of line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.
line rate forwarding
The line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.
Link Aggregation Control Protocol
A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface to increase bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE 802.3ad.
E-16
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
E Glossary
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were a single link. link capacity adjustment scheme
LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a control mechanism to hitlessly increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation, increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the responsibility of the Network and Element Management Systems.
Link Protection
Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link is a downstream link adjacent to the PLR. When the PLR fails to provide node protection, the link protection should be provided.
LMSP
linear multiplex section protection
local area network
A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet, FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/ s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
local area network
A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet, FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/ s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
Locked switching
When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to the working channel.
LOF
See Loss Of Frame
LOM
loss of multiframe
loopback
A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the signal or message can be analyzed for errors.
LOP
See loss of pointer
LOS
See Loss Of Signal
Loss Of Frame
A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost frame delineation. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.
loss of pointer
Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start of cell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.
Loss Of Signal
Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the received signal.
LP
lower order path
LPT
link-state pass through
LSP
See label switched path
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
E-17
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
E Glossary
LSR
See label switching router
M MA
See maintenance association
MAC
See media access control
MAC
See media access control
MADM
multiple add/drop multiplexer
main topology
A interface that displays the connection relation of NEs on the NMS (screen display). The default client interface of the NMS, a basic component of the human-machine interactive interface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network, the alarms of different NEs, subnets in the network, the communication status as well as the basic network operation status. All topology management functions are accessed here.
maintenance association
That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, the connectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of Maintenance Entities.
maintenance association end point
A MEP is an actively managed CFM Entity, associated with a specific DSAP of a Service Instance, which can generate and receive CFM frames and track any responses. It is an end point of a single Maintenance Association, and terminates a separate Maintenance Entity for each of the other MEPs in the same Maintenance Association.
maintenance domain
The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. The devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP.
maintenance point
Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP.
management information base
A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such as routers and switches) in a network.
manual switch
Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition exists on other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal.
maximum transmission The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies, unit depending on the network—576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbps Token Ring. Responsibility for determining the size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmitted across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks involved. MBS
maximum burst size
MCF
See message communication function
MD
See maintenance domain
MDI
See medium dependent interface
Mean Time Between Failures
The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure of the reliability of the system.
Mean Time To Repair
The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.
E-18
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
E Glossary
media access control
A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
media access control
A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
medium dependent interface
The electrical and mechanical interface between the equipment and the media transmission.
MEP
See maintenance association end point
MEP
maintenance end point
message communication function
The MCF is composed of a protocol stack that allows exchange of management information with their prs.
MIB
See management information base
MIP
maintenance intermediate point
mounting ear
A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements or components.
MP
See maintenance point
MPID
maintenance point identification
MPLS
See Multiprotocol Label Switching
MPLS L2VPN
The MPLS L2VPN provides the Layer 2 VPN service based on an MPLS network. In this case, on a uniform MPLS network, the carrier is able to provide Layer 2 VPNs of different media types, such as ATM, FR, VLAN, Ethernet, and PPP.
MPLS OAM
The MPLS OAM provides continuity check for a single LSP, and provides a set of fault detection tools and fault correct mechanisms for MPLS networks. The MPLS OAM and relevant protection switching components implement the detection function for the CRLSP forwarding plane, and perform the protection switching in 50 ms after a fault occurs. In this way, the impact of a fault can be lowered to the minimum.
MPLS TE
See multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
E-19
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
E Glossary
MPLS TE tunnel
In the case of reroute deployment, or when traffic needs to be transported through multiple trails, multiple LSP tunnels might be used. In traffic engineering, such a group of LSP tunnels are referred to as TE tunnels. An LSP tunnel of this kind has two identifiers. One is the Tunnel ID carried by the SENDER object, and is used to uniquely define the TE tunnel. The other is the LSP ID carried by the SENDER_TEMPLATE or FILTER_SPEC object.
MS
See multiplex section
MSP
See multiplex section protection
MSTP
See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MTBF
See Mean Time Between Failures
MTTR
See Mean Time To Repair
MTU
See maximum transmission unit
Multicast
A process of transmitting packets of data from one source to many destinations. The destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast group rather than a host.
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
multiplex section
The trail between and including two multiplex section trail termination functions.
multiplex section protection
A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a "protection" channel.
Multiprotocol Label Switching
A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of networks, and is beneficial to routing.
multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering
N/A
N N+1 protection
A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection channel.
NE
See network element
NE Explorer
The main operation interface, of the NMS, which is used to manage the telecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can query, manage and maintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.
E-20
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
network element
E Glossary
A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One NE is at least equipped with one system control and communication(SCC) board which manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the SCC board.
Network Management A system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network. System network service access A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer can point access OSI network services. network to network interface
An internal interface within a network linking two or more elements.
next hop
The next router to which a packet is sent from any given router as it traverses a network on its journey to its final destination.
NLP
normal link pulse
NMS
See Network Management System
NNI
See network to network interface
node
A node stands for a managed device in the network. For a device with a single frame, one node stands for one device. For a device with multiple frames, one node stands for one frame of the device. Therefore, a node does not always mean a device.
Node Protection
A parameter of the FRR protection. It indicates that the bypass tunnel should be able to protect the downstream node that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the PLR. The node cannot be a merge point, and the bypass tunnel should also be able to protect the downstream link that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the PLR.
non-gateway network element
A network element whose communication with the NM application layer must be transferred by the gateway network element application layer.
non-GNE
See non-gateway network element
NSAP
See network service access point
NSF
not stop forwarding
O OAM
See operation, administration and maintenance
ODF
See optical distribution frame
ODU
See outdoor unit
OM
Operation and maintenance
One-to-One Backup
A local repair method in which a backup tunnel is separately created for each protected tunnel at a PLR.
open shortest path first A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A link state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routers in the area.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
E-21
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
E Glossary
Open Systems Interconnection
A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made by different vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven different categories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user. Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above. Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message source and destination, and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions.
operation, administration and maintenance
A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation, activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification, location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an operational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber access network to users/subscribers.
optic fiber connector
A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and an optical source (or a detector).+
optical distribution frame
A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.
orderwire
A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations.
OSI
See Open Systems Interconnection
OSPF
See open shortest path first
outdoor unit
The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequency conversion and amplification for RF signals.
Outloop
A method of looping back the input signals received at a port to an output port without changing the structure of the signals.
Output optical power
The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.
E.5 P-T This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T.
P packet switched network
A telecommunication network which works in packet switching mode.
Packing case
A case which is used for packing the board or subrack.
Path
A performance resource object defined in the network management system. The left end of a path is a device node whose port needs to be specified and the right end of a path is a certain IP address which can be configured by the user. By defining a path in the network management system, a user can test the performance of a network path between a device port and an IP address. The tested performance may be the path delay, packet loss ratio or other aspects.
PBS
See peak burst size
PCB
See printed circuit board
E-22
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
E Glossary
PCI bus
PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) bus. A high performance bus, 32-bit or 64-bit for interconnecting chips, expansion boards, and processor/memory subsystems.
PDH
See plesiochronous digital hierarchy
PDU
See protocol data unit
PE
See provider edge
peak burst size
A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
peak information rate
A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be not less than the committed information rate.
penultimate hop popping
Penultimate Hop Popping (PHP) is a function performed by certain routers in an MPLS enabled network. It refers to the process whereby the outermost label of an MPLS tagged packet is removed by a Label Switched Router (LSR) before the packet is passed to an adjacent Label Edge Router (LER).
per-hop behavior
IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network should select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the IETF defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding (EF), assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).
PHB
See per-hop behavior
PHP
See penultimate hop popping
PIR
See peak information rate
plesiochronous digital hierarchy
A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.
Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulates data packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack. polarization
A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed or rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called vertically polarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the tip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.
Power box
A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies power for the subracks in the cabinet.
PPP
See Point-to-Point Protocol
PQ
See priority queue
PRBS
See pseudo random binary sequence
PRC
primary reference clock
printed circuit board
A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto a non-conductive substrate.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
E-23
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
E Glossary
priority queue
An abstract data type in computer programming that supports the following three operations: 1) InsertWithPriority: add an element to the queue with an associated priority 2) GetNext: remove the element from the queue that has the highest priority, and return it (also known as "PopElement(Off)", or "GetMinimum") 3) PeekAtNext (optional): look at the element with highest priority without removing it
protection ground cable
A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, one half of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green.
Protection path
A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.
protocol data unit
It is a data packet at the network layer of the OSI model.
provider edge
A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is responsible for VPN user management, establishment of LSPs between PEs, and exchange of routing information between sites of the same VPN. During the process, a PE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network and the public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.
pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the sequence values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences. pseudo wire
An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is established and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW is maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.
pseudo wire emulation A type of end-to-end Layer 2 transmitting technology. It emulates the essential attributes edge-to-edge of a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a Packet Switched Network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real situation. PSN
See packet switched network
PTN
packet transport network
PW
See pseudo wire
PWE3
See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge
Q QinQ
A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It encapsulates the tag of the user's private virtual local area network (VLAN) into the tag of the public VLAN. The packet carries two layers of tags to travel through the backbone network of the carrier. In this manner, the layer 2 virtual private network (VPN) is provided for the user.
QoS
See quality of service
QPSK
See quadrature phase shift keying
quadrature phase shift A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation and keying the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four dots are evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can perform twobit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the minimum BER.
E-24
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
quality of service
E Glossary
A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel. Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a service provider to meet the demands of users.
R radio frequency
A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an electromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave. The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The AC with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classified into such high-frequency current.
radio network controller
A device in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity of the radio resources.
random early detection A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronization resulted in traditional Tail-Drop can be prevented. Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with the STP protocol.
RDI
See remote defect indication
received signal level
The signal level at a receiver input terminal.
Received Signal Strength Indicator
The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in the receiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDD within a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna
Receiver Sensitivity
Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-12 BER (The FEC is open).
RED
See random early detection
Reed-Solomon-Code
A forward error correction code located before interleaving that enables correction of errors induced by burst noise. Widely used error correction scheme to fight transmission errors at the receiver site.
REI
See remote error indication
remote defect indication
A signal transmitted at the first opportunity in the outgoing direction when a terminal detects specific defects in the incoming signal.
remote error indication A remote error indication (REI) is sent upstream to signal an error condition. There are two types of REI alarms: Remote error indication line (REI-L) is sent to the upstream LTE when errors are detected in the B2 byte. Remote error indication path (REI-P) is sent to the upstream PTE when errors are detected in the B3 byte. Request For Comments A document in which a standard, a protocol, or other information pertaining to the operation of the Internet is published. The RFC is actually issued, under the control of the IAB, after discussion and serves as the standard. RFCs can be obtained from sources such as InterNIC.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
E-25
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
E Glossary
Resource Reservation Protocol
The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and is used to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transport layer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network control protocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP).
reverse pressure
A traffic control method. In telecommunication, when detecting that the transmit end transmits a large volume of traffic, the receive end sends signals to ask the transmit end to slow down the transmission rate.
RF
See radio frequency
RFC
See Request For Comments
RIP
See Routing Information Protocol
RMON
remote network monitoring
RMON
remote network monitoring
RNC
See radio network controller
Root alarm
An alarm directly caused by anomaly events or faults in the network. Some lower-level alarms always accompany a root alarm.
route
A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/ IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically.
route table
A mapping table that stores the relationship between the original address, destination address, short message (SM) protocol type and account. The SMSC delivers an SM to the designated account according to the information set in the route table.
Routing Information Protocol
A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth.
routing table
A table that stores and updates the locations (addresses) of network devices. Routers regularly share routing table information to be up to date. A router relies on the destination address and on the information in the table that gives the possible routes--in hops or in number of jumps--between itself, intervening routers, and the destination. Routing tables are updated frequently as new information is available.
RSL
See received signal level
RSSI
See Received Signal Strength Indicator
RSTP
See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RSVP
See Resource Reservation Protocol
RTN
radio transmission node
S SD
See space diversity
SDH
See synchronous digital hierarchy
SEMF
See synchronous equipment management function
E-26
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
E Glossary
service level agreement A service contract between a customer and a service provider that specifies the forwarding service a customer should receive. A customer may be a user organization (source domain) or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). A SLA may include traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreement as a whole or partially. Service Level Agreement *
A management-documented agreement that defines the relationship between service provider and its customer. It also provides specific, quantifiable information about measuring and evaluating the delivery of services. The SLA details the specific operating and support requirements for each service provided. It protects the service provider and customer and allows the service provider to provide evidence that it has achieved the documented target measure.
SES
See severely errored second
Setup Priority
The priority of the tunnel with respect to obtaining resources, ranging from 0 (indicates the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the tunnel can preempt the resources required by other backup tunnels.
severely errored second A one-second period which has a bit error ratio ≥ X 10-3 or at least one defect. Time interval of one second during which a given digital signal is received with an error ratio greater than 1 X 10 -3 (Rec. ITU R F. 592 needs correction). SF
See signal fail
SFP
See small form-factor pluggable
side trough
The trough on the side of the cable rack, which is used to place nuts so as to fix the cabinet.
signal cable
Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber signal cable.
signal fail
A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
signal to noise ratio
The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and is usually expressed in dB (Decibel).
Simple Network Management Protocol
A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the transmission of management information between any two points. The polling mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
simplex
Designating or pertaining to a method of operation in which information can be transmitted in either direction, but not simultaneously, between two points.
SLA
See service level agreement
SLA*
See Service Level Agreement *
Slicing
To divide data into the information units proper for transmission.
small form-factor pluggable
A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.
SNC
See subnetwork connection
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
E-27
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
E Glossary
SNCP
See subnetwork connection protection
SNMP
See Simple Network Management Protocol
SNR
See signal to noise ratio
space diversity
A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a specific distance to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD is used.
Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundant network to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prune a loop network into a loop-free tree network. SSM
See Synchronization Status Message
static virtual circuit
Static virtual circuit. A static implementation of MPLS L2VPN that transfers L2VPN information by manual configuration of VC labels, instead of by a signaling protocol.
Statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can be transmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only to active input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devices to be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. Compare with TDM. STM
See Synchronous Transport Module
STM-1
See synchronous transport mode-1
STM-N
See synchronous transport module of order N
STP
See Spanning Tree Protocol
sub-network
Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group of network management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected or correlated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clock subnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, a sub-network is used to contain the equipments which are located in adjacent regions and closely related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on a topological view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-network planning can better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view space can be saved, on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus on the equipments under their management.
subnet mask
The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine, server or router and is matched with the IP address.
subnetwork connection A "transport entity" that transfers information across a subnetwork, it is formed by the association of "ports" on the boundary of the subnetwork. subnetwork connection A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protection protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level. SVC
See static virtual circuit
switch
To filter, forward frames based on label or the destination address of each frame. This behavior operates at the data link layer of the OSI model.
E-28
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
E Glossary
Synchronization Status A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link. Message Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clock information through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on their clocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff), and forward the synchronization information to downstream nodes. synchronous digital hierarchy
A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode, transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and BISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is used only for signals. SDH is suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.
synchronous equipment management function
The SEMF converts performance data and implementation specific hardware alarms into object-oriented messages for transmission over DCCs and/or a Q interface.
synchronous transport Synchronous Transfer Mode at 155 Mbit/s. mode-1 Synchronous Transport Module
An STM is the information structure used to support section layer connections in the SDH. It consists of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125. The information is suitably conditioned for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is synchronized to the network. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. This is termed STM-1. Higher capacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic rate. STM capacities for N = 4, N = 16 and N = 64 are defined; higher values are under consideration.
synchronous transport A STM-N is the information structure used to support section layer connections in SDH. See ITU-T Recommendation G. 707 for STM modules of order 1, 4, 16 and 64. module of order N
T tail drop
A type of QoS. When a queue within a network router reaches its maximum length, packet drops can occur. When a packet drop occurs, connection-based protocols such as TCP slow down their transmission rates in an attempt to let queued packets be serviced, thereby letting the queue empty. This is also known as tail drop because packets are dropped from the input end (tail) of the queue.
Tail drop
A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded when the queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-wide synchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism.
TCI
tag control information
TCP
See Transmission Control Protocol
TDM
See time division multiplexing
TE
See traffic engineering
TEDB
See traffic engineering database
Telecommunication A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications Management Network network. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation, maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networks and services. Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
E-29
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
E Glossary
TIM
trace identifier mismatch
time division multiplexing
A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3…), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over one channel.
time to live
A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly. The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in the network. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives, and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero.
TMN
See Telecommunication Management Network
ToS priority
A ToS sub-field (the bits 0 to 2 in the ToS field) in the ToS field of the IP packet header.
TPS
See tributary protection switch
traffic engineering
A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the load of the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic management parameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize the utilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused by unbalanced loads.
traffic engineering database
TEDB is the abbreviation of the traffic engineering database. MPLS TE needs to know the features of the dynamic TE of every links by expanding the current IGP, which uses the link state algorithm, such as OSPF and IS-IS. The expanded OSPF and IS-IS contain some TE features, such as the link bandwidth and color. The maximum reserved bandwidth of the link and the unreserved bandwidth of every link with priority are rather important. Every router collects the information about TE of every links in its area and generates TE DataBase. TEDB is the base of forming the dynamic TE path in the MPLS TE network.
Traffic shaping
It is a way of controlling the network traffic from a computer to optimize or guarantee the performance and minimize the delay. It actively adjusts the output speed of traffic in the scenario that the traffic matches network resources provided by the lower layer devices, avoiding packet loss and congestion.
Transmission Control Protocol
The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to be sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the complete messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in the ISO/OSI reference model.
tributary protection switch
Tributary protection switching, a function provided by the equipment, is intended to protect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board.
trTCM
See two rate three color marker
TTL
See time to live
TU
tributary unit
Tunnel
A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs. In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel is an MPLS tunnel.
E-30
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
two rate three color marker
E Glossary
The trTCM meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates, Peak Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their associated burst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it exceeds the PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it exceeds or doesn't exceed the CIR.
E.6 U-Z This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.
U U-VLAN
A VLAN attribute indicating that the current VLAN is a user VLAN of an M-VLAN. Multicast services are copied from the M-VLAN to the user VLAN.
UAS
unavailable second
UBR
See unspecified bit rate
UDP
See User Datagram Protocol
underfloor cabling
The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor.
UNI
See user network interface
unicast
The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient.
unspecified bit rate
No commitment to transmission. No feedback to congestion. This type of service is ideal for the transmission of IP datagrams. In case of congestion, UBR cells are discarded, and no feedback or request for slowing down the data rate is delivered to the sender.
upload
An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS(Network Management system). The configuration data then covers the configuration data stored at the NMS side.
User Datagram Protocol
A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable connectionless packet delivery service. Thus, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated, delayed, or delivered out of order. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is, the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is received.
user network interface The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for example, ATM switches).
V V-UNI
See virtual user-network interface
variable bit rate
One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls.
VBR
See variable bit rate
VC
See virtual container
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
E-31
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
E Glossary
VCC
See virtual channel connection
VCG
See virtual concatenation group
VCI
See virtual channel identifier
VCTRUNK
A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal port of a data service processing board
virtual channel connection
The VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A logical grouping of multiple virtual channel connections into one virtual connection.
virtual channel identifier
A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used to identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on its way to its destination.
virtual concatenation group
A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same virtual concatenation link
virtual container
The information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. It consists of information payload and path Overhead (POH) information fields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 or 500 μs.
virtual local area network
A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated with switched Ethernet.
virtual path identifier
The field in the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) cell header that identifies to which virtual path the cell belongs.
virtual private LAN service
A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLS enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through the MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.
virtual private network A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network via connections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities. virtual route forward
VRF performs the function of establishing multiple virtual routing devices on one actual routing device. That is, the L3 interfaces of the device are distributed to different VRFs, performing the function of establishing multiple virtual route forwarding instances on the device.
virtual user-network interface
A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service classification and traffic control in HQoS.
VLAN
See virtual local area network
voice over IP
An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the public switched telephone network (PSTN).
VoIP
See voice over IP
VPI
See virtual path identifier
VPLS
See virtual private LAN service
VPN
See virtual private network
VRF
See virtual route forward
E-32
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
E Glossary
W wait to restore
The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line.
WAN
See wide area network
Web LCT
The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located on the NE management layer of the transport network
weighted fair queuing
A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all priority queues can be scheduled.
weighted random early A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCP detection synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-priority packet when calculating the packet loss ratio. weighted round Robin N/A WFQ
See weighted fair queuing
wide area network
A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as a province, a state or even a country.
winding pipe
A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe.
WRED
See weighted random early detection
WRR
See weighted round Robin
WTR
See wait to restore
X XPIC
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
See cross polarization interference cancellation
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
E-33
